Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing

Protocols

ATTENTION
Clicking on a PDF hyperlink takes you to the appropriate page. If necessary,
scroll up or down the page to see the beginning of the referenced section.

NN46205-501 314719-D Rev 01

.
Document status: Standard
Document version: 01.01
Document date: 10 January 2007

Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks

All Rights Reserved.

Sourced in Canada and the United States of America

 3

Contents
New in this release 11
Features 11
Other changes 11
Changes in document structure and content 11
Document changes 11

Introduction 13
IP Multicast concepts 15
Overview of IP Multicast 15
Multicast host groups 17
Multicast addresses 18
Multicast protocols 19
Static source groups 19
Internet Group Management Protocol 20
IGMP queries 20
IGMP host reports 21
Host leave messages 21
Fast leave feature 22
Fast leave mode 22
Ethernet Routing Switch 8600 implementation of IGMP 23
IGMP snoop 23
Multicast group trace for IGMP snooping 24
IGMP proxy 24
IGMP versions 24
Multicast access control feature 25
Multicast access control policy types 26
Multicast stream limitation feature 29
Multicast Router Discovery Protocol 30
Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol 31
Reverse path forwarding 31
Pruning and grafting 32
DVMRP concepts and terminology 32
DVMRP static source groups 35
DVMRP routing policies 35

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
4 Contents

Ethernet Routing Switch 8600 implementation of DVMRP 41

Protocol Independent Multicast-Sparse Mode 42
PIM-SM concepts and terminology 42
Shared trees and shortest-path trees 46
Receiver joining group 47
Receiver leaving group 48
Source sending packets to group 48
Required elements for PIM-SM operation 49
PIM-SM simplified example 49
PIM-SM static source groups 51
PIM-SMLT 51
PIM-SSM 52
SSM features 53
PIM-SSM architecture 53
Ethernet Routing Switch 8600 implementation of SSM and IGMP 55
PIM-SSM static source groups 58
Configuration limitations 58
PIM passive interfaces 58
Pragmatic General Multicast 60
PGM concepts and terminology 60
PGM network element 61
Multicast flow distribution over MLT 62
Distribution algorithm 62
Traffic redistribution 64
Configuring multicast MLT distribution 64
Multicast MAC filtering 65
Configuration example 66

Configuring IGMP using Device Manager 67

Configuration prerequisites and notes 67
Configuring IGMP parameters on a brouter port 68
Configuring fast leave mode 71
Configuring IGMP parameters on a VLAN 72
Enabling IGMP snooping on a VLAN 75
Enabling IGMP snooping on a VLAN 75
Viewing IGMP cache information 76
Viewing and editing the IGMP interface table 76
Viewing multicast router discovery information 79
Viewing IGMP snooping information 80
Viewing IGMP group information 82
Creating and viewing IGMP static information 83
Configuring multicast access control 85
Configuring a prefix list 85
Configuring multicast access control for an interface 87

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Contents 5

Configuring IGMP sender entries 90

Configuring the SSM range and global parameters 91
Changing the SSM range group 93
Configuring the SSM channel table 94
Configuring multicast stream limitation 96
Configuring multicast stream limitation on an interface 96
Configuring multicast stream limitation members 97
Configuring multicast stream limitation on an Ethernet port 100
Configuring multicast stream limitation on a VLAN 102
Showing multicast group trace for IGMP snooping 104

Configuring DVMRP using Device Manager 107

Configuration prerequisites 107
Enabling DVMRP globally 108
Enabling DVMRP on a brouter port 111
Enabling DVMRP on a VLAN 112
Viewing and editing DVMRP interface parameters 115
Viewing and editing DVMRP interface advance parameters 116
Viewing DVMRP neighbor parameters 117
Viewing DVMRP learned routes 119
Viewing DVMRP next hop information 120
Configuring DVMRP routing policies 122
Configuring default route policies 122
Configuring DVMRP announce policies 125
Configuring DVMRP accept policies 134
Configuring the advertisement of local network policies 140
Configuring a DVMRP interface type 141
Displaying DVMRP routing policy information 144

Configuring PIM using Device Manager 147

Configuration prerequisites 148
Enabling PIM-SM globally 150
Enabling static RP 153
Configuration considerations 153
Enabling static RP procedure 154
Configuring static RP 154
Enabling PIM on a brouter port 156
Changing the interface type 158
Configuring a candidate bootstrap router 159
Viewing the current BSR information 159
Enabling PIM on a VLAN interface 161
Changing the VLAN interface type 163
Viewing and editing PIM interface parameters 164
Viewing PIM-SM neighbor parameters 165
Viewing the RP Set parameters 166

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
6 Contents

Configuring a candidate RP 167

Configuring Source Specific Multicast 169
Configuration prerequisites 169
Enabling Source Specific Multicast globally 170

Configuring PGM using Device Manager 173

Configuration prerequisites 174
Enabling PGM globally 174
Enabling PGM on an interface 176
Configuring VLANs with PGM 178
Viewing and editing PGM interface parameters 180
Graphing PGM interface statistics 181
Graphing SPM and RDATA statistics for an interface 181
Graphing NAK, NNAK, and NCF statistics for an interface 183
Viewing PGM session parameters 185
Graphing PGM session statistics 186
Graphing SPM statistics for a session 186
Graphing NAK statistics for a session 188
Viewing the Retransmit parameters 190

Viewing and editing multicast routes using Device Manager 193

Viewing multicast route information 193
Viewing multicast next hop information 194
Viewing and editing multicast interface information 196
Configuring multicast static source groups 197
Configuration considerations 197
Viewing and editing static source groups 198
Adding a new static source group 199
Deleting a static source group 200
Troubleshooting DVMRP 201
Configuring IP Multicast software forwarding 204
Configuring the Mroute stream limit 206
Configuring the resource usage counter for multicast streams 207

Configuring multicast flow distribution over MLT using Device

Manager 211
Enabling multicast flow distribution globally 211
Enabling multicast flow distribution per multilink trunk 214

Configuring multicast MAC filtering using Device Manager 219

Configuring Layer 2 multicast MAC filtering 219
Configuring Layer 3 multicast MAC filtering 222

Configuring IGMP using the CLI 225

Roadmap of IGMP commands 226
Configuration prerequisites and notes 231

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Contents 7

Configuring IGMP on an interface 232

Showing IGMP interfaces 234
Showing IGMP cache information 236
Showing IGMP group information 237
Showing IGMP router-alert status 238
Showing IGMP sender information 239
Showing IGMP snoop status 240
Configuring fast leave mode 240
Showing the current fast leave mode 241
Configuring multicast access control for an IGMP interface 242
Showing IGMP access control groups 244
Configuring IGMP multicast router discovery options 245
Showing IGMP multicast router discovery information 246
Showing IGMP multicast router discovery neighbors 247
Configuring IGMP interface static members 248
Showing IGMP static and blocked ports 249
Configuring SSM dynamic learning and range group 250
Changing the SSM range group 251
Showing SSM group range and dynamic learning status 253
Configuring the SSM channel table 254
Showing SSM channel information 256
Configuring IGMP Ethernet ports 257
Showing IGMP port information 259
Configuring multicast access control for an IGMP Ethernet port 260
Configuring IGMP on a VLAN 262
Showing IGMP VLAN information 266
Configuring multicast access control for a VLAN 267
Configuring IGMP multicast route discovery on a VLAN 270
Configuring IGMP static members on a VLAN 271
Configuring IGMP fast leave members on a VLAN 272
Configuring multicast stream limitation 273
Configuring multicast stream limitation on an interface 274
Configuring multicast stream limitation members on an interface 275
Showing multicast stream limitations per interface 276
Showing multicast stream limitations per port 277
Configuring multicast stream limitation on an Ethernet port 277
Configuring multicast stream limitation on a VLAN 278
Configuring multicast stream limitation members on a VLAN 279
Showing multicast group trace for IGMP snooping 281
Displaying all IP IGMP show commands 283

Configuring DVMRP using the CLI 285

Roadmap of DVMRP commands 285
Configuration prerequisites 289

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
8 Contents

Configuring DVMRP globally 290

Configuring DVMRP on an interface 292
Showing DVMRP group information 293
Showing DVMRP neighbors 295
Showing DVMRP next hops 296
Showing DVMRP routes 297
Configuring DVMRP on Ethernet ports 298
Configuring DVMRP on a VLAN 300
Configuring DVMRP routing policies 304
Configuring default route policies 304
Configuring DVMRP announce policies 310
Configuring DVMRP accept policies 321
Configuring the advertisement of local network policies 330
Configuring a DVMRP interface type 333
Displaying DVMRP routing policy information 337
Configuration examples 340
Denying DVMRP routes from a DVMRP neighbor 341
Manipulating the advertised DVMRP metric to load balance multicast traffic 343
Displaying all IP DVMRP show commands 344

Configuring PIM using the CLI 345

Roadmap of PIM commands 347
PIM-SM configuration prerequisites 350
Configuring PIM-SM globally 351
Showing PIM group information 354
Configuring a PIM multicast border router (PMBR) 355
Configuring PIM on an interface 355
Changing the interface type 357
Configuring the PIM interface virtual neighbor 357
Showing PIM interface information 357
Showing PIM neighbor information 358
Configuring a candidate BSR on an interface 359
Configuring a candidate rendezvous point (C-RP) 360
Showing rendezvous point (RP) set information 361
Showing candidate RP information 362
Showing the active RP for a specific group 363
Showing the active RP for all groups 364
Showing bootstrap router (BSR) information 365
Showing PIM route information 366
Configuring a static rendezvous point router 367
Static RP configuration considerations 368
Configuring static RP 368
Showing the static RP table 370
Configuring PIM on an Ethernet (brouter) port 370

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Contents 9

Changing the port interface type 372

Configuring a candidate BSR on an Ethernet port 372
Configuring PIM on a VLAN 373
Changing the VLAN interface type 375
Showing PIM information for VLANs 375
Configuring a candidate BSR on a VLAN 376
Configuring PIM debug trace commands 377
Tips for using the debug trace commands 378
Debug trace command sample output 379
Configuring Source Specific Multicast (SSM) 384
PIM-SSM configuration prerequisites 384
Configuring PIM-SSM globally 385
Configuring square-SMLT globally 388
Configuration examples 388
Base configuration with backup BSR 388
PIM-SM BSR and RP using circuitless IP addresses 392
PIMv2 configuration example with Cisco and Juniper, with redundant BSR 394
PIM configuration example with Cisco using PIMv1 and Auto-RP 400
Using PIM-SSM with static channel table 404
Showing the PIM mode 405
Showing the virtual neighbor 406
Displaying all IP PIM show commands 406

Configuring PGM using the CLI 409

Roadmap of PGM commands 409
Configuration considerations and prerequisites 411
Configuring PGM globally 411
Showing PGM global information 412
Showing PGM retransmission statistics 414
Showing PGM session statistics 414
Configuring PGM on an interface 417
Showing PGM interface commands 418
Configuring PGM on Ethernet ports 424
Configuring PGM on a VLAN 425
Displaying all IP PGM show commands 426

Viewing and editing multicast routes using the CLI 429

Roadmap of multicast route commands 429
Displaying multicast routes 431
Showing a multicast routes next hop 431
Showing multicast route information 432
Configuring a multicast route on an interface 434
Showing multicast routes on an interface 435
Configuring multicast stream limits 436
Showing multicast stream configuration 437

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
10 Contents

Configuring multicast static source groups 439

Configuration considerations 439
Viewing and editing static source groups 440
Showing multicast static source groups 442
Showing DVMRP troubleshooting information 443
Configuring IP Multicast software forwarding 446
Showing the software forwarding configuration 447
Configuring the resource usage counter for multicast streams 448
Showing the hardware resource usage output 449
Displaying all IP mroute show commands 450

Configuring multicast flow distribution over MLT using the

CLI 455
Roadmap of multicast MLT commands 455
Configuring multicast flow distribution globally 456
Configuring multicast flow distribution per multilink trunk 457
Showing the multicast MLT distribution show command 457

Configuring multicast MAC filtering using the CLI 461

Roadmap of multicast MAC filtering commands 461
Configuring Layer 2 multicast MAC filtering 462
Configuring Layer 3 multicast MAC filtering 464
Showing the Layer 2 multicast MAC filters 465
Showing the Layer 3 multicast MAC ARP data 466
Showing VLAN port data 466
Showing the multicast VLAN information 468

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 11

New in this release

The following sections detail what is new in Configuring IP Multicast Routing
Protocols (NN46205-501) for release 4.1:

Features
There are no new feature-related changes for this document release.

Other changes
See the following sections for information about changes that are not
feature-related:

Changes in document structure and content

This document has been reformatted to comply with Nortel Customer
Documentation Standards.

Document changes
In the section "Rendezvous-Point router" (page 43), the following in
formation is added:

To reduce convergence times, Nortel recommends you create only one

static RP per group. The more static RPs you configure for redundancy, the
more time PIM requires to rebuild the mroute table and associate RPs.

The information in "Traffic delay with PIM while rebooting peer SMLT
switches" (page 52)is added and updated.

Example output and an explanation of the show ip mroute route

command is updated in "Showing multicast route information" (page 432).

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
12 New in this release

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 13

Introduction
This manual describes all the multicast protocols that the Ethernet Routing
Switch 8600 supports. It provides information about using both the Device
Manager graphical user interface (GUI) and the command line interface
(CLI) to perform general network management operations on an Ethernet
Routing Switch 8600.

The Ethernet Routing Switch 8600 modules provide very high-speed packet
forwarding combined with the ability to route Internet Protocol (IP) and
Internetwork Packet Exchange (IPX) Protocol traffic.

Prerequisites
• This guide is intended for network administrators with the following
background:
— Basic knowledge of networks, Ethernet bridging, and IP routing
— Familiarity with networking concepts and terminology
— Basic knowledge of network topologies
— Experience with windowing systems or GUIs

Navigation
• "IP Multicast concepts" (page 15)
• "Configuring IGMP using Device Manager" (page 67)
• "Configuring DVMRP using Device Manager" (page 107)
• "Configuring PIM using Device Manager" (page 147)
• "Configuring PGM using Device Manager" (page 173)
• "Viewing and editing multicast routes using Device Manager" (page 193)
• "Configuring multicast flow distribution over MLT using Device Manager"
(page 211)
• "Configuring multicast MAC filtering using Device Manager" (page 219)
• "Configuring IGMP using the CLI" (page 225)

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
14 Introduction

• "Configuring DVMRP using the CLI" (page 285)

• "Configuring PIM using the CLI" (page 345)
• "Configuring PGM using the CLI" (page 409)
• "Viewing and editing multicast routes using the CLI" (page 429)
• "Configuring multicast flow distribution over MLT using the CLI" (page
455)
• "Configuring multicast MAC filtering using the CLI" (page 461)

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 15

IP Multicast concepts
IP Multicast extends the benefits of layer 2 multicasting on LANs to WANs.
Multicasting techniques are used on LANs primarily to help clients and
servers to find each other. IP Multicast enables a source to send information
to multiple destinations in a WAN with a single transmission. The source
enjoys considerable efficiencies while a significant amount of bandwidth
can be saved.
This section discusses the following topics and includes IP Multicast
protocols that the Ethernet Routing Switch 8600 supports:
• "Overview of IP Multicast" (page 15)
• "Internet Group Management Protocol" (page 20)
• "Multicast Router Discovery Protocol" (page 30)
• "Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol" (page 31)
• "Protocol Independent Multicast-Sparse Mode" (page 42)
• "PIM-SSM " (page 52)
• "PIM passive interfaces" (page 58)
• "Pragmatic General Multicast " (page 60)
• "Multicast flow distribution over MLT" (page 62)
• "Multicast MAC filtering" (page 65)

Overview of IP Multicast
IP Multicast transmits messages to multiple recipients at the same time.
This one-to-many delivery mechanism is similar to broadcasting, except
that multicasting transmits to specific groups and broadcasting transmits
to everybody. Since IP Multicast transmits only one stream of data to the
network where it is replicated to many receivers, multicasting saves a
considerable amount of bandwidth.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
16 IP Multicast concepts

IP Multicast provides services such as the delivery of information to

multiple destinations with a single transmission, and the solicitation of
servers by clients. IP Multicast services benefit applications such as video
conferencing, dissemination of datagram information, and dissemination of
mail or news to a large number of recipients.

Multicast protocols use different techniques to discover delivery paths.

A Distribution Tree is a set of multicast routers and subnetworks that allow

the member’s of the group to receive traffic from a source. The source of
the tree depends on the algorithm used by the multicast protocol. Figure 1
"Multicast distribution tree and broadcasting" (page 16) is an example of
a simple distribution tree where S is the multicast source and the arrows
indicate the multicast broadcast procedure.

Figure 1
Multicast distribution tree and broadcasting

Broadcast and prune are methods to use multicast traffic to build the
distribution tree. Periodically, data is sent out or broadcast from the source
to the extremities of the internetwork to search for active group members. If
there are no local members of the group, the router sends a message to the
host, removing itself from the distribution tree, and thus pruning the router.

Figure 2 "Pruning routers from a distribution tree" (page 17) illustrates how
routers are pruned from the distribution tree. First, a message is sent to the
source, after which the pruned routers do not receive multicast data.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Overview of IP Multicast 17

Figure 2
Pruning routers from a distribution tree

Reverse path multicast is based on the concept that a multicast distribution

tree is built on the shortest path from the source to each (sub) network
containing active receivers. When a datagram arrives on an interface,
the router determines the reverse path to the source of the datagram by
examining the routing table of known network sources. If the datagram is
not on the optimal delivery tree, it is discarded.

Multicast host groups and their group members enable the IP Multicast
router to transmit just to those groups interested in receiving the traffic.
The Ethernet Routing Switch 8600 uses the Internet Group Membership
Protocol (IGMP) to learn the existence of host group members on their
directly attached subnets. A router communicates with the hosts on a local
network by sending IGMP queries. Hosts respond by issuing IGMP reports.
For more information about host groups, see "Multicast host groups" (page
17) and "Multicast addresses" (page 18). For more information about IGMP,
see "Internet Group Management Protocol" (page 20).

Multicast traffic forwarding transmits frames to all interfaces/subnets

that IGMP reports are received for the multicast group indicated in the
destination IP address. Multicast packets forwarded within the same VLAN
remain unchanged. Packets are not forwarded to networks which do not
have members of the multicast group indicated in the destination IP address.

Multicast host groups

IP Multicast is a method for addressing, routing, and delivering a datagram
to a collection of receivers called a host group.
Host groups can be permanent or transient, with the following characteristics:
• A permanent host group has a well-known, administratively-assigned
IP Multicast group address. This address is permanent and defines the
group. A permanent host group can consist of zero or more members.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
18 IP Multicast concepts

• A transient host group exists only as long as it has members that need
its services. IP addresses in the multicast range that are not reserved
for permanent groups are available for dynamic assignment to transient
host groups.

Any host system on any IP network can send a message to a multicast

group using the IP Multicast address for the group. To receive a message
addressed to a multicast group, however, the host must be a member of the
group and must reside on a network where that group is registered with a
local multicast router.

An IP Multicast host group can consist of zero or more members and places
no restrictions on its membership. Host members can reside anywhere;
they can join and leave the group at any time; and they can be members of
more than one group at the same time.

In general, hosts that are members of the same group reside on different
networks. However, a range of multicast addresses (224.0.0.x) is reserved
for groups that are locally scoped. All message traffic for these hosts
typically remains on the local network. Hosts that belong to a group in this
address range and that reside in different networks do not receive message
traffic for each other.

ATTENTION
In the Ethernet Routing Switch 8600, a special set of filters (global filters) can
be applied to multicast packets. The user can create, deny, or accept filters to
configure the sources that can receive and send data.

Multicast addresses
Each host group is assigned a unique multicast address. To reach all
members of the group, a sender uses the multicast address as the
destination address of the datagram.

An IP version 4 multicast address is a Class D address (the high-order bits

are set to 1110) from 224.0.1.0 to 239.255.255.255. These addresses are
assigned statically for use by permanent groups and dynamically for use
by transient groups.

The block of addresses from 224.0.0.1 to 224.0.0.255 is reserved for routing

protocols and other low-level protocols. Multicast routers do not forward
datagrams with addresses in this range because the time-to-live (TTL) value
for the packet is usually set to 1.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Overview of IP Multicast 19

Multicast protocols
This section describes several protocols you can use to enable multicasting
on an Ethernet Routing Switch 8600. These include:
• IP Multicast routers that use Internet Group Management Protocol
( IGMP) to learn the existence of host group members on directly
attached subnets.
• Multicast Router Discovery Protocol (MRDP) that discovers multicast
routers in a layer 2 bridged domain configured for IGMP snooping.
• Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol (DVMRP) that is a
dense-mode protocol suitable for implementation in networks that are
densely populated by receivers.
• Protocol Independent Multicast (PIM)
— Sparse Mode (PIM-SM) protocol is suitable for implementation on
networks that are sparsely populated by receivers.
— Source Specific Multicast (SSM) protocol uses a one-to-many model
where members can only receive traffic from a single source. This is
suitable for TV channels and other content-distribution applications.

• Pragmatic General Multicast (PGM) Protocol that is suitable for multicast

applications that require reliable, ordered, duplicate-free delivery of
multicast traffic.

Static source groups

Static source groups (or static mroutes) enable you to configure static
source-group entries in the DVMRP, PIM-SM, or PIM-SSM multicast routing
table. DVMRP and PIM cannot prune these entries from the distribution tree.
In other words, even if there are no receivers for the group, the multicast
stream for a static source-group entry stays active. Static forwarding entries
are never pruned. When they are no longer needed, you manually delete
them.

To configure static source groups, you must first globally enable either
DVMRP or PIM. If you disable DVMRP or PIM, the switch saves all of the
configured static source-group entries and deactivates them. When you
reenable DVMRP or PIM, the switch reactivates the static source groups.

Static source groups ensure that the multicast route (mroute) records remain
in the distribution tree. When receivers join the group, there is no delay in
receiving multicast data because there is no need to graft onto the group
or start a join process in the case of PIM. This is essential for applications
where the multicast data must be sent to a receiver as soon as the
receiver joins the group, for example, when a switch delivers TV channels
to receivers. When the receiver turns the channel, which is equivalent to
joining a group, the receiver is able to view the channel immediately.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
20 IP Multicast concepts

Static entries result in continuous traffic if the source is active, even when
no receivers are present. However, traffic is not forwarded by an Ethernet
Routing Switch 8600 with static entry if there are no receivers, but is
forwarded continuously to the switch where the entry is programmed and
crosses intermediate switches on the path.

Static source-group entries can be configured for a specific source or

subnet. If several sources on the same subnet send traffic to the same
group, traffic for all these sources flows continuously when using the subnet
configuration.

For information about configuring static source groups using Device

Manager, see "Configuring multicast static source groups" (page 197).
For information about configuring static source groups using the CLI, see
"Configuring multicast static source groups" (page 439).

Internet Group Management Protocol

Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) has the following
characteristics:
• IGMP allows a host to register group memberships with the local querier
router so to receive any datagrams sent to this router which are targeted
to a group with a specific IP Multicast address.
• IGMP allows a router to learn the existence of group members on
networks to which it is directly attached. The router periodically sends a
general query message to each of its local networks. Any host that is a
member of any multicasting group identifies itself by sending a response.

IGMP is a protocol used by IP Multicast routers to learn the existence of

host group members on their directly attached subnets. It allows hosts to
communicate their desired group memberships to their local querier router,
and to receive any datagrams sent to this router which are targeted to a
group with a specific IP Multicast address. A router communicates with
the hosts on a local network by sending IGMP queries. Hosts respond by
issuing IGMP reports.

IGMP queries
When there are multiple IGMP routers on a network, one router is elected
to send queries. This elected querier periodically sends host membership
queries (also known as general queries) to its attached local subnets. The
Ethernet Routing Switch 8600 supports queries from all three versions of
IGMP.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Internet Group Management Protocol 21

IGMP host reports

A host that receives a membership query from a local router can respond
with a host membership report, one for each multicast group that joins.
A host that receives a query delays its reply by a random interval and
listens for a reply from any other host in the same host group. For example,
consider a network that includes two host members—host A and host B—of
the same multicast group. The router sends out a host membership query
on the local network. Both host A and host B receive the query and listen
on the network for a host membership report. The delay timer for Host B
expires first, so it responds to the query with a membership report. Hearing
the response, host A does not send a report of its own for the same group.

Each query from a router to a host includes a Maximum Response Time

field. IGMP inserts a value n into this field specifying the maximum time in
tenths of a second within which the host must issue a reply. The host uses
this value to calculate a random value between 0 and n tenths of a second
for the period that it waits before sending a response. This is true for IGMP
version 2 and 3. For IGMP version 1, this field is set to 0 but defaults to a
value of 100, that is, 10 seconds.

If at least one host on the local network specifies that it is a member of a

given group, the router forwards to that network all datagrams bearing the
multicast address for the group.

Upon initialization, the host can immediately issue a report for each of
its supported multicast groups. The router accepts and processes these
asynchronous reports the same as requested reports.

After hosts and routers are in a steady state, they communicate in a way
that minimizes the exchange of queries and reports. The designated
routers set up a path between the IP Multicast stream source and the end
stations and periodically query the end stations about whether or not to
continue participation. As long as any client continues to participate, all
clients, including nonparticipating end stations on the switch port, receive
the IP Multicast stream.

Host leave messages

When an IGMP version 2 host leaves a group and it is the host that issues
the most recent report, it also issues a leave group message. The multicast
router on the network issues a group-specific query to determine whether
there are other group members on the network. If no host responds to the
query, the router assumes that no members belonging to that group exist
on that interface.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
22 IP Multicast concepts

Fast leave feature

The Ethernet Routing Switch 8600 supports a fast leave feature that is
useful for multicast-based TV distribution applications. Fast leave relies on
an alternative leave process where the switch stops sending traffic for the
group immediately after receiving a leave message, without issuing a query
to check if other group members are present on the network. Fast leave
alleviates the network from additional bandwidth demand when changing
TV channels.

For information about configuring fast leave on an interface, port, or VLAN,

see "Configuring IGMP using Device Manager" (page 67).

Fast leave mode

The Ethernet Routing Switch 8600 provides several fast leave processes
for IP Multicast:
• Immediate leave with one user per interface
• Immediate leave with several users per interface
• Standard IGMP leave based on a Last Member Query Interval (LMQI),
which is configurable in tenths of seconds

Fast leave modifies the IGMP leave processing mechanism on an IGMP

interface. After receiving an IGMP leave on a fast leave-enabled interface,
the switch does not send a group-specific query and immediately stops
sending traffic to the leaving member (IGMP host) port. Without fast leave,
traffic is forwarded until the group-specific query times out. This wastes
bandwidth if there is no receiver interested in the group traffic.
Fast leave mode provides two options of the fast leave mechanism—single-
user mode and multiple-users mode.
• Single-user mode: In this mode, the port stops receiving traffic
immediately after a group member on that port sends a leave. Nortel
recommends using the single-user mode when each switch interface
port is connected to only one IGMP host.
• Multiple-users mode: Use this mode if the switch interface port is
connected to multiple IGMP hosts. In this case, the port stops receiving
traffic after all members leave the IGMP group. The switch removes the
leaving IGMP member and, if there are more group members on that
port, the switch continues sending traffic to the port.
When operating in multiple-users mode, the Ethernet Routing Switch
8600 must have the right membership information. To support
multiple-users mode, multicast receivers on the same interface cannot
use IGMP report suppression. If you have to use IGMP report
suppression, Nortel recommends not using this mode. Instead, you
can use the LMQI (configurable in units of 1/10ths of seconds) to have

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Internet Group Management Protocol 23

a faster leave process while still sending group-specific queries after a

leave message is received.

Fast leave mode applies to all fast leave-enabled IGMP interfaces.

ATTENTION
Fast leave mode applies only to fast leave enabled IGMP interfaces. Although
IGMP for user Authentication Protocol (IGAP) interfaces are always fast leave
enabled, they ignore this mode because they only operate in the multiple-user
mode.

For information about configuring the fast leave mode using Device
Manager, see "Configuring fast leave mode" (page 71).

Ethernet Routing Switch 8600 implementation of IGMP

You can enable and disable multicast routing on an interface basis. If you
disable multicast routing on an interface, IGMP queries are not generated.
If the switch or interface is in IGMP router behavior mode for example,
DVMRP or PIM enabled, IGMP snooping is not configurable. The switch
still learns the group membership and snoops multicast receivers on the
switch vlan or ports.

IGMP snoop
The Ethernet Routing Switch 8600 also provides IP Multicast capability
when used as a switch. Functioning as a switch, it supports all three
versions of IGMP to prune group membership per port within a VLAN. This
feature is called IGMP snoop.

ATTENTION
IGMP snoop can guarantee delivery only of local multicast data. In a VLAN with
static IGMP receivers, multicast data from remote sources cannot be delivered.

The IGMP snoop feature allows you to optimize the multicast data flow,
for a group within a VLAN, to only those ports that are members of the
group. The switch builds a database of group members by listening to IGMP
reports from each port. It suppresses the reports heard by not forwarding
them to ports other than the one receiving the report, thus forcing the
members to continuously send their own reports. The switch relays group
membership from the hosts to the multicast routers. It forwards queries
from multicast routers to all port members of the VLAN. Furthermore, it
forwards multicast data only to the participating group members and to the
multicast routers within the VLAN.

For information about configuring IGMP snoop using Device Manager,

see "Enabling IGMP snooping on a VLAN" (page 75) and "Viewing IGMP
snooping information" (page 80).

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
24 IP Multicast concepts

For information about configuring IGMP snoop using the CLI, see
"Configuring IGMP on an interface" (page 232) or "Configuring IGMP on
a VLAN" (page 262).

Multicast group trace for IGMP snooping

This feature helps you to monitor the multicast group trace for an IGMP
snoop-enabled Ethernet Routing Switch 8600. You can view the multicast
group trace from the CLI or Device Manager.

Multicast group trace tracks the data flow path of the multicast streams.
There is information such as the multicast group address, the source
address, ingress VLAN and port, and egress VLAN and port.

For more information about displaying the multicast group trace using
Device Manager, see "Showing multicast group trace for IGMP snooping"
(page 104).

IGMP proxy
If an Ethernet Routing Switch 8600 receives multiple reports for the same
multicast group, it does not transmit each report to the multicast upstream
router. Instead, the switch consolidates the reports into a single report and
forwards it. If there is new information that another multicast group has
been added or that a query has been received since the last report was
transmitted upstream, the report is forwarded onto the multicast router ports.
This feature is known as IGMP proxy.

For information about configuring IGMP proxy using Device Manager, see
"Configuring IGMP parameters on a VLAN" (page 72) and "Viewing IGMP
snooping information" (page 80).

For information about configuring IGMP proxy using the CLI, see
"Configuring IGMP on an interface" (page 232) or "Configuring IGMP on
a VLAN" (page 262).

IGMP versions
The Ethernet Routing Switch 8600 supports IGMPv1, IGMPv2, and
IGMPv3. The versions IGMPv1 and IGMPv2 are backward compatible and
can exist together on a multicast network. The Ethernet Routing Switch
8600 implementation of IGMPv3 for PIM-SSM is not backward compatible
with IGMPv1 or IGMPv2. The following describes the main purpose for
each version:
• IGMPv1 provides the support for IP Multicast routing. IGMPv1 specifies
the mechanism for communicating IP Multicast group membership
requests from a host to its locally attached routers. For more information,
see RFC 1112.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Internet Group Management Protocol 25

• IGMPv2 extends the features in IGMPv1 by quickly reporting group

membership termination to the routing protocol. This feature is important
for multicast groups with highly volatile group membership. For more
information, see RFC 2236.
• IGMPv3 supports the PIM Source-Specific Multicast (SSM) protocol.
IGMPv3 provides the ability for a host to selectively request or filter
traffic from individual sources within a multicast group. For more
information, see RFC 3376.

Multicast access control feature

Multicast access control is a set of features unique to the Ethernet Routing
Switch 8600 that operate with standard existing multicast protocols. You can
configure multicast access control an IP Multicast-enabled port or VLAN
with an access control policy that consists of several IP Multicast groups.

This feature is particularly useful to restrict access to certain multicast

streams is required and to protect multicast streams from spoofing (injecting
data to the existing streams). For example, in a television distribution
application, instead of applying a filter to each channel (multicast group), you
can apply a multicast access policy to a range of channels (groups), thereby
reducing the total number of filters and allowing for a more simple, efficient,
and scalable configuration. Also, if you want to add or remove television
channels from a package, you can modify the multicast access policy; you
do not need to change filters for individual VLANs or ports. Multicast access
policies contain an ID and a name (for example, PremiumChannels), the list
of IP Multicast addresses, and the subnet mask to be used.

It is important to note that multicast access control is not a regular filtering

configuration. It is specifically designed for multicast streams and relies on
handling multicast control and initial data to prevent hosts from sending
or receiving specified multicast streams. It does not consume any filters.
Also, multicast access control provides a list of multicast groups in one
configuration using the same routing policy prefix list configuration. For
information about prefix lists, see Configuring IP Routing Operations. You
can configure multicast access control and change it dynamically to support
any changes in the configuration without having to restart the protocol. You
can change the access capabilities of a given user or service subscriber
without loss of service.

The following example describes a typical application:

Your local cable television company offers three packages; each one
includes 35 channels (35 multicast groups). Each package is configured in
an access control policy. This policy is applied to a set of VLANs/ports to
prevent users from viewing the channels on those VLANs. The same policy
can be used to prevent users from sending traffic to those groups (also

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
26 IP Multicast concepts

known as spoofing) by specifying the deny-tx option for that port. After the
packages are defined, you can use them for any access policy configuration.
Also, you can easily change the package by changing the group range,
without changing all the port configurations.

The multicast access control functionality is applicable to any IP Multicast

application where controlling a user’s access is required. You can use it
in financial-type applications and other enterprise applications, such as
multicast-based videoconferencing.

Multicast access control policy types

There are six types of multicast access control policies:
• deny-tx
• deny-rx
• deny-both
• allow-only-tx
• allow-only rx
• allow-only-both

The tx policies control the sender and ingress interface for a group;
the rx policies control the receivers and egress interface for a group

deny-tx
You use the deny-tx access policy to prevent a matching source from
sending multicast traffic to the matching group on the interface where the
deny-tx access policy is configured. Configure this policy on the ingress
interface to the multicast source. The deny-tx access policy performs the
opposite function of the allow-only-tx access policy. Therefore, the deny-tx
access policy and the allow-only-tx access policy cannot exist on the same
interface at the same time.

For example, in Figure 3 "Data flow using deny-tx policy" (page 27), a
deny-tx access policy is configured on VLAN 1 (the ingress VLAN to the
Ethernet Routing Switch 8600). This policy prevents multicast traffic sent by
Sender from being forwarded from VLAN 1 to any receiver, consequently
preventing Receiver 1 and Receiver 2 from receiving data from the multicast
group. You can create receive only VLANs, such as VLAN 1, with the
deny-tx policy.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Internet Group Management Protocol 27

Figure 3
Data flow using deny-tx policy

deny-rx
You use the deny-rx access policy to prevent a matching group from
receiving IGMP reports from the matching receiver on the interface where
the deny-rx access policy is configured. The deny-rx access policy performs
the opposite function of the allow-only-rx access policy. Therefore, the
deny-rx access policy and the allow-only-rx access policy cannot exist on
the same interface at the same time.

For example, in Figure 4 "Data flow using deny-rx policy" (page 27), a
deny-rx access policy is configured on VLAN 2, preventing IGMP reports
sent by Receiver 1 from being received on VLAN 2. You can deny a multicast
group access to a specific VLAN or receiver using the deny-rx policy.

Figure 4
Data flow using deny-rx policy

deny-both
You use the deny-both access policy to prevent a matching IP address
from both sending multicast traffic to, and receiving IGMP reports from, a
matching receiver on an interface where the deny-both policy is configured.
You can use this policy to eliminate all multicast activity for a receiver or
source in a specific multicast group. The deny-both access policy performs

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
28 IP Multicast concepts

the opposite function of the allow-only-both access policy. Therefore, the

deny-both access policy and the allow-only-both access policy cannot exist
on the same interface at the same time.

For example, in Figure 5 "Data flow using deny-both policy" (page 28), a
deny-both access policy is configured on VLAN 2, preventing IGMP reports
sent by Receiver 2 from being received by VLAN 2, and preventing multicast
traffic sent by Sender 2 from being forwarded from VLAN 2. You can prevent
certain VLANs from participating in any activity involving the specified
multicast groups with the deny-both policy.

Figure 5
Data flow using deny-both policy

allow-only-tx
You use the allow-only-tx policy to allow only the matching source to
send multicast traffic to the matching group on the interface where the
allow-only-tx policy is configured. All other multicast data received on
this interface is discarded. The allow-only-tx access policy performs the
opposite function of the deny-tx access policy. Therefore, the allow-only-tx
access policy and the deny-tx access policy cannot exist on the same
interface at the same time.

allow-only-rx
You use the allow-only-rx policy to allow only the matching group to receive
IGMP reports from the matching receiver on the interface where the
allow-only-rx access policy is configured. All other multicast data received
on this interface is discarded. The allow-only-rx access policy performs the
opposite function of the deny-rx access policy. Therefore, the allow-only-rx
access policy and the deny-rx access policy cannot exist on the same
interface at the same time.

allow-only-both
You use the allow-only-both policy to allow only the matching IP address
to both send multicast traffic to, and receive IGMP reports from, the
matching receiver on the interface where the allow-only-both access policy
is configured. All other multicast data and IGMP reports received on

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Internet Group Management Protocol 29

this interface are discarded. The allow-only-both access policy performs

the opposite function of the deny-both access policy. Therefore, the
allow-only-both access policy and the deny-both access policy cannot exist
on the same interface at the same time.

Specifying host addresses and masks

When configuring multicast access policies, you must specify the host (IP)
address and host (subnet) mask of the host that is being filtered (the host
that is sending multicast traffic).

You can use the host subnet mask to restrict access to a portion of the
host’s network. For example, when the host subnet mask is configured
as 255.255.255.255, the full host address is used. To restrict access to a
portion of the network of a host, use a subnet mask such as 255.255.255.0.
Access control is applied to the specified subnet only.

For information about configuring multicast access control using Device

Manager, see "Configuring multicast access control" (page 85).

Multicast stream limitation feature

You can configure the multicast stream limitation feature to limit the
number of multicast groups that can join a VLAN. By limiting the number of
concurrent multicast streams, a service provider can, for example, protect
the bandwidth on a specific interface and control access to multicast
streams.
You use multicast stream limitation in any environment where you want to
limit users to a certain number of multicast streams simultaneously. For
example, a TV service provider can limit the number of TV channels a user
can watch at any given time. (To a TV service provider, a multicast stream is
synonymous with a TV channel.) If a user has a service contract for two
TV sets, they can have two channels flowing at the same time, but is not a
third. The service provider can control the bandwidth usage in addition to
preventing users from watching more than the allowed number of channels
at a given point in time.
There are several ways to enable the multicast stream limitation feature on
the Ethernet Routing Switch 8600:
• per interface—This limitation controls the total number of streams for
all clients on this interface.
• per interface port—This limitation controls the number of streams for all
clients on this interface port.
• per Ethernet port—This limitation controls the number of streams for all
clients on this Ethernet port.
• per VLAN—This limitation controls the total number of streams for all
clients on this VLAN. This is equivalent to the interface stream limitation.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
30 IP Multicast concepts

• per VLAN port—This limitation controls the number of streams for all
clients on this VLAN port. This is equivalent to the per interface port
stream limitation.

The maximum number of streams for each limit can be set independently.
After the stream limit is met, any additional join reports for new streams
are dropped.

For information about configuring multicast stream limitation using Device

Manager, see "Configuring multicast stream limitation" (page 96). For
information about configuring multicast stream limitation using the CLI, see
"Configuring multicast stream limitation" (page 273).

Multicast Router Discovery Protocol

The Multicast Router Discovery Protocol (MRDISC or MRDP) enables the
automatic discovery of multicast capable routers. By listening to multicast
router discovery messages, layer 2 devices can determine where to send
multicast source data and IGMP host membership reports. This feature is
useful in a layer 2 bridging domain that is configured for IGMP snooping.
IGMP multicast router discovery consists of three message types that
discover multicast routers on the network. The three message types are:
• Multicast router advertisements sent by routers to advertise that IP
Multicast forwarding is enabled on an interface.
• Multicast router solicitations sent by routers to solicit multicast router
advertisements.
• Multicast router termination messages sent when a router terminates its
multicast routing functions.

Multicast routers send multicast router advertisements periodically on all

interfaces where multicast forwarding is enabled. Advertisements are also
sent in response to multicast router solicitations that are sent to solicit a
response of multicast router advertisements from all multicast routers on a
subnet.

Multicast router solicitations are sent to the IGMP-MRDISC all-routers

multicast group that has a multicast address of 224.0.0.2. Multicast router
solicitations are sent whenever a router wishes to discover multicast routers
on a directly attached subnet.

Multicast router termination messages are sent when a router terminates

its multicast routing functions. Other non-IP forwarding devices, such as
layer 2 switches, can send multicast router solicitations to solicit multicast
router advertisements.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol 31

When you enable IGMP snooping on an Ethernet Routing Switch 8600,

MRDISC is enabled by default.

ATTENTION
The Multicast Router Discovery protocol is not supported on brouter ports.

For information about configuring MRDISC using Device Manager, see

"Viewing multicast router discovery information" (page 79).

Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol

Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol (DVMRP) is a distance vector
type of multicast routing protocol. It advertises shortest-path routes to
multicasting source networks, that is, any network containing hosts that
can issue multicast datagrams. In this respect, DVMRP is the opposite
of RIP, which advertises all routes to destination networks. Coupled with
IGMP, membership for a multicast stream is learned from both the routers
and directly attached hosts.
DVMRP constructs a different distribution tree for each source and its
destination host group. The distribution tree provides a shortest path
between the source and each multicast receiver in the group, based on
the number of hops in the path. A tree is constructed on demand, using
a broadcast and prune technique, when a source begins to transmit
messages to a multicast group.
DVMRP assumes that initially every host on the network is part of the
multicast group. The designated router on the source subnet (the router that
is selected to handle routing for all hosts on the subnet) begins transmitting
a multicast message to all adjacent routers. Each of these routers then
selectively forwards the message to downstream routers until the message
is eventually passed to all multicast group members.
This section discusses the following topics:
• "Reverse path forwarding" (page 31)
• "Pruning and grafting" (page 32)
• "DVMRP concepts and terminology" (page 32)
• "DVMRP static source groups" (page 35)
• "DVMRP routing policies" (page 35)
• "Ethernet Routing Switch 8600 implementation of DVMRP" (page 41)

Reverse path forwarding

In the selective forwarding process during the formation of the multicast
tree, when a router receives a multicast stream, it checks its DVMRP routing
tables to determine the interface that provides the shortest path back to the
source. If that is the interface where the multicast stream arrived, the router

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
32 IP Multicast concepts

enters state information to identify the multicast stream and its source in its
internal tables, and forwards the multicast message to all adjacent routers
except to those on the same interface. If the interface is not the optimal one
receiving the multicast stream, the stream is discarded. This mechanism,
called reverse path forwarding, ensures that there are no loops in the tree
and that the tree includes the shortest path from the source to all recipients.

Pruning and grafting

Pruning eliminates branches of the distribution tree that do not lead to
any multicast group members. The IGMP running between hosts and
their immediately neighboring multicast routers is used to maintain group
membership data in the routers. When a router determines that no hosts
beyond it belong to the multicast group, it sends a prune message to
its upstream router. Routers update source and destination group state
information in their tables to reflect the branches that are eliminated from
the tree, resulting in a minimum multicast tree. If a router later learns of new
group memberships from the hosts or downstream routers, it sends a graft
message upstream to retract the prune sent earlier.

After the multicast tree is constructed, it is used to transmit multicast

messages from the source to multicast members. Each router in the path
forwards messages over only those interfaces that lead to group members.
Because new members can join the group at any time and these members
can depend on one of the pruned branches to receive the transmission,
DVMRP periodically reinitiates the construction of the multicast tree.

DVMRP concepts and terminology

DVMRP is a multicasting protocol that provides a mechanism for routers to
propagate multicast datagrams in a manner that minimizes the number of
excess copies sent to any particular network.

Neighbor connections
In a DVMRP environment, neighbors are multicasting routers that have
an interface to the same network.
At startup, a DVMRP multicasting router performs the following tasks:
• initializes its routing table with information on all of its local networks
• learns the existence of its neighbors by sending a probe for all routes
on each of its multicast interfaces
• receives reports from its neighbors containing the routing information
(including route costs)

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol 33

Source route advertisements

A source network is any network containing hosts that can issue multicast
datagrams. DVMRP advertises shortest-path routes to multicasting source
networks. In this respect, DVMRP is the opposite of RIP, which advertises
routes to destination networks.

Periodically, each multicasting router issues full or partial routing information

on each DVMRP circuit using DVMRP report messages. This routing
information represents the cost for the sending router to reach the specified
source network. The cost is the sum of the hop metrics along the shortest
path to the given source network.

Upon receiving a DVMRP report from another router, DVMRP reexamines

its routing table to determine whether the shortest path information needs
updating. Specifically, DVMRP looks in the routing table for an entry
describing a route to the same source network. If one exists, DVMRP
compares the cost of the two routes and stores the route with the lower
cost in its routing table.

A router does not send route reports on an interface until it knows (by
means of received probes or reports) that it has a neighboring multicast
router on that interface. The Ethernet Routing Switch 8600 acknowledges
implicit probes from neighboring multicast routers, and it sends probes
periodically on the interface.

How DVMRP chooses a route

Each DVMRP interface is configured with a metric that indicates the cost
of the hop. A router that receives multiple route reports for the same
multicasting source network performs the following tasks:
• compares the cost specified in each route report (based on the metric
field)
• stores information from the report with the lowest cost in its routing table

A route metric is the sum of all the interface (hop) metrics from a given route
source to a given router. After a next-hop neighbor has been declared for
a route, the route updates received from that neighbor for that route take
precedence until either the route times out or another router advertises a
better metric for that route.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
34 IP Multicast concepts

Routing table
Table 1 "Parts of a routing table entry" (page 34) shows the principal items
in a routing table entry.

Table 1
Parts of a routing table entry
Item Description
Source subnet address The network address and mask that identify the source for this entry
and mask contains multicast routing information.
Upstream neighbor The address of the upstream neighbor from where multicast
datagrams are received.
Interface The value of the interface index where IP datagrams sent by these
sources are received.
Metric The distance in hops to the source subnet.
Expiration Time The maximum amount of time (in time ticks) remaining before this
entry ages out.

Note that the source subnet and the previous-hop router in the DVMRP
routing table are the opposite of the destination subnet and next-hop router
in a RIP routing table.
Using this information, the router performs the following tasks:
• receives a multicast datagram and determines whether it has arrived on
the interface that is on the shortest path to the source network
• drops the datagram if it has not arrived on the shortest-path interface
• floods the multicast stream to all active, nonpruned, downstream
DVMRP neighbors

Shortest-path trees
Route information used by DVMRP is independent of any other routing
information used by the router. This routing information creates a
shortest-path tree entry in the routing table for the propagation of multicast
datagrams.

The shortest-path tree entry indicates the interface that provides the
shortest path to the network that is the source of the multicast datagram. A
shortest-path tree also indicates those interfaces that are on the shortest
path to that source network from a neighboring router.

In IGMP version 2, neighboring routers have the same metric to a given

source network. The router with the lower IP address is responsible for
propagating multicast traffic originating from that source network onto the
network or tunnel that is common to these neighboring routers.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol 35

A network is considered a leaf network if it has no dependent downstream

neighbors for a source.

DVMRP static source groups

Static source groups (or static mroutes) enable you to configure static
source group entries in the DVMRP multicast routing table. DVMRP cannot
prune these entries from the distribution tree. For more information about
static source groups, see "Static source groups" (page 19).

DVMRP routing policies

With DVMRP routing policies, you can improve the management of the
DVMRP routing tables by controlling how the routing table is populated and
how the routes are exchanged between switches. These routing policies,
when enabled, can be applied to an interface that can be either a VLAN
or a brouter port.

Default route policy

DVMRP uses a default route to summarize routes in the routing table in an
effort to reduce the size of the routing table, which is particularly useful for
the edge switches in your network. Default route policies allow DVMRP to:
• Listen for a default route: You can enable or disable a switch to listen
for a default route; the Ethernet Routing Switch 8600 is configured by
default to listen for the default route.
• Advertise a default route: You can enable or disable a switch to advertise
a default route; the Ethernet Routing Switch 8600 is configured by
default to advertise a default route if the route exists in the routing table.
• Supply a default route: You can configure an interface to supply a
default route, where the default route is generated and advertised.
In this case, the default route is not added to the routing table but is
used by a neighbor switch as a path from where all unknown source
addresses are accepted.

When supplying a default route, consider the following:

• You can set the Ethernet Routing Switch 8600 to advertise a default
route only if that switch is not enabled to listen for the default route.
• When you configure an interface to supply a default route, it does not
advertise any other route to its neighbors.
• The Ethernet Routing Switch 8600 does not listen for default route on an
interface that is configured to supply default route.

Configuration example

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
36 IP Multicast concepts

Figure 6 "Default route configuration example" (page 36) shows a network

with two domains that include multiple switches. In this configuration, switch
1 (S1) is an edge switch that connects only to S4 and S5 in a different
domain. S4 and S5 are configured to supply default routes to S1. The
metrics for these switches are set as 1 hop for S1 and 2 hops for S5. S4 and
S5 do not advertise any other route to S1 because they are configured to
supply the default route. In this case, the default route is not added to the S4
and S5 routing tables because the default supply is enabled on the interface.

Figure 6
Default route configuration example

In this example, only one default route can be active at any time; therefore,
no load sharing occurs on the links. In addition, there can be cases where a
nonoptimal path is taken to reach S1 from a switch in the other domain. By
default, the other switches in the domain that includes S1 receive the default
route advertised by S1 the same as any other regular route. No exceptions
exist as none of the switches are configured with a supply default route
policy. These switches can be set to not to accept the route, if required.

All the switches with a default route in their routing table accept traffic on
the interface where they learn the default route from any source that is
unknown to them.

You can simplify the configuration shown in Figure 6 "Default route

configuration example" (page 36). In the simplified configuration, S1 has
only one link to domain 2, and S4 is configured to supply a default route
to S1. In this configuration, S1 accepts all multicast traffic from domain 2
on that interface.

See Figure 8 "Announce policy configuration example" (page 38) and

Figure 10 "Accept policy configuration example" (page 40) for configuration
examples that show the application of the DVMRP announce and accept
policies to the same network configuration shown in Figure 6 "Default route
configuration example" (page 36).

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol 37

Announce policy
A DVMRP announce policy (out filter) governs the propagation of DVMRP
routing information. Use DVMRP announce policies to control which routes
are sent to neighboring routers, to reduce the size of routing tables, or
provide a level of security for the network.

The announce policies are applied to the outgoing advertisements to the

other neighbors/peers in the protocol domain. These policies determine
whether or not to announce specific route information. You can selectively
announce routes with announce policies. You can configure a policy to
apply to any route. If there is no policy configured or no matching policy for
a given route, the default configuration enables the switch to accept the
route. If there is no policy configured or no matching policy for a route, the
default behavior is to announce the route.

Figure 7 "DVMRP announce policy logic" (page 37) shows how an outgoing
route is handled when a DVMRP announce policy does or does not exist
on a switch.

Figure 7
DVMRP announce policy logic

Configuration example

Figure 8 "Announce policy configuration example" (page 38) is an example

of an announce policy communication between two different domains
that include multiple switches. In this example, S1 is an edge switch that

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
38 IP Multicast concepts

connects only to S4 and S5, which are located in a different domain. S4 is

configured so that it does not announce routing information. The result and
benefit of this configuration is that the local switch (S4) does not send route
advertisements to the other switches in the network, therefore, reducing the
size of the routing stable and providing a level of security for the network.

Figure 8
Announce policy configuration example

Accept policy
A DVMRP accept policy (in filter) is required to control the way DVMRP
manages incoming routes advertisements. Accept policies apply to
incoming advertisements and allow users to reduce the size of the DVMRP
routing table. For example, you can configure an edge switch to use a default
route and not to accept any route, therefore, reducing the size of its routing
table (the routing table includes only the default and local routes). In this
case, this switch can still advertise all of its routes to the rest of the network.

Accept policies allow injecting routes into the DVMRP routing table and can
be applied to single or all interfaces of a switch. You can use these policies
to selectively accept routes and you can configure a policy to apply for any
route. If there is no policy configured or no matching policy for a given route,
the default configuration enables the switch to accept the route.

Figure 9 "DVMRP accept policy logic" (page 39) shows how an incoming
route is handled when a DVMRP accept policy is or is not enabled on
your switch.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol 39

Figure 9
DVMRP accept policy logic

Configuration example

Figure 10 "Accept policy configuration example" (page 40) is an example of

an accept policy communication between two different domains that include
multiple switches. In this example, S1 is an edge switch that connects only
to S4 and S5, which are located in a different domain. S4 and S5 are
configured so that they do not accept routing information from S1. The
result and benefit of this configuration is that the switches in domain 2 do
not receive routing information from domain 1, therefore, reducing the size
of the routing tables and providing a level of security for the network. S4 and
S5 do, however, advertise routing information to S1. Therefore, switches in
domain 1 receive the routing information from domain 2.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
40 IP Multicast concepts

Figure 10
Accept policy configuration example

Advertisement of local networks policy

By default, DVMRP advertises its own local networks over an interface. With
the advertisement of local networks policy, you can configure an interface
to omit the advertisement of local routes to other switches in your network.
This policy allows for the reduction of the size of the routing table and
provides a level of security where multicast traffic on the interface does not
get routed to other interfaces in the network. The interface still receives
multicast traffic from the other interfaces in the network.

Configuration example

Figure 11 "Advertisement of local networks policy configuration example"

(page 41) is an example of how the advertisement of a local networks policy
applies to switches communicating with a core network. In this example, four
switches with several interfaces contain receivers (such as a television) that
communicate with devices in the core network. The switches are configured
to disable the advertisement of their local network, which means that the
switch only receives (does not supply) multicast traffic. This configuration
allows the switches to maintain smaller routing tables.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol 41

Figure 11
Advertisement of local networks policy configuration example

DVMRP passive interface policy

With the DVMRP passive interface policy feature, you can configure multiple
DVMRP interfaces on an Ethernet Routing Switch 8600 without affecting
the performance of the switch. You can configure an interface as passive
or active with the DVMRP passive interface policy. When you configure an
interface as passive, it drops all types of incoming DVMRP packets from
neighbors and does not send out any probes or route reports to its neighbor
switches. When you configure a DVMRP interface as passive, you can only
change the interface type if the interface is disabled.

For information about configuring routing policies using Device Manager,

see "Configuring DVMRP routing policies" (page 122).

For information about configuring routing policies using the CLI, see
"Configuring DVMRP routing policies" (page 304).

Ethernet Routing Switch 8600 implementation of DVMRP

In an Ethernet Routing Switch 8600, DVMRP fully supports multiaccess
networks. The forwarding entries for the receivers on multiaccess networks
are port based rather than network based. Therefore, on a multiaccess
network, only ports interested in the data receive it. That is, IP multicast
routing is supported on ports with port-based or IP subnet-based VLANs
enabled.

The DVMRP router listens to all IGMP host membership reports even if it
is not the designated querier and keeps a local group database of every
host membership reporter.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
42 IP Multicast concepts

When a multicast stream of UDP packets first enters the switch, if DVMRP
is enabled for the interface, then it processes these packets as necessary
and creates a hardware cache entry to handle subsequent packets in the
same stream for the same multicast destination. The packets are discarded
if there are no members; otherwise they are forwarded.

The Ethernet Routing Switch 8600 implementation does not support

DVMRP tunneling.

Protocol Independent Multicast-Sparse Mode

Protocol Independent Multicast-Sparse Mode (PIM-SM), as defined in
RFC 2362, supports multicast groups spread out across large areas of a
company or the Internet. Unlike dense mode protocols, such as DVMRP,
that initially flood multicast traffic to all routers over an entire internetwork,
PIM-SM sends multicast traffic only to routers that have specifically joined
a multicast group. This technique reduces traffic flow over WAN links and
overhead costs for processing unwanted multicast packets.

Dense-mode protocols use a flood-and-prune technique, which is efficient

where receivers are densely populated. However, for sparsely populated
networks, PIM-SM is more efficient because it sends multicast traffic only
to those routers that belong to a specific multicast group and that choose
to receive the traffic.

PIM-SM is independent of any specific unicast routing protocol, but it does

require the presence of a unicast routing protocol, such as RIP or OSPF.
PIM-SM uses the information from the unicast routing table to create and
maintain multicast trees that enable PIM-enabled routers to communicate.

PIM-SM concepts and terminology

Typically, a PIM-SM network consists of several multipoint data streams,
each targeted to a small number of LANs in the internetwork. For example,
customers whose networks consist of multiple hosts on different LANs can
use PIM-SM to simultaneously access a video data stream, such as a video
teleconference, on a different subnet.

ATTENTION
In some cases, PIM stream initialization can take several seconds.

Hosts
A host can be a source, a receiver, or both.
• A source, also known as a sender, sends multicast data to a multicast
group.
• A receiver receives multicast data from one or several sources that
sends data to a multicast group.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Protocol Independent Multicast-Sparse Mode 43

PIM-SM domain
PIM-SM operates in a domain of contiguous routers that have PIM-SM
enabled. All these routers are configured to operate within a common
boundary defined by PIM Multicast Border Routers (PMBRs).
Each PIM-SM domain requires the following routers:
• Designated router (DR)
• Rendezvous-point (RP) router
• Bootstrap router (BSR)

Although a PIM-SM domain can have only one active RP router and one
active BSR, you can configure additional routers as candidate RP routers
and as candidate BSRs. Candidate routers provide backup protection in
case the primary RP or BSR router fails.

Designated router
The designated router (DR) is the router with the highest IP address on a
LAN designated to perform the following tasks:
• sends register messages to the rendezvous-point (RP) router on behalf
of directly connected sources
• sends join/prune messages to the RP router on behalf of directly
connected receivers
• maintains information about the status of the active RP router for local
sources in each multicast group

ATTENTION
The DR is not a required configuration, and switches act automatically as such for
directly attached sources and receivers.

Rendezvous-Point router
PIM-SM builds a shared multicast distribution tree within each domain, and
the rendezvous point (RP) router is at the root of this shared tree. Although
the RP can be physically located anywhere on the network, it must be as
close to the source as possible. There is only one active RP router for a
multicast group.
At the RP router, receivers meet new sources. Sources use the RP to
identify themselves to other routers on the network; receivers use the RP
to learn about new sources.
The RP performs the following tasks:
• registers a source that wants to announce itself and send data to group
members
• joins a receiver that wants to receive data for the group

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
44 IP Multicast concepts

• forwards data to group

Candidate rendezvous-point router

You can configure a set of routers as candidate rendezvous-point (C-RP)

routers that serve as backup to the RP router. If an RP fails, all the routers
in the domain apply the same algorithm to elect a new RP from the group of
C-RPs. To make sure that the routers have a complete list of C-RPs, the
C-RP periodically sends unicast advertisement messages to the bootstrap
router (BSR). The most common implementation is to configure a PIM-SM
router as both a candidate RP and a candidate BSR.

ATTENTION
Although you can configure a candidate RP on a DVMRP interface, no
functionality is tied to this configuration.

Static rendezvous point router

You can configure a static entry for a rendezvous point (RP) with static
RP. This feature avoids the process of selecting an active RP from the list
of candidate RPs and dynamically learning about RPs through the BSR
mechanism. Static RP-enabled switches cannot learn about RPs through
the BSR because the switch loses all dynamically-learned BSR information
and ignores BSR messages. When you configure static RP entries, the
switch adds them to the RP-set as if they were learned through the BSR.

ATTENTION
In a PIM domain with both static and dynamic RP switches, the static RP switches
cannot have one of their (local) interfaces configured as RP.

While configuring a PIM static RP in a switch, consider that the next-hop

of the unicast route towards PIM static RP must be a PIM neighbor. The
PIM protocol fails to work if due to a route change the next-hop towards an
already configured static RP becomes a non-PIM neighbor. The configured
RP does not activate until it can be reached through a PIM neighbor, and its
state remains invalid.

Static RP-enabled Ethernet Routing Switch 8600 can communicate with

switches from other vendors that do not use the BSR mechanism. Some
vendors use either early implementations of PIM-SM v1 that do not support
the BSR or proprietary mechanisms like the Cisco Auto-RP. For a network to
work properly with static RP, you must have all the switches in the network
(including switches from other vendors) map to the same RP or RPs, if
several RPs are present in the network.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Protocol Independent Multicast-Sparse Mode 45

To avoid a single point of failure, you can also configure redundant static
RPs.

ATTENTION
To reduce convergence times, Nortel recommends you create only one static RP
per group. The more static RPs you configure for redundancy, the more time PIM
requires to rebuild the mroute table and associate RPs.

You use the static RP feature when dynamic learning mode is not needed,
typically in small networks or for security reasons, where RPs have to be
forced to some devices in the network so that they do not learn other RPs.

Bootstrap router
The BSR receives RP router advertisement messages from the candidate
RPs. The BSR adds the RP router with its group prefix to the RP set. Only
one BSR exists for each PIM-SM domain.

The BSR periodically sends bootstrap messages containing the complete

RP set to all routers in the domain. The BSR ensures that all PIM-SM
routers send join/prune and register packets.

Candidate bootstrap router

Within a PIM-SM domain, you can configure a small set of routers as

candidate BSRs (C-BSRs). The candidate BSR with the highest configured
priority becomes the BSR for the domain. If two candidate BSRs have
equal priority, the candidate with the higher IP address becomes the BSR.
If you add a new candidate BSR with a higher priority to the domain, it
automatically becomes the new BSR.

For information about configuring a candidate BSR using Device Manager,

see "Configuring a candidate bootstrap router" (page 159).

For information about configuring a candidate BSR using the CLI, see
"Configuring a candidate BSR on an interface" (page 359), "Configuring a
candidate BSR on an Ethernet port" (page 372), or "Configuring a candidate
BSR on a VLAN" (page 376).

Join/prune messages
The DR sends join/prune messages from a receiver toward a RP for the
group to either join the shared tree or remove (prune) a branch from it. A
single message contains both a join and a prune list. This list includes a set
of source addresses indicating the shortest-path trees or the shared trees
that the host wants to join. The DR sends join and prune messages hop by
hop to each PIM router on the path to the source or the RP.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
46 IP Multicast concepts

Register and register-stop messages

The DR sends register messages to the RP for a directly connected source.
The register message informs the RP of a new source, causing the RP
to send join or prune messages back toward the DR of the source which
forwards the data down the RP tree after it gets the data natively. When the
receiver DR gets the first packet, it switches to the shortest-path tree (SPT)
and continues receiving data through the SPT path.

The DR stops sending encapsulated packets to the RP after receiving a

register-stop message. This traffic stops without delay because the RP
sends a register-stop message immediately after receiving the first multicast
data packet, and joins the shortest-path tree.

Shared trees and shortest-path trees

In a PIM-SM domain, shared trees and shortest-path trees are used to
deliver data packets to group members. This section describes both trees.

Shared trees
Group members in a PIM-SM domain receive the first packet of data from
sources across a shared tree. A shared tree consists of a set of paths that
connect all members of a multicast group to the RP. PIM creates a shared
tree when sources and receivers send messages toward the RP.

Shortest-path trees
After receiving a certain number of packets from the RP, the DR
switches from a shared tree to a shortest-path tree (SPT). Switching to
a shortest-path tree creates a direct route between the receiver and the
source. The Ethernet Routing Switch 8600 switches to the SPT when it
receives the first packet from the RP.

Figure 12 "Shared tree and shortest-path tree" (page 47) shows a shared
tree and a shortest-path tree.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Protocol Independent Multicast-Sparse Mode 47

Figure 12
Shared tree and shortest-path tree

Receiver joining group

The following steps describe how a receiver joins a multicast group:
1. A receiver multicasts an IGMP host membership message to the group
that it wants to join.
2. When the DR (normally the PIM router with the highest IP address for
that VLAN) receives the IGMP message for a new group, it looks up
the associated active RP.
3. After determining the RP router for the group, the DR creates a (*,G)
route entry in the multicast forwarding table and sends a (*,G) join to
the RP. When the DR receives data packets from the RP, it switches to
shortest path, creates an (S,G) entry in the multicast forwarding table
and sends a (S,G) join to the source.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
48 IP Multicast concepts

4. All intermediate routers along the path to the source create the (S,G)
entry.
5. The DR receives data from the data source using the SPT.

Receiver leaving group

Before it leaves a multicast group, a receiver sends an IGMP leave message
to the DR. If all directly connected members of a multicast group leave
or time out, and no downstream members remain, the DR sends a prune
message upstream and PIM-SM deletes the route entry after that entry
times out.

Source sending packets to group

The following steps describe how a source sends multicast packets to
a group:
1. A source directly attached to a VLAN bridges the multicast data to
the DR. The DR for the VLAN (the router with the highest IP address)
encapsulates each packet in a register message and sends a unicast
message directly to the RP router to distribute to the multicast group.
2. If a downstream group member chooses to receive multicast traffic,
the RP router sends a join/prune message towards the source DR and
forwards the data down the RP tree after it gets the data natively.
3. When the receiver DR gets the first packet, it switches to the
shortest-path tree (SPT) and continues receiving data through the SPT
path.
4. If no downstream members want to receive multicast traffic, the RP
router sends a register-stop message (for the source) to the DR.
The DR starts the register suppression timer when it receives the first
register-stop message. During the register suppression timeout period
(the default is 60 seconds), the following events occur:
• The DR for the source sends a probe packet to the RP router before
the register suppression timer expires. The probe packet prompts
the RP router to determine whether any new downstream receivers
have joined the group.
• If no new receivers have joined the group, the RP router sends
another register-stop message to the DR for the source, and its
register suppression timer restarts.
• When the RP router no longer responds with a register-stop
message to the source DR probe message, the register suppression
timer expires and the DR sends encapsulated multicast packets to
the RP router. The RP router uses this method to tell the DR that
new members have joined the group.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Protocol Independent Multicast-Sparse Mode 49

The RP sends a register-stop message to the DR immediately after

receiving the first multicast data packet.

Required elements for PIM-SM operation

For PIM-SM to operate, a number of elements must be present in the
PIM-SM domain including the following:
• An underlying unicast routing protocol must be enabled for the switch to
provide routing table information to PIM-SM.
• In a PIM-SM domain, an active BSR must be in place to send bootstrap
messages to all PIM-V2 configured switches and routers to enable them
to learn group-to-RP mapping. If several BSRs are configured in a
network, an active BSR is elected based on priority and IP address (if
priority is equal, the BSR with the higher IP address is elected).
• An RP must be in place in the PIM-SM domain to perform the following
tasks:
— To manage one or several IP Multicast groups.
— To become the root for the shared tree to these groups.
— To accept join messages from receiver switches for groups that it
manages.
— If more than one RP that have groups in common, the RPs elect an
active RP based on priority and IP address (if priority is equal, the
RP with the higher IP address is elected).

PIM-SM simplified example

Figure 13 "PIM-SM simplified example" (page 50) shows a simplified
example of a PIM-SM configuration.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
50 IP Multicast concepts

Figure 13
PIM-SM simplified example

In the sample configuration, the following events occur:

1. The BSR distributes RP information to all switches in the network.
2. R sends a report to S4.
3. Acting on this report, S4 sends a (*,G) join to RP.
4. S starts sending data to G.
5. The DR (S1 in this example) encapsulates the data that it unicasts to RP
(S2) in register messages.
6. S2 decapsulates the data that it forwards to S4.
7. S4 forwards the data to R.
8. S4 joins S1 because it now knows the source.
9. S1 starts forwarding to S4. When S4 receives data from S1, it prunes
the stream from the RP.

ATTENTION
Figure 13 "PIM-SM simplified example" (page 50) is a simplified example and
is not the best design for a network if the source and receiver are placed as
shown. In general, RPs are placed as close as possible to sources.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Protocol Independent Multicast-Sparse Mode 51

PIM-SM static source groups

You can configure static source groups (or static mroutes) as static
source-group entries in the PIM-SM multicast routing table. PIM-SM cannot
prune these entries from the distribution tree. For more information about
static source groups, see "Static source groups" (page 19).

PIM-SMLT
The provision of IP Multicast routing support with Split MultiLink Trunking
(SMLT) is based on the concept of building a virtual switch that represents
the two switches of the split multilink trunk core. When switches are running
PIM in the core, they need to exchange protocol related updates as part of
the interswitch trunking (IST) protocol. IST hides the fact that the edge
switch is attached to two physical switches. Similar to the GLP (Group
Learning Protocol) protocol, a protocol called MRLP (Multicast Routing
Learning Protocol) is used as an extension to SMLT to support routed
scenarios.

ATTENTION
DVMRP is not supported in the core as a Layer 3 routing protocol.

MRLP provides the following basic information between the two core
switches: for example, neighbor information learning for the edge switches,
other types of messages that determine the forwarder, and multicast tree
building information that is related to the edge switch. Only one of the
core switches receives control messages from the edge switch on one, or
several, of the links of the link aggregation group of the edge switch. This
process connects the edge switch to those switches, resulting in the need to
provide the peer switch with this information. The basic concept is to build
one view of the edge switch in the two core switches.
The PIM-SMLT and the MRLP protocol works for triangular and square
configurations with layer 3 IP Multicast.
The following rules apply:
• For a given VLAN, if traffic is received from the IST link, it cannot be
forwarded on the split multilink trunk link or the edge for the same VLAN.
• The IST can be used to route traffic between VLANs if the forwarding
decision for the multicast protocol requires that the other side of the core
has to forward the multicast traffic (follow the IP Multicast routing and
forwarding rules for routed traffic). So, the MRLP protocol is used for
those VLANs configured for SMLT only. Other VLANs not part of SMLT
continue behaving the same way.

SMLT provides for fast failover in all cases, but is not designed to provide a
functionality similar to RSMLT.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
52 IP Multicast concepts

Traffic delay with PIM while rebooting peer SMLT switches

PIM uses a Designated Router (DR) to forward data to receivers on the
DR VLAN. The DR is the router with the highest IP address on a LAN. If
this router is down for some reason, the router with the next highest IP
address becomes the DR.
Rebooting the DR in an SMLT VLAN may result in data loss because of
the following actions:
• When the DR is down, the nonDR switch assumes the role and starts
forwarding data.
• When the DR comes back up, it has priority (higher IP address) to
forward data so the nonDR switch stops forwarding data.
• The DR is not ready to forward traffic due to protocol convergence and
because it takes time to learn the RP set and create the forwarding path.
This can result in a traffic delay of 2-3 minutes (since the DR learns
the RP set after OSPF converges).

A workaround is to configure static Rendezvous Point (RP) router on the

peer SMLT switches. This feature avoids the process of selecting an active
RP router from the list of candidate RPs, and also of dynamically learning
about RPs through the BSR mechanism. Then, when the Designated
Router comes back, traffic resumes as soon as OSPF converges. This
reduces the traffic delay to approximately 15 to 65 seconds.

PIM-SSM
Source Specific Multicast (SSM) optimizes PIM-SM by simplifying the
many-to-many model. Since most multicast applications distribute content
to a group in one direction, SSM uses a one-to-many model that only uses a
subset of the PIM-SM features. This model is more efficient and puts less of
a load on multicast routing devices.

SSM only builds source-based shortest path trees. Whereas PIM-SM

always joins a shared tree first and then switches to the source tree, SSM
eliminates the need for starting with a shared tree by immediately joining a
source through the shortest path tree. This method enables SSM to avoid
using a rendezvous point (RP) and RP-based shared trees, which can be a
potential bottleneck.

Members of a SSM group can only receive from a single source. This is ideal
for applications like TV channel distribution and other content-distribution
businesses. Banking and trade applications can also use SSM because it
provides more control over the hosts receiving and sending data over their
networks.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 PIM-SSM 53

SSM applications use IP addresses reserved by the Internet

Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA) in the 232/8 range (232.0.0.0 to
232.255.255.255). SSM recognizes packets in this range and controls the
behavior of multicast routing devices and hosts that use these addresses.
When a source S transmits IP datagrams to a SSM destination address G,
a receiver can receive these datagrams by subscribing to the (S,G) channel.

A channel is a source-group (S,G) pair where S is the source sending to

the multicast group and G is a SSM group address. SSM defines channels
on a per-source basis, which enforces the one-to-many concept of SSM
applications. In a SSM channel, each group is associated with one and
only one source. However, another SSM channel can associate the same
multicast group with a different source, which allows an efficient use of
the SSM address range. For example, channel (192.1.3.4, 232.1.2.3) is
different from channel (141.251.186.13, 232.1.2.3).

SSM features
SSM only uses a subset of the PIM-SM features such as the shortest path
tree, designated router (DR), and some messages (Hello, Join/Prune,
and Assert). However, there are also some features that are unique to
SSM. These features, which are described in the following sections, are
extensions of the IGMP and PIM protocols.

PIM-SSM architecture
Figure 14 "PIM-SSM architecture" (page 54) illustrates how the PIM-SSM
architecture requires routers to:
• support IGMPv3 source-specific host membership reports and queries
at the edge routers
• initiate PIM-SSM (S,G) joins directly and immediately after receiving an
IGMPv3 join report from the designated router
• restrict forwarding to shortest-path trees within the SSM address range
by all PIM-SSM routers

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
54 IP Multicast concepts

Figure 14
PIM-SSM architecture

The following rules apply to layer 3 devices with SSM enabled:

• Receive IGMPv3 membership join reports in the SSM range and, if there
is no entry (S,G) in the SSM channel table, creates one.
• Receive IGMPv2 membership join reports, but only for groups that
already have a static (S,G) entry in the SSM channel table.
• Send periodic join messages to maintain a steady SSM tree state.
• Use standard PIM-SM SPT procedures for unicast routing changes, but
ignore any rules associated with the SPT-bit for the (S,G) route entry.
• Receive prune messages and use standard PIM-SM procedures to
remove interfaces from the source tree.
• Forward data packets to interfaces from the downstream neighbors
that have sent an SSM join, or to interfaces with locally attached SSM
group members.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 PIM-SSM 55

• Drop data packets that do not have an exact-match lookup (S,G) in their
forwarding database for S and G.

Ethernet Routing Switch 8600 implementation of SSM and IGMP

The following sections describe how PIM-SSM and IGMP are implemented
in the Ethernet Routing Switch 8600.

SSM range
The standard SSM range is 232/8, but you can extend the range to
include any IP Multicast address with the Ethernet Routing Switch 8600
implementation of SSM. Although you can configure the SSM range,
configuring it for all multicast groups (224/4 or 224.0.0.0/240.0.0.0 or
224.0.0.0/255.0.0.0) is not allowed.

You can extend the SSM range to configure existing applications without
changing their group configurations. This flexibility allows applications to
take immediate advantage of SSM.

For information about configuring the SSM range using Device Manager,
see "Configuring the SSM range and global parameters" (page 91).
For information about configuring the SSM range using the CLI, see
"Configuring SSM dynamic learning and range group" (page 250).

SSM channel table

The SSM channel table gives you the flexibility to manually configure S,G
entries that map existing groups to their sending source. These table entries
apply to the whole switch, not per interface, and both IGMPv2 and IGMPv3
hosts use the SSM channel table.
The following rules apply to a SSM channel table for an individual switch:
• You can map one source to multiple groups.
• You can map one group to one source only; that is, you cannot map the
same group more than once in a given table.

ATTENTION
Different switches can have different mappings for groups to sources, for example,
different channels may be mapped differently even if they are on the same
network.

For information about configuring the SSM channel table using Device
Manager, see "Configuring the SSM channel table" (page 94). For
information about configuring the SSM channel table using the CLI, see
"Configuring the SSM channel table" (page 254).

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
56 IP Multicast concepts

SSM and IGMPv2

SSM-configured switches can accept reports from IGMPv2 hosts on
IGMPv2 interfaces if the group has a SSM channel table entry. However,
the IGMPv2 host groups must be in the SSM range defined on the switch,
which is 232/8 by default.
• When the SSM switch receives an IGMPv2 report for a group that is in
the SSM channel table, it joins the specified source immediately.
• When the SSM switch receives an IGMPv2 report for a group that
has an enabled static SSM channel table entry, it triggers PIM-SSM
processing as if it had received an equivalent IGMPv3 report.
• When the SSM switch receives an IGMPv2 report for a group out of the
SSM range, it processes the report as if it is in PIM-SM mode.

SSM and IGMPv3

The Ethernet Routing Switch 8600 supports IGMPv3 for SSM. IGMPv3
enables a host to selectively request or filter traffic from sources within the
multicast group. IGMPv3 is an interface-level configuration.

ATTENTION
IGMPv3 works only with PIM-SSM or SSM snoop enabled on the interface.

The following rules apply to IGMPv3-enabled interfaces:

• Send only IGMPv3 (source-specific) reports for addresses in the SSM
range.
• Accept IGMPv3 reports.
• Drop IGMPv2 reports.
Note that the IGMPv2 report mentioned in "SSM and IGMPv2" (page
56) is processed because it is an IGMPv2 report that is received on an
IGMPv2 interface. If it is an IGMPv3 report received on an IGMPv2
interface, it is dropped even if PIM-SSM is enabled and the entry is in the
SSM channel table. The rule is that the IGMP version must match first.
• Discard any IGMP packets with a group address out of the SSM range.

The Ethernet Routing Switch 8600 implements IGMPv3 in one of two

modes: dynamic and static.
• In dynamic mode, the switch learns about new (S,G) pairs from IGMPv3
reports and adds them to the SSM channel table. If dynamic mode is
not enabled and an IGMPv3-enabled interface receives a report that
includes a group not listed in the SSM channel table, it ignores the report.
• In static mode, you can statically configure (Source,Group) entries in the
SSM channel table. If an IGMPv3-enabled interface receives a report
that includes a group not listed in the SSM channel table, it ignores

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 PIM-SSM 57

the report. It also ignores the report if the group is in the table, but the
source/mask does not match what is in the table.

ATTENTION
When IGMPv3 is enabled, changes to the query interval and robustness values
on the querier switch are propagated to other switches on the same VLAN
through IGMP query.

Both IGMPv2 and IGMPv3 hosts use the SSM channel table:
• An IGMPv2 host (with an IGMPv2 VLAN) must have an existing SSM
channel entry if the group is in SSM range.
• An IGMPv3 host has dynamic learning that is enabled, the SSM channel
automatically learns the group. Otherwise, the SSM channel also needs
a static entry.

Table 2 "Summary of how PIM-SSM interacts with IGMPv2 and v31 "
(page 57) summarizes how a switch in PIM-SSM mode works with IGMP.
References to any matching static SSM channel entry assumes that the
entry is enabled. If an entry is disabled, it is treated the same as if it is
disallowed.

Table 2
Summary of how PIM-SSM interacts with IGMPv2 and v3
Host VLAN SSM Range Action
IGMPv2 host IGMPv3 VLAN In or Out of range Drop report.
IGMPv3 host IGMPv2 VLAN In or Out of range Drop report.
IGMPv2 host IGMPv2 VLAN In SSM range If the report matches an existing static
SSM channel entry, create (S,G).
If the report does not match any
existing static SSM channel entry,
drop it.
IGMPv2 host IGMPv2 VLAN Out of SSM Ignore the SSM channel table and
range process the report as if it is in PIM-SM
mode.
IGMPv3 host IGMPv3 VLAN Out of SSM Drop report.
range
IGMPv3 host IGMPv3 VLAN In SSM range Dynamic enabled. Create (S,G).
IGMPv3 host IGMPv3 VLAN In SSM range Dynamic disabled and matches an
existing SSM channel entry. Create
(S,G).
IGMPv3 host IGMPv3 VLAN In SSM range Dynamic disabled and does not
match an existing SSM channel entry.
Drop it.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
58 IP Multicast concepts

When an IGMPv3 group report enters the VLAN port and one or more of
the groups in that packet needs to be discarded after the IGMP access
controls are applied, the entire packet is dropped and is not forwarded on to
any other ports of the VLAN.

When an IGMPv3 interface receives an IGMPv2 or v1 query, the interface

backs down to IGMPv2 or v1. As a result, all senders and receivers on this
interface are flushed.

PIM-SSM static source groups

You can configure static source group entries in the PIM-SSM multicast
routing table with static source groups (or static mroutes). PIM-SSM cannot
prune these entries from the distribution tree. For more information about
static source groups, see "Static source groups" (page 19).

Configuration limitations
Nortel recommends running PIM-SSM on either all the switches in the
domain or only on the edge routers. If there is a mix of PIM-SSM and
PIM-SM switches in the domain, run PIM-SSM on all the edge routers and
PIM-SM on all the core routers.

ATTENTION
A PIM domain with edge routers running PIM-SM and core routers running
PIM-SSM does not work properly.

Nortel does not support SSM interoperability with DVMRP. However,

the MBR functionality works properly for non-SSM groups because
SSM-enabled interfaces use PIM-SM behavior for groups outside the SSM
range.

SSM switches running IGMPv3 drop any reports that they receive out of the
SSM range. The SSM switch does not forward them to a PIM-SM switch.

Static source groups cannot conflict with SSM channels and vice versa.
When you configure a static source group or a SSM channel, the switch
performs a consistency check to make sure there are no conflicts. You
cannot map one group (G) to different sources for both a static source group
and a SSM channel.

PIM passive interfaces

You can specify whether you want a PIM interface to be active or passive.
The default is active. With an active interface, you can configure transmit
and receive PIM control traffic. A passive interface drops all PIM control
traffic, thereby reducing the load on the system. This feature is useful
when you have a high number of PIM interfaces and these interfaces are
connected to end-users, not to other switches.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 PIM passive interfaces 59

A PIM interface that is configured as passive does not transmit and drops
any messages of the following type:
• Hello
• Join/Prune
• Register (see Note below)
• Register-Stop (see Note below)
• Assert
• Candidate-RP-Advertisement
• Bootstrap

If a PIM passive interface receives any of these types of messages, it

drops them and the switch logs a message, detailing the type of protocol
message that is received and the IP address of the sending device. These
log messages help to identify the device that is performing routing on the
interface, which is useful if you must disable a device that is not operating
correctly.

ATTENTION
A device can send Register and Register-Stop messages to a PIM passive
interface, but these messages cannot be sent out of that interface.

The PIM passive interface maintains information about hosts, through the
IGMP protocol, that are related to senders and receivers, but the interface
does not maintain information about any PIM neighbors. You can configure
a bootstrap router (BSR) or a rendezvous point (RP) on a PIM passive
interface.

You can also use the PIM passive interface feature as a security measure
to prevent routing devices from becoming attached and participating in
the multicast routing of the network.

ATTENTION
Before you change the state (active or passive) of a PIM interface, disable PIM
on that interface. This prevents any instability in the PIM operations, especially
when neighbors are present or streams are received.

For information about configuring PIM passive interfaces using Device

Manager, see "Viewing and editing PIM interface parameters" (page 164).

For information about configuring PIM passive interfaces using the CLI, see
"Changing the interface type" (page 357), "Changing the port interface type"
(page 372), or "Changing the VLAN interface type" (page 375).

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
60 IP Multicast concepts

Pragmatic General Multicast

Pragmatic General Multicast (PGM) is a standard transport-level protocol
that addresses the disadvantages inherent in other multicasting protocols
such as unreliable packet delivery, packet duplication, and network
congestion. PGM addresses these limitations with techniques that enable it
to provide reliable, duplicate-free delivery of data packets while reducing
network congestion.

PGM sources multicast data packets (ODATA, original data) in an ordered

sequence. If there is a missing packet in the sequence, the receiver detects
the missing sequence number and unicasts a negative acknowledgement
(NAK) to the source. The source responds by sending a NAK confirmation
(NCF), and either the source itself or a designated local repairer (DLR)
retransmits the missing packet (RDATA, retransmitted data).

PGM is defined by the IETF <draft-speakman-pgm-spec-06.txt>.

PGM requires a host implementation as well as a network element (layer

3 device) implementation.

The Ethernet Routing Switch 8600 implements the network element aspect
of PGM, but does not implement the DLR as it requires a high amount of
buffering. End systems usually implement DLR.

PGM concepts and terminology

The following sections describe PGM terms and how they are used within
a PGM network.

Transport session identifiers

PGM runs over IP Multicast and delivers data from a source to one or
several receivers. The key distinction between PGM and other multicast
protocols is that data must be delivered within a transmit window time
frame. Each multicast session has a transport session identifier (TSI). PGM
supports any number of sources within a multicast group, but each has its
own TSI, and all sources operate independently.

Source path messages

Source path messages (SPMs) establish the source path state for the
TSI. The source sends out SPMs to maintain up-to-date PGM neighbor
information for the distribution tree from source to receivers. PGM receivers
also use this information to address negative acknowledgements (NAKs) to
the source.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Pragmatic General Multicast 61

Negative acknowledgements
PGM uses Negative acknowledgements (NAKs) to ensure reliable packet
delivery. When a receiver detects a missing packet, it repeats this NAK
until it receives a NAK confirmation. By doing this, PGM guarantees
that receivers either can receive all data packets from transmissions and
retransmissions, or can detect unrecoverable data packet loss.

PGM also uses NAKs to reduce congestion. Instead of sending a positive

acknowledgement (ACK) every time a packet is received, which adds to
network overhead, PGM issues a negative acknowledgement (NAK) only
when a packet is not received.

NAK confirmations
NAK confirmations (NCFs) further reduce congestion by suppressing
redundant NAKs. When a receiver detects a missing packet, it unicasts a
NAK to the next-hop upstream PGM router. This router then multicasts
an NCF to the subnet so other receivers do not send additional NAKs.
The router also stores the address of the group so that it forwards
retransmissions only to those segments containing receivers that require
the packet.

Designated local repairers (DLRs)

Designated local repairers (DLRs) are local hosts that retransmit missing
data packets for a number of multicast groups. DLRs multicast the missing
data to receivers below it in the distribution tree. This technique reduces
the load on the network due to retransmissions and reduces the time for
receivers to recover missing packets.

ATTENTION
The Ethernet Routing Switch 8600 cannot serve as a DLR because DLRs require
a large amount of buffering. Therefore, the null negative acknowledgement
(NNAK) parameters in Device Manager and the CLI are not supported.

PGM network element

You can configure an Ethernet Routing Switch 8600 as the network element
of a PGM network. The network element performs several PGM tasks as
follows:
• Sources periodically interleave Source Path Messages (SPMs) with data
frames. SPM frames allow the network element (an Ethernet Routing
Switch 8600 with PGM enabled) to learn the path to the source and to
maintain information on the PGM session.
• Because data frames are numbered, hosts can detect missing data
and issue Negative Acknowledgement messages (NAKs) if data is
missing. The network element forwards NAKs to the source and stores
information about the NAK to forward retransmitted data.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
62 IP Multicast concepts

• Hosts continue to send NAK messages until they receive a NAK

Confirmation (NCF) from the network element. To reduce traffic on
the network, the network element does not forward all received NAKs
because they can be transmitted from several receivers for the same
lost packet.
• The source retransmits the requested frame that is forwarded by the
network element to the interfaces that send the NAK.

For information about configuring PGM, see "Configuring PGM using Device
Manager" (page 173) or "Configuring PGM using the CLI" (page 409).

Multicast flow distribution over MLT

MultiLink Trunking (MLT) is a mechanism for distributing multicast streams
over an multilink trunk. The distribution is based on source-subnet and
group addresses and in the process provides you can choose the address
and the bytes in the address for the distribution algorithm. As a result, you
can distribute the load on different ports of the multilink trunk and aim
(whenever possible) to achieve an even distribution of the streams. In
applications like TV distribution, multicast traffic distribution is particularly
important, since the bandwidth requirements can be substantial when a
large number of TV streams are employed.

ATTENTION
The multicast flow distribution over the multilink trunk feature is supported only
on Ethernet Routing Switch 8600 E modules. As a result, all the modules that
have ports in a multilink trunk must be Ethernet Routing Switch 8600 E modules
to enable multicast flow distribution over a multilink trunk.

If you have two Ethernet Routing Switch 8600 switches connected through
a multilink trunk, with IP Multicast flowing between both switches, you must
enable/disable multicast on both switches (IGMP or DVMRP). If you do
not, multicast traffic loops can occur.

Distribution algorithm
To determine the port for a particular Source, Group (S,G) pair, the
number of active ports of the multilink trunk is used to MOD the number
generated by the XOR of each byte of the masked group address with the
masked source address. By default, the group mask and source mask is
255.255.255.255. A byte with a value of 255 in the mask means that the
corresponding byte in the group or source address is taken into account
when the algorithm is applied.

For example, consider:

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Multicast flow distribution over MLT 63

Group address G[0].G[1].G[2].G[3], Group Mask GM[0].GM[1].GM[2].GM[3],

Source Subnet address S[0].S[1].S[2].S[3], Source Mask
SM[0].SM[1].SM[2].SM[3]

Then, the Port =:

( ( ( (( G[0] AND GM[0] ) xor ( S[0] AND SM[0] ) ) xor ( (G[1] AND GM[0] ) xor
( S[1] AND SM[1] )) ) xor ( (G[2] AND GM[2] ) xor ( S[2] AND SM[2] )) ) xor (
( G[3] AND GM[3] ) xor ( S[3] AND SM[3] )) ) MOD (active ports of the MLT)

The algorithm used for traffic distribution causes the distribution to be

sequential if the streams are similar to those in the example that follows.
Assume that the multilink trunk ports are 1/1-1/4, that mask configuration
is 0.0.0.0 for the source mask and 0.0.0.255 for the group mask, and that
source A.B.C.D sends to groups:

X.Y.Z.1

X.Y.Z.2

X.Y.Z.3

.....

X.Y.Z.10

The algorithm chooses link 1/1 for group X.Y.Z.1, then X.Y.Z.2 goes on 1/2,
X.Y.Z.3 goes on 1/3, X.Y.Z.4 goes on 1/4, X.Y.Z.5 goes on 1/1 and so on.

In the following configuration example, only the first byte of the grp-mask,
and the first two bytes of the src-subnet mask are considered when
distributing the streams:

config sys mcast-mlt-distribution grp-mask 255.0.0.0

config sys mcast-mlt-distribution src-mask 255.255.0.0
config sys mcast-mlt-distribution enable
config sys mcast-mlt-distribution redistribution enable

ATTENTION
When configuring flow distribution over MLT, Nortel recommends that you choose
source and group masks that result in the most even traffic distribution over the
multilink trunk links. For example, if you find that in the network group addressing
that group addresses change incrementally, while few sources always send to
different groups, you must use a source mask of 0.0.0.0 and a group mask of
255.255.255.255. In most cases, this provides a sequential distribution of traffic
on the links of the multilink trunk.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
64 IP Multicast concepts

Traffic redistribution
The overall goal of traffic redistribution is to achieve a distribution of the
streams on the multilink trunk links in the event of a MLT configuration
change. For example, ports might be added or deleted. By default,
redistribution is disabled. When a link is added or removed from the
multilink trunk, the active streams continue flowing on their original links
if redistribution is disabled.

If redistribution is enabled, however, the active streams are redistributed

according to the distribution algorithm on the links of the multilink trunk.
Note that this can cause minor traffic interruptions. To minimize the effect of
redistribution of multicast traffic on the multilink trunks, the implementation
does not move the streams to the appropriate links all at once. Instead, it
redistributes a few streams at every time tick of the system.

To that end, when an multilink trunk port becomes inactive and redistribution
is disabled, only the affected streams are redistributed on the remaining
active ports. If redistribution is enabled, all the streams are redistributed
on the multilink trunk ports based on the assignment provided by the
distribution algorithm. For more information, see the previous section,
"Distribution algorithm" (page 62).

When a new port becomes active in a multilink trunk and redistribution is

disabled, existing streams remain on their original links. If you need to
redistribute the streams dynamically to split the load on all the links of the
multilink trunk, you must enable redistribution. This results in a few streams
being redistributed every time tick of the system.

Configuring multicast MLT distribution

You can configure multicast flow distribution over MLT using either the
command line interface (CLI), or Device Manager (DM). Using the CLI,
you enable multicast flow distribution over MLT globally by entering the
following command:
config sys mcast-mlt-distribution enable
You can enable multicast distribution per multilink trunk by entering:
config mlt <mltid> mcast-distribution enable
For a more detailed description of these commands, see "Configuring
multicast flow distribution over MLT using the CLI" (page 455).
Using Device Manager, you can enable multicast flow distribution over MLT
globally by:

Step Action

1 Selecting Edit > Chassis > Mcast MLT Distribution .

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Multicast MAC filtering 65

2 You then enable multicast distribution per multilink trunk by selecting

VLAN > MLT > McastDistribution Enable.

—End—

For a more detailed description of these commands, see "Enabling multicast

flow distribution per multilink trunk" (page 214).

For more information about MLT, see Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree,
and Link Aggregation (NN46205-506).

Multicast MAC filtering

Some network applications rely on a Layer 2 multicast MAC mechanism to
send a frame to multiple hosts for processing. For example, mirroring is one
such application. With release 3.3 of the Ethernet Routing Switch 8600
software, you can direct MAC multicast flooding to a specific set of ports
using the multicast MAC filtering feature.

ATTENTION
You can configure multicast MAC filtering only for local addresses to a switch. You
cannot use this feature to route traffic between switches (for example, configure it
to forward for interfaces that are not local).

Basically, the multicast MAC is defined as any MAC address where the
least significant bit of the most significant byte is set to 1. The multicast
MAC filtering feature is available for Layer 2. Because it is also effective for
IP routed traffic, however, Layer 3 functionality is available as well. (This
filtering does not apply to BPDUs.)

In Layer 2, a multicast MAC address generally floods to all ports in the

VLAN. With multicast MAC filtering, you can now define a separate flooding
domain for a given multicast MAC address, which is a subset of the ports on
a VLAN. The maximum number of multicast MAC addresses that you can
configure is 100. However, depending upon the overall configuration of your
switch you can be limited to fewer addresses.

In Layer 3, you must configure an ARP entry for routed traffic that maps the
unicast IP to the multicast MAC address and lists the ports where data
destined for that IP/multicast MAC must be delivered.

To perform multicast MAC filtering, create the VLAN normally and then
manually define a flooding domain (that is, MAC address and port list)
for a specific multicast address. When specifying the multicast MAC

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
66 IP Multicast concepts

flooding domain, you must indicate the ports or multilink trunks that must be
considered for multicast traffic. The actual flooding is based on whether the
specified ports are active members in the VLAN.

Configuration example
You can configure multicast MAC filtering on a VLAN through either the CLI
or Device Manager (DM). To configure multicast MAC filtering for Layer
2, use the config vlan static-mcastmac command. For Layer 3
configuration, use the config ip arp static-mcastmac command.

For a more detailed description of these commands, see "Configuring

multicast MAC filtering using the CLI" (page 461).

To configure multicast MAC filtering for Layer 2 using Device Manager:

Select VLANs > Bridge > Multicast.

To configure multicast MAC filtering for Layer 3 using the DM:

Choose IP > IP > Multicast ARP.

For a more detailed description of these commands, see "Configuring Layer

3 multicast MAC filtering" (page 222).

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 67

Configuring IGMP using Device

Manager
Hosts use IGMP to report their multicast group memberships to neighboring
multicast routers. For more information about IGMP concepts and
terminology, see "IP Multicast concepts" (page 15).
This section describes the following topics:
• "Configuration prerequisites and notes" (page 67)
• "Configuring IGMP parameters on a brouter port" (page 68)
• "Configuring fast leave mode" (page 71)
• "Configuring IGMP parameters on a VLAN" (page 72)
• "Enabling IGMP snooping on a VLAN" (page 75)
• "Viewing IGMP cache information" (page 76)
• "Viewing and editing the IGMP interface table" (page 76)
• "Viewing multicast router discovery information" (page 79)
• "Viewing IGMP snooping information" (page 80)
• "Viewing IGMP group information" (page 82)
• "Creating and viewing IGMP static information" (page 83)
• "Configuring multicast access control" (page 85)
• "Configuring IGMP sender entries" (page 90)
• "Configuring the SSM range and global parameters" (page 91)
• "Configuring the SSM channel table" (page 94)
• "Configuring multicast stream limitation" (page 96)
• "Showing multicast group trace for IGMP snooping" (page 104)

Configuration prerequisites and notes

Before you can configure IGMP, you must configure an IP interface. For
information, see Configuring IP Routing Operations (NN46205-500).

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
68 Configuring IGMP using Device Manager

Step Action

1 Configure IGMP on a L2 interface by enabling IGMP snooping,

or
Configure IGMP on a L3 interface by enabling multicast routing, for
example, DVMRP, PIM-SM, or PIM-SSM.
• To enable IGMP snooping, see "Enabling IGMP snooping on a
VLAN" (page 75).
• To enable DVMRP or PIM-SM on an IP interface, first enable
them globally. (PIM-SSM is a global configuration; you cannot
enable it per interface.)
— To enable DVMRP globally, see "Enabling DVMRP globally"
(page 108).
— To enable PIM-SM globally, see "Enabling PIM-SM globally"
(page 150).
— To enable PIM-SSM globally, see "Enabling Source Specific
Multicast globally" (page 170).

ATTENTION
To drop IGMPv2 control packets that do not have the router alert
option set, click IP > IGMP and open the Interface tab. To enable,
change the RouterAlertEnable box.

—End—

• "Configuring IGMP parameters on a brouter port" (page 68)

• "Configuring fast leave mode" (page 71)
• "Configuring IGMP parameters on a VLAN" (page 72)
• "Internet Group Management Protocol" (page 20)

Configuring IGMP parameters on a brouter port

For IGMP parameters to take effect, globally enable either DVMRP or PIM
on the particular interface.
To configure IGMP parameters on a brouter port:

Step Action

1 On the Device Manager, select a port.

2 From the Device Manager menu bar, choose Edit > Port > IP.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring IGMP parameters on a brouter port 69

The Port dialog box appears with the IP Address tab displayed
Figure 15 "Port dialog box, IP Address tab" (page 69).
Figure 15
Port dialog box, IP Address tab

3 Click the IGMP tab.

The IGMP tab appears (Figure 16 "Port dialog box, IGMP tab" (page
69)).
Figure 16
Port dialog box, IGMP tab

For more information, see Table 3 "IGMP tab fields" (page 70).

—End—

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
70 Configuring IGMP using Device Manager

Table 3
IGMP tab fields
Field Description
QueryInterval The frequency (in seconds) where the IGMP host query
packets are transmitted on the interface. The range is from 1 to
65535, and the default is 125.
QueryMaxResponseTime
The maximum response time (in tenths of a second)
advertised in IGMPv2 general queries on this interface.
This value is not configurable for IGMPv1.
Smaller values allow a router to prune groups faster. The
range is from 0 to 255, and the default is 100 tenths of a
seconds (equal to 10 seconds).

ATTENTION
This value must be less than the QueryInterval.

Robustness This parameter allows tuning for the expected packet loss of a
network. This value is equal to the number of expected query
packet losses per serial query interval, plus 1. If a network is
expected to lose query packets, the robustness value must
be increased.
The range is from 2 to 255, and the default is 2. The default
value of 2 means that one query per query interval can be
dropped without the querier aging out.
LastMembQueryIntvl The maximum response time (in 1/10 seconds) that is inserted
into group-specific queries sent in response to leave group
messages. It is also the time between group-specific query
messages. This value is not configurable for IGMPv1.
Decreasing the value reduces the time to detect the loss of
the last member of a group. The range is from 0 to 255, and
the default is 10 tenths of a second. Nortel recommends
configuring this parameter to values higher than 3. If a fast
leave process is not required, Nortel recommends values
above 10. (The value 3 is equal to 0.3 of a second, and 10
is equal to 1.0 second.)
Version The version of IGMP (1, 2 or 3) that you want to configure on
this interface. For IGMP to function correctly, all routers on a
LAN must use the same version. The default is version 2.
FastLeaveEnable Enables fast leave on the interface.
StreamLimitEnable Enables or disables stream limitation on this port.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring fast leave mode 71

Field Description
Maximum Number Of Stream Sets the maximum number of streams allowed on this port.
The range is from 0 to 65535, and the default is 4.
Current Number Of Stream Displays the current number of streams. This is a read-only
value.

Configuring fast leave mode

Fast leave mode provides one command that controls all IGMP fast leave
enabled interfaces. Using this global parameter, you can alter the leave
processing on fast leave enabled IGMPv2, IGMPv3, and IGMP snoop
interfaces.

ATTENTION
Fast leave mode applies only to fast leave enabled IGMP interfaces. It does
not apply to IGAP interfaces.

To configure the fast leave mode:

Step Action

1 From the Device Manager menu bar, choose IP > IGMP.

The IGMP dialog box appears with the Cache tab displayed (Figure
17 "IGMP dialog box, Cache tab" (page 71)).
Figure 17
IGMP dialog box, Cache tab

2 Click the Global tab.

The Global tab appears (Figure 18 "IGMP dialog box, Global tab"
(page 72)).

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
72 Configuring IGMP using Device Manager

Figure 18
IGMP dialog box, Global tab

3 Click on the mode you want, if not already selected.

4 Click Apply.
For more information, see Table 4 "Global tab fields" (page 72).

—End—

Table 4
Global tab fields
Field Description
multipleUser Removes from the group only the IGMP member who sent the
Leave message. Traffic is not stopped if there are other receivers
on the interface port. This is the default.
oneUser Removes all group members on a fast leave enabled interface
port upon receiving the first Leave message from a member. This
behavior is the same as the conventional fast leave process.

Configuring IGMP parameters on a VLAN

For IGMP parameters to take effect, globally enable either DVMRP or
PIM-SM on the particular interface.
To configure IGMP on a VLAN:

Step Action

1 From the Device Manager menu bar, choose VLAN > VLANs.
The VLAN dialog box appears, with the Basic tab displayed.

2 Select a VLAN.

3 Click IP.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring IGMP parameters on a VLAN 73

The IP, VLAN dialog box appears with the IP Address tab displayed.

4 Select IGMP.
The IGMP tab appears (Figure 19 "IP, VLAN dialog box, IGMP tab"
(page 73)).
Figure 19
IP, VLAN dialog box, IGMP tab

For more information, see Table 5 "IGMP tab fields" (page 74).

—End—

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
74 Configuring IGMP using Device Manager

Table 5
IGMP tab fields
Field Description
QueryInterval The frequency (in seconds) in which the IGMP host query
packets are transmitted on the interface. The range is from 1 to
65535, and the default is 125.
QueryMaxResponseTime
The maximum response time (in tenths of a second)
advertised in IGMPv2 general queries on this interface.
This value is not configurable for IGMPv1.
Smaller values allow a router to prune groups faster. The
range is from 0 to 255, and the default is 100 tenths of a
second (equal to 10 seconds.)

ATTENTION
This value must be less than the QueryInterval.

Robustness This parameter allows tuning for the expected packet loss of a
network. This value is equal to the number of expected query
packet losses per serial query interval, plus 1. If a network is
expected to lose query packets, the robustness value must
be increased.
The range is from 2 to 255, and the default is 2. The default
value of 2 means that one query per query interval can be
dropped without the querier aging out.
LastMembQueryIntvl The maximum response time (in tenths of a second) that is
inserted into group-specific queries sent in response to leave
group messages. It is also the time between group-specific
query messages. This value is not configurable for IGMPv1.
Decreasing the value reduces the time to detect the loss of
the last member of a group. The range is from 0 to 255, and
the default is 10 tenths of a second. Nortel recommends
configuring this parameter to values higher than 3. If a fast
leave process is not required, Nortel recommends values
above 10. (The value 3 is equal to 0.3 of a second, and 10
is equal to 1.0 second.)
SnoopEnable Enables snoop.
SsmSnoopEnable Enables or disables support for PIM source-specific multicast
(SSM) on the snooping interface.
ProxySnoopEnable Enables proxy snoop.
IgapEnable Enables or disables IGAP on this interface.
AccntEnable Enables or disables IGAP accounting on this interface.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Enabling IGMP snooping on a VLAN 75

Field Description
AuthEnable Enables or disables IGAP authentication on this interface.
Version The version of IGMP (1, 2, or 3) that you want to configure on
this interface. For IGMP to function correctly, all routers on a
LAN must use the same version. The default is version 2.
FastLeaveEnable Enables fast leave on the interface.
StreamLimitEnable Enables or disables stream limitation on this VLAN.
Maximum Number Of Stream Sets the maximum number of streams allowed on this VLAN.
The range is from 0 to 65535, and the default is 4.
Current Number Of Stream Displays the current number of streams. This is a read-only
value.
FastLeavePortMembers The set of ports that are enabled for fast leave.
SnoopMRouterPorts The set of ports in this interface that provide connectivity to
an IP Multicast router.

Enabling IGMP snooping on a VLAN

The Ethernet Routing Switch 8600 provides IP Multicast capability when
used as a switch. As a switch, it supports Internet Group Management
Protocols IGMPv1, IGMPv2, and IGMPv3 to prune group membership per
port within a VLAN by reporting multicast group memberships to neighbor
multicast routers. This feature is called IGMP snooping.

You can optimize the multicast data flow for a group within a VLAN to only
those that are members of the group using IGMP snooping. The switch
listens to group reports from each port and builds a database of multicast
group members per port. It suppresses the reports heard by not forwarding
them to other hosts, forcing the members to continuously send their own
reports. The switch relays group membership from the hosts to the multicast
routers. It also forwards queries from multicast routers to all port members
of the VLAN. Furthermore, it multicasts data only to the participating group
members and to the multicast routers within the VLAN.

Enabling IGMP snooping on a VLAN

To enable IGMP snooping:

Step Action

1 From the Device Manager menu bar, choose VLAN > VLANs.
The VLAN dialog box appears with the Basic tab displayed.

2 Select a VLAN.

3 Click IP.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
76 Configuring IGMP using Device Manager

The IP, VLAN dialog box appears with the IP Address tab displayed.

4 Click IGMP.
The IGMP tab appears (Figure 19 "IP, VLAN dialog box, IGMP tab"
(page 73)).
5 Click SnoopEnable.

6 Click ProxySnoopEnable.
7 In the SteamLimtEnable box, select enable.

8 Click Apply.

—End—

Viewing IGMP cache information

To view IGMP cache information:

From the Device Manager menu bar, choose IP > IGMP.

The IGMP dialog box appears with the Cache tab displayed [see Figure 20
"IGMP dialog box, Cache tab" (page 76)].

Figure 20
IGMP dialog box, Cache tab

The following table describes the Cache tab fields.

Viewing and editing the IGMP interface table

Use the Interface tab to view or edit the IGMP interface table. When a
particular interface does not have an IP address, it does not appear in the
IGMP table. When an interface has an IP address, and DVMRP or PIM-SM
is not enabled, it is shown as "notInService" in the Status field.
To view or edit the IGMP interface table:

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Viewing and editing the IGMP interface table 77

Step Action

1 From the Device Manager menu bar, choose IP > IGMP.

The IGMP dialog box appears with the Cache tab displayed.

2 Click the Interface tab.

The Interface tab appears Figure 21 "IGMP dialog box, Interface
tab" (page 77).
Figure 21
IGMP dialog box, Interface tab

For more information, see Table 6 "Interface tab fields" (page 77).

—End—

Table 6
Interface tab fields
Field Description
IfIndex The interface where IGMP is enabled.
QueryInterval The frequency (in seconds) in which the IGMP host query
packets are transmitted on the interface. The range is from 1 to
65535, and the default is 125.
Status The IGMP row status. When an interface has an IP address
and DVMRP or PIM-SM is enabled, status is shown as active.
Otherwise, it is shown as notInService.
Version The version of IGMP (1, 2, or 3) that you want to configure on
this interface. For IGMP to function correctly, all routers on a
LAN must use the same version. The default is version 2.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
78 Configuring IGMP using Device Manager

Field Description
OperVersion The version of IGMP currently running on this interface.
Querier The address of the IGMP querier on the IP subnet to which
this interface is attached.
QueryMaxResponseTime
The maximum response time (in tenths of a second)
advertised in IGMPv2 general queries on this interface.
This value is not configurable for IGMPv1.
Smaller values allow a router to prune groups faster. The
range is from 0 to 255, and the default is 100 tenths of a
second (equal to 10 seconds.)

ATTENTION
This value must be less than the QueryInterval.

WrongVersionQueries The number of queries received with an IGMP version that does
not match the interface.All routers on a LAN be must configured
to run the same version of IGMP. If any queries are received
with the wrong version, it indicates a version mismatch.
Joins The number of times a group membership has been added
on this interface; that is, the number of times an entry for this
interface has been added to the cache table. This number
gives an indication of the amount of IGMP activity over time.
Robustness This parameter allows tuning for the expected packet loss of a
network. This value is equal to the number of expected query
packet losses per serial query interval, plus 1. If a network is
expected to lose query packets, the robustness value must
be increased.
The range is from 2 to 255, and the default is 2. The default
value of 2 means that one query per query interval can be
dropped without the querier aging out.
LastMembQueryIntvl The maximum response time (in tenths of a second) that is
inserted into group-specific queries sent in response to leave
group messages. It is also the time between group-specific
query messages. This value is not configurable for IGMPv1.
Decreasing the value reduces the time to detect the loss of the
last member of a group. The range is from 0 to 255, and the
default is 10 tenths of seconds. Nortel recommends configuring
this parameter to values higher than 3. If a fast leave process is
not required, Nortel recommends values above 10. (The value
3 is equal to 0.3 of a second, and 10 is equal to 1.0 second.)
OtherQuerierPresent Timeout The length of time that must pass before a multicast router
decides that there is no other router that must be the querier. If
the local router is the querier, the value is 0.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Viewing multicast router discovery information 79

Field Description
FlushAction • none
• flushGrpMem
• flushMrouter
• flushSender
RouterAlertEnable
When enabled, this parameter instructs the router to
process packets not directly addressed to it.

ATTENTION
To maximize your network performance, Nortel
recommends that you set this parameter according to the
version of IGMP currently in use.

• IGMPv1—Disable
• IGMPv2—Enable
• IGMPv3—Enable

SsmSnoopEnable Enables SSM snooping.

Viewing multicast router discovery information

To view multicast router discovery information:

Step Action

1 From the Device Manager menu bar, choose IP > IGMP.

The IGMP dialog box appears with the Cache tab displayed.
2 Click the Multicast Router Discovery tab.
The Multicast Router Discovery tab appears Figure 22 "IGMP dialog
box, Multicast Router Discovery tab" (page 79).
Figure 22
IGMP dialog box, Multicast Router Discovery tab

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
80 Configuring IGMP using Device Manager

For more information, see Table 7 "Multicast Router Discovery tab

fields" (page 80).

—End—

Table 7
Multicast Router Discovery tab fields
Field Description
Interface The interface where IGMP is enabled.
MrdiscEnable Enables or disables the router interface to listen for multicast
router discovery messages to determine where to send
multicast source data and IGMPv2 reports. Whenever snooping
is enabled, multicast router discovery is automatically enabled.
DiscoveredRouterPorts List of ports that are discovered by IGMP Multicast router
discovery (MRDISC) protocol.

ATTENTION
The MRDISC protocol is not supported on brouter ports.

MaxAdvertiseInterval The maximum time allowed between sending router

advertisements from the interface, in seconds. The range is
between 2 and 180 seconds. Default is 20 seconds.
MinAdvertiseInterval The minimum time allowed between sending unsolicited router
advertisements from the interface, in seconds. Must be more
than 3 seconds but no greater than the value assigned to the
MaxAdvertiseInterval value.
MaxInitialAdvertiseInterval Used to set the maximum number (in seconds) of multicast
advertisement intervals that can be configured on the switch.
MaxInitialAdvertisements Used to set the maximum number of initial multicast
advertisements that can be configured on the switch.
NeighborDeadInterval The time interval (in seconds) before the router interface drops
traffic when a user leaves the multicast group.

Viewing IGMP snooping information

To view information about IGMP snooping:

Step Action

1 From the Device Manager menu bar, choose IP > IGMP.

The IGMP dialog box appears with the Cache tab displayed.

2 Click the Snoop tab.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Viewing IGMP snooping information 81

The Snoop tab appears Figure 23 "IGMP dialog box, Snoop tab"
(page 81).
Figure 23
IGMP dialog box, Snoop tab

For more information, see Table 8 "Snoop tab fields" (page 81).

—End—

Table 8
Snoop tab fields
Field Description
IInterface VLAN ID for the VLAN.
SnoopEnable Enables (true) or disables (false) IGMP snooping. IGMP
snooping works only when a multicast router exists in the
VLAN.
SsmSnoopEnable Enables SSM Snooping.
ProxySnoopEnable Indicates whether or not the IGMP report proxy feature is
enabled. When this feature is enabled, reports are forwarded
from hosts to the multicast router once per group per query
interval, or when there is new group information. When
this feature is disabled, all reports from different hosts are
forwarded to multicast routers, and more than one group report
can be forwarded for the same multicast group per query
interval. The default is enabled.
FastLeaveEnable Enable or disable FastLeave for this port.
FastLeavePortMembers Set of ports that are enabled for FastLeave.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
82 Configuring IGMP using Device Manager

Field Description
SnoopMRouterPorts
Ports that were configured as multicast router ports. Such
ports are attached to a multicast router, so the multicast
data and group reports are forwarded to the router.

ATTENTION
Configure this field only when there are multiple multicast
routers that are not attached to one another, but are
attached to the VLAN (technically an invalid configuration).
If multicast routers have a route between them (the valid
configuration) and this field is configured, a multicast loop
forms.

SnoopActiveMRouter Ports Active multicast router ports are ports directly attached to a
multicast router. These ports include the Querier port and
all ports in the forwarding state that were configured by the
user as well as those that were dynamically learned through
receiving queries.
SnoopMRouterExpiration Time remaining before the multicast router is aged out. If the
switch does not receive any queries before this time expires,
it flushes out all group memberships known to the VLAN. The
Query Max Response Interval (obtained from the queries
received) is used as the timer resolution.

Viewing IGMP group information

To view information about IGMP groups:

Step Action

1 From the Device Manager menu bar, choose IP > IGMP.

The IGMP dialog box appears with the Cache tab displayed.

2 Click the Groups tab.

The Groups tab appears Figure 24 "IGMP dialog box, Groups tab"
(page 82).
Figure 24
IGMP dialog box, Groups tab

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Creating and viewing IGMP static information 83

For more information, see Table 9 "Groups tab fields" (page 83).

—End—

Table 9
Groups tab fields
Field Description
IpAddress Multicast group Address (Class D) that members can join. A group address
can be the same for many incoming ports.
IfIndex Unique value that identifies a physical interface or a logical interface (VLAN),
which receives Group reports from various sources.
InPort Unique value to identify a brouter interface or a logical interface (VLAN) that
receives Group reports from various members.
Members IP address of a member that issues a group report for this group.
Expiration Time left before the group report expires on this port. This variable is updated
upon receiving a group report.

Creating and viewing IGMP static information

Some sources do not join a multicast group before transmitting a multicast
stream. When this is the case and if there are no other group members
joined in the VLAN, the data is flooded to all port members of the VLAN. You
can create a static entry to forward multicast data streams to a particular set
of ports within the VLAN. When the entry is created, multicast data streams
are always forwarded to the multicast router within the VLAN, in addition to
the ports configured for this static entry.

ATTENTION
IGMP snoop can guarantee delivery only of local multicast data, but cannot
guarantee delivery of remote multicast data. You cannot configure a port as a
static receiver in an IGMP snoop-enabled VLAN that does not contain at least one
dynamic receiver port and have multicast data forwarded.

To add members to the IGMP snoop group:

Step Action

1 From the Device Manager menu bar, choose IP > IGMP.

The IGMP dialog box appears with the Cache tab displayed.

2 Click the Static tab.

The Static tab appears (Figure 25 "IGMP, static tab" (page 84)).

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
84 Configuring IGMP using Device Manager

Figure 25
IGMP, static tab

3 In the Static tab, click Insert.

The IGMP, Insert Static dialog box appears (Figure 26 "IGMP, Insert
Static dialog box" (page 84)).
Figure 26
IGMP, Insert Static dialog box

4 Enter the appropriate data.

5 Click Insert.
For more information, see Table 10 "Insert Static fields" (page 84).

—End—

Table 10
Insert Static fields
Field Description
IfIndex The interface where the IGMP entry is enabled.
GrpAddr Enter the multicast group address of the multicast stream.
Within the indicated valid range (224.0.1.0 to 239.255.255.255), the
following are invalid addresses: 244.0.0.x and the corresponding 31
multicast addresses that map to the IP MAC addresses. If you try to
select them, you receive an invalid message.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring multicast access control 85

Field Description
MemberPorts The ports to which you want to redirect the multicast stream for this
multicast group. The ports must be member ports of the VLAN.
NotAllowedToJoin The ports that do not receive the multicast stream for this multicast group.

Configuring multicast access control

Before you can configure multicast access control, first configure one or
more prefix lists. Prefix lists are lists of routes that can be applied to one
or more route policies. They contain a set of contiguous or noncontiguous
routes. Prefix lists are referenced by name from within the routing policies.
For more information about prefix lists, see Configuring IP Routing
Operations (NN46205-500).
This section contains the following topics:
• "Configuring a prefix list" (page 85)
• "Configuring multicast access control for an interface" (page 87)

Configuring a prefix list

To set up a route policy prefix list:

Step Action

1 From the Device Manager menu bar, choose IP > Policy.

The Policy dialog box appears with the Prefix List tab displayed
Figure 27 "Policy dialog box, Prefix List tab" (page 85).
Figure 27
Policy dialog box, Prefix List tab

2 Click Insert.
The Policy, Insert Prefix List dialog box appears Figure 28 "Policy,
Insert Prefix List dialog box" (page 86).

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
86 Configuring IGMP using Device Manager

Figure 28
Policy, Insert Prefix List dialog box

3 Enter the appropriate data.

4 Click Insert.
For more information, see Table 11 "Policy, Insert Prefix List dialog
box fields" (page 86)

—End—

Table 11
Policy, Insert Prefix List dialog box fields
Field Description
ID The list identifier.
Prefix The IP address.
PrefixMaskLen
The specified length of the prefix mask.

ATTENTION
You must enter the full 32-bit mask in order to exact a full match of a
specific IP address (for example, when creating a policy to match
on next-hop).

Name The name command is used to name a specified prefix list during the
creation process or to rename the specified prefix list. The name length
can be from 1 to 64 characters.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring multicast access control 87

Field Description
MaskLenFrom The lower boundary of the mask length. The default is the mask length.
Lower boundary and higher boundary mask lengths together can define
a range of networks.
MaskLenUpto The higher boundary mask length. The default is the mask length. Lower
boundary and higher boundary mask lengths together can define a range
of networks.

Configuring multicast access control for an interface

To configure multicast access control for a selected IGMP interface or
a VLAN:

Step Action

1 From the Device Manager menu bar, choose IP > IGMP.

The IGMP dialog box appears with the Cache tab displayed.

2 Click the Access Control tab.

The Access Control tab appears Figure 29 "IGMP dialog box,
Access Control tab" (page 87).
Figure 29
IGMP dialog box, Access Control tab

3 Click Insert.
The IGMP, Insert Access Control dialog box appears (Figure 30
"IGMP, Insert Access Control dialog box" (page 88)).

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
88 Configuring IGMP using Device Manager

Figure 30
IGMP, Insert Access Control dialog box

4 If you are configuring multicast access control for an IGMP interface,

follow steps a and b. If you are configuring multicast access control
for a VLAN, go to Step 5.
a. Enter the number of the slot/port that you want to add as a
member or click on the ellipsis (...) and select one from the
graphic display. Click the Port ellipsis button (Port...) next to
IfIndex.
The IGMP New Access IfIndex tab appears Figure 31
"IgmpNewAccessIfIndex dialog box" (page 88).
Figure 31
IgmpNewAccessIfIndex dialog box

b. Select the interface where the IGMP entry is enabled

c. Click Ok.
5 To configure multicast access control for a VLAN:
a. Enter the number of the VLAN to which you want to add a
member or click the VLAN ellipsis button (VLAN...).
The IfIndex tab appears Figure 32 "IGMP, Insert IfIndex dialog
box with VLAN ID" (page 89).

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring multicast access control 89

Figure 32
IGMP, Insert IfIndex dialog box with VLAN ID

b. Select a VLAN.
c. Click Ok.
6 Click the ellipsis button (...) next to PrefixListId.

7 Select a prefix list ID/name.

8 Enter the host address and host mask.

9 Select the action mode that you want for the specified host.
10 Click Insert.

11 Click Close.
For more information, see Table 12 "Access Control tab fields" (page
89).

—End—

Table 12
Access Control tab fields
Field Description
IfIndex The interface where the IGMP entry is enabled.
PrefixListId A numeric string that identifies the prefix list. "Configuring a
prefix list" (page 85).
HostAddr The IP address of the host. See "Specifying host addresses
and masks" (page 29).
HostMask The subnet mask used to determine the host or hosts covered
by this configuration. You can use the host subnet mask to
restrict access to a portion of the network for the host. See
"Specifying host addresses and masks" (page 29).

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
90 Configuring IGMP using Device Manager

Field Description
PrefixListName The name of the prefix list. "Configuring a prefix list" (page 85).
ActionMode Used to specify whether the host identified by HostAddr must
be:
• Denied IP Multicast transmitted traffic (deny-tx).
• Denied IP Multicast received traffic (deny-rx).
• Denied both IP Multicast transmitted and received traffic
(deny-both).
• Allowed IP Multicast transmitted traffic (allow-only-tx).
• Allowed IP Multicast received traffic (allow-only-rx).
• Allowed both IP Multicast transmitted and received traffic
(allow-only-both).

Configuring IGMP sender entries

To configure IGMP sender entries:

Step Action

1 From the Device Manager menu bar, choose IP > IGMP.

The IGMP dialog box appears with the Cache tab displayed.

2 Click the Sender tab.

The Sender tab appears Figure 33 "IGMP dialog box, Sender tab"
(page 90).
Figure 33
IGMP dialog box, Sender tab

For more information, see Table 13 "Sender tab fields" (page 91).

—End—

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring the SSM range and global parameters 91

Table 13
Sender tab fields
Field Description
GrpAddr Enter the Multicast group address of the multicast stream.
Within the indicated valid range (224.0.1.0 to 239.255.255.255),
the following are invalid addresses: 244.0.0.x and the
corresponding 31 multicast addresses that map to the IP MAC
addresses. If you try to select them, you receive an invalid
message.
IfIndex The interface where the IGMP entry is enabled.
MemberAddr The IP address of a host.
Action Used to flush an entry or a group.
TPort Identifies the T Port.
State Indicates whether or not a sender exists because of an IGMP
access filter. The options are: filtered and not filtered.

Configuring the SSM range and global parameters

You extend the default SSM range of 232/8 to include any IP Multicast
address using the SSM range parameter. You can configure existing
applications without having to change their group configurations.
The other global parameters in this dialog box enable the IGMPv3 dynamic
learning feature and set the admin state for all the entries in the SSM
channel table.
To configure the SSM range and other global parameters:

Step Action

1 From the Device Manager menu bar, choose IP > IGMP.

The IGMP dialog box appears with the Cache tab displayed.

2 Click the SsmGlobal tab.

The SsmGlobal tab appears Figure 34 "IGMP dialog box, SsmGlobal
tab" (page 92).

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
92 Configuring IGMP using Device Manager

Figure 34
IGMP dialog box, SsmGlobal tab

For more information, see Table 14 "SsmGlobal tab fields" (page 92).

—End—

Table 14
SsmGlobal tab fields
Field Description
DynamicLearning Enables the dynamic learning of SSM channel (S,G) pairs from IGMPv3
reports. As new SSM channels are learned, they appear in the SSM
channel table; see "Configuring the SSM channel table" (page 94) .
AdminAction Sets the admin state, which determines whether or not the switch uses
the table entries:
• none (default)—Does not set the admin state globally so that you can
set it for individual SSM channel table entries.
• enableAll—Globally activates all the static entries in the SSM channel
table. This setting does not affect the dynamically learned entries.
• disableAll—Globally inactivates all the static entries in the SSM
channel table. This setting does not affect the dynamically learned
entries.
For information about how this setting affects the switch, see
"Configuring the SSM channel table" (page 94)

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring the SSM range and global parameters 93

Field Description
RangeGroup
Sets the IP Multicast group address. The lowest group address
is 224.0.1.0 and the highest is 239.255.255.255. The default is
232.0.0.0.

ATTENTION
Before changing this setting, see "Changing the SSM range group"
(page 93) .

RangeMask Sets the address mask of the multicast group. The default is 255.0.0.0.

Changing the SSM range group

ATTENTION
This procedure reinitializes PIM and temporarily stops all PIM traffic. For those
multicast groups out of SSM range (for example, under PIM-SM behavior), this
procedures also causes a RP relearn delay of up to 60 seconds. This delay can
be longer if the BSR is local.

To change the SSM range group address, perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Disable PIM.
If you forget to disable PIM, the following error message appears.

2 Select the SsmChannel tab and delete all of the entries in the SSM
channel table.
If you forget to delete the SSM channels, the following error message
appears.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
94 Configuring IGMP using Device Manager

3 Enter the new IP Multicast group address in the RangeGroup box.

4 Click Apply.
The following message appears to warn you that every static mroute
entry that falls into the new SSM range is deleted.

5 Click Yes.

6 Enable PIM.

—End—

Configuring the SSM channel table

The SSM channel table consists of entries that map groups to their sending
source. SSM channels cannot conflict with static source groups and vice
versa. When you configure an SSM channel or a static source group, the
switch performs a consistency check to make sure there are no conflicts.
You cannot map one group (G) to different sources for both a static source
group and a SSM channel.
The consistency check mentioned above applies to all SSM channel entries,
even if they are disabled. Disabling an entry means that it becomes inactive.
It does not delete the entry, and you can reenable it at any time.
When you disable an SSM channel, the Ethernet Routing Switch 8600 stops
any multicast traffic from the specified source to the specified group. If
desired, you can use this static setting as a security feature to block traffic
from a certain source to a specific group.
For more information, see "Configuring multicast static source groups"
(page 197).
To create a new, or modify an existing, SSM channel table entry:

Step Action

1 From the Device Manager menu bar, choose IP > IGMP.

The IGMP dialog box appears with the Cache tab displayed.
2 Click the SsmChannel tab.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring the SSM channel table 95

The SsmChannel tab appears Figure 35 "IGMP dialog box,

SsmChannel tab" (page 95).
Figure 35
IGMP dialog box, SsmChannel tab

3 Click Insert.
The IGMP, Insert SsmChannel dialog box appears Figure 36 "IGMP,
Insert SsmChannel dialog box" (page 95).
Figure 36
IGMP, Insert SsmChannel dialog box

4 Enter the IP address for the multicast group and source.

5 Click Insert.
The SsmChannel tab appears with the entry you just created in the
table. You can change the default status of a SSM channel from
enable to disable by clicking in the AdminState field.
For more information, see Table 15 "SsmChannel tab fields" (page
96).

—End—

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
96 Configuring IGMP using Device Manager

Table 15
SsmChannel tab fields
Field Description
IpMulticastGrp Any IP Multicast address that is within the SSM range.
IpSource The IP address of the source that is sending traffic to the group.
LearningMode Displays whether the entry is statically configured (Static) or
dynamically-learned from IGMPv3 (Dynamic). This a read-only
field.
Activity Displays the current activity of the selected (S,G) entry. True
indicates that traffic is flowing to the switch, otherwise, it must
display false. This a read-only field for the Ethernet Routing
Switch 8600.
AdminState The admin state for the selected static entry. This state
determines whether or not the switch uses the static entries.
Set this field to enable (default) to use the entry or disable
to save for future use.

Configuring multicast stream limitation

Multicast stream limitation enables providers to limit the number of multicast
groups that can join a VLAN. By limiting the number of concurrent multicast
streams, providers can protect the bandwidth on a specific interface and
control access to multicast streams.
The maximum number of streams can be set independently. After the
stream limit is met, any additional join reports for new streams are dropped.
You can control the overall bandwidth usage in addition to restricting users
from receiving more than a set limit of multicast streams on a given interface.
This section includes the following topics:
• "Configuring multicast stream limitation on an interface" (page 96)
• "Configuring multicast stream limitation members" (page 97)
• "Configuring multicast stream limitation on an Ethernet port" (page 100)
• "Configuring multicast stream limitation on a VLAN" (page 102)

Configuring multicast stream limitation on an interface

To configure stream limitation on a specific interface:

Step Action

1 From the Device Manager menu bar, choose IP > IGMP.

The IGMP dialog box appears with the Cache tab displayed.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring multicast stream limitation 97

2 Click the StreamLimit tab.

The StreamLimit tab appears and displays a list of interfaces Figure
37 "IGMP dialog box, StreamLimit tab" (page 97).
To change the status of an interface, double-click on the
StreamLimitEnable field for the selected interface and select
enable or disable from the menu. If the interface is enabled, you
can edit the Maximum Number of Stream field.
Figure 37
IGMP dialog box, StreamLimit tab

For more information, see Table 16 "StreamLimit tab fields" (page

97).

—End—

Table 16
StreamLimit tab fields
Field Description
Interface Displays the slot/port number or VLAN ID for this interface.
Stream Limit Enable Enables or disables stream limitation on this interface.
Maximum Number Of Stream Sets the maximum number of streams allowed on this interface.
The range is from 0 to 65535, and the default is 4.
Current Number Of Stream Displays the current number of streams received on this
interface. This is a read-only value.

Configuring multicast stream limitation members

To configure multicast stream limitation on ports of the specified interface:

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
98 Configuring IGMP using Device Manager

Step Action

1 From the Device Manager menu bar, choose IP > IGMP.

The IGMP dialog box appears with the Cache tab displayed.

2 Click the StreamLimit Members tab.

The StreamLimit Members tab appears Figure 38 "IGMP dialog box,
StreamLimit Members tab" (page 98).
Figure 38
IGMP dialog box, StreamLimit Members tab

For more information, see Table 17 "StreamLimit Members tab

fields" (page 98).

—End—

StreamLimit Members tab fields

Table 17
StreamLimit Members tab fields
Field Description
IfIndex Displays the name of the VLAN.
Port Lists each slot/port number for this interface that has stream
limitation enabled.
MaxStreams Sets the maximum number of allowed streams for this specific
port. The number of allowed streams cannot exceed the
maximum number for the interface. The range is from 0 to
65535, and the default is 4.
NumStreams Displays the current number of streams received on this
interface. This is a read-only value.

Adding a multicast stream limitation member

To add a multicast stream limitation member to an interface:

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring multicast stream limitation 99

Step Action

1 From the Device Manager menu bar, choose IP > IGMP.

The IGMP dialog box appears with the Cache tab displayed.

2 Click the StreamLimit Members tab.

The StreamLimit Members tab appears.

3 Click Insert.
The Insert StreamLimit Members dialog box appears Figure 39
"IGMP, Insert StreamLimit Members dialog box" (page 99).
Figure 39
IGMP, Insert StreamLimit Members dialog box

4 Enter the number of the VLAN to which you want to add a member
or select one from the Vlan ID list.

5 Enter the number of the slot/port that you want to add as a member
or click on the ellipsis (...) and select one from the graphic display.

ATTENTION
The port you select in this step must be one of the ports in the VLAN
that you selected in step 4.

6 Enter a maximum number of streams or accept the default of 4.

7 Click Insert.

—End—

Deleting a multicast stream limitation member

To delete a multicast stream limitation member from an interface:

Step Action

1 From the Device Manager menu bar, choose IP > IGMP.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
100 Configuring IGMP using Device Manager

The IGMP dialog box appears with the Cache tab displayed.

2 Click the StreamLimit Members tab.

The StreamLimit Members tab appears Figure 40 "IGMP dialog box,
StreamLimit Members tab" (page 100).
3 Click on the row that lists the member you want to delete.
Figure 40
IGMP dialog box, StreamLimit Members tab

4 Click Delete.

—End—

Configuring multicast stream limitation on an Ethernet port

To configure multicast stream limitation on an Ethernet port:

Step Action

1 On the Device Manager, select a port.

2 From the Device Manager menu bar, choose Edit > Port > IP.
The Port dialog box appears with the Interface tab displayed Figure
41 "Port dialog box, Interface tab" (page 100).
Figure 41
Port dialog box, Interface tab

3 Click the IGMP tab.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring multicast stream limitation 101

The IGMP tab appears (Figure 42 "Port dialog box, IGMP tab" (page
101)).
Figure 42
Port dialog box, IGMP tab

For more information, see Table 18 "Port stream limitation fields"

(page 101). For information about the other fields on this dialog box,
see "Configuring IGMP parameters on a brouter port" (page 68).

—End—

Table 18
Port stream limitation fields
Field Description
StreamLimitEnable Enables or disables stream limitation on this port.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
102 Configuring IGMP using Device Manager

Field Description
Maximum Number Of Sets the maximum number of streams allowed on
Stream this port. The range is from 0 to 65535, and the
default is 4.
Current Number Of Displays the current number of streams. This is
Stream a read-only value.

Configuring multicast stream limitation on a VLAN

To configure multicast stream limitation on a specific VLAN:

Step Action

1 From the Device Manager menu bar, choose VLAN > VLANs.
The VLAN dialog box appears, with the Basic tab displayed.

2 Select a VLAN.

3 Click IP.
The IP, VLAN dialog box appears with the IP Address tab displayed.
4 Select IGMP.
The IGMP tab appears (Figure 43 "IP, VLAN dialog box, IGMP tab"
(page 103)).

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring multicast stream limitation 103

Figure 43
IP, VLAN dialog box, IGMP tab

For more information, see Table 19 "VLAN stream limitation fields"

(page 104)For information about the other fields on this dialog box,
see "Configuring IGMP parameters on a VLAN" (page 72).

—End—

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
104 Configuring IGMP using Device Manager

Table 19
VLAN stream limitation fields
Field Description
StreamLimitEnable Enables or disables stream limitation on this VLAN.
Maximum Number Of Stream Sets the maximum number of streams allowed on this VLAN.
The range is from 0 to 65535, and the default is 4.
Current Number Of Stream Displays the current number of streams. This is a read-only
value.

Showing multicast group trace for IGMP snooping

Multicast group trace tracks the data flow path of the multicast streams.
There is information such as the multicast group address, the source
address, ingress vlan and port, and egress vlan and port.
To display the multicast group trace for an IGMP snoop-enabled interface:

Step Action

1 From the Device Manager menu bar, choose IP > IGMP.

The IGMP dialog box appears with the Cache tab displayed (Figure
44 "IGMP dialog box" (page 104)).
Figure 44
IGMP dialog box

2 Click the Snoop Trace tab.

The Snoop Trace dialog box appears (Figure 45 "Snoop Trace dialog
box" (page 105)).

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Showing multicast group trace for IGMP snooping 105

Figure 45
Snoop Trace dialog box

For more information, see Table 20 "Snoop Trace fields" (page 105).

—End—

Table 20
Snoop Trace fields
Field Description
GrpAddr Displays the IP Multicast address of the group traversing the
router.
SrcAddr Displays the IP source address of the multicast group.
OutVLAN Displays the egress VLAN ID for the multicast group.
InPort Displays the ingress port for the multicast group.
InVLAN Displays the ingress VLAN ID for the multicast group.
OutPort Displays the egress port of the multicast group.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
106 Configuring IGMP using Device Manager

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 107

Configuring DVMRP using Device

Manager
DVMRP is used between routers to exchange multicast routing information.
For more information about DVMRP concepts and terminology, see "IP
Multicast concepts" (page 15).
For instructions on how to configure DVMRP static source groups, see
"Viewing and editing multicast routes using Device Manager" (page 193).
This section describes the following topics:
• "Configuration prerequisites" (page 107)
• "Enabling DVMRP globally" (page 108)
• "Enabling DVMRP on a brouter port" (page 111)
• "Enabling DVMRP on a VLAN" (page 112)
• "Viewing and editing DVMRP interface parameters" (page 115)
• "Viewing and editing DVMRP interface advance parameters" (page 116)
• "Viewing DVMRP neighbor parameters" (page 117)
• "Viewing DVMRP learned routes" (page 119)
• "Viewing DVMRP next hop information" (page 120)
• "Configuring DVMRP routing policies" (page 122)

Configuration prerequisites
Before you can configure DVMRP, prepare the router as follows:

Step Action

1 Configure an IP interface. For information, see Configuring IP

Routing Operations (NN46205-500).

2 Disable PIM-SM from the interface where you want to configure

DVMRP because you cannot configure PIM-SM and DVMRP on
the same interface.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
108 Configuring DVMRP using Device Manager

ATTENTION
Changing the configuration from PIM to DVMRP, or from DVMRP to PIM,
is not recommended while multicast traffic is flowing on the network.

A switch can have a mix of DVMRP and PIM-SM interfaces if it is

configured as an multicast border router (MBR). An interface can
only be configured with one multicast routing protocol at a time
(DVMRP or PIM-SM).
For information about disabling PIM-SM, see "Configuring PIM using
Device Manager" (page 147).

3 Enable DVMRP globally.

To enable DVMRP globally, see "Enabling DVMRP globally" (page
108).

—End—

Enabling DVMRP globally

When you enable DVMRP globally and on a particular interface, the IGMP
parameters automatically take effect.
To enable DVMRP globally:

Step Action

1 From the Device Manager menu bar, choose IP > DVMRP.

The DVMRP dialog box appears with the Globals tab displayed
Figure 46 "DVMRP dialog box, Globals tab" (page 109).

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Enabling DVMRP globally 109

Figure 46
DVMRP dialog box, Globals tab

2 Click Enable.

3 Click Apply.
For more information, see Table 21 "Globals tab fields" (page 109)

—End—

Table 21
Globals tab fields
Field Description
Enable Enables (true) or disables (false) DVMRP on the routing switch.
You must globally enable DVMRP before you can enable a port
or a VLAN as IGMP or DVMRP.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
110 Configuring DVMRP using Device Manager

Field Description
UpdateInterval Periodically, each multicast router advertises routing
information on each DVMRP interface, using the DVMRP
export message. You can specify the time interval (in seconds)
between DMVRP updates. The range is from 10 to 2000 with a
default of 60.
TriggeredUpdateInterval Triggered updates are sent when routing information changes.
This value is the amount of time (in seconds) between triggered
update messages. The range is from 5 to 1000 with a default
value of 5.
LeafTimeOut When DVMRP advertises a route on an interface, it waits a
period of time for a DVMRP neighbor to respond positively. If
no neighbor responds in the given time, the router considers
the network attached to the interface to be a leaf network. The
leaf timer allows you to specify how long (in seconds) the router
waits for a response from a neighbor. The range is from 25 to
4000 with a default value of 200.
NbrTimeOut The neighbor report timer specifies how long (in seconds)
the router waits to receive a report from a neighbor before
considering the connection inactive. The range is from 35 to
8000 with a default of 140.
NbrProbeInterval Specifies how often the DVMRP router sends probe messages
on its interfaces. The range is from 5 to 30 seconds with a
default of 10.
RouteExpireTimeOut Defines the route expiration time-out value. The range is from
20 to 4000 seconds with a default value of 140.
FwdCacheTimeOut Defines forward cache time-out value, which is used is aging
prune entries. The range is from 300 to 86400 seconds with
a default value of 300.
RouteDiscardTimeOut Defines the time to garbage collect route. The range is from 40
to 8000 seconds with a default value of 260.
RouteSwitchTimeOut Defines the route discard time-out value. The range is from 20
to 2000 seconds with a default value of 140.
VersionString The DVMRP version information for the router.
GenerationId Used by neighboring routers to detect whether a reset or
disable/enable DVMRP action occurred to the switch or to a
particular interface. If so, the router must resend the entire
multicast routing table to its neighbor immediately instead of
waiting for the next scheduled update.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Enabling DVMRP on a brouter port 111

Field Description
NumRoutes The number of entries in the routing table. Use this information
to monitor the routing table size to detect illegal advertisements
of multicast routes.
ReachableRoutes The number of entries in the routing table with noninfinite
metrics. Use this number to detect network partitions by
observing the ratio of reachable routes to total routes.

Enabling DVMRP on a brouter port

To configure DVMRP on a brouter port:

Step Action

1 On the Device Manager, select a port.

2 From the Device Manager menu bar, choose Edit > Port > IP.
The Port dialog box appears with the IP Address tab displayed.
3 Click the DVMRP tab.
The Port dialog box appears with the DVMRP tab displayed Figure
47 "Port dialog box, DVMRP tab" (page 111).
Figure 47
Port dialog box, DVMRP tab

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
112 Configuring DVMRP using Device Manager

4 Click the Enable check box to select DVMRP on the port, or click to
clear the check box.

5 Enter a metric (cost) of the maximum number of hops for DVMRP;

the range is from 1 to 31. A default value of 1 means local delivery
only. You can use the metric value to control the scope of the
DVMRP routes.
For more information, see Table 22 "Port DVMRP tab fields" (page
112).

—End—

Table 22
Port DVMRP tab fields
Field Description
LocalAddress Provides the IP address of the DVMRP router interface.
Enable Enables (check box selected) or disables (check box cleared)
DRMRP on the port.
Metric Specifies the distance metric for this port; used to calculate distance
vectors. The range is 1 to 31 hops.
InterfaceType Sets the port type as passive or active.
DefaultListen Sets the port to listen (check box selected) or not listen (check box
cleared) for the default route.
DefaultSupply Sets the port to supply (check box selected) or not supply (check
box cleared) only the default route.
DefaultRouteMetric Sets the metric (number of hops for DVMRP) of the default route.
The range is 1 to 31 hops.
AdvertiseSelf Sets the port to advertise (check box selected) or not advertise
(check box cleared) local routes to neighbors.
InPolicy Selects the name of the DVMRP accept policy applied to the port.
OutPolicy Selects the name of the DVMRP announce policy applied to the port.

Enabling DVMRP on a VLAN

You must enable DVMRP on a VLAN before you configure IGMP on a VLAN.
To enable DVMRP on a VLAN:

Step Action

1 From the Device Manager, choose VLAN > VLANs.

The VLAN dialog box appears with the Basic tab displayed Figure
48 "VLAN dialog box, Basic tab" (page 113).

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Enabling DVMRP on a VLAN 113

Figure 48
VLAN dialog box, Basic tab

2 Select a VLAN.
3 Click IP.
The IP, VLAN dialog box appears with the IP Address tab displayed
(Figure 49 "IP, VLAN dialog box, IP Address tab" (page 113)).
Figure 49
IP, VLAN dialog box, IP Address tab

4 Click the DVMRP tab.

The DVMRP tab appears (Figure 50 "IP, VLAN dialog box, DVMRP
tab" (page 114)).

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
114 Configuring DVMRP using Device Manager

Figure 50
IP, VLAN dialog box, DVMRP tab

5 Click the Enable box to select DVMRP on the port, or click to clear
the box.

6 Enter a metric (cost) of the maximum number of hops for DVMRP;

the range is from 1 to 31. A default value of 1 means local delivery
only. You can use the metric value to control the scope of the
DVMRP routes.
For more information, see Table 23 "VLAN DVMRP tab fields" (page
114).

—End—

Table 23
VLAN DVMRP tab fields
Field Description
LocalAddress Provides the IP address of the DVMRP router interface.
Enable Enables (check box selected) or disables (check box cleared) DRMRP
on the VLAN.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Viewing and editing DVMRP interface parameters 115

Field Description
Metric Specifies the distance metric for this VLAN; used to calculate distance
vectors. The range is from 1 to 31 hops.
InterfaceType Sets the VLAN type as passive or active.
DefaultListen Sets the VLAN to listen (check box selected) or not listen (check box
cleared) for the default route.
DefaultSupply Sets the VLAN to supply (check box selected) or not supply (check box
cleared) only the default route.
DefaultRouteMetric Sets the metric (number of hops for DVMRP) of the default route. The
range is from 1 to 31 hops.
AdvertiseSelf Sets the VLAN to advertise (check box selected) or not advertise (check
box cleared) local routes to neighbors.
InPolicy Selects the name of the DVMRP accept policy applied to the VLAN.
OutPolicy Selects the name of the DVMRP announce policy applied to the VLAN.

Viewing and editing DVMRP interface parameters

To view or edit DVMRP interface parameters:

Step Action

1 From the Device Manager menu bar, choose IP > DVMRP.

The DVMRP dialog box appears with the Globals tab displayed
(Figure 46 "DVMRP dialog box, Globals tab" (page 109)).
2 Click the Interfaces tab.
The Interfaces tab appears Figure 51 "DVMRP dialog box, Interfaces
tab" (page 115).
Figure 51
DVMRP dialog box, Interfaces tab

For more information, see Table 24 "Interfaces tab fields" (page 116).

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
116 Configuring DVMRP using Device Manager

—End—

Table 24
Interfaces tab fields
Field Description
IfIndex The DVMRP interface, slot/port number, or VLAN identification.
LocalAddress The IP address of the DVMRP router interface.
Metric The distance metric for this interface; used to calculate distance vectors. The
range is from 1 to 31. The default value is 1, which means local delivery only.
OperState The current operational state of this DVMRP interface (up or down).

Viewing and editing DVMRP interface advance parameters

You can configure an interface to listen for a default route or supply a default
route. You can also configure an interface to specify the metric (cost) of the
default route, which is advertised if the interface is configured to supply
a default route.
To view or edit DVMRP interface advance parameters:

Step Action

1 From the Device Manager menu bar, choose IP > DVMRP.

The DVMRP dialog box appears with the Globals tab displayed
(Figure 46 "DVMRP dialog box, Globals tab" (page 109)).

2 Click the Interface Advance tab.

The DVMRP Interface Advance tab appears and displays the DVMRP
configuration options (Figure 52 "DVMRP dialog box, Interface
Advance tab" (page 116)). Table 25 "Interface Advance tab fields"
(page 117) provides a description of the fields in this dialog box.
Figure 52
DVMRP dialog box, Interface Advance tab

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Viewing DVMRP neighbor parameters 117

For more information, see Table 25 "Interface Advance tab fields"

(page 117).

—End—

Table 25
Interface Advance tab fields
Field Description
IfIndex Provides the DVMRP interface, VLAN, or slot/port number
identification.
LocalAddress Provides the IP address of the DVMRP router interface.
Enable Enables (true) or disables (false) DRMRP on the interface.
Metric Specifies the distance metric for this interface; used to calculate
distance vectors. The range is from 1 to 31 hops.
InterfaceType Sets the interface type as passive or active.
DefaultListen Sets the interface to listen (true) or not listen (false) for the default
route. The default is true, which indicates that the interface listens
to the default route.
DefaultSupply Sets the interface to supply (true) or not supply (false) only the
default route. The default is false, which indicates not to supply a
default route on that interface.
DefaultRouteMetric Sets the metric (number of hops for DVMRP) of the default route.
The range is from 1 to 31 hops.
AdvertiseSelf Sets the interface to advertise (true) or not advertise (false) its local
route to neighbors. The default value is True.
InPolicy Selects the name of the DVMRP accept policy applied to the
interface.
OutPolicy Selects the name of the DVMRP announce policy applied to the
interface.

Viewing DVMRP neighbor parameters

To view the DVMRP neighbor parameters:

Step Action

1 From the Device Manager menu bar, choose IP > DVMRP.

The DVMRP dialog box appears with the Globals tab displayed
(Figure 46 "DVMRP dialog box, Globals tab" (page 109)).

2 Click the Neighbors tab.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
118 Configuring DVMRP using Device Manager

The Neighbors tab appears Figure 53 "DVMRP dialog box,

Neighbors tab" (page 118).
Figure 53
DVMRP dialog box, Neighbors tab

For more information, see Table 26 "Neighbors tab fields" (page 118).

—End—

Table 26
Neighbors tab fields
Field Description
IfIndex The DVMRP slot/port number or the virtual interface (VLAN) used to reach
this DVMRP neighbor.
Address The IP address of the DVMRP neighbor where this entry contains information.
ExpiryTime The time remaining before this DVMRP neighbor is aged out.
GenerationId The generation ID number for the neighboring router.
MajorVersion The major DVMRP version number for the neighboring router.
MinorVersion The minor DVMRP version number for the neighboring router.
Capabilities The capabilities for the neighboring router. The probe flag is 1 byte long with
the lower 4 bits containing the following information:
• The leaf bit (0) indicates that the neighbor has only one interface with
neighbors.
• The prune bit (1) indicates that the neighbor supports pruning.
• The generationID bit (2) indicates that the neighbor sends its generation
ID in probe messages.
• The mtrace bit (3) indicates that the neighbor can handle mtrace requests.
State The state of neighbor adjacency:
• oneway—The switch sees a packet from the neighbor but no adjacency
has been established.
• active—Adjacency exists in both directions.
• ignoring

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Viewing DVMRP learned routes 119

Field Description

• down—The interface is not enabled.

Viewing DVMRP learned routes

To view the DVMRP learned routing table:

Step Action

1 From the Device Manager menu bar, choose IP > DVMRP.

The DVMRP dialog box appears with the Globals tab displayed
(Figure 46 "DVMRP dialog box, Globals tab" (page 109)).

2 Click the Routes tab.

The Routes tab appears Figure 54 "DVMRP dialog box, Routes tab"
(page 119).
Figure 54
DVMRP dialog box, Routes tab

For more information, see Table 27 "Routes tab fields" (page 120).

—End—

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
120 Configuring DVMRP using Device Manager

Table 27
Routes tab fields
Field Description
Source The network address that, when combined with the corresponding
route SourceMask value, identifies the sources containing multicast
routing information.
SourceMask The network mask that, when combined with the corresponding
route Source value, identifies the sources containing multicast
routing information.
UpstreamNeighbor The address of the upstream neighbor (for example, a RPF
neighbor) from where the IP datagrams from these sources are
received. The address is 0.0.0.0 if the network is local.
Interface The DVMRP interface, slot/port number, or VLAN ID where the IP
datagrams sent by the upstream sources are received.
Metric The distance in hops to the source subnet. The range is from 1 to 32.
ExpiryTime The amount of time (in seconds) remaining before this entry is aged
out.

Viewing DVMRP next hop information

Before you can show DVMRP next hops, use the CLI to enable showing the
next-hop table. Enter the following command:
config ip dvmrp show-next-hop-table enable
Showing the next-hop table is disabled by default. This avoids using the
large amount of memory required for these tables in a scaled multicast
environment with a large number of VLANs.
For more information, see "Configuring DVMRP using the CLI" (page 285).
To view information about the DVMRP next hops on outgoing interfaces
for routing IP Multicast datagrams:

Step Action

1 From the Device Manager menu bar, choose IP > DVMRP.

The DVMRP dialog box appears with the Globals tab displayed
Figure 46 "DVMRP dialog box, Globals tab" (page 109).

2 Click the Next Hops tab.

The Next Hops tab appears (Figure 55 "DVMRP dialog box, Next
Hops tab" (page 121)).

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Viewing DVMRP next hop information 121

Figure 55
DVMRP dialog box, Next Hops tab

For more information, see Table 28 "Next Hops tab fields" (page
121).

—End—

Table 28
Next Hops tab fields
Field Description
Source The network address that, when combined with the corresponding next
hop SourceMask value, identifies the source of the next hop on an
outgoing interface.
SourceMask The network mask that, when combined with the corresponding next
hop Source value, identifies the source of the next hop on an outgoing
interface.
IfIndex The DVMRP interface, slot/port number, or VLAN ID for the outgoing
interface for the next hop.
Type Type is 0, or leaf, if no downstream dependent neighbors exist on the
outgoing virtual interface. Otherwise, type is branch.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
122 Configuring DVMRP using Device Manager

Configuring DVMRP routing policies

DVMRP routing policies improve the management of the DVMRP routing
tables by controlling how the routing table is populated and how the routes
are exchanged between Ethernet Routing Switch 8600s. These routing
policies, when enabled, can apply to an interface that is either a VLAN or a
brouter port.
This section includes the following topics:
• "Configuring default route policies" (page 122)
• "Configuring DVMRP announce policies" (page 125)
• "Configuring DVMRP accept policies" (page 134)
• "Configuring the advertisement of local network policies" (page 140)
• "Configuring a DVMRP interface type" (page 141)
• "Displaying DVMRP routing policy information" (page 144)

Configuring default route policies

This section includes the following tasks that describe how to set up your
default route configuration using Device Manager:
• "Applying the default route policy to an interface" (page 122)
• "Applying the default route policy to a VLAN" (page 123)
• "Applying the default route policy to a port" (page 124)

Before you apply the default route policy to the switch, you must perform the
procedures provided in "Configuration prerequisites" (page 107).

You can apply a default route policy to an interface, VLAN, or port. To display
DVMRP default route configuration information for an interface, VLAN, or
port, see "Displaying DVMRP routing policy information" (page 144).

Applying the default route policy to an interface

You can configure an interface to listen for a default route or supply a default
route. You can also configure an interface to specify the metric (cost) of the
default route, which is advertised if the interface is configured to supply
a default route.
To apply the default route policy to an interface:

Step Action

1 From the Device Manager menu bar, choose IP > DVMRP.

The DVMRP dialog box appears with the Globals tab displayed.
2 Select the Interface Advance tab.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring DVMRP routing policies 123

The DVMRP Interface Advance tab appears and displays the

DVMRP configuration options (Figure 56 "DVMRP dialog box,
Interface Advance tab" (page 123)).
Figure 56
DVMRP dialog box, Interface Advance tab

3 Set the DefaultListen field for the interface you want to modify to
true if you want to listen for a default route.

4 Set the DefaultSupply field for the interface you want to modify to
true. if you want the interface to supply only a default route,
5 Enter the number of hops for DVMRP in the DefaultRouteMetric
field to set the metric (cost) of the default route to be used when this
switch advertises this default route; the range is 1 to 31.

6 Click Apply to save the new configuration.

—End—

Applying the default route policy to a VLAN

You can configure a VLAN to listen for a default route or supply a default
route. You can also configure a VLAN to specify the metric (cost) of the
default route, which is advertised if the VLAN is configured to supply a
default route.
To apply the default route policy to a VLAN:

Step Action

1 From the Device Manager menu bar, choose VLAN > VLANs.
The VLAN dialog box appears with the Basic tab displayed (Figure
48 "VLAN dialog box, Basic tab" (page 113)).
2 Select a VLAN ID that you want to configure.

3 Click IP.
The IP, VLAN dialog box appears with the IP Address tab displayed.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
124 Configuring DVMRP using Device Manager

4 Click the DVMRP tab.

The DVMRP tab appears and displays the DVMRP configuration
options (Figure 57 "IP, VLAN dialog box, DVMRP tab" (page 124)).
Figure 57
IP, VLAN dialog box, DVMRP tab

5 To set the VLAN to listen for a default route, click the DefaultListen
box.

6 To set the VLAN to supply only the default route, select the
DefaultSupply box.
7 To set the metric (cost) of the default route to be used when this
switch advertises this default route, enter the number of hops for
DVMRP in the DefaultRouteMetric field; the range is 1 to 31.

8 Click Apply to save the new configuration.

—End—

Applying the default route policy to a port

You can configure a port to listen for a default route or supply a default route.
You can also configure a port to specify the metric (cost) of the default route,
which is advertised if the port is configured to supply a default route.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring DVMRP routing policies 125

To apply the default route policy to a port:

Step Action

1 On the Device Manager, select a port.

2 From the Device Manager menu bar, choose Edit > Port > IP.
The Port dialog box appears with the Interface tab displayed.

3 Click the DVMRP tab.

The DVMRP tab appears and displays the DVMRP configuration
options (Figure 50 "IP, VLAN dialog box, DVMRP tab" (page 114)).
4 To set the port to listen for a default route, click the DefaultListen
check box.

5 To set the port to supply only the default route, select the
DefaultSupply check box.
6 To set the metric (cost) of the default route to be used when this
switch advertises this default route, enter the number of hops for
DVMRP in the DefaultRouteMetric field; the range is 1 to 31.

7 Click Apply to save the new configuration.

—End—

Configuring DVMRP announce policies

This section includes the following tasks that describe how to set up your
accept policy configuration using Device Manager:
• "Creating a DVMRP announce policy" (page 126)
• "Applying a DVMRP announce policy to an interface" (page 131)
• "Applying a DVMRP announce policy to a VLAN" (page 132)
• "Applying a DVMRP announce policy to a port" (page 133)

Before you create and apply a DVMRP announce policy to the switch, you
must perform the procedures provided in "Configuration prerequisites"
(page 107).

Configuring a DVMRP announce policy involves creating a policy and then

applying it. To display DVMRP announce policy configuration information
for an interface, VLAN, or port, see "Displaying DVMRP routing policy
information" (page 144).

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
126 Configuring DVMRP using Device Manager

Creating a DVMRP announce policy

Before you can apply an announce policy to an interface, VLAN, or port, first
create the announce policy.
You can create one or more IP prefix lists and apply that list to any IP route
policy. A prefix list with a 32 bit mask is equivalent to an address. A prefix
list with a mask less than 32 bits can be used as a network. If you configure
the MaskLenFrom field to be less than MaskLenUpto field, it can also be
used as a range.
To create a DVMRP announce policy:

Step Action

1 From the Device Manager menu bar, choose IP > Policy.

The Policy dialog box appears with the Prefix List tab displayed
(Figure 58 "Policy dialog box, Prefix List tab" (page 126)).
Figure 58
Policy dialog box, Prefix List tab

2 Click Insert.
The Policy, Insert Prefix List dialog box displays (Figure 59 "Prefix
List tab, Policy, Insert Prefix List dialog box" (page 127)).

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring DVMRP routing policies 127

Figure 59
Prefix List tab, Policy, Insert Prefix List dialog box

Table 29 "Policy, Insert Prefix List dialog box field" (page 129)
describes the information for the required fields in the dialog box.

3 In the Id box, enter an ID for the prefix list (unique number).

4 In the Prefix box, enter an IP address.

5 In the PrefixMaskLen box, enter the length of the prefix mask

(range is 0 to 32).

6 In the Name box, enter a name for the prefix list.

7 Click Insert.
For more information, see Table 29 "Policy, Insert Prefix List dialog
box field" (page 129).
8 Repeat steps 3 to 7 to include additional IP addresses for the prefix
list you create.
You can also create additional prefix lists by repeating steps 3 to 7.

9 From the Policy dialog box, click the Route Policy tab.
The Route Policy tab appears (Figure 60 "Policy dialog box, Route
Policy tab" (page 127)).
Figure 60
Policy dialog box, Route Policy tab

10 Click Insert.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
128 Configuring DVMRP using Device Manager

The Policy, Insert Route Policy dialog box appears (Figure 61 "Route
Policy tab, Policy, Insert Route Policy dialog box" (page 128)).
Figure 61
Route Policy tab, Policy, Insert Route Policy dialog box

ATTENTION
Not all the fields in the Policy, Insert Route Policy dialog box apply to
the process of creating a DVMRP policy.
Table 30 "Policy, Insert Route Policy dialog box" (page 130) describes the
fields in the dialog box where you must supply information to create the
DVMRP policy. For information about the other fields in this dialog box,
see Configuring IP Routing Operations (NN46205-500).

11 In the Id box, enter a number for the policy.

12 In the SequenceNumber box, enter a policy sequence number

(range is 1 to 65535).

13 In the Name box, specify the name of the policy.

14 Select DVMRP in the MatchProtocol box.

15 Enter the applicable names of the prefix lists you created in Steps
3 and 10 in the MatchNetwork, MatchIPRouteSource, and
MatchNextHop boxs.
You can enter a single or several prefix lists. You can select up to
four lists. To enter the names of the prefix lists, click the ellipse
button to the right of the box, select the appropriate names from the
dialog box, and click OK. To select multiple names, use the CTRL
key. To deselect an entry, use the ALT key.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring DVMRP routing policies 129

16 In the MatchMetric box, enter a value (range is 0 to 65535).

17 In the SetMetric box, enter a value (range is 0 to 65535).

18 Click Insert.
For more information, see "Policy, Insert Route Policy dialog box"
(page 130)

19 From the Policy dialog box, click the DVMRP In/Out Policy tab.
The DVMRP In/Out Policy tab appears (Figure 62 "Policy dialog box,
DVMRP In/Out Policy tab" (page 129)). The Enable field indicates
the current status (true is enabled; false is disabled).
Figure 62
Policy dialog box, DVMRP In/Out Policy tab

20 Right-click in the OutPolicy name field of the DVMRP interface

to where you want to apply the announce policy and select the
appropriate policy name from the PolicyName dialog box.

21 Click Apply to save the new configuration.

—End—

Table 29
Policy, Insert Prefix List dialog box field
Field Description
ID The list identifier.
Prefix The IP address and mask.
PrefixMaskLen This is the specified length of the prefix mask. The range is 0 to 32.
Name Identifies a specific prefix list during the creation process. The name
length can be from 1 to 64 characters.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
130 Configuring DVMRP using Device Manager

Field Description
MaskLenFrom A value that specifies the lower bound of the mask length. The
default is the mask length.
MaskLenUpto A value that specifies the higher bound the mask length. The default
is the mask length.

Table 30
Policy, Insert Route Policy dialog box
Field Description
Id The ID of an entry in the prefix list table.
SequenceNumber A second index used to identify a specific policy within a route policy
group.
Name The name of the route policy.
MatchProtocol Selects the appropriate protocol. If configured, matches the protocol
through which the route is learned.
MatchNetwork Matches the destination network against the contents of the
specified prefix list, if configured.
MatchIpRouteSource Matches the previous hop IP addresses for DVMRP routes
against the contents of the specified prefix list, if configured.
Click the ellipse button and choose from the list in the Match
Route Source dialog box. You can select up to four entries. To
clear an entry, use the ALT key.

ATTENTION
This field can also be changed in the Route Policy tab of the
Policy dialog box.

MatchNextHop Matches the previous hop IP address of the route against the
contents for the specified prefix list. This field applies only to
nonlocal routes, if configured.
Click the ellipse button and choose from the list in the Match Next
Hop dialog box. You can select up to four entries. To clear an
entry, use the ALT key.
MatchMetric Matches the metric of the incoming advertisement or existing route
against the specified value (1to 65535). If 0, then this field is
ignored, if configured. The default is 0.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring DVMRP routing policies 131

Field Description
MatchInterface If configured, the switch matches the IP address of the interface by
the RIP route that was learned against the contents of the specified
prefix list. This field is used only for RIP routes and it is ignored for
all other types of route.
Click the ellipse button and choose from the list in the Match
Interface dialog box. You can select up to four entries. To clear an
entry, use the ALT key.
MatchRouteType Sets a specific route-type to be matched (applies only to OSPF
routes).
Externaltype1 and Externaltype2 specify the OSPF routes of the
specified type only. OSPF internal refers to intra and inter area
routes.
MatchAsPath If configured, the switch matches the as-path attribute of the BGP
routes against the contents of the specified as-lists. This field is
used only for BGP routes and ignored for all other type of routes.

Applying a DVMRP announce policy to an interface

To apply an announce policy to an interface:

Step Action

1 From the Device Manager menu bar, choose IP > DVMRP.

The DVMRP dialog box appears with the Globals tab displayed.

2 Select the Interface Advance tab.

The DVMRP Interface Advance tab appears and displays the
DVMRP configuration options (Figure 52 "DVMRP dialog box,
Interface Advance tab" (page 116)).

3 Double-click the OutPolicy field for a selected interface.

The OutPolicy dialog box appears and displays the list of policies
you can apply to the interface Figure 63 "DVMRP Interface tab,
OutPolicy dialog box" (page 132).

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
132 Configuring DVMRP using Device Manager

Figure 63
DVMRP Interface tab, OutPolicy dialog box

4 Select a policy name and click OK.

5 Click Apply from the DVMRP Interface Advance tab.

—End—

Applying a DVMRP announce policy to a VLAN

To apply an announce policy to a VLAN:

Step Action

1 From the Device Manager menu bar, choose VLAN > VLANs.
The VLAN dialog box appears with the Basic tab displayed (Figure
48 "VLAN dialog box, Basic tab" (page 113)).

2 Select a VLAN and IP.

The IP, VLAN dialog box appears with the IP Address tab displayed.

3 Click the DVMRP tab.

The DVMRP tab appears and displays the DVMRP configuration
options.

4 Double-click the button to the right of the OutPolicy field.

The OutPolicy dialog box appears and displays the list of policies you
can apply to the interface Figure 64 "DVMRP VLAN tab, OutPolicy
dialog box" (page 133).

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring DVMRP routing policies 133

Figure 64
DVMRP VLAN tab, OutPolicy dialog box

5 Select a policy name and click OK.

6 Click Apply from the DVMRP port tab.

—End—

Applying a DVMRP announce policy to a port

To apply an announce policy to a port:

Step Action

1 On the Device Manager, select a port.

2 From the Device Manager menu bar, choose Edit > Port.
The Port dialog box appears with the Interface tab displayed.

3 Click the DVMRP tab.

The DVMRP tab appears and displays the DVMRP configuration
options.

4 Double-click the ellipse button to the right of the OutPolicy field.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
134 Configuring DVMRP using Device Manager

The OutPolicy dialog box appears and displays the list of policies
you can apply to the interface Figure 65 "DVMRP Port tab, OutPolicy
dialog box" (page 134).
Figure 65
DVMRP Port tab, OutPolicy dialog box

5 Select a policy name and click OK.

6 Click Apply from DVMRP tab.

—End—

Configuring DVMRP accept policies

This section includes the following tasks that describe how to set up your
accept policy configuration using Device Manager:
• "Creating a DVMRP accept policy" (page 135)
• "Applying a DVMRP accept policy to an interface" (page 137)
• "Applying a DVMRP accept policy to a VLAN" (page 137)
• "Applying a DVMRP accept policy to a port" (page 139)

Before you create and apply a DVMRP accept policy to the switch, perform
the procedures provided in "Configuration prerequisites" (page 107).

Configuring a DVMRP accept policy involves creating a policy and then

applying it. To display DVMRP accept policy configuration information for an
interface, VLAN, or port, see "Displaying DVMRP routing policy information"
(page 144).

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring DVMRP routing policies 135

Creating a DVMRP accept policy

Before you can apply an accept policy to an interface, VLAN, or port, you
must first create the policy.
You can create one or more IP prefix lists and apply that list to any IP route
policy. A prefix list with a 32 bit mask is equivalent to an address. A prefix
list with a mask less than 32 bits can be used as a network. If you configure
the MaskLenFrom field to be less than MaskLenUpto field, it can also be
used as a range.
To create a DVMRP accept policy:

Step Action

1 From the Device Manager menu bar, choose IP > Policy.

The Policy dialog box appears with the Prefix List tab displayed
(Figure 58 "Policy dialog box, Prefix List tab" (page 126)).
2 Click Insert.
The Policy, Insert Prefix List dialog box displays (Figure 59 "Prefix
List tab, Policy, Insert Prefix List dialog box" (page 127)).
See Table 29 "Policy, Insert Prefix List dialog box field" (page 129)
for a description of the information for the required fields in this
dialog box.
3 In the Id box, enter an ID for the prefix list (unique number).

4 In the Prefix box, enter an IP address.

5 In the PrefixMaskLen box, enter the length of the prefix mask
(range is 0 to 32).

6 In the Name box, enter a name for the prefix list.

ATTENTION
The MaskLenFrom and MaskLenUpto boxs are not required to create
an accept policy. For information about these parameters, see Table 29
"Policy, Insert Prefix List dialog box field" (page 129).

7 Click Insert.

8 Repeat steps 3 to 7 to add additional IP addresses to the prefix list

you create.
You can also create additional prefix lists by repeating steps 3 to 7.

9 From the Policy dialog box, click the Route Policy tab.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
136 Configuring DVMRP using Device Manager

The Route Policy tab appears (Figure 60 "Policy dialog box, Route
Policy tab" (page 127)).

10 Click Insert.
The Policy, Insert Route Policy dialog box displays (Figure 61 "Route
Policy tab, Policy, Insert Route Policy dialog box" (page 128)).

ATTENTION
Not all the fields in the Policy, Insert Route Policy dialog box apply to the
process of creating a DVMRP policy.
Table 30 "Policy, Insert Route Policy dialog box" (page 130) describes the
fields in the dialog box for which you must supply information to create
the DVMRP policy. For information about the other fields in this dialog
box, see Configuring IP Routing Operations (NN46205-500).

11 In the Id box, enter number for the policy

12 In the SequenceNumber box, enter a number for the policy (range

is 1 to 65535).

13 In the Name box, enter a name for the policy.

14 In the MatchProtocol box, select DVMRP.

15 In the MatchNetwork, MatchIPRouteSource, and MatchNextHop

boxs, enter the applicable names of the prefix lists you created in
steps 3 to 8.
16 You can enter a single or several prefix lists. You can select up to
four lists. To enter the names of the prefix lists, click the ellipse
button to the right of the field, select the appropriate names from the
dialog box, and click OK. To select multiple names, use the CTRL
key. To deselect an entry, use the ALT key.
17 In the MatchMetric box, enter a value (range is 0 to 65535).

18 In the SetMetric box, enter a value (range is 0 to 65535).

19 Click Insert.

20 From the Policy dialog box, click the DVMRP In/Out Policy tab.
The DVMRP In/Out Policy tab appears (Figure 62 "Policy dialog box,
DVMRP In/Out Policy tab" (page 129)).
21 Right-click in the InPolicy name box of the DVMRP interface where
you want to apply the accept policy and select the appropriate policy
name from the PolicyName dialog box.

22 Click Apply to save the new configuration.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring DVMRP routing policies 137

—End—

Applying a DVMRP accept policy to an interface

To apply an accept policy to an interface:

Step Action

1 From the Device Manager menu bar, choose IP > DVMRP.

The DVMRP dialog box appears with the Globals tab displayed.
2 Select the Interface Advance tab.
The DVMRP Interface Advance tab appears and displays the
DVMRP configuration options.
3 Double-click the InPolicy field for a selected interface.
The InPolicy dialog box appears and displays the list of policies you
can apply to the interface Figure 66 "DVMRP Interface tab, InPolicy
dialog box" (page 137).
Figure 66
DVMRP Interface tab, InPolicy dialog box

4 Select a policy name and click OK.

5 Click Apply from DVMRP Interface Advance tab.

—End—

Applying a DVMRP accept policy to a VLAN

To apply an accept policy to a VLAN:

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
138 Configuring DVMRP using Device Manager

Step Action

1 From the Device Manager menu bar, choose VLAN > VLANs.
The VLAN dialog box appears with the Basic tab displayed.

2 Select a VLAN and click IP.

The IP, VLAN dialog box appears with the IP Address tab displayed.

3 Click the DVMRP tab.

The DVMRP tab appears and displays the DVMRP configuration
options.

4 Double-click the tab to the right of the InPolicy field.

The InPolicy dialog box appears and displays the list of policies you
can apply to the interface Figure 67 "DVMRP VLAN tab, InPolicy
dialog box" (page 138).
Figure 67
DVMRP VLAN tab, InPolicy dialog box

5 Select a policy name and click OK.

6 Click Apply from the DVMRP tab.

—End—

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring DVMRP routing policies 139

Applying a DVMRP accept policy to a port

To apply an accept policy to a port:

Step Action

1 On the Device Manager, select a port.

2 From the Device Manager menu bar, choose Edit > Port.
The Port dialog box appears with the Interface tab displayed.

3 Click the DVMRP tab.

The DVMRP tab appears and displays the DVMRP configuration
options.

4 Double-click the tab to the right of the InPolicy field.

The InPolicy dialog box appears and displays the list of policies
you can apply to the interface Figure 68 "DVMRP Port tab, InPolicy
dialog box" (page 139).
Figure 68
DVMRP Port tab, InPolicy dialog box

5 Select a policy name and click OK.

6 Click Apply from DVMRP tab.

—End—

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
140 Configuring DVMRP using Device Manager

Configuring the advertisement of local network policies

This section includes the following tasks that describe how configure the
advertisement of local networks policy using Device Manager:
• "Apply the advertisement of local networks policy over an interface"
(page 140)
• "Apply the advertisement of local networks policy over a VLAN" (page
140)
• "Apply the advertisement of local networks policy over a port" (page 141)

Before you apply the advertisement of local networks policy to the switch,
you must perform the procedures provided in "Configuration prerequisites"
(page 107).

You can apply the configuration for the advertisement of local networks
policy to an interface, VLAN, or port. To display the advertisement
policy configuration information, see "Displaying DVMRP routing policy
information" (page 144).

Apply the advertisement of local networks policy over an

interface
To enable the advertisement of local networks over an interface:

Step Action

1 From the Device Manager menu bar, choose IP > DVMRP.

The DVMRP dialog box appears with the Globals tab displayed.

2 Select the Interface Advance tab.

The DVMRP Interface Advance tab appears and displays the
DVMRP configuration options.
3 To enable the advertisement of local networks policy for a selected
interface, set the AdvertiseSelf field for the interface you want to
modify to true.

4 Click Apply to save the new configuration.

—End—

Apply the advertisement of local networks policy over a VLAN

To enable the advertisement of local networks over a VLAN:

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring DVMRP routing policies 141

Step Action

1 From the Device Manager, choose VLAN > VLANs.

The VLAN dialog box appears with the Basic tab displayed.

2 Select a VLAN and click IP.

The IP, VLAN dialog box appears with the IP Address tab displayed.

3 Click the DVMRP tab.

The DVMRP tab appears and displays the DVMRP configuration
options.

4 To enable the VLAN to advertise its local networks, click the

AdvertiseSelf box.

5 Click Apply to save the new configuration.

—End—

Apply the advertisement of local networks policy over a port

To enable the advertisement of local networks over a port:

Step Action

1 On the Device Manager, select a port.

2 From the Device Manager menu bar, choose Edit > Port.
The Port dialog box appears with the Interface tab displayed.
3 Click the DVMRP tab.
The DVMRP tab appears and displays the DVMRP configuration
options.

4 To enable the port to advertise its local networks, click the

AdvertiseSelf check box.

5 Click Apply to save the new configuration.

—End—

Configuring a DVMRP interface type

This section includes the following tasks that describe how to configure the
interface type using Device Manager:
• "Configuring an active or passive interface type" (page 142)

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
142 Configuring DVMRP using Device Manager

• "Configuring an active or passive VLAN type" (page 142)

• "Configuring an active or passive port type" (page 143)

Before you apply the DVMRP passive interface policy to the switch, you
must perform the procedures provided in "Configuration prerequisites"
(page 107).

To display DVMRP interface type configuration information for an interface,

VLAN, or port, see "Displaying DVMRP routing policy information" (page
144).

To display DVMRP interface type configuration information for an interface,

VLAN, or port, see "Displaying DVMRP routing policy information" (page
144).

Configuring an active or passive interface type

You can configure an interface as active or passive when the interface is
disabled.
To configure an active or passive interface type:

Step Action

1 From the Device Manager menu bar, choose IP > DVMRP.

The DVMRP dialog box appears with the Globals tab displayed.

2 Select the Interface Advance tab.

The DVMRP Interface Advance tab appears and displays the
DVMRP configuration options.

3 Disable the selected interface. In the Enable box, select false to

disable the interface.
4 Set the interface to passive or active by selecting passive or active
from the InterfaceType box for the selected interface.

5 Reenable the interface by selecting the true option from the Enable
box.
6 Click Apply to save the new configuration.

—End—

Configuring an active or passive VLAN type

You can configure a VLAN as active or passive when the interface is
disabled.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring DVMRP routing policies 143

To configure an active or passive VLAN type:

Step Action

1 From the Device Manager menu bar, choose VLAN > VLANs.
The VLAN dialog box appears with the Basic tab displayed.
2 Select a VLAN and click IP.
The IP, VLAN dialog box appears with the IP Address tab displayed.

3 Click the DVMRP tab.

The DVMRP tab appears and displays the DVMRP configuration
options.

4 Disable the selected interface. In the Enable box, select false to

disable the interface.
5 Set the interface to passive or active by selecting passive or active
from the InterfaceType box for the selected interface.

6 Reenable the interface by selecting the true option from the Enable
box.
7 Click Apply to save the new configuration.

—End—

Configuring an active or passive port type

You can configure a port as active or passive when the interface is disabled.
To configure an active or passive port type:

Step Action

1 On the Device Manager, select a port.

2 From the Device Manager menu bar, choose Edit > Port.
The Port dialog box appears with the Interface tab displayed.

3 Click the DVMRP tab.

The DVMRP tab appears and displays the DVMRP configuration
options.
4 Disable the selected interface. In the Enable box, select false to
disable the interface.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
144 Configuring DVMRP using Device Manager

5 Set the interface to passive or active by selecting passive or active

from the InterfaceType box for the selected interface.

6 Reenable the interface by selecting the true option from the Enable
box.
7 Click Apply to save the new configuration.

—End—

Displaying DVMRP routing policy information

This section describes the procedures for displaying DVMRP configuration
information for an interface, VLAN, and port.
This section includes the following tasks:
• "Displaying DVMRP routing policy information for an interface" (page
144)
• "Displaying DVMRP routing policy information for a VLAN" (page 144)
• "Displaying DVMRP routing policy information for a port" (page 145)

You can display DVMRP routing policy information for an interface, VLAN,
or port.

Displaying DVMRP routing policy information for an interface

To display DVMRP routing policy information for an interface:

Step Action

1 From the Device Manager menu bar, choose IP > DVMRP.

The DVMRP dialog box appears with the Globals tab displayed.
2 Select the Interface Advance tab.
The DVMRP Interface Advance tab appears and displays the
DVMRP configuration settings.

—End—

Displaying DVMRP routing policy information for a VLAN

To display DVMRP routing policy information for a VLAN:

Step Action

1 From the Device Manager menu bar, choose VLAN > VLANs.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring DVMRP routing policies 145

The VLAN dialog box appears with the Basic tab displayed.

2 Select a VLAN and click IP.

The IP, VLAN dialog box appears with the IP Address tab displayed.
3 Click the DVMRP tab.
The DVMRP tab appears and displays the DVMRP configuration
settings.

—End—

Displaying DVMRP routing policy information for a port

To display DVMRP routing policy information for a port:

Step Action

1 On the Device Manager, select a port.

2 From the Device Manager menu bar, choose Edit > Port.
The Port dialog box appears with the Interface tab displayed.

3 Click the DVMRP tab.

The DVMRP tab appears and displays the DVMRP configuration
settings.

—End—

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
146 Configuring DVMRP using Device Manager

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 147

Configuring PIM using Device Manager

The Ethernet Routing Switch 8600 supports two modes of Protocol
Independent Multicast: sparse mode (SM) and source specific multicast
(SSM):
• PIM-SM supports multicast groups spread out across large areas of a
company or the Internet.
• PIM-SSM optimizes PIM-SM by simplifying the many-to-many model
(servers-to-receivers).

For more information about PIM concepts and terminology, see Configuring
IP Routing Operations (NN46205-500).
The Ethernet Routing Switch 8600 supports two modes of Protocol
Independent Multicast: sparse mode (SM) and source specific multicast
(SSM). For information about PIM-SM, see "Configuration prerequisites"
(page 148); for information on PIM-SSM, see "Configuring Source Specific
Multicast" (page 169).
Protocol Independent Multicast-Sparse Mode (PIM-SM) supports multicast
groups spread out across large areas of a company or the Internet:
• What makes PIM-SM protocol-independent? PIM-SM does not maintain
its own, or depend on, a specific multicast protocol to maintain unicast
routing tables. PIM-SM uses the routing table information from any
underlying unicast routing protocol, such as RIP or OSPF.
• How does it multicast? PIM-SM sends one stream of data to the network
where it is replicated to all interested receivers.
• What is sparse mode? Instead of using a push model. PIM-SM uses a
pull model that receivers use to pull down multicast traffic. For sparsely
populated networks, PIM-SM is more efficient than dense-mode
protocols because it sends multicast traffic only to those routers that
belong to a specific multicast group and that choose to receive the traffic.

The Ethernet Routing Switch 8600 supports the following for PIM-SM:
• RP functionality

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
148 Configuring PIM using Device Manager

• Redundant RP configuration where several RPs can be configured for

the same groups
• RP load sharing where several RPs can be configured in the same PIM
domain
• BSR functionality
• Redundant BSR functionality
• MBR functionality to connect a PIM-SM domain to a DVMRP domain.
When you configure an Ethernet Routing Switch 8600 with MBR
functionality, you can have some interfaces running PIM-SM and other
interfaces running DVMRP to connect a PIM-SM domain to a DVMRP
domain.

ATTENTION
You must configure and enable PIM on the circuitless IP interface before
configuring PIM on the RP. To configure PIM-SM RP for a circuitless IP interface,
see Configuring BGP Services (NN46205-510).

For more information about PIM-SM concepts and terminology, see "IP
Multicast concepts" (page 15).
For instructions on how to configure PIM static source groups, see "Viewing
and editing multicast routes using Device Manager" (page 193).
This section describes the following topics:
• "Configuration prerequisites" (page 148)
• "Enabling PIM-SM globally" (page 150)
• "Enabling static RP" (page 153)
• "Enabling PIM on a brouter port" (page 156)
• "Configuring a candidate bootstrap router" (page 159)
• "Viewing the current BSR information" (page 159)
• "Enabling PIM on a VLAN interface" (page 161)
• "Viewing and editing PIM interface parameters" (page 164)
• "Viewing PIM-SM neighbor parameters" (page 165)
• "Viewing the RP Set parameters" (page 166)
• "Configuring a candidate RP" (page 167)
• "Configuring Source Specific Multicast" (page 169)

Configuration prerequisites
Before you can configure PIM-SM, you must configure an IP interface. For
information, see Configuring IP Routing Operations (NN46205-500).

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuration prerequisites 149

Step Action

1 Disable DVMRP from the interface where you want to configure

PIM-SM because you cannot configure PIM-SM and DVMRP on
the same interface.

ATTENTION
Changing the configuration from PIM to DVMRP, or from DVMRP to PIM,
is not recommended while multicast traffic is flowing on the network.

For information about disabling DVMRP, see "Enabling DVMRP on a

VLAN" (page 112).
A switch can have a mix of DVMRP and PIM-SM interfaces if it is
configured as an multicast border router (MBR).
An interface can only be configured with one multicast routing
protocol at a time (PIM-SM or DVMRP).

2 Configure a unicast protocol (RIP or OSPF) globally and on the

interfaces where you want to configure PIM-SM.
For information about RIP and OSPF, see Configuring IP Routing
Operations (NN46205-500).
PIM-SM requires a unicast protocol to use to multicast traffic within
the network when performing the Reverse Path Forwarding (RFP)
check. PIM-SM uses the information from the unicast routing table
to create and maintain the shared and shortest multicast tree that
enables PIM-enabled routers to communicate. The unicast routing
table must contain a route to every multicast source in the network
as well as routes to PIM entities like the RPs and BSR.

3 Enable PIM-SM globally.

4 Enable PIM-SM on individual interfaces.

5 Configure one or several RPs for the groups that are used by a
multicast application in the network.

6 Configure one or several BSRs to propagate RP information to all

switches in the network.
7 If connecting a PIM-SM domain to a DVMRP domain, configure
the switch connecting the domains as a MBR switch with the
corresponding PIM-SM interfaces enabled with PIM-SM, and the
DVMRP interfaces enabled with DVMRP.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
150 Configuring PIM using Device Manager

ATTENTION
Routes to sources in a PIM domain must not have a lower cost through the
DVMRP domain for multicast routing from these sources to work properly. MBR
switches must be configured with this design guideline in mind.

—End—

Enabling PIM-SM globally

PIM-SM is required for IGMP. When you enable PIM-SM globally and on a
particular interface, the IGMP parameters take effect.

ATTENTION
To enable PIM-SSM globally, see "Enabling Source Specific Multicast globally"
(page 170). Also note that when you change from one mode to another, an
information message appears to remind you that traffic does not stop immediately.

To enable PIM-SM globally:

Step Action

1 From the Device Manager menu bar, choose IP > PIM.

The PIM dialog box appears with the Globals tab displayed (Figure
69 "PIM dialog box, Globals tab" (page 151)).

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Enabling PIM-SM globally 151

Figure 69
PIM dialog box, Globals tab

2 Click Mode: sm (sparse mode).

ATTENTION
You can use static RP when SSM is enabled for groups outside the SSM
range.

3 Select the Enable box.

4 Click Apply.
For more information, see Table 31 "PIM Globals tab fields" (page
152).

—End—

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
152 Configuring PIM using Device Manager

Table 31
PIM Globals tab fields
Field Description
Mode Configures the mode on the routing switch: sm (sparse mode) or
ssm (source-specific multicast).
Enable Enables or disables PIM.
Mbr (Multicast Border Configures the router as a PIM multicast border router (PMBR).
Router) PMBRs connect PIM domains to other multicast routing domains
and the rest of the Internet. In particular, the MBR on an Ethernet
Routing Switch 8600 permits the connection of a PIM-SM domain to
a DVMRP domain.
JoinPruneInterval Specifies how long to wait (in seconds) before the PIM router sends
out the next join/prune message to its upstream neighbors.
The range is from 1 to 18724, and the default is 60 seconds.
RegisterSuppTimer Specifies how long (in seconds) the DR suppresses sending
registers to the RP. The timer starts when the DR receives a
Register Stop message from the RP.
The range is from 6 to 65535, and the default is 60 seconds.
UniRouteChgTimeOut
Specifies how often (in seconds) the switch polls the routing
table manager (RTM) for unicast routing information updates
to be used by PIM.
The range is from 2 to 65535, and the default is 5 seconds.

ATTENTION
Lowering this value increases how often the switch polls the
RTM. This can affect the performance of the switch, especially
when there is a lot of traffic is flowing through the switch.

DiscardDataTimeOut Specifies how long (in seconds) to discard data until the Join is
received from the RP. An ipmc discard record is created after a
register packet is sent, until the timer expires or when a Join is
received.
The range is from 5 to 65535, and the default is 60 seconds.
CRPADVTimeOut Specifies how often (in seconds) that routers configured as candidate
RPs send C-RP advertisement messages. When this timer expires,
the C-RP sends an advertisement message to the elected BSR.
The range is from 5 to 26214, and the default is 60 seconds.
BootStrapPeriod Specifies the interval (in seconds) that the elected BSR waits
between originating bootstrap messages.
The range is from 5 to 32757, and the default is 60 seconds.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Enabling static RP 153

Field Description
StaticRP Enables or disables the Static RP feature. You can use static RP
configure a static entry for a rendezvous point (RP). A static RP
permits communication with switches from other vendors that do not
use the BSR mechanism.
ActivityChkInterval Specifies the activity check interval for polling PIM SG traffic activity
information. The possible interval values are 15, 30, or 210. The
default interval is 210.
FwdCacheTimeOut PIM forward cache expiry value in seconds. This value is used in
aging PIM mroutes in seconds. This value has the range of 10 to
86400. The default value is 210.

Enabling static RP
With static RP, you can configure a static entry for a rendezvous point
(RP). When configured, static RP ignores the BSR mechanism and uses
the statically configured RPs only. This feature allows static RP-enabled
Ethernet Routing Switch 8600s to communicate with switches from other
vendors that do not use the BSR mechanism.

For more information about static RP and other PIM-SM concepts, see
"IP Multicast concepts" (page 15).

Configuration considerations
Before you can configure a static RP, you must enable the following:
1. PIM-SM
2. Static RP

After meeting these prerequisites, keep in mind the following configuration

considerations:
• You cannot configure a static RP-enabled switch as a BSR or as a C-RP.
• All dynamically learned BSR information is lost. However, if you disable
static RP, the switch loses the static RP information and regains the
BSR functionality.
• Static RPs do not age. They cannot time out.
• Switches do not advertise static RPs, so, if a new PIM neighbor joins
the network, it does not know about the static RP unless it is configured
with that static RP.
• Configure all the switches in the network (including switches from other
vendors) to map to the same RP.
• In a PIM domain with both static and dynamic RP switches, the static RP
switches cannot have one of their (local) interfaces configured as RP.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
154 Configuring PIM using Device Manager

• To avoid a single point of failure, you can configure redundant static RPs
for the same group prefix. If there is a mix of Nortel and other vendor’s
switches across the network, ensure that all switches or routers use the
same active RP because other vendors use different algorithms to elect
the active RP. Ethernet Routing Switch 8600s use the hash function
defined in the PIM-SM standard to elect the active RP; other vendors
can use the lowest IP address to break the tie.
• Static RP configured on the switch is assumed to be alive as long as the
switch has a unicast route to the network for the static RP. If the switch
loses this route, the static RP is invalidated, and the hash algorithm is
invoked to remap all affected groups. If the switch regains this route,
the static RP is validated and the hash algorithm is invoked to remap
the affected groups.

Enabling static RP procedure

To enable static RP:

Step Action

1 From the Device Manager menu bar, choose IP > PIM.

The PIM dialog box appears with the Globals tab displayed (Figure
69 "PIM dialog box, Globals tab" (page 151)).
2 Click Mode: sm (sparse mode).

3 Click Enable.
4 Click Static RP.

5 Click Apply.
Information messages appear to remind you that traffic does not
stop immediately, and that RP information learned through the BSR
is lost.

ATTENTION
Since a Static RP-enabled switch cannot be configured as a BSR, the
Current BSR tab disappears from this dialog box after you click Apply.

6 Click Yes to continue.

—End—

Configuring static RP
To configure a static RP:

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Enabling static RP 155

Step Action

1 From the Device Manager menu bar, choose IP > PIM.

The PIM dialog box appears with the Globals tab displayed.

2 Click the Static RP tab.

The Static RP tab appears Figure 70 "PIM dialog box, Static RP
tab" (page 155).
Figure 70
PIM dialog box, Static RP tab

3 Click Insert.
The PIM, Insert Static RP dialog box appears Figure 71 "PIM dialog
box, Insert Static RP dialog box" (page 155).
Figure 71
PIM dialog box, Insert Static RP dialog box

For more information, see Table 32 "PIM Static RP tab fields" (page
156).

—End—

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
156 Configuring PIM using Device Manager

Table 32
PIM Static RP tab fields
Field Description
GroupAddress The IP address of the multicast group. When combined with the
group mask, it identifies the range of the multicast addresses
that the RP handles.
GroupMask The address mask of the multicast group. When combined
with the group address, it identifies the range of the multicast
addresses that the RP handles.
Address The IP address of the static RP.
Status Shows the current status of the static RP entry. The status is
valid when the switch has a unicast route to the network for the
static RP and is invalid otherwise.

Enabling PIM on a brouter port

When you enable PIM on a particular interface, you must also enable it
globally. Otherwise, PIM does not work. See "Enabling PIM-SM globally"
(page 150).
To enable PIM on a brouter port:

Step Action

1 On the Device Manager, select a port.

2 From the Device Manager menu bar, choose Edit > Port > IP.
The Port dialog box appears with the IP Address tab displayed.

3 Click the PIM tab.

The PIM tab appears Figure 72 "Port dialog box, PIM tab" (page
157).

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Enabling PIM on a brouter port 157

Figure 72
Port dialog box, PIM tab

4 Click Enable.

5 Click Apply.
6 Click Close.
For more information, see Table 33 "PIM tab fields" (page 157)

—End—

Table 33
PIM tab fields
Field Description
Enable Enables (true) or disables (false) PIM for the specified brouter
port.
Mode Displays the mode currently running on the routing switch.
IntfType Indicates the interface type as active or passive.
HelloInterval Specifies how long to wait (in seconds) before the PIM router
sends out the next hello message to neighboring routers. The
default is 30 seconds.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
158 Configuring PIM using Device Manager

Field Description
JoinPruneInterval Specifies how long to wait (in seconds) before the PIM
router sends out the next join/prune message to its upstream
neighbors. The default is 60 seconds.
CBSRPreference Sets your preference for this local interface to become
a Candidate BSR. The Candidate BSR with the highest
BSR-priority and address is referred to as the preferred BSR.
The default is -1, which indicates that the current interface is
not a Candidate BSR.

Changing the interface type

Before you change the state (active or passive) of PIM on a brouter port,
you must first disable PIM to prevent any instability in the PIM operations,
especially when neighbors are present or when streams are received.
To change the state of PIM on a brouter port, use the following procedure:

Step Action

1 On the Device Manager, select a port.

2 From the Device Manager menu bar, choose Edit > Port > IP.
The Port dialog box appears with the IP Address tab displayed.

3 Click the PIM tab.

The PIM tab appears (Figure 72 "Port dialog box, PIM tab" (page
157)).
Make sure that Enable is not selected. If a check mark appears next
to Enable, disable PIM by clearing the Enable box.
4 Click Apply.

5 Click Close.

—End—

To reenable PIM on the brouter port:

Step Action

1 Follow steps 1 through 3 above.

2 Select Enable.
3 Click Apply.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Viewing the current BSR information 159

4 Click Close.

—End—

Configuring a candidate bootstrap router

PIM-SM cannot run without a bootstrap router (BSR). Although a PIM-SM
domain can have only one active BSR, you can configure additional routers
as candidate BSRs (C-BSRs). C-BSRs provide backup protection in case
the primary BSR fails.
The C-BSR with the highest configured priority becomes the BSR for the
domain. If two C-BSRs have equal priority, the candidate with the higher IP
address becomes the BSR. If you add a new C-BSR with a higher priority to
the domain, it automatically becomes the new BSR.
To configure a C-BSR:

Step Action

1 On the device view, select a port.

2 From the Device Manager menu bar, choose Edit > Port >IP.
The Port dialog box appears with the IP Address tab displayed.

3 Click the PIM tab.

The PIM tab appears (Figure 72 "Port dialog box, PIM tab" (page
157)).

4 Click Enable.
5 Set the CBSRPreference. The C-BSR with the highest
BSR-preference and address becomes the active BSR. The default
is -1, which indicates that the current interface is not a C-BSR.

6 Click Apply.

—End—

Viewing the current BSR information

To view the current BSR information:

ATTENTION
To view and configure the Current BSR tab, you must disable StaticRP in the
IP > PIM > Globals tab. Disabling static RP results in the loss of the static RP
configuration information.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
160 Configuring PIM using Device Manager

Step Action

1 From the Device Manager menu bar, choose IP > PIM.

The PIM dialog box appears with the Globals tab displayed.

2 Click the Current BSR tab.

The Current BSR tab appears Figure 73 "PIM dialog box, Current
BSR tab" (page 160).
Figure 73
PIM dialog box, Current BSR tab

For more information, see Table 34 "PIM Current BSR tab fields"
(page 160).

—End—

Table 34
PIM Current BSR tab fields
Field Description
Address The IP address of the current BSR for the local PIM domain.
FragmentTag A randomly generated number that distinguishes fragments belonging
to different Bootstrap messages. Fragments belonging to the same
Bootstrap message carry the same Fragment Tag.
HashMask The mask used in the hash function to map a group to one of the C-RPs
from the RP-Set. The hash-mask allows a small number of consecutive
groups (for example, 4) to always hash to the same RP.
Priority The priority of the current BSR. The Candidate BSR (C-BSR) with the
highest BSR-priority and address (referred to as the preferred BSR) is
elected as the BSR for the domain.
BootStrapTimer When the Bootstrap Timer expires, the BSR sends out Bootstrap
messages.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Enabling PIM on a VLAN interface 161

Enabling PIM on a VLAN interface

When you enable PIM on a particular VLAN, you must also enable it globally.
Otherwise, PIM does not work. See "Enabling PIM-SM globally" (page 150).
To enable PIM on a VLAN:

Step Action

1 From the Device Manager menu bar, choose VLAN > VLANs.
The VLAN dialog box appears with the Basic tab displayed.

2 Select the VLAN ID that you want to configure with PIM.

Several buttons on the bottom of the dialog box become available.

3 Click IP.
The IP, VLAN dialog box appears with the IP Address tab displayed
Figure 74 "IP VLAN dialog box" (page 161).
Figure 74
IP VLAN dialog box

4 Click the PIM tab.

The PIM tab appears (Figure 75 "IP VLAN dialog box, PIM tab"
(page 162)).

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
162 Configuring PIM using Device Manager

Figure 75
IP VLAN dialog box, PIM tab

5 Select the Enable box.

6 Click Apply.
7 Click Close.
For more information, see Table 35 "VLAN PIM tab fields" (page 162)

—End—

Table 35
VLAN PIM tab fields
Field Description
Enable Enables (true) or disables (false) PIM.
Mode Displays the mode currently running on the routing switch. The
valid modes are SSM and Sparse. This is a read-only field.
IntfType Specifies the type of interface: active or passive.
HelloInterval Specifies how long to wait (in seconds) before the PIM router
sends out the next hello message to neighboring routers. The
default is 30 seconds.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Enabling PIM on a VLAN interface 163

Field Description
JoinPruneInterval Specifies how long to wait (in seconds) before the PIM
router sends out the next join/prune message to its upstream
neighbors. The default is 60 seconds.
CBSRPreference Sets your preference for this local interface to become
a Candidate BSR. The Candidate BSR with the highest
BSR-priority and address is referred to as the preferred BSR.
The default is -1, which indicates that the current interface is
not a Candidate BSR.

Changing the VLAN interface type

Before you change the state (active or passive) of PIM on a VLAN interface,
you must first disable PIM to prevent any instability in the PIM operations,
especially when neighbors are present or when streams are received.
To change the state of PIM on a VLAN interface, use the following procedure:

Step Action

1 From the Device Manager menu bar, choose VLAN > VLANs.
The VLAN dialog box appears with the Basic tab displayed.

2 Select the VLAN ID that you want to configure with PIM.

3 Click IP.
The IP, VLAN dialog box appears with the IP Address tab displayed
(Figure 74 "IP VLAN dialog box" (page 161)).

4 Click the PIM tab.

The PIM tab appears (Figure 75 "IP VLAN dialog box, PIM tab"
(page 162)).
Make sure that Enable is not selected. If a check mark appears next
to Enable, disable PIM by clearing the check box.

5 Click Apply.
6 Click Close.

—End—

To reenable PIM on the VLAN interface:

Step Action

1 Follow steps 1 through 4.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
164 Configuring PIM using Device Manager

2 Select the Enable box.

3 Click Apply.

4 Click Close.

—End—

Viewing and editing PIM interface parameters

To view or edit PIM parameters for a brouter port:

Step Action

1 From the Device Manager menu bar, choose IP > PIM.

The PIM dialog box appears with the Globals tab displayed.

2 Click the Interfaces tab.

The PIM dialog box, Interfaces tab appears Figure 76 "PIM dialog
box, Interfaces tab" (page 165).
3 Edit the desired fields by clicking on them and selecting the new
values.

ATTENTION
Before you change the state (active or passive) of a PIM interface using
the Interface Type field, first disable PIM to prevent any instability in the
PIM operations, especially when neighbors are present or when streams
are received.
For instructions on disabling PIM on a brouter port and changing the state
of a PIM interface, see "Changing the interface type" (page 158).
For instructions on disabling PIM on a VLAN interface and changing the
state of PIM interface, see "Changing the VLAN interface type" (page
163).

4 Click Apply.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Viewing PIM-SM neighbor parameters 165

Figure 76
PIM dialog box, Interfaces tab

For more information, see Table 36 "PIM Interfaces tab fields" (page
165).

—End—

Table 36
PIM Interfaces tab fields
Field Description
IfIndex Interface Index.
Address The IP address of the PIM interface.
NetMask The network mask for the IP address of the PIM interface.
Mode The configured mode of this interface. The valid modes are SSM
and Sparse. This is a read-only field.
DR The router with the highest IP address on a LAN designated to
perform these tasks.
HelloInterval Specifies how long to wait (in seconds) before the PIM switch sends
out the next hello message to neighboring switches. The default
is 30 seconds.
JoinPruneInterval Specifies how long to wait (in seconds) before the PIM switch sends
out the next join/prune message to its upstream neighbors. The
default is 60 seconds.
CBSRPreference Sets your preference for this local interface to become a Candidate
BSR. The Candidate BSR with the highest BSR-priority and address
is referred to as the preferred BSR. The default is -1, which indicates
that the current interface is not a Candidate BSR.
OperState Indicates the status of PIM on this interface: enabled or disabled.

Viewing PIM-SM neighbor parameters

To view PIM-SM neighbor parameters:

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
166 Configuring PIM using Device Manager

Step Action

1 From the Device Manager menu bar, choose IP > PIM.

The PIM dialog box appears with the Globals tab displayed (Figure
69 "PIM dialog box, Globals tab" (page 151)).
2 Click the Neighbors tab.
The Neighbors tab appears Figure 77 "PIM dialog box, Neighbors
tab" (page 166).
Figure 77
PIM dialog box, Neighbors tab

For more information, see Table 37 "PIM Neighbors tab fields" (page
166).

—End—

Table 37
PIM Neighbors tab fields
Field Description
Address The IP address of the PIM neighbor.
IfIndex The slot/port number or VLAN ID of the interface used to reach this
PIM neighbor.
UpTime The elapsed time since this PIM neighbor last became a neighbor
of the local router.
ExpiryTime The time remaining before this PIM neighbor times out.

Viewing the RP Set parameters

RP Set is a list of rendezvous point addresses. The bootstrap router (BSR)
constructs this list from C-RP advertisements and then distributes it to all
PIM routers in the PIM domain for the BSR.
To view the RP Set parameters:

Step Action

1 From the Device Manager menu bar, choose IP > PIM.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring a candidate RP 167

The PIM dialog box appears with the Globals tab displayed (Figure
69 "PIM dialog box, Globals tab" (page 151)).

2 Click the RP Set tab.

The RP Set tab appears Figure 78 "PIM dialog box, RP Set tab"
(page 167).
Figure 78
PIM dialog box, RP Set tab

For more information, see Table 38 "PIM RP Set tab fields" (page
167).

—End—

Table 38
PIM RP Set tab fields
Field Description
GroupAddress The IP address of the multicast group. When combined with the group
mask, it identifies the prefix that the local router uses to advertise itself
as a C-RP.
GroupMask The address mask of the multicast group. When combined with the group
address, it identifies the prefix that the local router uses to advertise itself
as a C-RP.
Address The IP address of the C-RP.
HoldTime The time specified in a C-RP advertisement that the BSR uses to time out
the RP. When the BSR receives an advertisement for the RP, it restarts
the timer. If no advertisement arrives before the timer expires, the BSR
removes that RP from the RP set.
ExpiryTime The time remaining before this C-RP times out.

Configuring a candidate RP
The following steps describe how to add a candidate rendezvous point
(C-RP) to the RP Set.
To configure a C-RP:

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
168 Configuring PIM using Device Manager

Step Action

1 From the Device Manager menu bar, choose IP > PIM.

The PIM dialog box appears with the Globals tab displayed (Figure
69 "PIM dialog box, Globals tab" (page 151)).
2 Click the Candidate RP tab.
The Candidate RP tab appears Figure 79 "PIM dialog box, Candidate
RP tab" (page 168).
Figure 79
PIM dialog box, Candidate RP tab

3 Click Insert.
The PIM, Insert Candidate dialog box appears Figure 80 "PIM dialog
box, Insert Candidate RP dialog box" (page 168).
Figure 80
PIM dialog box, Insert Candidate RP dialog box

For more information, see Table 39 "PIM Candidate RP tab fields"

(page 169).

—End—

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring Source Specific Multicast 169

Table 39
PIM Candidate RP tab fields
Field Description
GroupAddress The IP address of the multicast group. When combined with the group
mask, it identifies the prefix that the local router uses to advertise itself
as a C-RP.
GroupMask The address mask of the multicast group. When combined with the group
address, it identifies the prefix that the local router uses to advertise itself
as a C-RP.
InterfaceAddress The IP address of the C-RP. This address must be one of the local
PIM-SM enabled interfaces.

You can only configure one interface on an Ethernet Routing Switch 8600
for multiple groups; that is, you cannot configure multiple interfaces for
multiple groups.

Using the GroupMask value, you can configure a Candidate RP for

several groups in one configuration. For example, with a Candidate RP
configuration with a GroupAddress value of 224.0.0.0 and a GroupMask of
240.0.0.0, you can configure the Candidate RP for a multicast range from
224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255.

Configuring Source Specific Multicast

Source Specific Multicast (SSM) optimizes PIM-SM by simplifying the
many-to-many model (servers-to-receivers). Since most multicast
applications distribute content to a group in one direction, SSM uses a
one-to-many model that only uses a subset of the PIM-SM features. This
model is more efficient and puts less of a load on multicast routing devices.

For more information about SSM concepts and terminology, see "IP
Multicast concepts" (page 15).

Configuration prerequisites
SSM is a global configuration. When you enable SSM on a switch, it is
enabled on all interfaces running PIM. On an SSM-enabled switch, SSM
behavior is limited to the SSM group range. For non-SSM groups, the
protocol behavior is PIM-SM.
Before you can configure SSM, you must configure an IP interface. For
information, see Configuring IP Routing Operations (NN46205-500).

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
170 Configuring PIM using Device Manager

Step Action

1 Configure a unicast protocol (RIP or OSPF) globally and on the

interfaces where you want to configure PIM.
For information about RIP and OSPF, see Configuring IP Routing
Operations (NN46205-500).
PIM requires a unicast protocol in order to forward multicast traffic
within the network when performing the Reverse Path Forwarding
(RFP) check. PIM-SM uses the information from the unicast routing
table to create and maintain the shared and shortest multicast tree
that enables PIM-enabled routers to communicate. The unicast
routing table must contain a route to every multicast source in the
network as well as to routes to PIM entities like the RPs and BSR.

2 Enable PIM globally.

—End—

Enabling Source Specific Multicast globally

To enable SSM globally:

Step Action

1 From the Device Manager menu bar, choose IP > PIM.

The PIM dialog box appears with the Globals tab displayed (Figure
69 "PIM dialog box, Globals tab" (page 151)).
2 Click Mode: ssm (source specific multicast).

3 Select the Enable box.

4 Click Apply.
An information message appears to remind you that traffic does
not stop immediately.

5 Click Yes to continue.

—End—

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring Source Specific Multicast 171

ATTENTION
After you enable PIM in SSM mode, the IGMP parameters take effect. To take full
advantage of SSM, enable IGMPv3 if hosts attached to the switch are running
IGMPv3 or configuring the SSM table.
For information about configuring IGMPv3, see "Configuring IGMP parameters on
a brouter port" (page 68) or "Configuring IGMP parameters on a VLAN" (page 72).
For information about configuring the SSM group range and channel table, see
"Configuring the SSM range and global parameters" (page 91) or "Configuring the
SSM channel table" (page 94).

Table 31 "PIM Globals tab fields" (page 152) describes the PIM Globals
tab fields.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
172 Configuring PIM using Device Manager

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 173

Configuring PGM using Device Manager

Pragmatic General Multicast (PGM) provides reliable, duplicate-free delivery
of data packets while reducing network congestion. PGM guarantees
that receivers either can receive all data packets from transmissions and
retransmissions, or can detect unrecoverable data packet loss. PGM is
particularly well suited to push applications with relatively small information
transfers such as stock and news updates. DVMRP is used between routers
to exchange multicast routing information. For more information about
DVMRP concepts and terminology, see "IP Multicast concepts" (page 15).
The Ethernet Routing Switch 8600 implements the network element portion
of PGM. It supports the following PGM options:
• NAK list
• FEC (forward error correction)

The Ethernet Routing Switch 8600 cannot serve as a designated local

repairer (DLR) because DLRs require a large amount of buffering.
Therefore, the null negative acknowledgement (NNAK) parameters in
Device Manager are not supported.
This section describes the following topics:
• "Configuration prerequisites" (page 174)
• "Enabling PGM globally" (page 174)
• "Enabling PGM on an interface" (page 176)
• "Configuring VLANs with PGM" (page 178)
• "Viewing and editing PGM interface parameters" (page 180)
• "Graphing PGM interface statistics" (page 181)
• "Graphing SPM and RDATA statistics for an interface" (page 181)
• "Graphing NAK, NNAK, and NCF statistics for an interface" (page 183)
• "Viewing PGM session parameters" (page 185)
• "Graphing PGM session statistics" (page 186)

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
174 Configuring PGM using Device Manager

• "Graphing SPM statistics for a session" (page 186)

• "Graphing NAK statistics for a session" (page 188)
• "Viewing the Retransmit parameters" (page 190)

Configuration prerequisites
To configure and use PGM on an Ethernet Routing Switch 8600, the switch
must be running IP Multicast with IGMP snooping or an IP Multicast protocol
such as DVMRP or PIM-SM. If PGM is configured without IP Multicast
enabled on a switch, PGM cannot run and cannot be used.
To configure PGM on a switch, you need to perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Configure and enable IP Multicast on the switch, particularly on the

interfaces where PGM is required.
2 Enable PGM globally.

3 Enable PGM on the required interfaces.

—End—

Enabling PGM globally

To enable PGM globally:

Step Action

1 From the Device Manager menu bar, choose IP > PGM.

The PGM dialog box appears with the Globals tab displayed Figure
81 "PGM dialog box, Globals tab" (page 175).

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Enabling PGM globally 175

Figure 81
PGM dialog box, Globals tab

2 In the Enable box, select enabled.

3 Click Apply.
For more information, see Table 40 "PGM, Globals tab fields" (page
175)

—End—

Table 40
PGM, Globals tab fields
Field Description
Enable Enables or disables PGM globally.
State Displays the current state (up or down) of PGM.
SessionLifeTime Specifies the length of idle time (in seconds) after a session
times out. Idle time is when no SPMs are received from the
upstream. The default is 300 seconds.
NnakGenerate This option is not supported in this release.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
176 Configuring PGM using Device Manager

Field Description
MaxReXmitStates Configures the maximum number of retransmit state entries
that the switch can create. Each entry has a unique NAK
sequence number. The default is 200 entries.
TotalReXmitStates Displays the total number of retransmit state entries in the
retransmit table.
MaxSessions Configures the maximum number of source path state sessions
allowed on the switch. The default is 100 sessions.
TotalSessions Displays the total number of source path state sessions in the
PGM session entries table.
TotalReXmitStatesTimedOut Displays the total number of retransmit state entries that were
removed because they timed out.
TotalUniqueNaks Displays the total number of unique NAKs received.
TotalUniqueParityNaks Displays the total number of unique parity NAKs received.
MaxNakRate Configures the maximum number of NAK transmission packets
allowed per second.
(This parameter is not currently implemented.)

Enabling PGM on an interface

To enable PGM on an interface:

Step Action

1 On the device view, select a port.

2 From the Device Manager menu bar, choose Edit > Port > IP.
The Port dialog box appears with the IP Address tab displayed.

3 Click the PGM tab.

The PGM tab appears Figure 82 "Port dialog box, PGM tab" (page
177).

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Enabling PGM on an interface 177

Figure 82
Port dialog box, PGM tab

4 In the Enable box, select enabled.

5 Click Apply.
For more information, see Table 41 "Port dialog box, PGM tab fields"
(page 177).

—End—

Table 41
Port dialog box, PGM tab fields
Field Description
Enable Enables or disables PGM on this interface.
State Indicates the current state (up or down) of PGM.
NakReXmitInterval Specifies how long to wait for an NCF (in milliseconds) before
retransmitting the NAK. The default is 1000 milliseconds.
MaxNakReXmitRate Configures the maximum number of NAK retransmission packets
allowed per second. The default is 2.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
178 Configuring PGM using Device Manager

Field Description
NakRdataInterval Specifies how long to wait for RDATA (in milliseconds) after
receiving a NCF. The default is 10000 milliseconds.
NakEliminateInterval Specifies the length of time (in milliseconds) that a network element
(NE) eliminates duplicate NAKs. When this interval expires, the
NE suspends NAK elimination until the first duplicate arrives. After
this NAK is forwarded, the NE once again eliminates duplicate
NAKs for the specified interval. This parameter must be less than
NakRdataInterval. The default is 5000 milliseconds.

Configuring VLANs with PGM

To enable PGM on a VLAN:

Step Action

1 From the Device Manager menu bar, choose VLAN > VLANs.
The VLAN dialog box appears with the Basic tab displayed.
2 Select the VLAN Id that you want to configure with PGM.
Several buttons on the bottom of the dialog box become available.
3 Click IP.
The IP, VLAN dialog box appears with the IP Address tab displayed
Figure 83 "IP VLAN dialog box" (page 178).
Figure 83
IP VLAN dialog box

4 Click the PGM tab.

The PGM tab appears (Figure 84 "IP VLAN dialog box, PGM tab"
(page 179)).

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring VLANs with PGM 179

Figure 84
IP VLAN dialog box, PGM tab

5 In the Enable box, select enabled.

6 Click Apply.
For more information, see Table 42 "IP, VLAN dialog box, PGM tab
fields" (page 179).

—End—

Table 42
IP, VLAN dialog box, PGM tab fields
Field Description
Enable Enables or disables PGM on this interface.
State Indicates the current state (up or down) of PGM.
NakReXmitInterval Specifies how long to wait for a NCF (in milliseconds) before
retransmitting the NAK. The default is 1000 milliseconds.
MaxNakReXmitRate Configures the maximum number of NAK retransmission packets
allowed per second. The default is 2.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
180 Configuring PGM using Device Manager

Field Description
NakRdataInterval Specifies how long to wait for RDATA (in milliseconds) after
receiving a NCF. The default is 10000 milliseconds.
NakEliminateInterval Specifies the length of time (in milliseconds) that a network element
(NE) eliminates duplicate NAKs. When this interval expires, the
NE suspends NAK elimination until the first duplicate arrives. After
this NAK is forwarded, the NE once again eliminates duplicate
NAKs for the specified interval. This parameter must be less than
NakRdataInterval. The default is 5000 milliseconds.

Viewing and editing PGM interface parameters

To view or edit PGM interface parameters:

Step Action

1 From the Device Manager menu bar, choose IP > PGM.

The PGM dialog box appears with the Globals tab displayed (Figure
81 "PGM dialog box, Globals tab" (page 175)).

2 Click the Interfaces tab.

The Interfaces tab appears Figure 85 "PGM dialog box, Interfaces
tab" (page 180).
3 Click on a desired field to edit it.

4 Click Apply.
Figure 85
PGM dialog box, Interfaces tab

For more information, see Table 43 "PGM Interfaces tab fields"

(page 181).

—End—

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Graphing PGM interface statistics 181

Table 43
PGM Interfaces tab fields
Field Description
Cct Displays the circuit number of the selected interface.
State Displays the current state (up or down) of PGM.
Enable Enables or disables PGM.
NakReXmitInterval Specifies how long to wait for a NCF (in milliseconds) before
retransmitting the NAK. The default is 1000 milliseconds.
MaxNakReXmitRate Configures the maximum number of NAK retransmission packets
allowed per second. The default is 2.
NakRdataInterval Specifies how long to wait for RDATA (in milliseconds) after
receiving a NCF. The default is 10000 milliseconds.
NakEliminateInterval Specifies the length of time (in milliseconds) that a network element
(NE) eliminates duplicate NAKs. When this interval expires, the
NE suspends NAK elimination until the first duplicate arrives. After
this NAK is forwarded, the NE once again eliminates duplicate
NAKs for the specified interval. This parameter must be less than
NakRdataInterval. The default is 5000 milliseconds.

Graphing PGM interface statistics

The following sections discuss the interface statistics that you can graph.
• "Graphing SPM and RDATA statistics for an interface" (page 181)
• "Graphing NAK, NNAK, and NCF statistics for an interface" (page 183)

ATTENTION
All graphing tables have the following buttons: Line Chart, Area Chart, Bar Chart,
Pie Chart, Export Data, Print table, Clear Counter, Close, and Help.

Graphing SPM and RDATA statistics for an interface

You can graph statistics on all source path message (SPM) and RDATA
packets that go through a selected interface.
To graph SPM and RDATA statistics:

Step Action

1 From the Device Manager menu bar, choose IP > PGM.

The PGM dialog box appears with the Globals tab displayed.

2 Click the Interfaces tab.

The Interfaces tab appears.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
182 Configuring PGM using Device Manager

3 Select an interface.
The Graph button at the bottom of the dialog box becomes available.

4 Click the Graph button.

The PGM Interface dialog box appears with the Spms/Rdata tab
displayed (Figure 86 "PGM Interface Graph dialog box, Spms/Rdata
tab" (page 182)).
Figure 86
PGM Interface Graph dialog box, Spms/Rdata tab

For more information, see Table 44 "Interface Spms/Rdata tab

fields" (page 182).

—End—

Table 44
Interface Spms/Rdata tab fields
Field Description
TotalReXmitStates Displays the total number of retransmit state entries for this interface.
TotalReXmitTimedOut Displays the total number of timed out retransmit state entries for
this interface.
InSpms Displays the number of SPMs received on this interface.
OutSpms Displays the number of SPMs sent out from this interface.
InParitySpms Displays the number of parity SPMs received on this interface.
OutParitySpms Displays the number of parity SPMs sent out from this interface.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Graphing PGM interface statistics 183

Field Description
InSpmPortErrors Displays the number of SPMs discarded because they were
received on the wrong interface.
InRdata Displays the number of RDATA packets received on this interface.
OutRdata Displays the number of RDATA packets sent out from this interface.
InParityRdata Displays the number of parity RDATA packets received on this
interface.
OutParityRdata Displays the number of parity RDATA packets sent out from this
interface.
InRdataPortErrors Displays the number of RDATA packets discarded because they
were received on the wrong interface.
InRdataNoSessionErrors Displays the number of RDATA packets discarded because there
was no active session.

Graphing NAK, NNAK, and NCF statistics for an interface

To graph NAK, NNAK, and NCF statistics:

Step Action

1 From the Device Manager menu bar, choose IP > PGM.

The PGM dialog box appears with the Globals tab displayed.

2 Click the Interfaces tab.

The Interfaces tab appears.
3 Select an interface.
The Graph button at the bottom of the dialog box becomes available.

4 Click the Graph button.

The PGM Interface dialog box appears with the Spms/Rdata tab
displayed.

5 Click the Naks/Nnaks/Ncfs tab.

The Naks/Nnaks/Ncfs tab appears (Figure 87 "PGM Interface Graph
dialog box, Naks/Nnaks/Ncfs tab" (page 184)).

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
184 Configuring PGM using Device Manager

Figure 87
PGM Interface Graph dialog box, Naks/Nnaks/Ncfs tab

For more information, see Table 45 "Interface Naks/Nnaks/Ncfs tab

fields" (page 184).

—End—

Table 45
Interface Naks/Nnaks/Ncfs tab fields
Field Description
UniqueNaks Displays the number of unique NAKs received on this interface.
InNaks Displays the number of NAKs received on this interface.
OutNaks Displays the number of unique NAKs sent out from this
interface.
UniqueParityNaks Displays the number of unique parity NAKs received on this
interface.
InParityNaks Displays the number of parity NAKs received on this interface.
OutParityNaks Displays the number of parity NAKs sent out from this interface.
InNakPortErrors Displays the number of NAKs discarded because they were
received on the wrong interface.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Viewing PGM session parameters 185

Field Description
InNakNoSessionErrors Displays the number of NAKs discarded because there was
no active session.
InNakSeqErrors Displays the number of NAKs discarded because they were
out of sequence.
InParityNakTgErrors Displays the number of parity NAKs discarded because they
were out of the parity TG window.
InNnaks Displays the number of NNAKs received on this interface.
OutNnaks Displays the number of NNAKs sent out from this interface.
InParityNnaks Displays the number of parity NNAKs received on this interface.
OutParityNnaks Displays the number of parity NNAKs sent out from this
interface.
InNnakPortErrors Displays the number of NNAKs discarded because they were
received on the wrong interface.
InNnakNoSessionErrors Displays the number of NNAKs discarded because there was
no active session.
InNcfs Displays the number of NCFs received on this interface.
OutNcfs Displays the number of NCFs sent out from this interface.
InParityNcfs Displays the number of parity NCFs received on this interface.
OutParityNcfs Displays the number of parity NCFs sent out from this interface.
InNcfPortErrors Displays the number of NCFs discarded because they were
received on the wrong interface.
InNcfNoSessionErrors Displays the number of NCFs discarded because there was
no active session.
InRedirectNcfs Displays the number of redirected NCFs received on this
interface.

Viewing PGM session parameters

To view PGM session parameters:

Step Action

1 From the Device Manager menu bar, choose IP > PGM.

The PGM dialog box appears with the Globals tab displayed.

2 Click the Session tab.

The Session tab appears Figure 88 "PGM dialog box, Session tab"
(page 186).

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
186 Configuring PGM using Device Manager

Figure 88
PGM dialog box, Session tab

For more information, see Table 46 "PGM Session tab fields" (page
186).

—End—

Table 46
PGM Session tab fields
Field Description
Source Displays the source IP address for this session.
Group Displays the destination group address for this session.
SourcePort Displays the source port for this session.
GlobalId Displays the global ID for this session.
UpstreamAddress Displays the IP address of the upstream interface for this session.
UpstreamIfCct Displays the circuit number of the upstream interface for this session.
TrailEdgeSeq Displays the trailing edge sequence of the transfer window.
LeadEdgeSeq Displays the leading edge sequence of the transfer window.

Graphing PGM session statistics

The following sections discuss the session statistics that you can graph.
• "Graphing SPM statistics for a session" (page 186)
• "Graphing NAK statistics for a session" (page 188)

ATTENTION
All graphing tables have the following buttons: Line Chart, Area Chart, Bar Chart,
Pie Chart, Export Data, Print table, Clear Counter, Close, and Help.

Graphing SPM statistics for a session

You can graph statistics on all SPM packets for a selected session.
To graph SPM statistics:

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Graphing PGM session statistics 187

Step Action

1 From the Device Manager menu bar, choose IP > PGM.

The PGM dialog box appears with the Globals tab displayed.

2 Click the Session tab.

The Session tab appears.

3 Select a session.
The Graph button at the bottom of the dialog box becomes available.

4 Click the Graph button.

The PGM Session dialog box appears with the Spms/Rdata tab
displayed Figure 89 "PGM Session Graph dialog box, Spms/Rdata
tab" (page 187).
Figure 89
PGM Session Graph dialog box, Spms/Rdata tab

For more information, see Table 47 "Session Spms/Rdata tab fields"

(page 187).

—End—

Table 47
Session Spms/Rdata tab fields
Field Description
TotalReXmitStates Displays the total number of retransmit state entries during this
session.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
188 Configuring PGM using Device Manager

Field Description
TotalReXmitTimedOut Displays the total number of timed out retransmit state entries during
this session.
InSpms Displays the number of SPMs received during this session.
OutSpms Displays the number of SPMs sent out during this session.
InParitySpms Displays the number of parity SPMs received during this session.
OutParitySpms Displays the number of parity SPMs sent out during this session.
InRdata Displays the number of RDATA packets received during this session.
OutRdata Displays the number of RDATA packets sent out during this session.
InParityRdata Displays the number of parity RDATA packets received during this
session.
OutParityRdata Displays the number of parity RDATA packets sent out during this
session.
InRdataNoStateErrors Displays the number of RDATA packets discarded because there
was no active session.

Graphing NAK statistics for a session

To graph NAK statistics:

Step Action

1 From the Device Manager menu bar, choose IP > PGM.

The PGM dialog box appears with the Globals tab displayed.
2 Click the Session tab.
The Session tab appears.
3 Select a session.
The Graph button at the bottom of the dialog box becomes available.

4 Click the Graph button.

The PGM Session dialog box appears with the Spms/Rdata tab
displayed.

5 Click the Naks/Nnaks/Ncfs tab.

The Naks/Nnaks/Ncfs tab appears (Figure 90 "PGM Session Graph
dialog box, Naks/Nnaks/Ncfs tab" (page 189)).

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Graphing PGM session statistics 189

Figure 90
PGM Session Graph dialog box, Naks/Nnaks/Ncfs tab

For more information, see Table 48 "Session Naks/Nnaks/Ncfs tab

fields" (page 189).

—End—

Table 48
Session Naks/Nnaks/Ncfs tab fields
Field Description
UniqueNaks Displays the number of unique NAKs received during this session.
InNaks Displays the number of NAKs received during this session.
OutNaks Displays the number of unique NAKs sent out during this session.
UniqueParityNaks Displays the number of unique parity NAKs received during this session.
InParityNaks Displays the number of parity NAKs received during this session.
OutParityNaks Displays the number of parity NAKs sent out during this session.
InNakSeqErrors Displays the number of NAKs discarded because they were out of
sequence.
InNnaks Displays the number of NNAKs received during this session.
OutNnaks Displays the number of NNAKs sent out during this session.
InParityNnaks Displays the number of parity NNAKs received during this session.
OutParityNnaks Displays the number of parity NNAKs sent out during this session.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
190 Configuring PGM using Device Manager

Field Description
InNcfs Displays the number of NCFs received during this session.
OutNcfs Displays the number of NCFs sent out during this session.
InParityNcfs Displays the number of parity NCFs received during this session.
OutParityNcfs Displays the number of parity NCFs sent out during this session.
InRedirectNcfs Displays the number of redirected NCFs received during this session.

Viewing the Retransmit parameters

To view the retransmit parameters:

Step Action

1 From the Device Manager menu bar, choose IP > PGM.

The PGM dialog box appears with the Globals tab displayed.
2 Click the Retransmit tab.
The Retransmit tab appears Figure 91 "PGM dialog box, Retransmit
tab" (page 190).
Figure 91
PGM dialog box, Retransmit tab

For more information, see Table 49 "PGM Retransmit tab fields"

(page 190).

—End—

Table 49
PGM Retransmit tab fields
Field Description
Source Displays the source IP address for this entry.
Group Displays the destination group address for this entry.
SourcePort Displays the source port of this retransmit state.
GlobalId Displays the global ID for this entry.
SelectiveSeqNum Displays the selected sequence number for this entry.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Viewing the Retransmit parameters 191

Field Description
ParityTgSeqNum Displays the requested parity TG sequence number for this entry.
ReqParityTgCount Displays the requested number of missing parity packets of the
specified TG.
UpStreamCct Displays the upstream circuit number from this entry.
DownStream Displays the list of downstream interfaces from this entry.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
192 Configuring PGM using Device Manager

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 193

Viewing and editing multicast routes

using Device Manager
Using the Multicast tabs, you can view information about any Layer 3 IP
Multicast protocol interface set up on the switch.
This section describes the following topics:
• "Viewing multicast route information" (page 193)
• "Viewing multicast next hop information" (page 194)
• "Viewing and editing multicast interface information" (page 196)
• "Configuring multicast static source groups" (page 197)
• "Troubleshooting DVMRP" (page 201)
• "Configuring IP Multicast software forwarding" (page 204)
• "Configuring the Mroute stream limit" (page 206)
• "Configuring the resource usage counter for multicast streams" (page
207)

Viewing multicast route information

To view multicast route information:

From the Device Manager menu bar, choose IP > Multicast.

The Multicast dialog box appears with the Routes tab displayed.

Figure 92
Multicast dialog box, Routes tab

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
194 Viewing and editing multicast routes using Device Manager

For more information, see Table 50 "Routes tab fields" (page 194).

Table 50
Routes tab fields
Field Description
Group The IP Multicast group address for this entry that contains multicast
routing information.
Source The network address that, when combined with the corresponding
route SourceMask value, identifies the source containing multicast
routing information.
SourceMask The network mask that, when combined with the corresponding
route Source value, identifies the multicast source.
UpstreamNeighbor The address of the upstream neighbor (for example, RPF neighbor)
from where IP datagrams from these sources to this multicast
address are received. 0.0.0.0 displays if the network is local.
Interface The DVMRP interface, slot/port number, or VLAN ID where IP
datagrams sent by these multicast sources to this multicast address
are received.
ExpiryTime The amount of time remaining before this entry is aged out. The
value 0 indicates that the entry is not subject to aging.
Protocol The routing protocol through which this route was learned. Currently
only DVMRP is supported.

Viewing multicast next hop information

The Multicast Next Hops tab displays all multicast next hop information.
To open the Next Hops tab:

Step Action

1 From the Device Manager menu bar, choose IP > Multicast.

The Multicast dialog box appears with the Routes tab displayed.

2 Click the Next Hops tab.

The Next Hops tab appears Figure 93 "Multicast dialog box, Next
Hops tab" (page 195).

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Viewing multicast next hop information 195

Figure 93
Multicast dialog box, Next Hops tab

For more information, see Table 51 "Next Hops tab fields" (page
195).

—End—

Table 51
Next Hops tab fields
Field Description
Group The IP Multicast group for this entry that specifies a next hop on an
outgoing interface.
Source The network address that, when combined with the corresponding
next hop SourceMask value, identifies the source for this entry that
specifies a next hop on an outgoing interface.
SourceMask The network mask that, when combined with the corresponding next
hop Source value, identifies the source for this entry that specifies a
next hop on an outgoing interface.
OutInterface The DVMRP interface slot/port number or VLAN ID for the outgoing
interface for this next hop.
Address The address of the next hop specific to this entry. For most
interfaces, it is identical to the next hop group. NBMA interfaces,
however, can have multiple next hop addresses out a single
outgoing interface.
State An indication of whether or not the outgoing interface and next hop
represented by this entry is currently being used to forward IP
datagrams. A Value of "forwarding" indicates it is currently being
used; "pruned" indicates it is not being used.
ExpiryTime The minimum amount of time remaining before this entry is aged
out. The value 0 indicates that the entry is not subject to aging.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
196 Viewing and editing multicast routes using Device Manager

Field Description
ClosestMemberHops The minimum number of hops between this router and any member
of this IP Multicast group reached through this next hop on this
outgoing interface. Any IP Multicast datagrams for the group that
have a TTL less than this number of hops is not forwarded to the
next hop.
Protocol The routing protocol where this next hop was learned. Currently
only DVMRP is supported.

Viewing and editing multicast interface information

To view and edit multicast interface information:

Step Action

1 From the Device Manager menu bar, choose IP > Multicast.

The Multicast dialog box appears with the Routes tab displayed.

2 Click the Interfaces tab.

The Interfaces tab appears Figure 94 "Multicast dialog box,
Interfaces tab" (page 196).

3 Click the desired fields to edit.

4 Click Apply.
Figure 94
Multicast dialog box, Interfaces tab

For more information, see Table 52 "Multicast dialog box, Interfaces

tab fields" (page 197).

—End—

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring multicast static source groups 197

Table 52
Multicast dialog box, Interfaces tab fields
Field Description
Interface The slot/port number or VLAN ID for this entry that contains this information.
Ttl The datagram time-to-live (TTL) threshold for the interface. Any IP Multicast
datagrams with a TTL less than this threshold is not forwarded out of the
interface. The default value of 1 means that all multicast packets are forwarded
out of the interface.
Protocol The routing protocol running on this interface. Currently only DVMRP is
supported.

Configuring multicast static source groups

With static source groups, you can configure static source-group entries in
the DVMRP or PIM multicast routing table. Neither DVMRP nor PIM can
prune these entries from the distribution tree. In other words, even if there
are no receivers in the group, the multicast stream for a static source-group
entry stays active.
This topic contains the following sections:
• "Configuration considerations" (page 197)
• "Viewing and editing static source groups" (page 198)
• "Adding a new static source group" (page 199)
• "Deleting a static source group" (page 200)

Configuration considerations
The Ethernet Routing Switch 8600 supports static source groups using
one of several multicast protocols: DVMRP, PIM-SM (sparse mode), and
PIM-SSM (source specific multicast). For conceptual information about
DVMRP, PIM, and static source groups, see "IP Multicast concepts" (page
15).
Before you can configure a static source group, you must globally enable
one of the following protocols:
• DVMRP - To globally enable DVMRP, see "Enabling DVMRP globally"
(page 108).
• PIM sparse mode (SM) - To globally enable PIM-SM, see "Enabling
PIM-SM globally" (page 150).
• PIM source specific multicast mode (SSM) - To globally enable
PIM-SSM, see "Enabling Source Specific Multicast globally" (page 170).

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
198 Viewing and editing multicast routes using Device Manager

After configuring static source groups, keep the following points in mind:
• The maximum number of static source groups must not exceed 1 024.
• Disabling DVMRP or PIM causes the switch to deactivate all of the
static source groups. When you reenable DVMRP or PIM, the switch
reactivates the static source groups.
• Using DVMRP or PIM-SM
In DVMRP and PIM-SM configurations, the static source-group feature
works for both specific source addresses and subnet addresses. This is
achieved by using the SrcSubnetMask field, see "Adding a new static
source group" (page 199).
When the Network Mask is configured as 255.255.255.255, the full
source address is used to match the (S,G) which is the specific source
case. When the network mask field is configured as a subnet mask
for the source, only the source subnet is used to match (S,G)s. The
first entry in Figure 95 "Multicast dialog box, Static Source Group tab"
(page 199) shows a subnet configuration and the second entry shows a
source specific configuration.
• Using PIM-SSM
In PIM-SSM configurations, static source groups have the following
limitations:
— Subnets: SSM static source groups work only with specific IP
addresses. This means that static source groups cannot work
with source subnets, so the mask must be a full 32-bit mask,
255.255.255.255, and the source must be a host address.
— SSM Channels: Static source groups cannot conflict with SSM
channels and vice versa. When you configure a static source group
or an SSM channel, the switch performs a consistency check to
make sure there are no conflicts. You cannot map one group (G)
to different sources, for both a static source group and an SSM
channel. For SSM channel information, see "Configuring the SSM
channel table" (page 94).
If a group is already mapped to a source and you try to map it to a
different source, the switch detects the conflict and displays an error
message. For example, if G1 is already defined in the SSM channel
table as (S1,G1), you cannot configure G1 as static source group
(S2,G1). However, you can configure the same entry (S1,G1) in both
the SSM channel table and as a static source group. As long as there
is no conflict between the two tables, the configuration is allowed.

Viewing and editing static source groups

To view and edit static source groups:

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring multicast static source groups 199

Step Action

1 From the Device Manager menu bar, choose IP > Multicast.

The Multicast dialog box appears with the Routes tab displayed.

2 Click the Static Source Group tab.

The Static Source Group tab appears Figure 95 "Multicast dialog
box, Static Source Group tab" (page 199).
Figure 95
Multicast dialog box, Static Source Group tab

For more information, see Table 53 "Static Source Group tab fields"
(page 199)

—End—

Table 53
Static Source Group tab fields
Field Description
GroupAddress The multicast group IP address for this static source-group
entry.
SourceSubnet The multicast source address for this static source-group
entry.
How you configure the source address depends on the
protocol you are using and in what mode. For more
information, see "Configuration considerations" (page 197)
.
SrcSubnetMask The subnet mask of the source for this static source-group
entry.

Adding a new static source group

The following steps describe how to add a new static source group. An
attempt to add a duplicate of an existing source-group entry results in an
error message.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
200 Viewing and editing multicast routes using Device Manager

Step Action

1 From the Device Manager menu bar, choose IP > Multicast.

The Multicast dialog box appears with the Routes tab displayed.

2 Click the Static Source Group tab.

The Static Source Group dialog box appears.

3 Click Insert.
The Multicast, Insert Static Source Group dialog box appears Figure
96 "Multicast, Insert Static Source Group dialog box" (page 200).
Figure 96
Multicast, Insert Static Source Group dialog box

4 Complete the information in the dialog box and click Insert.

ATTENTION
To avoid conflicts between the static source group table and the SSM
channel table, see "Configuration considerations" (page 197) before filling
out the fields in this dialog box.

—End—

Deleting a static source group

To delete a static source group:

Step Action

1 From the Device Manager menu bar, choose IP > Multicast.

The Multicast dialog box appears with the Routes tab displayed.

2 Click the Static Source Group tab.

The Static Source Group tab appears.

3 Select the static source group that you want to delete.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Troubleshooting DVMRP 201

The Delete button is highlighted Figure 97 "Static Source Group

tab" (page 201).
Figure 97
Static Source Group tab

4 Click Delete.

—End—

Troubleshooting DVMRP
The Mroute-HW tab provides an exact hardware view of existing IP
Multicast records and information on sender and receiver ports for every
stream. When you select this tab, you are presented with a table and three
additional tabs (Prunes, Sources, and EgressVLANs) that allow you to
gather additional information on multicast hardware records. This section
describes these new tabs and explains how to access them.
This topic contains the following sections:
• "Mroute-HW, Prunes tab fields" (page 203)
• "Mroute-HW, Sources tab fields" (page 203)
• "Mroute-HW, Egress VLANs tab fields" (page 204)

To perform DVMRP troubleshooting:

Step Action

1 From the Device Manager menu bar, choose IP > Multicast.

The Multicast dialog box appears with the Routes tab displayed.
2 Click the Mroute-HW tab.
The Mroute-HW tab appears (Figure 98 "Multicast dialog box,
Mroute-HW tab" (page 202)).
By default, all three buttons (Prunes, Sources, and EgressVLANs)
in the dialog box are disabled.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
202 Viewing and editing multicast routes using Device Manager

3 Click on any row in the table (representing the output of Mroute-HW).

The Prunes, Sources, and EgressVLANs buttons are enabled
(highlighted).

4 Click either the Prunes, Sources, or Egress Vlans buttons.

Depending on your selection, the Prunes (Figure 99 "Multicast dialog
box, Mroute-HW tab, Prunes tab" (page 203)), Sources (Figure 100
"Multicast dialog box, Mroute-HW tab, Sources tab" (page 203)),
or Egress VLANs (Figure 101 "Multicast dialog box, Mroute-HW
tab, Egress VLANs tab" (page 204)) dialog box appears displaying
further information about the stream selected in the table.

5 Click the Close button to return to the Multicast- Mroute-HW tab.

Figure 98
Multicast dialog box, Mroute-HW tab

For more information, see Table 54 "Multicast dialog box, Mroute-HW

tab fields" (page 202).

—End—

Table 54
Multicast dialog box, Mroute-HW tab fields
Field Description
GroupAddress The IP Multicast group address for the multicast stream.
Subnet
The network address of the source subnet that has sources sending
IP Multicast traffic to the GroupAddress.

ATTENTION
There can be several sources sending to that Group. You can use
the Source tab to view these sources.

Invlan The ingress VLAN ID where the traffic emanates for the multicast stream.
Pruned True indicates that the multicast stream has been pruned back. False
indicates it has not.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Troubleshooting DVMRP 203

Mroute-HW, Prunes tab fields

Figure 99 "Multicast dialog box, Mroute-HW tab, Prunes tab" (page 203)
displays the Prunes tab. The output of this tab shows all of the prunes
received for the Group address in the multicast stream selected from the
Mroute-HW table.

Figure 99
Multicast dialog box, Mroute-HW tab, Prunes tab

For more information, see Table 55 "Prunes tab fields" (page 203).

Table 55
Prunes tab fields
Field Description
Neighbor The IP address of the downstream neighbor from whom the prune
has been received.
Prune Timer The time left for the neighboring downstream router to send the
graft message.

Mroute-HW, Sources tab fields

Figure 100 "Multicast dialog box, Mroute-HW tab, Sources tab" (page
203) displays the Sources tab. With the Sources tab, you can view all the
sources on the subnet that send to the particular group selected in the
Mroute-HW table.

Figure 100
Multicast dialog box, Mroute-HW tab, Sources tab

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
204 Viewing and editing multicast routes using Device Manager

For more information, see Table 56 "Sources tab fields" (page 204)

Table 56
Sources tab fields
Field Description
Source Address The IP addresses of the sources on this particular subnet sending
traffic to the multicast group for the selected entry in the Mroute-HW
table.
Ingress Port The corresponding ingress port in the multicast stream selected
from the Mroute-HW table.

Mroute-HW, Egress VLANs tab fields

Figure 101 "Multicast dialog box, Mroute-HW tab, Egress VLANs tab" (page
204) displays the Egress VLANs tab. With the Egress VLANs tab, you can
view the egress VLANs for the streams corresponding to the selected entry
in the Mroute-HW (subnet, Group) entry.

Figure 101
Multicast dialog box, Mroute-HW tab, Egress VLANs tab

For more information, see Table 57 "Egress VLANs tab fields" (page 204)

Table 57
Egress VLANs tab fields
Field Description
Egress Vlan All the egress VLANs for the particular multicast stream selected
from the Mroute-HW table.
Egress Vlan Ports The corresponding ports for the particular multicast stream selected
from the Mroute-HW table.

Configuring IP Multicast software forwarding

The IP Multicast software forwarding feature enables the CPU to initially
forward IP Multicast data until a hardware record is created. The CPU
forwards the initial packets of a stream it receives and, at the same time,

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring IP Multicast software forwarding 205

creates a corresponding hardware record for any subsequent packets. The

advantage of this feature is that it avoids any initial data loss experienced by
multicast applications, and is most suited for low bandwidth.
The IP Multicast software forwarding is a global system configuration feature
that applies to all IP Multicast enabled interfaces and protocols. When you
enable IP Multicast software forwarding, be aware that the hardware is
still responsible for forwarding IP Multicast traffic. Only initial data traffic is
forwarded by the software. Thus, the intention is not to replace hardware
forwarding with software forwarding. By default, the feature is disabled.

ATTENTION
To avoid overloading the CPU, Nortel recommends that you do not use the IP
Multicast software forwarding feature for video multicast applications.

To configure IP Multicast software forwarding:

Step Action

1 From the Device Manager menu bar, choose IP > Multicast.

The Multicast dialog box appears with the Routes tab displayed.
2 Click the Mcast SW Forwarding tab.
The Mcast SW Forwarding tab appears (Figure 102 "Multicast dialog
box, Mcast SW Forwarding tab" (page 205)).
Figure 102
Multicast dialog box, Mcast SW Forwarding tab

3 Select the SWForwardingEnable box.

4 Click Apply to enable this feature.

The IP Multicast software forwarding feature is now enabled.

—End—

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
206 Viewing and editing multicast routes using Device Manager

Configuring the Mroute stream limit

To protect a CPU from multicast data packet bursts generated by malicious
applications, such as viruses that cause the CPU to reach 100 percent
utilization or that prevent the CPU from processing protocol packets or
management requests, you can limit the number of multicast streams. If
more than a certain number of multicast streams ingress to a CPU through
a port during a sampling interval, the port shuts down until the user or
administrator takes appropriate action.
To configure the multicast stream limit for a Mroute:

Step Action

1 From the Device Manger, click a port.

2 From the Device Manager menu bar, select Edit > Port > General.
The Interface tab appears (Figure 103 "Port box, Interface tab"
(page 206)).
Figure 103
Port box, Interface tab

3 Select the Mroute Stream Limit tab.

The Mroute Stream Limit tab appears (Figure 103 "Port box,
Interface tab" (page 206)).

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring the resource usage counter for multicast streams 207

Figure 104
Port dialog box, Mroute Stream Limit tab

4 Select the StreamLimitEnable box.

5 Edit any other desired fields.

6 Click Apply.
For more information, see Table 58 "Mroute Stream Limit tab fields"
(page 207)

—End—

Table 58
Mroute Stream Limit tab fields
Field Description
StreamLimitEnable Enables or disables mroute stream limit on the port.
StreamLimit Specifies the maximum number of multicast streams allowed to
ingress to the CPU through this port.
StreamTimerCheck Specifies the sampling period, in seconds, to check the number of
multicast streams that have ingressed the CPU through this port.

Configuring the resource usage counter for multicast streams

With the Ethernet Routing Switch 8600, you can query the number of
ingress and egress IP Multicast streams traversing your switch. After you
have set the thresholds for ingress and egress records, if the record usage
goes beyond the threshold, you are notified by a trap on the console, a
logged message, or both.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
208 Viewing and editing multicast routes using Device Manager

ATTENTION
If you do not set the thresholds, Device Manager displays only the ingress and
egress records that are currently in use.

To configure or query the number of ingress and egress IP Multicast streams

traversing your switch:

Step Action

1 From the Device Manager menu bar, select IP > Multicast.

The Multicast dialog box appears with the Routes tab displayed.

2 Select the Resource Usage tab.

The Resource Usage tab appears Figure 103 "Port box, Interface
tab" (page 206).
Figure 105
Multicast Dialog box, Resource Usage tab

For more information, see Table 59 "Records Usage tab fields"

(page 208).

—End—

Table 59
Records Usage tab fields
Field Description
Egress Records In-Use Displays the number of egress records (peps) traversing the
switch.
Ingress Records In-Use Displays the number of ingress records (source or group)
traversing the switch

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring the resource usage counter for multicast streams 209

Field Description
Egress Threshold Enter the egress threshold level (0 to 32767). A notification
message is sent if this value is exceeded.
Ingress Threshold Enter the ingress threshold level (0 to 32767). A notification
message is sent if this value is exceeded.
Send Trap Only Select enable to have trap only notification messages sent
when the threshold level is exceeded. Select disable if
selecting a different notification type. You can set only one
notification type
SendTrapAndLog Select enable to have trap and log notification messages
sent when the threshold level is exceeded. Select disable if
selecting a different notification type.
LogMsgOnly Select enable to have log only notification messages sent when
the threshold level is exceeded. Select disable if selecting a
different notification type.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
210 Viewing and editing multicast routes using Device Manager

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 211

Configuring multicast flow distribution

over MLT using Device Manager
Multicast flow distribution over MultiLink Trunking (MLT) provides a
mechanism for distributing multicast streams over a multilink trunk. With
MLT, you can distribute the load on different ports of the multilink trunk and
aim (whenever possible) to achieve an even distribution of the streams.
To configure multicast flow distribution over MLT, you must enable it globally
and per multilink trunk. For more information about MLT concepts and
terminology, see "IP Multicast concepts" (page 15).
This section describes the following topics:
• "Enabling multicast flow distribution globally" (page 211)
• "Enabling multicast flow distribution per multilink trunk" (page 214)

Enabling multicast flow distribution globally

To enable multicast flow distribution over MLT globally:

Step Action

1 From the Device Manager menu bar, choose Edit > Chassis.
The Chassis dialog box appears with the System tab displayed
Figure 106 "Chassis dialog box" (page 212).

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
212 Configuring multicast flow distribution over MLT using Device Manager

Figure 106
Chassis dialog box

2 Click the Mcast MLT Distribution tab.

The Mcast MLT Distribution tab appears Figure 107 "Mcast MLT
Distribution dialog box" (page 213).

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Enabling multicast flow distribution globally 213

Figure 107
Mcast MLT Distribution dialog box

3 Select Enable in the Enable box.

4 Optionally, enter a group IP address in the GrpMask box.

5 Optionally, enter a source IP address in the SrcMask box.

6 Optionally, select the RedistributionEnable box.

7 Click Apply.
When you select enable or disable or redistribution enable or disable,
the following information message appears:
Multicast distribution over MLT must be enabled/disable
d on both sides of the MLT, otherwise loops or traffic
interruption or traffic interruption may occur.
Do you want to continue?

8 Click Yes to continue or No to cancel the operation.

If you click Yes, multicast flow distribution over MLT is globally
configured.
For more information, see Table 60 "Mcast MLT Distribution tab
fields" (page 214).

—End—

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
214 Configuring multicast flow distribution over MLT using Device Manager

Table 60
Mcast MLT Distribution tab fields
Field Description
Enable Globally enables multicast flow distribution. The default is disabled.
GrpMask A group mask used when distributing multicast traffic over a multilink
trunk. The default is 255.255.255.255.
SrcMask A source mask used when distributing multicast traffic over a
multilink trunk. The default is 255.255.255.255.
RedistributionEnable Enable or disable the multicast MLT redistribution feature. The
default is disabled.

Enabling multicast flow distribution per multilink trunk

To enable multicast flow distribution per multilink trunk:

Step Action

1 From the Device Manager menu bar, choose VLAN > MLT/LACP.
The MLT_LACP dialog box appears with the LCAP Global Trunks
tab displayed Figure 108 "MLT_LACP dialog box" (page 214).
Figure 108
MLT_LACP dialog box

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Enabling multicast flow distribution per multilink trunk 215

2 Click the MultiLink/LACP Trunks tab.

The MultiLink/LACP Trunks tab appears (Figure 109 "MultiLink/LACP
Trunks tab" (page 215)).
Figure 109
MultiLink/LACP Trunks tab

3 Click Insert.
The MLT_LACP, Insert MultiLink/LACP Trunks dialog box appears
(Figure 110 "MLT_LACP, Insert MultiLink/LACP Trunks dialog box"
(page 215)).
Figure 110
MLT_LACP, Insert MultiLink/LACP Trunks dialog box

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
216 Configuring multicast flow distribution over MLT using Device Manager

4 In the Id box, type the Id number for the MultiLink Trunk.

5 In the SvlanPortType box, select a stacked VLAN port type.

6 In the PortType, select the port type.

7 In the Name box, type a name for the MultiLink Trunk port.

8 In the PortMembers box, select the ports to belong to the split

multilink trunk port. by clicking the ellipsis (...), select a port in the
box that appears and click Ok.

9 In the VlanIds box, click the click the ellipsis (...), select a VLAN to
belong to the MultiLink Trunk port in the box that appears and click
Ok.
10 In the MltType box, select the MLT type.

11 If splitMLT is chosen, in the SmltId box, enter the SMLT ID, from
1 - 32.

ATTENTION
the SMLT ID has to be paired on each aggregation switch. The SMLT ID is
the identification number that the IST uses to determine the split multilink
trunk to which send information. This number is identified between the
two aggregation switches.

12 In the MulticastDistribution box, select enable to activate multicast

flow distribution.
13 In the NtStgEnable box, check the box to ensure that the spanning
tree group is in Nortel mode.

14 In the Aggregatable box, select disable.

15 Click Insert.
The MLT dialog box updates.
For more information, see Table 61 "MultiLink/LACP Trunks tab
fields" (page 217).

—End—

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Enabling multicast flow distribution per multilink trunk 217

Table 61
MultiLink/LACP Trunks tab fields
Field Description
Id A value that uniquely identifies the MultiLink Trunk associated with this
entry.
SvlanPortType Normal, UNI, or NNI stacked VLAN port.
PortType Access or trunk port.
Name The name given to the multilink trunk.
PortMembers The ports assigned to the multilink trunk.
VlanIds The VLANs to which the ports belong.
MltType The type of MLT. Options here include:
• normalMLT
• istMLT
• splitMLT
SmltId The split multilink trunk ID.
MulticastDistribution Enables or disables multicast flow distribution.
NtStgEnable Indicates whether this STG is operating in Nortel Mode or in Cisco Mode.
True is Nortel Mode, and false is Cisco Mode. The default setting is true.
Aggregatable Enables or disables the Link Aggregation on an multilink trunk. The
default is disable.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
218 Configuring multicast flow distribution over MLT using Device Manager

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 219

Configuring multicast MAC filtering

using Device Manager
With Multicast Media Access Control (MAC) filtering, you can create a
smaller flooding domain inside a VLAN. For a particular VLAN, you can
specify a multicast MAC address and a subset of ports. When clients send
data to a designated MAC address, only that subset of ports receives the
traffic. For more information about Multicast MAC filtering, see Configuring
IP Multicast Routing Protocols (NN46205-501).
With Multicast Media Access Control (MAC) filtering, you can create a
smaller flooding domain inside a VLAN. For a particular VLAN, you can
specify a multicast MAC address and a subset of ports. When clients send
data to a designated MAC address, only that subset of ports receives the
traffic. For more information about Multicast MAC filtering, see "IP Multicast
concepts" (page 15).
This section describes the following topics:
• "Configuring Layer 2 multicast MAC filtering" (page 219)
• "Configuring Layer 3 multicast MAC filtering" (page 222)

Configuring Layer 2 multicast MAC filtering

To configure the MAC address for Layer 2 multicast flooding:

Step Action

1 From the Device Manager menu bar, choose VLAN > VLANs.
The VLAN dialog box appears with the Basic tab displayed (Figure
111 "VLAN dialog box, Basic tab" (page 220)). The Basic tab
displays all defined VLANs, their configurations, and their current
status.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
220 Configuring multicast MAC filtering using Device Manager

Figure 111
VLAN dialog box, Basic tab

2 From the table, select a VLAN.

3 Click Bridge.
The Bridge dialog box appears with the FDB Aging tab displayed
(Figure 112 "Bridge, VLAN dialog box, FDB Aging tab" (page 220)).
Figure 112
Bridge, VLAN dialog box, FDB Aging tab

4 Click the Multicast tab.

The Multicast tab appears (Figure 113 "Bridge, VLAN dialog box,
Multicast tab" (page 220)).
Figure 113
Bridge, VLAN dialog box, Multicast tab

5 In the Multicast tab, click Insert.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring Layer 2 multicast MAC filtering 221

The Bridge, VLAN, Insert Multicast MAC dialog box appears Figure
114 "Bridge, VLAN, Insert Multicast MAC dialog box" (page 221).
Figure 114
Bridge, VLAN, Insert Multicast MAC dialog box

6 In the Address box, type the MAC address for the multicast flooding
domain.
7 Click the ellipsis (...) next to the ForwardingPorts box and choose
from the list of ports that appear.

8 Click Ok.
9 Click the ellipsis (...) next to the MltIds box and choose from the list
of MLT IDs that appear.

10 Click Ok.
11 After you finish entering the required information in the dialog box,
click Insert.
For more information, see Table 62 "Bridge, VLAN, Insert Multicast
tab fields" (page 221).

—End—

Table 62
Bridge, VLAN, Insert Multicast tab fields
Item Description
Address The MAC address for the multicast flooding domain.This field does not accept
MAC addresses beginning with 01:00:5e (01:00:5e:00:00:00 to 01:00:5e:ff:ff:ff
inclusive). If you attempt to use this type of address, the following error
message is displayed: Error: Invalid MAV address
ForwardingPorts The ports to be included in the multicast flooding domain.
MltIds The multilink trunks that must be included in the multicast flooding domain.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
222 Configuring multicast MAC filtering using Device Manager

Configuring Layer 3 multicast MAC filtering

In Layer 3, the Ethernet Routing Switch 8600 must be able to route an IP
frame to a unicast IP address and flood it with a destination multicast MAC
address. You must then manually define a static ARP entry that associates
an IP address with a multicast MAC, flooding ports, and multilink trunk.
To configure the MAC address for Layer 3 multicast flooding:

Step Action

1 From the Device Manager menu bar, choose IP > IP.

The IP dialog box appears with the Globals tab displayed (Figure
115 "IP dialog box" (page 222)).
Figure 115
IP dialog box

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring Layer 3 multicast MAC filtering 223

2 Click the Multicast ARP tab.

The Multicast ARP tab appears (Figure 115 "IP dialog box" (page
222)).
Figure 116
Multicast ARP tab

3 To add a MAC address, click the Insert button.

The Insert Multicast dialog box appears (Figure 117 "Insert Multicast
dialog box" (page 223)).
Figure 117
Insert Multicast dialog box

4 In the VlanId box, click the arrow choose the VLAN.

5 In the MacAddress box, type the MAC address.

6 In the IpAddress box, type the IP address.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
224 Configuring multicast MAC filtering using Device Manager

7 In the Ports box, click the ellipsis (...) and choose from the list of
ports that appear.

8 Click Ok.
9 In the Mltids box, choose from the list of Mltids.

10 After you finish entering the required information in the dialog box,
click Insert.
You return to the Multicast ARP tab (Figure 115 "IP dialog box"
(page 222)).
For more information, see Table 63 "Multicast ARP fields" (page
224).

—End—

Table 63
Multicast ARP fields
Item Description
VlanID The ID number of the VLAN for the multicast ARP.
MacAddress The MAC address assigned to the IP address in the multicast ARP. This field
does not accept MAC addresses beginning with 01:00:5e (01:00:5e:00:00:00
to 01:00:5e:ff:ff:ff inclusive). If you attempt to use this type of address, the
following error message is displayed: Error: Invalid MAV address
IPAddress The IP address of the multicast ARP.
Ports The ports that receive the multicast flooding.
MltIds The multilink trunks that must be included in the multicast flooding domain.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 225

Configuring IGMP using the CLI

The Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) is used by hosts to report
their IP Multicast group memberships to neighboring multicast routers.
Configure IGMP on a per-interface basis.
For more information about IGMP concepts and terminology, see "IP
Multicast concepts" (page 15).
This section describes the interface Layer 3 IGMP commands for the
Ethernet Routing Switch 8600.
The config ip igmp info command displays information about the
current global Layer 3 IGMP configuration.
This section includes the following topics:
• "Roadmap of IGMP commands" (page 226)
• "Configuring IGMP on an interface" (page 232)
• "Configuring fast leave mode" (page 240)
• "Configuring multicast access control for an IGMP interface" (page 242)
• "Configuring IGMP multicast router discovery options" (page 245)
• "Configuring IGMP interface static members" (page 248)
• "Configuring SSM dynamic learning and range group" (page 250)
• "Configuring the SSM channel table" (page 254)
• "Configuring IGMP Ethernet ports" (page 257)
• "Configuring multicast access control for an IGMP Ethernet port" (page
260)
• "Configuring IGMP on a VLAN" (page 262)
• "Configuring multicast access control for a VLAN" (page 267)
• "Configuring IGMP multicast route discovery on a VLAN" (page 270)
• "Configuring IGMP static members on a VLAN" (page 271)
• "Configuring IGMP fast leave members on a VLAN" (page 272)
• "Configuring multicast stream limitation" (page 273)

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
226 Configuring IGMP using the CLI

• "Configuring multicast stream limitation members on an interface" (page

275)
• "Configuring multicast stream limitation on an Ethernet port" (page 277)
• "Configuring multicast stream limitation on a VLAN" (page 278)
• "Configuring multicast stream limitation members on a VLAN" (page
279)
• "Showing multicast group trace for IGMP snooping" (page 281)
• "Displaying all IP IGMP show commands" (page 283)

Roadmap of IGMP commands

The following roadmap lists all the IGMP commands and their parameters.
After using the commands below to configure the Ethernet Routing Switch
8600, you can use the show commands to display information for a
particular feature.

To facilitate troubleshooting, the Ethernet Routing Switch 8600 also

provides one command (show ip igmp show-all) that lists all the show
commands for IP IGMP and displays their configuration output. "Showing
multicast group trace for IGMP snooping" (page 281).

ATTENTION
You must globally enable DVMRP or PIM multicasting on the switch for these
commands to take effect.

Use this list as a quick reference.

Command Parameter
config ip igmp interface <ipaddr> info

fast-leave <enable|disable>
flush <mrouter|sender|grp-member>
[<SenderAddress>] [<GroupAddress>]
last-memb-query-int <1/10_seconds>
proxy-snoop <enable|disable>
query-interval <seconds>

query-max-resp <1/10_seconds>
robustval <integer>
router-alert <enable|disable>
snoop <enable|disable>

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Roadmap of IGMP commands 227

Command Parameter
ssm-snoop <enable|disable>
version <integer>
show ip igmp interface
show ip igmp cache
show ip igmp group
show ip igmp router-alert
show ip igmp sender
show ip igmp snoop
config ip igmp fast-leave-mode
<one-user|multiple-user>
show ip igmp info
config ip igmp interface <ipaddr> info
access-control <name>
delete <HostAddress> <HostMask>
create <HostAddress> <HostMask>
<deny-tx|deny-rx|deny-both|allow-on
ly-tx|allow-only-rx|allow-only-both
>
mode <HostAddress> <HostMask> <deny
-tx|deny-rx|deny-both|allow-only-tx
|allow-only-rx|allow-only-both>
show ip igmp access
config ip igmp interface <ipaddr> info
mrdisc
max-advertisement-interval
<seconds>
max-initial advertisement-interval
<seconds>
max-initial-advertisements
<integer>
min-advertisement-interval
<seconds>
mrdisc-enable <enable|disable>
neighbor-dead-interval <seconds>
show ip igmp mrdisc
show ip igmp mrdisc-neighbors

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
228 Configuring IGMP using the CLI

Command Parameter
config ip igmp interface <ipaddr> info
static-members <FromGroupAddress-To
GroupAddress>
add <ports> <static|blocked>
create <ports> <static|blocked>
delete
remove <ports> <static|blocked>
show ip igmp static
config ip igmp ssm info
dynamic-learning <enable|disable>
ssm-grp-range group <value> mask
<value>
show ip igmp ssm-global
config ip igmp ssm ssm-channel info
create group <value> source <value>
delete group <value>
disable <all or group> [<GroupAdd
ress>]
enable <all or group> [<GroupAddre
ss>]
show ip igmp ssm-channel
config ethernet <ports> ip igmp info
fast-leave <enable|disable>
flush <mrouter|sender|grp-member>
[<SenderAddress>] [<GroupAddress>]
last-memb-query-int <1/10_seconds>
query-interval <seconds>
query-max-resp <1/10_seconds>
robustval <integer>
router-alert <enable|disable>
version <integer>
show ports info igmp [<ports>]
config ethernet <ports> ip igmp info
access-control <name>
create <HostAddress> <HostMask> <de
ny-tx|deny-rx|deny-both|allow-only-
tx|allow-only-rx|allow-only-both>

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Roadmap of IGMP commands 229

Command Parameter
delete <HostAddress> <HostMask>
mode <HostAddress> <HostMask> <deny
-tx|deny-rx|deny-both|allow-only-tx
|allow-only-rx|allow-only-both>
config vlan <vid> ip igmp info
del-mrouter <ports>
fast-leave <enable|disable>
flush <mrouter|sender| grp-member
>[<SenderAddress>] [<GroupAddress>]
last-memb-query-int <1/10_seconds>
mrouter <ports>
proxy-snoop <enable|disable>
query-interval <seconds>
query-max-resp <1/10_seconds>
robustval <integer>
router-alert <enable|disable>
snoop <enable|disable>
ssm-snoop <enable|disable>
version <integer>
show vlan info igmp [<vid>]
config vlan <vid> ip igmp info
access-control <name>
create <HostAddress> <HostMask> {de
ny-tx|deny-rx|deny-both|allow-only-
tx|allow-only-rx|allow-only-both>
delete <HostAddress> <HostMask>
mode <HostAddress> <HostMask> {deny
-tx|deny-rx|deny-both|allow-only-tx
|allow-only-rx|allow-only-both>
config vlan <vid> ip igmp mrdisc info
min-advertisement-interval
<seconds>
max-initial-advertisement-interval
<seconds>
max-initial-advertisements
<integer>
max-advertisement-interval
<seconds>

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
230 Configuring IGMP using the CLI

Command Parameter
mrdisc-enable <enable|disable>
neighbor-dead-interval <seconds>
config vlan <vid> ip igmp info
static-members <FromGroupAddre
ss-ToGroupAddress>
add <ports> <static|blocked>
create <ports> <static|blocked>
delete
remove <ports> <static|blocked>
config vlan <vid> ip igmp info
fast-leave-members
disable <ports>
enable <ports>
config ip igmp interface <ipaddr> info
stream-limit
enable
disable
max-streams <integer>
config ip igmp interface <ipaddr> info
stream-limit-members
enable <ports> max-streams <value>
disable <ports>
set <ports> max-streams <value>
show ip igmp stream-limit-interface
show ip igmp stream-limit-port
config ethernet <ports> ip igmp info
stream-limit
enable
disable
max-streams <integer>
config vlan <vid> ip igmp info
stream-limit
enable
disable
max-streams <integer>
config vlan <vid> ip igmp info
stream-limit-members

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuration prerequisites and notes 231

Command Parameter
enable <ports> max-streams <value>
disable <ports>
set <ports> max-streams <value>
show ip igmp snoop-trace [src
<value>] [grp <value>]
show ip igmp show-all [file
<value>]

Configuration prerequisites and notes

Before you can configure IGMP, you must prepare the router as follows:

Step Action

1 Configure an IP interface. For information, see Configuring IP

Routing Operations (NN46205-500).
2 Configure IGMP on a L2 interface by enabling IGMP snooping
or
Configure IGMP on a L3 interface by enabling multicast routing, for
example, DVMRP, PIM-SM, or PIM-SSM.
• To enable IGMP snooping on an interface, see "Configuring
IGMP on an interface" (page 232). To enable IGMP snooping on
a VLAN, see "Configuring IGMP on a VLAN" (page 262).
• To enable DVMRP or PIM-SM on an IP interface, first enable
them globally. (PIM-SSM is a global configuration; you cannot
enable it per interface.)
— To enable DVMRP globally, see "Configuring DVMRP
globally" (page 290).
— To enable PIM-SM globally, see "Configuring PIM-SM
globally" (page 351).
— To enable PIM-SSM globally, see "Configuring PIM-SSM
globally" (page 385).

—End—

ATTENTION
To drop IGMPv2 control packets that do not have the router alert option set,
use the config ip igmp interface command and disable the router-alert
&lt;enable|disable> parameter.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
232 Configuring IGMP using the CLI

Configuring IGMP on an interface

To configure IGMP on a specific interface, use the following command:
config ip igmp interface <ipaddr>
where
ipaddr indicates the IP address of the selected interface.
This command includes the following parameters:

config ip igmp interface <ipaddr>

followed by:
info Displays the access list of the IGMP interface.

fast-leave <enable|disable> Enables or disables the fast leave option on the interface.

flush <mrouter|sender|grp-m Flushes the specified table.

ember> [ <SenderAddress> ] [
<GroupAddress> ]
last-memb-query-int The maximum response time (in tenths of a second) that
<1/10_seconds> is inserted into group-specific queries sent in response
to leave group messages. It is also the time between
group-specific query messages. This value is not
configurable for IGMPv1.
Decreasing the value reduces the time to detect the loss
of the last member of a group.
• 1/10_seconds is an integer in the range from 0 to
255, and the default is 10 tenths of a seconds. Nortel
recommends configuring this value between 3 and 10
(equal to 0.3 – 1.0 seconds).
proxy-snoop Enables or disables the layer-3 proxy-snoop option.
<enable|disable>
query-interval <seconds> Sets the frequency (in seconds) that the host query
packets are transmitted on the interface.
• seconds is an integer in the range from 1 to 65535
with a default of 125.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring IGMP on an interface 233

config ip igmp interface <ipaddr>

followed by:
query-max-resp <1/10_second
The maximum response time (in tenths of a second)
s>
advertised in IGMPv2 general queries on this interface.
This value is not configurable for IGMPv1. Smaller
values allow a router to prune groups faster.
• 1/10_seconds is an integer value with a range of
0 to 255, and a default is 100 tenths of a seconds
(equal to 10 seconds).

ATTENTION
This value must be less than the query-interval.

robustval <integer> Allows tuning for the expected packet loss of a network.
• integer is an integer value with a range of 2 to 255
seconds. The default value is 2 seconds. Increase
the value if you expect the network to experience
some packet loss.
router-alert
Enables or disables the router alert option. When
<enable|disable> enabled, this parameter instructs the router to process
packets not directly addressed to it.

ATTENTION
To maximize your network performance, Nortel
recommends that you set this parameter according
to the version of IGMP currently in use:

• IGMPv1—Disable
• IGMPv2—Enable
• IGMPv3—Enable

snoop <enable|disable> Enables or disables the layer-3 snoop option.

ssm-snoop <enable|disable> Enables or disables support for PIM source-specific
multicast (SSM) on the snooping interface.
version <integer> Sets the version of IGMP that you want to configure on
this interface. For IGMP to function correctly, all routers
on a LAN must use the same version.
• integer is an integer value with a value of 1, 2 or 3.
The default value is 2 (IGMPv2).

Configuration example: IGMP on an interface

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
234 Configuring IGMP using the CLI

This configuration example uses the commands described above to perform

the following tasks:
• Set the last member query interval to 15 tenths of a seconds (equal
to 1.5 seconds).
• Set the query interval to 100 seconds.
• Set the query maximum response time to 15 tenths of a seconds (equal
to 1.5 seconds).
• Set the robustness value to 4 seconds.
• Enable IGMP version 3.
• Enable the fast leave option.
• Enable support for SSM on the snooping interface.

After configuring the parameters, use the info command to show a

summary of the results.

ERS-8606:5# config ip igmp interface 10.10.99.151

last-memb-query-int 15
ERS-8606:5/config/ip/igmp/interface/10.10.99.151#
query-interval 100
ERS-8606:5/config/ip/igmp/interface/10.10.99.151#
query-max-resp 50
ERS-8606:5/config/ip/igmp/interface/10.10.99.151#
robustval 4
ERS-8606:5/config/ip/igmp/interface/10.10.99.151#
ssm-snoop enable
ERS-8606:5/config/ip/igmp/interface/10.10.99.151#
version 3
ERS-8606:5/config/ip/igmp/interface/10.10.99.151#
fast-leave enable
ERS-8606:5/config/ip/igmp/interface/10.10.99.151# info
Sub-Context: access-list mrdisc static-members
Current Context:
last-memb-query-int : 15
query-interval : 100 secs
query-max-resp : 50
robustval : 4
version : 3
fast-leave : enable
ssm-snoop : enable

Showing IGMP interfaces

To display the information about the interfaces where IGMP is enabled,
use the following command:

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring IGMP on an interface 235

show ip igmp interface

Figure 118 "show ip igmp interface command output" (page 235) shows
sample output for the show ip igmp interface command.

Figure 118
show ip igmp interface command output

Table 64 "show ip igmp interface command" (page 235) shows the field
descriptions for this command.

Table 64
show ip igmp interface command
Field Description
IF Indicates the interface where IGMP is configured.
QUERY INTVL Indicates the frequency at which IGMP host-query packets are
transmitted on this interface.
STATUS Indicates the activation of a row that enables IGMP on the interface.
The destruction of a row disables IGMP on the interface.
VERS. Indicates the version of IGMP which is running on this interface.
This object configures a router capable of running either version. For
IGMP to function correctly, all routers on a LAN must be configured
to run the same version of IGMP.
OPER VERS Indicates the operational version of IGMP.
QUERIER Indicates the address of the IGMP querier on the IP subnet to which
this interface is attached.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
236 Configuring IGMP using the CLI

Field Description
QUERY MAXRSPT Indicates the maximum query response time (in tenths of a second)
advertised in IGMPv2 queries on this interface.
WRONG QUERY Indicates the number of queries received whose IGMP version does
not match the igmpInterface version. IGMP requires that all routers
on a LAN be configured to run the same version of IGMP. Thus, if
any queries are received with the wrong version, a configuration
error is indicated.
JOINS Indicates the number of times a group membership was added on
this interface.
ROBUST Indicates the robustness variable which allows tuning for the
expected packet loss on a subnet. If a subnet is expected to be
lossy, the robustness variable may be increased. IGMP is robust
to (Robustness Variable-1) packet losses.
LASTMEM QUERY Indicates the Max Response Time (in tenths of a second) inserted
into Group-Specific Queries sent in response to Leave Group
messages, and is also the amount of time between Group-Specific
Query messages. This value may be tuned to modify the leave
latency of the network. A reduced value results in reduced time to
detect the loss of the last member of a group. This does not apply if
igmpInterfaceVersion is 1.

Showing IGMP cache information

To display information about the IGMP cache, use the following command:

show ip igmp cache

Figure 119 "show ip igmp cache command output" (page 236) shows
sample output for the show ip igmp cache command.

Figure 119
show ip igmp cache command output

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring IGMP on an interface 237

Table 65 "show ip igmp cache command" (page 237) shows the field
descriptions for this command.

Table 65
show ip igmp cache command
Field Description
GRPADDR Indicates the multicast group address (Class D) that others want to
join. A group address can be the same for many incoming ports.
INTERFACE Indicates the physical interface or a logical interface (VLAN), which
has received group reports from various sources.
LASTREPORTER Indicates the IP address of the source of the last membership report
received for this IP multicast group address on this interface. If no
membership report is received, this object has the value 0.0.0.0.
EXPIRATION Indicates the minimum amount of time remaining before this entry
ages out.
V1HOSTTIMER Indicates the time remaining until the local router assumes that
there are no longer any IGMP version 1 members on the IP subnet
attached to this interface.
TYPE Indicates whether the entry is learned dynamically or is added
statically.
STATICPORTS Indicates the IP multicast group address for which this entry contains
information.

Showing IGMP group information

To display information about the IGMP group, use the following command:

show ip igmp group

Figure 120 "show ip igmp group command output" (page 237) shows
sample output for the show ip igmp group command.

Figure 120
show ip igmp group command output

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
238 Configuring IGMP using the CLI

Table 66 "show ip igmp router-alert command" (page 238) shows the field
descriptions for this command.

Table 66
show ip igmp router-alert command
Field Description
GRPADDR Indicates the multicast group address (Class D) that others
want to join. A group address can be the same for many
incoming ports.
INPORT Indicates the physical interface or a logical interface (VLAN),
which has received group reports from various sources.
MEMBER Indicates the IP address of a source that has sent a group
report to join this group.
EXPIRATION TIME Indicates the time left before the group report expires on this
port. This variable is updated upon receiving a group report.

Showing IGMP router-alert status

To display the status of IGMP router alert, use the following command:

show ip igmp router-alert

Figure 121 "show ip igmp router-alert command" (page 238) shows sample
output for the show ip igmp router-alert command.

Figure 121
show ip igmp router-alert command

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring IGMP on an interface 239

Table 67 "show ip igmp router-alert command" (page 239) shows the field
descriptions for this command.

Table 67
show ip igmp router-alert command
Field Description
IFINDEX Indicates the interface index number.
ROUTER ALERT ENABLE Indicates the status of the router alert check.

Showing IGMP sender information

To display information about the IGMP senders, use the following command:

show ip igmp sender

Figure 122 "show ip igmp sender command output" (page 239) shows
sample output for the show ip igmp sender command.

Figure 122
show ip igmp sender command output

Table 68 "show ip igmp sender command" (page 239) shows the field
descriptions for this command.

Table 68
show ip igmp sender command
Field Description
GRPADDR Indicates the IP multicast address.
IFINDEX Indicates the interface index number.
MEMBER Indicates the IP address of the host.
PORT Indicates the IGMP sender ports.
STATE Indicates if a sender exists because of an IGMP access filter or
not. Options include filtered and nonfiltered.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
240 Configuring IGMP using the CLI

Showing IGMP snoop status

To display the status of IGMP snoop, use the following command:

show ip igmp snoop

Figure 123 "show ip igmp snoop command" (page 240) shows sample
output for the show ip igmp snoop command.

Figure 123
show ip igmp snoop command

Table 69 "show ip igmp snoop command" (page 240) shows the field
descriptions for this command.

Table 69
show ip igmp snoop command
Field Description
IFINDEX Indicates the interface index number.
SNOOP ENABLE Indicates the status of IGMP snooping.
PROXY SNOOP ENABLE Indicates the status of IGMP proxy snooping.
SSM SNOOP ENABLE Indicates the status of IGMP SSM snooping.
STATIC MROUTER PORTS Indicates the set of ports in this VLAN that provide connectivity
to an IP Multicast router.
ACTIVE MROUTER PORTS Indicates the active ports.
MROUTER EXPIRATION TIME Indicates the multicast querier router aging time out in seconds.

Configuring fast leave mode

Fast leave mode provides one command that controls all IGMP fast leave
enabled interfaces. Using this global parameter, you can alter the leave
processing on fast leave enabled IGMPv2, IGMPv3, and IGMP snoop
interfaces.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring fast leave mode 241

ATTENTION
Fast leave mode applies only to fast leave enabled IGMP interfaces. It does not
apply to IGAP interfaces, which ignore this mode.

To configure the fast leave mode, use the following command:

config ip igmp fast-leave-mode <one-user|multiple-user>
where:
• one-user removes all group members on a fast leave enabled interface
port after receiving the first Leave message from a member. This
behavior is the same as the conventional fast leave process.
• multiple-user removes from the group only the IGMP member
who sent the Leave message. Traffic is not stopped if there are other
receivers on the interface port. This is the default.

Configuration example: IGMP fast leave mode

When a single user is connected to an interface, there is no need to track if
there are other users on the interface to perform the fast leave. In cases
like this, you must change the mode to one-user.
• Use the config ip igmp fast-leave-mode one-user command
to change the mode from the default (multiple user) to one user.
• Use the config ip igmp info command to show the result, which
is the current mode setting.

ERS-8606:5# config ip igmp fast-leave-mode one-user

ERS-8606:5/config/ip/igmp# info
Sub-Context: igap interface ssm
Current Context:
fast-leave-mode : multiple-users
generate-trap : disable
generate-log : disable

Showing the current fast leave mode

To display the current fast leave mode, use the following command:

show ip igmp info

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
242 Configuring IGMP using the CLI

Figure 124
show ip igmp info command output

Configuring multicast access control for an IGMP interface

To configure multicast access control for a selected IGMP interface, use the
following command:
config ip igmp interface <ipaddr> access-control <name>
where:
• ipaddr is the IP address of the selected interface.
• name is the name of the access policy. It can be 1 to 64 characters.

This command includes the following parameters:

config ip igmp interface <ipaddr> access-control <name> followed by:

info Displays the settings for the access-control parameter.
create <HostAddress> Creates an access control group entry for a specific IGMP
<HostMask> <deny-tx|deny-rx| interface.
deny-both|allow-only-tx|all
• HostAddress is the IP address of the host. See
ow-only-rx|allow-only-both>
"Specifying host addresses and masks" (page 29) for
more information.
• HostMask is the subnet mask used to determine
the host or hosts covered by this configuration. You
can use the host subnet mask to restrict access to a
portion of the network for the host. See "Specifying
host addresses and masks" (page 29) for more
information.
• deny-tx|deny-rx|deny-both|allow-only-t
x|allow-only-rx|allow-only-both indicates
the action you want for the specified IGMP interface.
For example, if you specify deny-both, the interface
denies both transmitted and received traffic.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring multicast access control for an IGMP interface 243

config ip igmp interface <ipaddr> access-control <name> followed by:

delete <HostAddress> Deletes the access control group entry for the specified
<HostMask> IGMP interface.
• HostAddress is the IP address of the host.
• HostMask is the subnet mask used to determine the
host or hosts covered by this configuration.
mode <HostAddress> Changes the access control group configuration.
<HostMask> <deny-tx|deny-rx|
• HostAddress is the IP address of the host.
deny-both|allow-only-tx|all
ow-only-rx|allow-only-both> • HostMask is the subnet mask used to determine the
host or hosts covered by this configuration.
• deny-tx|deny-rx|deny-both|allow-only-t
x|allow-only-rx|allow-only-both indicates
the action you want for the specified IGMP interface.
For example, if you specify deny-both, the interface
denies both transmitted and received traffic.

Configuration example: IGMP multicast access control

User one has subscribed to the extended-basic channels, which include

basic channels plus the Asianet channels. The basic channels and the
Asianet channels have a group range of 224.1.1.0 to 224.1.2.255 and
255.1.1.0, sent by sources belonging to the 192.32.16.0 and 192.32.32.0
networks, respectively.

The following example shows how to configure prefix lists (groups of

addresses) for basic and Asianet channels, and to create access policies for
the user. The access policies ensure that the user receives traffic only for
those groups from sources belonging to the 192.32.16.0 and 192.32.32.0
networks. After configuring the parameters, use the info command to
show a summary of the results.

ERS-8606:5# config ip prefix basic-channels

ERS-8606:5/config/ip/prefix/basic-channels# add-prefix
224.1.1.0/24
ERS-8606:5/config/ip/prefix/basic-channels# add-prefix
224.1.2.0/24
ERS-8606:5/config/ip/prefix/basic-channels# config ip
prefix asia-net
ERS-8606:5/config/ip/prefix/asia-net# add-prefix
255.1.1.0/24
ERS-8606:5/config/ip/prefix/asia-net# config ip igmp
interface 192.1.10.132 access-control basic-channels

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
244 Configuring IGMP using the CLI

ERS-8606:5/config/ip/igmp/interface/192.1.10.132/ac-
cess-control/basic-channels# create 192.32.16.0
255.255.255.0 allow-only-tx ERS-8606:5/con-
fig/ip/igmp/interface/192.1.10.132/access-control/ba-
sic-channels# config ip igmp interface 192.1.10.132
access-control asia-net
ERS-8606:5/config/ip/igmp/interface/192.1.10.132/ac-
cess-control/asia-net# create 192.32.32.0 255.255.255.0
allow-only-tx
ERS-8606:5/config/ip/igmp/interface/192.1.10.132/ac-
cess-control/asia-net# info
Sub-Context:
Current Context:
create :
HostAddress - 192.32.16.0
HostMask - 255.255.255.0
mode - allow-only-tx
mode :
delete : N/A
8010:5/config/ip/igmp/interface/192.1.10.132/access-control/
asia-net#

Showing IGMP access control groups

To display information about the IGMP multicast access control groups,
use the following command:

show ip igmp access

Figure 125 "show ip igmp access command output" (page 244) shows
sample output for the show ip igmp access command.

Figure 125
show ip igmp access command output

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring IGMP multicast router discovery options 245

Table 70 "show ip igmp access field descriptions" (page 245) shows the
field descriptions for this command.

Table 70
show ip igmp access field descriptions
Field Description
INTERFACE Identifies the interface where multicast access control is configured.
GRP PREFIX An alphanumeric string that identifies the name of the access policy.
HOSTADDR The IP address of the host. See "Specifying host addresses and
masks" (page 29) for more information.
HOSTMASK The subnet mask used to determine the host or hosts covered by
this configuration. You can use the host subnet mask to restrict
access to a portion of the host network. See "Specifying host
addresses and masks" (page 29) for more information.
ACCESSMODE Specifies the action of the access policy. The options are:
• deny-tx—deny IP Multicast transmitted traffic.
• deny-rx—deny IP Multicast received traffic.
• deny-both—deny both IP Multicast transmitted and received
traffic.only
• allow-only-rx—allow IP Multicast transmitted traffic.
• allow-only-rx—allow only IP Multicast received traffic.
• allow-only-both—allow both IP Multicast transmitted and
received traffic.

Configuring IGMP multicast router discovery options

To configure the multicast route discovery options, use the following
command:

config ip igmp interface <ipaddr> mrdisc

where
ipaddr indicates the IP address of the selected interface.

ATTENTION
The Multicast Router Discovery protocol is not supported on brouter ports.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
246 Configuring IGMP using the CLI

This command includes the following parameters:

config ip igmp interface <ipaddr> mrdisc

followed by:
info Displays information about the multicast route
discovery on the interface.

max-advertisement-interval Sets the maximum number (in seconds) of multicast

<seconds> advertisements that can be configured on the switch.
To take effect, save the configuration and reset the
switch.
max-initial-advertisements Sets the maximum number of initial multicast
<integer> advertisements that can be configured on the switch.
To take effect, save the configuration and reset the
switch.
max-initial advertisement-inte Sets the maximum number (in seconds) of multicast
rval <seconds> advertisement intervals that can be configured on
the switch.
To take effect, save the configuration and reset the
switch.
min-advertisement-interval Sets the minimum number (in seconds) of multicast
<seconds> advertisements that can be configured on the switch.
To take effect, save the configuration and reset the
switch.
mrdisc-enable Enables or disables the multicast route discovery
option.
<enable|disable>
neighbor-dead-interval Sets the multicast route discovery dead interval—the
<seconds> number of seconds the multicast route neighbors
for the switch must wait before assuming that the
multicast router is down.
• seconds is a value from 1 to 59. The default
is 30.

Showing IGMP multicast router discovery information

To display information about the IGMP multicast discovery routes, use the
following command:

show ip igmp mrdisc

Figure 126 "show ip igmp mrdisc command" (page 247) shows sample
output for the show ip igmp mrdisc command.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring IGMP multicast router discovery options 247

Figure 126
show ip igmp mrdisc command

Table 71 "show ip igmp mrdisc command" (page 247) shows the field
descriptions for this command.

Table 71
show ip igmp mrdisc command
Field Description
VLAN ID Indicates the VLAN ID.
MRDISC Indicates the status of multicast router discovery.
DISCOVERED RTR Indicates the ports discovered.
PORTS

Showing IGMP multicast router discovery neighbors

To display information about the IGMP multicast router discovery neighbors,
use the following command:

show ip igmp mrdisc-neighbors

Figure 127 "show ip igmp mrdisc-neighbors command" (page 247) shows
sample output for the show ip igmp mrdisc-neighbors command.

Figure 127
show ip igmp mrdisc-neighbors command

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
248 Configuring IGMP using the CLI

Table 72 "show ip igmp mrdisc-neighbors command" (page 248) shows the

field descriptions for this command.

Table 72
show ip igmp mrdisc-neighbors command
Field Description
VLAN ID Indicates the VLAN ID.
SRC_PORT Indicates the source port.
IP Addr Indicates the IP address
Advert-int Indicates the advertisement interval in seconds.
QUERY-int Indicates the query interval in seconds.
Robust-val Indicates the tuning for the expected packet loss on a subnet. If a
subnet is expected to be lossy, the Robustness variable may be
increased. IGMP is robust to (Robustness - 1) packet losses.

Configuring IGMP interface static members

To configure the static members of a specific IGMP interface, use the
following command:
config ip igmp interface <ipaddr> static-members
<FromGroupAddress-ToGroupAddress>
where:
• ipaddr indicates the IP address of the selected interface.
• FromGroupAddress-ToGroupAddress indicates the IP address
range {a.b.c.d[-w.x.y.z]} of the selected multicast group.

This command includes the following parameters:

config ip igmp interface <ipaddr> static-members <FromGroupAddress-ToGr

oupAddress>
followed by:
info Displays information about the static members of the
VLAN (Figure 128 "config ip igmp interface static-members
info command output" (page 249)).
add <ports> <static|blocke Adds a static-member entry to the IGMP interface.
d>
• ports is the port or list of ports to which you want to
redirect the multicast stream for this multicast group.
• static|blocked sets the route to static or blocked.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring IGMP interface static members 249

config ip igmp interface <ipaddr> static-members <FromGroupAddress-ToGr

oupAddress>
followed by:
create <ports> <static|bloc Creates static-members on the interface.
ked>
• ports is the port or list of ports to which you want to
redirect the multicast stream for this multicast group.
• static|blocked sets the route to static or blocked.
delete Deletes the static-members on the interface.

remove <ports> <static|bloc Removes slots/ports from the static-members of a

ked> protocol-based VLAN.
• ports is the port or list of ports you want to remove
from the multicast stream.
• static|blocked sets the multicast entry to static
or blocked.

Figure 128 "config ip igmp interface static-members info command output"

(page 249) shows sample output for the config ip igmp interface
static-members info command.

Figure 128
config ip igmp interface static-members info command output

Showing IGMP static and blocked ports

To display information about the static and blocked ports for the
IGMP-enabled interfaces, use the following command:

show ip igmp static

Figure 129 "show ip igmp static command output" (page 250) shows sample
output for the show ip igmp static command.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
250 Configuring IGMP using the CLI

Figure 129
show ip igmp static command output

Table 73 "show ip igmp static command" (page 250) shows the field
descriptions for this command.

Table 73
show ip igmp static command
Field Description
GRPADDR Indicates the IP multicast address. The group address holds the
starting range for the address range.
TO-GRPADDR Indicates the end of the range for the group address.
INTERFACE Indicates the interface IP address.
STATICPORTS Indicates the egressing ports.
BLOCKEDPORTS Indicates the ports not allowed to join.

Configuring SSM dynamic learning and range group

To enable the IGMPv3 dynamic learning feature and to extend the default
SSM range of 232/8 to include any IP Multicast address, use the following
command:

config ip igmp ssm

This command includes the following parameters:

config ip igmp ssm

followed by:
info Displays the SSM range and the status of the SSM
channel table entries (Figure 130 "config ip igmp ssm
command output" (page 251)).

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring SSM dynamic learning and range group 251

config ip igmp ssm

followed by:
dynamic-learning Enables the dynamic learning of SSM channel (S,G) pairs
from IGMPv3 reports. As new SSM channels are learned,
<enable|disable>
they appear in the SSM channel table. For information,
see "Configuring the SSM channel table" (page 254).
ssm-grp-range group <value>
Defines the SSM range. The SSM range parameter
mask <value>
extends the default SSM range of 232/8 to include
any IP Multicast address. You can configure existing
applications without having to change their group
configurations.

ATTENTION
Before changing this setting, see "Changing the SSM
range group" (page 251).

• group <value> is any IP Multicast address within

the range of 224.0.1.0 and 239.255.255.255. The
default is 232.0.0.0.
• mask <value> is the IP address mask of the
multicast group. The default is 255.0.0.0.

Figure 130 "config ip igmp ssm command output" (page 251) shows sample
output for the config ip igmp ssm info command.

Figure 130
config ip igmp ssm command output

Changing the SSM range group

ATTENTION
This procedure reinitializes PIM and temporarily stops all PIM traffic. For those
multicast groups out of SSM range (for example, under PIM-SM behavior), it
also causes a RP relearn delay of up to 60 seconds. This delay can be longer if
the BSR is local.

To change the SSM range group address, perform the following steps:

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
252 Configuring IGMP using the CLI

Step Action

1 Disable PIM by using the command:

config ip pim disable
If you forget to disable PIM, the following error message appears:
Error: PIM is enabled in SSM mode, disable PIM

2 Delete each entry in the SSM channel table by using the command:
config ip igmp ssm-channel delete group
<GroupAddress>
If you forget to delete the SSM channels, the following error message
appears:
Error: SSM source group table not empty

3 Enter the new IP Multicast group address by using the command:

config ip igmp ssm ssm-grp-range group <value>
mask <value>
The following message appears to warn you that every static mroute
entry that falls into the new SSM range will be deleted.
WARNING: All Static Source Group entries in the SSM
range will be deleted
Do you wish to change SSM range (y/n) ?

4 Enter Y.
5 Enable PIM by using the command:
config ip pim enable

—End—

Configuration example: SSM range group

This configuration example uses the commands described above to perform
the following tasks:
• Define the SSM range group address (234.0.0.0) and mask (255.0.0.0).
• Enable dynamic learning from IGMPv3 reports.

After configuring the parameters, use the info command to show a

summary of the results.

ERS-8606:5# config ip pim disable

ERS-8606:5# config ip igmp ssm ssm-grp group 234.0.0.0
mask 255.0.0.0

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring SSM dynamic learning and range group 253

WARNING: All Static Source Group entries in the SSM range

will be deleted

Do you wish to change SSM range (y/n) ? y

ERS-8606:5# config ip igmp ssm dynamic-learning enable
ERS-8606:5# config ip igmp ssm info
Sub-Context: clear config dump monitor show test trace wsm
sam
Current Context:
dynamic-learning : enable
ssm-grp-range : 234.0.0.0/255.0.0.0
ERS-8606:5#

Showing SSM group range and dynamic learning status

To display the SSM group range and the status of dynamic learning, use the
following command:

show ip igmp ssm-global

Figure 131 "show ip igmp ssm-global command output" (page 253) shows
sample output for the show ip igmp ssm-global command.

Figure 131
show ip igmp ssm-global command output

Table 74 "show ip igmp ssm-global command" (page 253) shows the field
descriptions for this command.

Table 74
show ip igmp ssm-global command
Field Description
DYNAMIC LEARNING Indicates whether dynamic learning is enabled at a global level.
SSM GROUP RANGE Indicates the IP address range for the SSM group.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
254 Configuring IGMP using the CLI

Configuring the SSM channel table

The SSM channel table consists of entries that map groups to their sending
source. SSM channels cannot conflict with static source groups and vice
versa. When you configure an SSM channel or a static source group, the
switch performs a consistency check to make sure there are no conflicts.
You cannot map one group (G) to different sources for both a static source
group and a SSM channel. For more information, see "Configuring multicast
static source groups" (page 439).
The consistency check mentioned previously applies to all SSM channel
entries, even if they are disabled. Disabling an entry means that it becomes
inactive. It does not delete the entry, and you can reenable it at any time.
When you disable a SSM channel, the Ethernet Routing Switch 8600 stops
any multicast traffic from the specified source to the specified group. If
desired, you can use this static setting as a security feature to block traffic
from a certain source to a specific group.
To configure the SSM channel table, use the following command:
config ip igmp ssm ssm-channel
This command includes the following parameters:

config ip igmp ssm ssm-channel

followed by:
info Displays the SSM range and the status of the SSM
channel table entries.

create group <value> source Creates a static SSM channel table entry by specifying
<value> the group and source IP addresses.
• group <value> is any IP Multicast address within
the SSM range defined by ssm-grp-range group.
• source <value> is any IP host address that is sends
traffic to the group.
delete group <value> Deletes the SSM channel table entry that you specify.
• value is the IP Multicast address of the table entry
you want to delete.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring the SSM channel table 255

config ip igmp ssm ssm-channel

followed by:
disable <all or group> [ Disables the admin state for all static entries in the SSM
<GroupAddress> ] channel table (all) or for a specific entry (group). This
setting does not affect the dynamically learned entries.
This state determines whether or not the switch uses the
static entry or saves it for future use. The default is enable
for each entry.
• all refers to all the static entries in the SSM channel
table.
• group requires the GroupAddress of the entry you
want to disable.
enable <all or group> [ Enables the admin state for all static entries in the SSM
<GroupAddress> ] channel table (all) or for a specific entry (group). This
setting does not affect the dynamically learned entries.
This state determines whether or not the switch uses the
static entry or saves it for future use. The default is enable
for each entry.
• all refers to all the static entries in the SSM channel
table.
• group requires the GroupAddress of the entry you
want to disable.

Configuration example: SSM channel table

This configuration example uses the commands described above to perform
the following tasks:
• Create an SSM channel table entry for the multicast group 234.0.1.0
and the source at 192.32.99.151.
• Set the admin state to enable all the static SSM channel table entries.

After configuring the parameters, use the info command to show a

summary of the results.

ERS-8606:5# config ip igmp ssm ssm-channel create group

234.0.1.0 source 192.32.99.151
ERS-8606:5# config ip igmp ssm ssm-channel enable all
ERS-8606:5# config ip igmp ssm ssm-channel info
Sub-Context: clear config dump monitor show test trace wsm
sam
Current Context:
create :
group : 234.0.1.0
source : 192.32.99.151

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
256 Configuring IGMP using the CLI

admin status : enabled

learning-mode : static
group : 234.10.10.0
source : 255.0.0.0
admin status : enabled
learning-mode : static
delete : N/A
disable : N/A
enable : N/A

ERS-8606:5#

Showing SSM channel information

To display the list of SSM channels, use the following command:

show ip igmp ssm-channel

Figure 132 "show ip igmp ssm-channel command output" (page 256) shows
sample output for the show ip igmp ssm-channel command.

Figure 132
show ip igmp ssm-channel command output

Table 75 "show ip igmp ssm-channel command" (page 256) shows the

field descriptions for this command.

Table 75
show ip igmp ssm-channel command
Field Description
GROUP Indicates the IP multicast group address that has default range of 232/8.
SOURCE Indicates the IP address of the source that sends traffic to the group source.
MODE Indicates that the entry is a statically configured entry (static) or a dynamically
learned entry from IGMPv3 (dynamic).

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring IGMP Ethernet ports 257

Field Description
ACTIVE Indicates the activity on the corresponding source and group. If the source is active
and traffic is flowing to the switch, this field is Active; otherwise, it is nonactive.
STATUS Indicates the admin state, whether the entry is to be used or not. If the value of this
field is enabled (default), the entry can be used. If the state is disabled, the entry is
not used, but is saved for future use.

Configuring IGMP Ethernet ports

To configure IGMP on specific ethernet ports, use the following command:

config ethernet <ports> ip igmp

where
ports use the convention {slot/port[-slot/port][, ...]}.
This command includes the following parameters

config ethernet <ports> ip igmp

followed by:
info Displays IGMP settings on the port (Figure 133 "config
ethernet ip igmp info command output" (page 259)).

fast-leave <enable|disable> Enables or disables the fast leave mode, which allows a
switch to immediately stop forwarding traffic for a multicast
group as soon as an IGMPv2 leave group message is
received on an interface.
flush <mrouter|sender|grp-m Flushes the specified table.
ember>
[<SenderAddress>]
[<GroupAddress>]
last-memb-query-int The maximum response time (in tenths of a second) that
<1/10_seconds> is inserted into group-specific queries sent in response
to leave group messages. It is also the time between
group-specific query messages. This value is not
configurable for IGMPv1.
Decreasing the value reduces the time to detect the loss
of the last member of a group.
• 1/10_seconds is the range from 0 to 255, and the
default is 10 tenths of a second. Nortel recommends
configuring this value between 3 and 10 (equal to 0.3
– 1.0 seconds).

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
258 Configuring IGMP using the CLI

config ethernet <ports> ip igmp

followed by:
query-interval <seconds> Sets the frequency (in seconds) in which the host query
packets are transmitted on the port.
• seconds is the range of 1 to 65535 seconds. The
default value is 125 seconds.
query-max-resp <1/10_second
The maximum response time (in tenths of a second)
s>
advertised in IGMPv2 general queries on this interface.
This value is not configurable for IGMPv1. Smaller
values allow a router to prune groups faster.
• 1/10_seconds is an integer value with a range of
0 to 255, and a default of 100 tenths of a second
(equal to 10 seconds).

ATTENTION
This value must be less than the query-interval.

robustval <integer> Allows tuning for the expected packet loss of a network.
• integer is the range of 2 to 255, with a default of
2. Increase the value if you expect the network to
experience packet loss.
router-alert
Enables or disables the router alert option. When
<enable|disable> enabled, this parameter instructs the router to process
packets not directly addressed to it.

ATTENTION
To maximize your network performance, Nortel
recommends that you set this parameter according
to the version of IGMP currently in use:

• IGMPv1 - Disable
• IGMPv2 - Enable
• IGMPv3 - Enable

version <integer> Sets the version of IGMP that you want to configure on
this port. For IGMP to function correctly, all routers on a
LAN must use the same version.
• integer is an integer value with a value of 1, 2, or
3. The default value is 2 (IGMPv2).

Figure 133 "config ethernet ip igmp info command output" (page 259) shows
sample output for the config ethernet ip igmp info command.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring IGMP Ethernet ports 259

Figure 133
config ethernet ip igmp info command output

Showing IGMP port information

To display information about the specified port or for all ports, use the
following command:

show ports info igmp [ <ports> ]

where
ports use the convention {slot/port[-slot/port][, ...]}.
Figure 134 "show ports info igmp command (partial output)" (page 259)
shows sample output for the show ports info igmp command.

Figure 134
show ports info igmp command (partial output)

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
260 Configuring IGMP using the CLI

Table 76 "show ports info igmp command" (page 260) shows the field
descriptions for this command.

Table 76
show ports info igmp command
Field Description
PORT NUM Indicates the port number.
QUERY INTVL Indicates the interval (in seconds) between IGMPHost-Query
packets transmitted on this port.
QUERY MAX RESP Indicates the interval (in seconds) for the maximum query response
time advertised in IGMPv2 queries on this interface. Smaller values
allow a router to prune groups faster.
ROBUST Indicates the tuning for the expected packet loss on a subnet. If a
subnet is expected to be lossy, the Robustness variable may be
increased. IGMP is robust to (Robustness - 1) packet losses.
VERSION Indicates the version of IGMP that is running on this interface. This
object configures a router capable of running either version. For
IGMP to function correctly, all routers on a LAN must be configured
to run the same version of IGMP on that LAN.
LAST MEMB QUERY Indicates the max response in a group specific query.
PROXY SNOOP ENABLE Indicates the status of IGMP proxy snoop on the port.
SNOOP ENABLE Indicates the status of IGMP snooping on the port.
SSM SNOOP ENABLE Indicates the status of SSM IGMP snooping on the port.
FAST LEAVE ENABLE Indicates the status of fast leave.

Configuring multicast access control for an IGMP Ethernet port

To configure multicast access control for a selected IGMP Ethernet port,
use the following command:
config ethernet <ports> ip igmp access-control <name>
where:
• ports uses the convention {slot/port[-slot/port][,...]}.
• name is the name of the access policy. It can be 1 to 64 characters.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring multicast access control for an IGMP Ethernet port 261

This command includes the following parameters:

config ethernet <ports> ip igmp access-control <name>

followed by:
info Displays the settings for the access-control
parameter.

create <HostAddress> <HostMask> Creates an access control group entry for a specific
<deny-tx|deny-rx|deny-both|allo IGMP Ethernet port.
w-only-tx|allow-only-rx|allow-o
• HostAddress is the IP address of the host. See
nly-both>
"Specifying host addresses and masks" (page
29) for more information.
• HostMask is the subnet mask used to determine
the host or hosts covered by this configuration.
You can use the host subnet mask to restrict
access to a portion of the host network. See
"Specifying host addresses and masks" (page
29) for more information.
• deny-tx|deny-rx|deny-both|allow-onl
y-tx|allow-only-rx| allow-only-both
indicates the action you want for the specified
IGMP Ethernet port. For example, if you specify
deny-both, the interface denies both transmitted
and received traffic.
delete <HostAddress> <HostMask> Deletes the access control group entry for the
specified IGMP interface.
• HostAddress is the IP address of the host.
• HostMask is the subnet mask used to determine
the host or hosts covered by this configuration.
mode <HostAddress> <HostMask> Changes the access control group configuration.
<deny-tx|deny-rx|deny-both|allo
• HostAddress is the IP address of the host.
w-only-tx|allow-only-rx|allow-o
nly-both> • HostMask is the subnet mask used to determine
the host or hosts covered by this configuration.
• deny-tx|deny-rx|deny-both|allow-onl
y-tx|allow-only-rx| allow-only-both
indicates the action you want for the specified
IGMP interface. For example, if you specify
deny-both, the interface denies both transmitted
and received traffic.

Configuration example: Ethernet port IGMP multicast access control

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
262 Configuring IGMP using the CLI

User 1 has subscribed to the extended-basic channels, which includes

basic channels plus the Asianet channels. The basic channels and the
Asianet channels have a group range of 224.1.1.0 to 224.1.2.255 and
255.1.1.0, sent by sources belonging to the 192.32.16.0 and 192.32.32.0
networks, respectively.

The following example shows how to configure prefix lists (groups of

addresses) for basic and Asianet channels, and to create access policies for
this user. The access policies ensure that the user receives traffic only for
those groups from sources belonging to the 192.32.16.0 and 192.32.32.0
networks. After configuring the parameters, use the info command to show
a summary of the results.

ERS-8606:5# config ip prefix basic-channels

ERS-8606:5/config/ip/prefix/basic-channels# add-prefix
224.1.1.0/24
ERS-8606:5/config/ip/prefix/basic-channels# add-prefix
224.1.2.0/24
ERS-8606:5/config/ip/prefix/basic-channels# config ip
prefix asia-net
ERS-8606:5/config/ip/prefix/asia-net# add-prefix
255.1.1.0/24
ERS-8606:5/config/ip/prefix/asia-net# config ethernet
4/1 ip igmp access-control basic-channels
ERS-8606:5/config/ethernet/4/1/ip/igmp/access-
control/basic-channels# create 192.32.16.0 255.255.255.0
allow-only-tx
ERS-8606:5/config/ethernet/4/1/ip/igmp/access-
control/basic-channels# config ethernet 4/1 ip igmp
access-control asia-net
ERS-8606:5/config/ethernet/4/1/ip/igmp/access-
control/asia-net# create 192.32.32.0 255.255.255.0
allow-only-tx
ERS-8606:5/config/ethernet/4/1/ip/igmp/access-
control/asia-net# info
Sub-Context:
Current Context:
create :
HostAddress - 192.32.16.0
HostMask - 255.255.255.0
mode - allow-only-tx
mode :
delete : N/A

Configuring IGMP on a VLAN

To configure IGMP on a VLAN, use the following command:

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring IGMP on a VLAN 263

config vlan <vid> ip igmp

where
vid is a VLAN ID from 1 to 4094.
This command includes the following parameters:

config vlan <vid> ip igmp

followed by:
info Displays IGMP settings on the VLAN.

del-mrouter <ports> Deletes multicast router ports.

fast-leave <enable|disable> Removes a given port from receiving a leave message
from any member of any given group. Normal IGMP
behavior is skipped.
flush <mrouter|sender|grp Flushes the specified table.
-member> [<SenderAddress>]
[<GroupAddress>]
last-memb-query-int The maximum response time (in tenths of a second) that
<1/10_seconds> is inserted into group-specific queries sent in response
to leave group messages. It is also the time between
group-specific query messages. This value is not
configurable for IGMPv1.
Decreasing the value reduces the time to detect the loss
of the last member of a group.
• 1/10_seconds is the range from 0 to 255, and the
default of 10 tenths of a second. Nortel recommends
configuring this value between 3 and 10 (equal to 0.3
– 1.0 seconds).
mrouter <ports> Adds multicast router ports.
proxy-snoop <enable|disabl Enables or disables the proxy-snoop option globally for
e> the VLAN.
query-interval <seconds> Sets the frequency (in seconds) in which the host query
packets are transmitted on the VLAN.
• seconds is the range from 1 to 65535. The default
value is 125 seconds.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
264 Configuring IGMP using the CLI

config vlan <vid> ip igmp

followed by:
query-max-resp <1/10_secon
The maximum response time (in tenths of a second)
ds>
advertised in IGMPv2 general queries on this interface.
This value is not configurable for IGMPv1. Smaller
values allow a router to prune groups faster.
• 1/10_seconds is an integer value with a range of
0 to 255, and the default is 100 tenths of a second
(equal to 10 seconds).

ATTENTION
This value must be less than the query-interval.

robustval <integer> Allows tuning for the expected packet loss of a network.
• integer is an integer value with a range of 2 to 255
seconds. The default value is 2 seconds. Increase
the value if you expect the network to experience loss.
router-alert <enable|disab
Enables or disables the router alert option. When
le>
enabled, this parameter instructs the router to process
packets not directly addressed to it.

ATTENTION
To maximize your network performance, Nortel
recommends that you set this parameter according
to the version of IGMP currently in use:

• IGMPv1—Disable
• IGMPv2—Enable
• IGMPv3—Enable

snoop <enable|disable> Enables or disables the snoop option for the VLAN.

ssm-snoop <enable|disable> Enables or disables support for PIM source-specific

multicast (SSM) on the snooping interface.

version <integer> Sets the version of IGMP that you want to configure on
this interface. For IGMP to function correctly, all routers
on a LAN must use the same version.
• integer is an integer value with a value of 1, 2, or
3. The default value is 2 (IGMPv2).

Configuration example: VLAN IGMP multicast

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring IGMP on a VLAN 265

This configuration example uses the commands described above to perform

the following tasks:
• Set the last member query interval to 15 tenths of a second (equal to
1.5 seconds).
• Set the query interval to 100 seconds.
• Set the query maximum response time to 15 tenths of a second (equal
to 1.5 seconds).
• Set the robustness value to 4 seconds.
• Enable IGMP version 3.
• Enable proxy snoop for the VLAN.
• Enable snoop for the VLAN.
• Enable support for SSM on the snooping interface.
• Enable the fast leave option.

After configuring the parameters, use the info command to show a

summary of the results.

ERS-8606:5# config vlan 2 ip igmp last-memb-query-int 15

ERS-8606:5/config/vlan/2/ip/igmp# query-interval 100
ERS-8606:5/config/vlan/2/ip/igmp# query-max-resp 50
ERS-8606:5/config/vlan/2/ip/igmp# robustval 4
ERS-8606:5/config/vlan/2/ip/igmp# ssm-snoop enable
ERS-8606:5/config/vlan/2/ip/igmp# version 3
ERS-8606:5/config/vlan/2/ip/igmp# proxy-snoop enable
ERS-8606:5/config/vlan/2/ip/igmp# snoop enable
ERS-8606:5/config/vlan/2/ip/igmp# fast-leave enable
ERS-8606:5/config/vlan/2/ip/igmp# router-alert enable
8610co:5/config/vlan/2/ip/igmp# info
Sub-Context: access-list mrdisc static-members
fast-leave-members
Current Context:
last-memb-query-int : 15
query-interval : 100 secs
query-max-resp : 50
robustval : 4
version : 3
proxy-snoop : enable
snoop : enable
mrouter :
ssm-snoop : enable
fast-leave : enable
router-alert : enable

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
266 Configuring IGMP using the CLI

Showing IGMP VLAN information

To display the IGMP configuration information for all VLANs on the switch or
for a specified VLAN, use the following command:

show vlan info igmp [ <vid> ]

where
vid is a VLAN ID from 1 to 4092.
Figure 135 "show vlan info igmp command output" (page 266) shows
sample output for the show vlan info igmp command.

Figure 135
show vlan info igmp command output

Table 77 "show vlan info igmp command" (page 266) shows the field
descriptions for this command.

Table 77
show vlan info igmp command
Field Description
VLAN ID Indicates the VLAN ID.
QUERY INTVL Indicates the interval (in seconds) between IGMPHost-Query
packets transmitted on this interface.
QUERY MAX RESP Indicates the interval (in seconds) for the maximum query
response time advertised in IGMPv2 queries on this interface.
Smaller values allow a router to prune groups faster.
ROBUST Indicates the tuning for the expected packet loss on a subnet.
If a subnet is expected to be lossy, the Robustness variable
may be increased. IGMP is robust to (Robustness - 1) packet
losses.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring multicast access control for a VLAN 267

Field Description
VERSION Indicates the version of IGMP that is running on this interface.
This object configures a router capable of running either
version. For IGMP to function correctly, all routers on a LAN
must be configured to run the same version of IGMP on that
LAN.
LAST MEMB QUERY Indicates the max response in a group specific query.
PROXY SNOOP ENABLE Indicates the status of IGMP proxy snoop on the VLAN.
SNOOP ENABLE Indicates the status of IGMP snooping on the VLAN.
SSM SNOOP ENABLE Indicates the status of SSM IGMP snooping on the VLAN.
FAST LEAVE ENABLE Indicates the status of fast leave.
FAST LEAVE PORTS Indicates the ports that have fast leave enabled.

Configuring multicast access control for a VLAN

To configure multicast access control for a VLAN, use the following
command:
config vlan <vid> ip igmp access-control <name>
where:
• vid is a VLAN ID from 1 to 4092.
• name is the name of the access policy. It can be 1 to 64 characters.

This command includes the following parameters:

config vlan <vid> ip igmp access-control <name>

followed by:
info Displays the settings for the access-control parameter.
create <HostAddress> Creates an access control group entry for a specified VLAN.
<HostMask> <deny-tx|deny
• HostAddress is the IP address of the host. See
-rx|deny-both|allow-onl
"Specifying host addresses and masks" (page 29) for more
y-tx|allow-only-rx|allo
information.
w-only-both>
• HostMask is the subnet mask used to determine the host
or hosts covered by this configuration. You can use the
host subnet mask to restrict access to a portion of the host
network. See "Specifying host addresses and masks"
(page 29) for more information.
• deny-tx|deny-rx|deny-both|allow-only-tx|al
low-only-rx|allow-only-both indicates the action
you want for the specified VLAN. For example, if you
specify deny-both, the VLAN denies both transmitted and
received traffic.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
268 Configuring IGMP using the CLI

config vlan <vid> ip igmp access-control <name>

followed by:
delete <HostAddress> Deletes the access control group entry for the specified VLAN.
<HostMask>
• HostAddress is the IP address of the host.
• HostMask is the subnet mask used to determine the host
or hosts covered by this configuration.
mode <HostAddress> Changes the access control group configuration.
<HostMask> <deny-tx|d
• HostAddress is the IP address of the host.
eny-rx|deny-both|allow-
only-tx|allow-only-rx|a • HostMask is the subnet mask used to determine the host
llow-only-both> or hosts covered by this configuration.
• deny-tx|deny-rx|deny-both|allow-only-tx|al
low-only-rx|allow-only-both indicates the action
you want for the specified VLAN. For example, if you
specify deny-both, the VLAN denies both transmitted and
received traffic.

Configuration example: VLAN IGMP multicast access control

User two belongs to VLAN 2 and has subscribed to the extended-basic
channels, which include basic channels plus the Asianet channels. The
basic channels and the Asianet channels have a group range of 224.1.1.0
to 224.1.2.255 and 255.1.1.0, sent by sources belonging to the 192.32.16.0
and 192.32.32.0 networks, respectively.
The following example shows how to configure prefix lists (groups of
addresses) for basic and Asianet channels, and to create access policies for
this user. The access policies ensure that the user receives traffic only for
those groups from sources belonging to the 192.32.16.0 and 192.32.32.0
networks. After configuring the parameters, use the info command to
show a summary of the results.
ERS-8606:5# config ip prefix basic-channels
ERS-8606:5/config/ip/prefix/basic-channels# add-prefix
224.1.1.0/24
ERS-8606:5/config/ip/prefix/basic-channels# add-prefix
224.1.2.0/24
ERS-8606:5/config/ip/prefix/basic-channels# config ip
prefix asia-net
ERS-8606:5/config/ip/prefix/asia-net# add-prefix
255.1.1.0/24
ERS-8606:5/config/ip/prefix/asia-net# config vlan 2 ip
igmp access-control basic-channels
ERS-8606:5/config/vlan/2/ip/igmp/access-control/basic-
channels# create 192.32.16.0 255.255.255.0 allow-only-tx
ERS-8606:5/config/vlan/2/ip/igmp/access-control/basic-
channels# config vlan 2 ip igmp access-control asia-net

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring multicast access control for a VLAN 269

ERS-8606:5/config/vlan/2/ip/igmp/access-control/asia-
net# create 192.32.32.0 255.255.255.0 allow-only-tx
ERS-8606:5/config/vlan/2/ip/igmp/access-control/asia-
net# info
Sub-Context:
Current Context:
create :
HostAddress - 192.32.16.0
HostMask - 255.255.255.0
mode - allow-only-tx
mode :
delete : N/A

Configuration example: IGMP access control

A network administrator wishing to configure IGMP Access Control on
ERS 8600-B sets up interface 172.3.1.0 to deny any multicast group in the
238.1.1.0/24 range (see Figure 136 "IGMP configuration example, IGMP
Access Control" (page 269)).
Figure 136
IGMP configuration example, IGMP access control

The following are the configuration steps required for ERS 8600-B.
Configure VLAN 2 with an Access Control to deny-rx for the Multicast group
address of 238.1.1.0/24.

Step Action

1 Add the prefix list named "2" by using the command:

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
270 Configuring IGMP using the CLI

8610:5# config ip prefix-list "2" add-prefix

238.1.1.0/24

2 Add IGMP Access Control to VLAN 2 by using the command:

8610:5# config vlan 2 ip igmp access-control 2
create 172.3.1.0 255.255.255.0 deny-rx
3 Set DVMRP interface type and Enable DVMRP by using the
commands:
8610:5# config vlan 2 ip dvmrp interface-type
passive
8610:5# config vlan 2 ip dvmrp enable

—End—

The preceding configuration is one method to achieve the desired result.

As an alternative, the allow-only-rx Access Control only allows a multicast
group address of 238.1.2.0/24 on VLAN 2. This is a better method if you
want only VLAN 2 to receive a multicast group in the 238.1.2.0/24 range.

Step Action

1 Add prefix list named "3" by using the command:

8610:5# config ip prefix-list "3" add-prefix
238.1.2.0/24 maskLenFrom 24 maskLenTo 32

2 Add IGMP Access Control to VLAN 2 by using the command:

8610:5# config vlan 2 ip igmp access-control 3
create 172.3.1.0 255.255.255.0 allow-only-rx

3 Set DVMRP interface type and enable DVMRP by using the

commands:
8610:5# config vlan 2 ip dvmrp interface-type
passive
8610:5# config vlan 2 ip dvmrp enable

—End—

Configuring IGMP multicast route discovery on a VLAN

To configure IGMP multicast discovery routes on a VLAN, use the following
command:

config vlan <vid> ip igmp mrdisc

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring IGMP static members on a VLAN 271

where
vid is a VLAN ID from 1 to 4092.
This command includes the following parameters:

config vlan <vid> ip igmp mrdisc

followed by:
info Displays multicast route discovery parameters on the
VLAN.
min-advertisement-interval Used to set the minimum number (in seconds) of multicast
<seconds> advertisements that can be configured on the VLAN.
max-initial-advertisement-i Used to set the maximum number of initial multicast
nterval <seconds> advertisements that can be configured on the VLAN.
max-initial-advertisements Used to set the maximum number of initial multicast
<integer> advertisements that can be configured on the VLAN.
max-advertisement-interval Used to set the maximum number (in seconds) of multicast
<seconds> advertisements that can be configured on the VLAN.
mrdisc-enable <enable|disa Enables multicast route discovery on the VLAN.
ble>
neighbor-dead-interval Sets the multicast route discovery dead interval—the
<seconds> number of seconds the multicast route neighbors of the
switch must wait before assuming that the multicast router
is down.

Configuring IGMP static members on a VLAN

To configure IGMP static members on a VLAN, use the following command:
config vlan <vid> ip igmp static-members <FromGroupAd-
dress-ToGroupAddress>
where:
• vid is a VLAN ID from 1 to 4092.
• FromGroupAddress-ToGroupAddress indicates the IP address or
range of the selected multicast group in the format {a.b.c.d[-w.x.y.z]}.

This command includes the following parameters:

config vlan <vid> ip igmp static-members <FromGroupAddress-ToGroupAddress>

followed by:
info Displays information about the static members of the
VLAN (Figure 137 "config vlan ip igmp info static-members
info command output" (page 272)).

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
272 Configuring IGMP using the CLI

config vlan <vid> ip igmp static-members <FromGroupAddress-ToGroupAddress>

followed by:
add <ports> <static|blocke Adds a static-member entry to the VLAN.
d>
• ports is the port or list of ports to which you want to
redirect the multicast stream for this multicast group.
• static|blocked sets the route to static or blocked.
create <ports> <static|bloc Creates a static-member entry to the VLAN.
ked>
• ports is the port or list of ports to which you want to
redirect the multicast stream for this multicast group.
• static|blocked sets the route to static or blocked.
delete Deletes a static-member entry to the VLAN.
remove <ports> <static|bloc Removes a port from the static-member entry to the VLAN.
ked>
• ports is the port or list of ports to which you want to
redirect the multicast stream for this multicast group.
• static|blocked sets the route to static or blocked.

Figure 137 "config vlan ip igmp info static-members info command output"
(page 272) shows sample output for the config vlan ip igmp
static-members info command.

Figure 137
config vlan ip igmp info static-members info command output

Configuring IGMP fast leave members on a VLAN

To configure IGMP fast leave members on a VLAN, use the following
command:

config vlan <vid> ip igmp fast-leave-members

where
vid is a VLAN ID from 1 to 4092.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring multicast stream limitation 273

This command includes the following parameters:

config vlan <vid> ip igmp fast-leave-members

followed by:
info Displays information about the fast leave members of the
VLAN (Figure 138 "config vlan ip igmp fast leave-members info
command output" (page 273)).
disable <ports> Removes a given port from receiving a leave message from any
member of any given group. Normal IGMP behavior is skipped.
enable <ports> Enables members to join a fast leave group on a given port
on the VLAN.
• ports is the port or list of ports that you want to join the
fast leave group.

Figure 138 "config vlan ip igmp fast leave-members info command output"
(page 273) shows sample output for the config vlan ip igmp
fast-leave-members info command.

Figure 138
config vlan ip igmp fast leave-members info command output

Configuring multicast stream limitation

With multicast stream limitation, service providers can limit the number of
multicast groups that can join a VLAN. By limiting the number of concurrent
multicast streams, providers can protect the bandwidth on a specific
interface and control access to multicast streams.
The maximum number of streams can be set independently. After a stream
limit is met, joins to new streams are dropped. This allows a service provider
to control the overall bandwidth usage in addition to restricting users from
attaching more than the allowed TV sets to a given link.
This section includes the following topics:
• "Configuring multicast stream limitation on an interface" (page 274)
• "Configuring multicast stream limitation members on an interface" (page
275)
• "Showing multicast stream limitations per interface" (page 276)

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
274 Configuring IGMP using the CLI

• "Showing multicast stream limitations per port" (page 277)

• "Configuring multicast stream limitation on an Ethernet port" (page 277)
• "Configuring multicast stream limitation on a VLAN" (page 278)
• "Configuring multicast stream limitation members on a VLAN" (page
279)

Configuring multicast stream limitation on an interface

To configure multicast stream limitation on a specific interface, use the
following command:
config ip igmp interface <ipaddr> stream-limit
where
ipaddr indicates the IP address of the selected interface.
This command includes the following parameters:

config ip igmp interface <ipaddr> stream-limit

followed by:
info Displays information about the stream limits set on
this interface.
enable Enables stream limitation on this interface.
disable Disables stream limitation on this interface.
max-streams <integer> Sets the maximum number of allowed streams on
this interface. The range is from 0 to 65535, and the
default is 4.

Configuration example: multicast stream limit

This configuration example uses the commands described above to perform
the following tasks:
• Enable multicast stream limitation on the interface at IP address 10.0.6.2.
• Set the maximum number of allowed streams to 8.

After configuring the parameters, use the info command to show a

summary of the results.

ERS-8606:5# config ip igmp interface 10.0.6.2

stream-limit enable
ERS-8606:5/config/ip/igmp/interface/10.0.6.2/stream-
limit# max-streams 8
ERS-8606:5/config/ip/igmp/interface/10.0.6.2/stream-
limit# info
Sub-Context:
Current Context:

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring multicast stream limitation 275

enable : TRUE
max-streams : 8
num-streams : 0

Configuring multicast stream limitation members on an interface

To configure multicast stream limitation on ports of the specified interface,
use the following command:
config ip igmp interface <ipaddr> stream-limit-members
where
ipaddr indicates the IP address of the selected interface.
This command includes the following parameters:

config ip igmp interface <ipaddr> stream-limit-members

followed by:
info Displays information about the stream limit members
set on individual ports for this interface.

enable <ports> max-streams Enables stream limitation and sets the maximum
<value> number of allowed streams for the specified ports on
this interface. The number of allowed streams cannot
exceed the maximum number for the interface. The
range is from 0 to 65535, and the default is 4.
disable <ports> Disables stream limitation for the specified ports on
this interface.
set <ports> max-streams <value> Sets the maximum number of allowed streams for
the specified ports on this interface. The range is
from 0 to 65535, and the default is 4.

Configuration example: multicast stream limit members

This configuration example uses the commands described above to perform
the following tasks:
• Enable multicast stream limitation on ports 1/3 to 1/8 and set the
maximum allowed number of streams to 6 for these ports.
• Set the maximum number of allowed streams for ports 1/3 to 1/8 to 8.

After configuring the parameters, use the info command to show a

summary of the results.

ERS-8606:5# config ip igmp interface 192.32.96.82

stream-limit-members enable 1/3-1/8 max-streams 6
ERS-8606:5/config/ip/igmp/inter-
face/192.32.96.82/stream-limit-members# set 1/3-1/8
max-streams 8

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
276 Configuring IGMP using the CLI

ERS-8606:5/config/ip/igmp/inter-
face/192.32.96.82/stream-limit-members# info
Sub-Context:
Current Context:
enable:
port - 1/3
max-streams - 8
num-streams - 0
port - 1/8
max-streams - 8
num-streams - 0
disable : N/A
set : N/A

Showing multicast stream limitations per interface

To display information about the interfaces where multicast stream limitation
is enabled, use the following command:

show ip igmp stream-limit-interface

Figure 139 "show ip igmp stream-limit-interface command output" (page 276)
shows sample output for the show ip igmp stream-limit-interface
command.

Figure 139
show ip igmp stream-limit-interface command output

Table 78 "show ip igmp stream-limit-interface command" (page 276) shows

the field descriptions for this command.

Table 78
show ip igmp stream-limit-interface command
Field Description
INTERFACE Indicates the interface IP address.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring multicast stream limitation 277

Field Description
MAX STREAMS Indicates the maximum number of streams.
NUM STREAMS Indicates the current number of streams.

Showing multicast stream limitations per port

To display multicast stream limitation information for the ports on a specific
interface, use the following command:

show ip igmp stream-limit-port

Figure 140 "show ip igmp stream-limit-port command output" (page 277)
shows sample output for the show ip igmp stream-limit-port
command.

Figure 140
show ip igmp stream-limit-port command output

Table 79 "show ip igmp stream-limit-port command" (page 277) shows the

field descriptions for this command.

Table 79
show ip igmp stream-limit-port command
Field Description
INTERFACE Indicates the interface IP address.
PORT Indicates the port for the VLAN.
MAX STREAMS Indicates the maximum number of streams.
NUM STREAMS Indicates the current number of streams.

Configuring multicast stream limitation on an Ethernet port

To configure multicast stream limitation on an Ethernet port, use the
following command:

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
278 Configuring IGMP using the CLI

config ethernet <ports> ip igmp stream-limit

where
ports use the convention {slot/port[-slot/port][, ...]}.
This command includes the following parameters:

config ethernet <ports> ip igmp stream-limit

followed by:
info Displays information about the stream limits set on
this port.
enable Enables stream limitation on this port.
disable Disables stream limitation on this port.
max-streams <integer> Sets the maximum number of allowed streams on
this port. The range is from 0 to 65535, and the
default is 4.

Configuration example: port multicast stream limit

This configuration example uses the commands described above to perform
the following tasks:
• Enable multicast stream limitation on the Ethernet port 1/3.
• Set the maximum number of allowed streams to 8.

After configuring the parameters, use the info command to show a

summary of the results.

ERS-8606:5# config ethernet 1/3 ip igmp stream-limit

enable
ERS-8606:5/config/ethernet/1/3/ip/igmp/stream-limit#
max-streams 8
ERS-8606:5/config/ethernet/1/3/ip/igmp/stream-limit#
info
Sub-Context:
Current Context:
enable : TRUE
max-streams : 8
num-streams : 0

Configuring multicast stream limitation on a VLAN

To configure multicast stream limitation on a specific VLAN, use the
following command:
config vlan <vid> ip igmp stream-limit
where

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring multicast stream limitation 279

vid is a VLAN ID from 1 to 4093.

This command includes the following parameters:

config vlan <vid> ip igmp stream-limit

followed by:
info Displays information about the stream limits set on this
VLAN.
enable Enables stream limitation on this VLAN.
disable Disables stream limitation on this VLAN.
max-streams <integer> Sets the maximum number of allowed streams on this
interface. The range is from 0 to 65535, and the default
is 4.

Configuration example: VLAN multicast stream limit

This configuration example uses the commands described above to perform
the following tasks:
• Enable multicast stream limitation on VLAN 3.
• Set the maximum number of allowed streams to 8.

After configuring the parameters, use the info command to show a

summary of the results.

ERS-8606:5# config vlan 3 ip igmp stream-limit enable

ERS-8606:5/config/vlan/3/ip/igmp/stream-limit#
max-streams 8
ERS-8606:5/config/vlan/3/ip/igmp/stream-limit# info
Sub-Context:
Current Context:
enable : TRUE
max-streams : 8
num-streams : 0

Configuring multicast stream limitation members on a VLAN

To configure multicast stream limitation on ports of a specific VLAN, use the
following command:
config vlan <vid> ip igmp stream-limit-members
where
vid is a VLAN ID from 1 to 4093.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
280 Configuring IGMP using the CLI

This command includes the following parameters:

config vlan <vid> ip igmp stream-limit-members

followed by:
info Displays information about the stream limit members set on
individual ports for this VLAN.
enable <ports> Enables stream limitation and sets the maximum number of
max-streams <value> allowed streams for the specified ports on this VLAN. The
number of allowed streams cannot exceed the maximum
number for the VLAN. The range is from 0 to 65535, and the
default is 4.
disable <ports> Disables stream limitation for the specified ports on this VLAN.
set <ports> max-streams Sets the maximum number of allowed streams for the specified
<value> ports on this VLAN. The range is from 0 to 65535, and the
default is 4.

Configuration example: VLAN multicast stream limit members

This configuration example uses the commands described above to perform
the following tasks:
• Enable multicast stream limitation on ports 1/3 to 1/8 and set the
maximum allowed number of streams to 6 for this interface.
• Set the maximum number of allowed streams for ports 1/3 to 1/8 to 8.

After configuring the parameters, use the info command to show a

summary of the results.

ERS-8606:5# config vlan 3 ip igmp/ stream-limit-members

enable 1/3-1/8 max-streams 6
ERS-8606:5/config/vlan/3/ip/igmp/stream-limit-members#
set 1/3-1/8 max-streams 8
ERS-8606:5/config/vlan/3/ip/igmp/stream-limit-members#
info
Sub-Context:
Current Context:
enable:
port - 1/3
max-streams - 8
num-streams - 0
port - 1/8
max-streams - 8
num-streams - 0
disable : N/A
set : N/A

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Showing multicast group trace for IGMP snooping 281

Showing multicast group trace for IGMP snooping

Multicast group trace tracks the data flow path of the multicast streams.
There is information such as the multicast group address, the source
address, ingress vlan and port, and egress vlan and port.
To display the multicast group trace for an IGMP snoop-enabled interface,
use the following command:
show ip igmp snoop-trace [src <value> ] [grp <value> ]
where:
• [src <value> ] specifies the source IP address in the format a.b.c.d.
• [grp <value> ] specifies the group IP address in the format a.b.c.d.

ATTENTION
This command is not supported on Ethernet Routing Switch 8100 operating with
IGMP snoop mode enabled.

Figure 141 "show ip igmp snoop-trace" (page 281) shows sample output
from the show multicast group trace for the IGMP snoop-trace
command.
Figure 141
show ip igmp snoop-trace

Table 80 "show ip igmp snoop-trace command" (page 281) shows the field
descriptions for this command.

Table 80
show ip igmp snoop-trace command
Field Description
GROUP ADDRESS Indicates the IP multicast group address for which this entry contains
information.
SOURCE ADDRESS Indicates the source of the multicast traffic.
IN VLAN Indicates the incoming VLAN ID.
IN PORT Indicates the incoming port number.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
282 Configuring IGMP using the CLI

Field Description
OUT VLAN Indicates the outgoing VLAN ID.
OUT PORT Indicates the outgoing port number.

Configuration procedure
Use the following procedure to enable multicast group trace for IGMP
snoop-trace for two Ethernet Routing Switch 8600 devices in a series:

Step Action

1 On Ethernet Routing Switch 8600 number 1, create two VLANs and

enable DVMRP on both of them. Enable DVMRP at global level.
a. For VLAN 1, use the following commands:
config ip dvmrp enable
config vlan <vid-1> create byport 1
conf vlan <vid-1> add ports <port #>
config vlan <vid-1> ip create <ip-address>
conf vlan <vid-1> ip dvmrp enable
b. For VLAN 2, use the following commands:
config ip dvmrp enable
config vlan <vid-2> create byport 1
conf vlan <vid-2> add ports <port #>
config vlan <vid-2> ip create <ip-address>
conf vlan <vid-2> ip dvmrp enable

2 Connect a multicast source to one of the VLAN ports and start

sending multicast traffic.

3 On Ethernet Routing Switch 8600 number 2, create the same VLAN

as the VLAN ID for the second VLAN on Ethernet Routing Switch
8600 number 1. This extends the VLAN over two switches. Then,
enable IGMP snooping using the following commands:
conf vlan <vid-2> create byport 1
conf vlan <vid-2> add ports <port #>
config vlan <vid-2> ip igmp snoop enable

4 Send an IGMP report on one of the VLAN member ports and verify
this using the command:
show ip igmp group

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Displaying all IP IGMP show commands 283

5 Verify that the packets are reaching the receiver.

6 To view the output for the multicast packet flow through the
IGMP-snoop enabled Ethernet Routing Switch 8600, use the
following command:
show ip igmp snoop-trace

—End—

Displaying all IP IGMP show commands

The show ip igmp show-all command displays all relevant IP IGMP
information.

The command uses the syntax:

show ip igmp show-all [file <value> ]

where
value is the filename where the output is to be redirected.
Figure 142 "show ip igmp show-all command output" (page 284) shows
sample output for the show ip igmp show-all command.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
284 Configuring IGMP using the CLI

Figure 142
show ip igmp show-all command output

For each of the show ip igmp commands listed in Figure 142 "show ip
igmp show-all command output" (page 284), see the appropriate section of
this section for parameter explanations.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 285

Configuring DVMRP using the CLI

Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol (DVMRP) is used between
routers to exchange their multicast routing information. The protocol can be
configured on a VLAN, but it must be enabled globally in order to take effect.
• For more information about DVMRP concepts and terminology, see
"IP Multicast concepts" (page 15).
• For instructions on how to configure DVMRP static source groups, see
"Viewing and editing multicast routes using the CLI" (page 429).

This section includes the following topics:

• "Roadmap of DVMRP commands" (page 285)
• "Configuration prerequisites" (page 289)
• "Configuring DVMRP globally" (page 290)
• "Configuring DVMRP on an interface" (page 292)
• "Configuring DVMRP on Ethernet ports" (page 298)
• "Configuring DVMRP on a VLAN" (page 300)
• "Configuring DVMRP routing policies" (page 304)
• "Configuration examples" (page 340)
• "Displaying all IP DVMRP show commands" (page 344)

Roadmap of DVMRP commands

The following roadmap lists all the DVMRP commands and their parameters.
After using the commands listed here to configure the Ethernet Routing
Switch 8600, you can use the show commands to display information for
a particular feature.

To facilitate troubleshooting, the Ethernet Routing Switch 8600 also

provides one command (show ip dvmrp show-all) that lists all the
show commands for IP DVMRP and displays their configuration output.
"Displaying all IP DVMRP show commands" (page 344).

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
286 Configuring DVMRP using the CLI

Use this list as a quick reference.

Command Parameter
config ip dvmrp info
disable
enable
fwd-cache-timeout <integer>
generate-log <enable|disable>
generate-trap <enable|disable>
leaf-timeout <integer>
nbr-probe-interval <integer>
nbr-timeout <integer>
route-discard-timeout <integer>
route-expiration-timeout <integer>
route-switch-timeout <integer>
show-next-hop-table <enable|disabl
e>
triggered-update- interval
<integer>
update-interval <integer>
prune-resend <enable|disable>
config ip dvmrp interface <ipaddr> info
advertise-self <enable|disable>
create <active|passive>
default-listen <enable|disable>
default-supply <enable|disable>
default-supply-metric <cost>
disable
enableenable
in-policy <policy_name>
interface-type <active|passive>
metric <cost>
out-policy <policy_name>
show ip dvmrp info
show ip dvmrp interface
show ip dvmrp neighbor
show ip dvmrp next-hop

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Roadmap of DVMRP commands 287

Command Parameter
show ip dvmrp route
config ethernet <ports> ip dvmrp info
advertise-self <enable|disable>
create <active|passive>
default-listen <enable|disable>
default-supply <enable|disable>
default-supply-metric <cost>
disable
enable
in-policy <policy_name>
interface-type <active|passive>
metric <cost>
out-policy <policy_name>
config vlan <vid> ip dvmrp info
advertise-self <enable|disable>
create <active|passive>
default-listen <enable|disable>
default-supply <enable|disable>
default-supply-metric <cost>
disable
enable
in-policy <policy_name>
interface-type <active|passive>
metric <cost>
out-policy <policy_name>
config ip prefix-list <prefix-lis info
t-name>
add-prefix <ipaddr|mask> [maskLenFr
om <value>][maskLenTo <value>]
delete
name <name>
remove-prefix <ipaddr/mask>
config ip route-policy <policy_name info
> seq <seq_number>
action <permit|deny>

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
288 Configuring DVMRP using the CLI

Command Parameter
create
delete
enable
disable
match-as-path <as-list> [clear]
match-community <community-list>
[clear]
match-community-exact <enable|disa
ble> [clear]
match-interface <prefix-list>
[clear]
match-metric <metric> [clear]
match-network <prefix-list> [clear]
match-next-hop <prefix-list>
[clear]
match-protocol <protocol_name>
[clear]
match-route-src <prefix-list>
[clear]
match-route-type <route-type>
match-tag <tag> [clear]
name <policy_name>
set-as-path <as-list-id> [clear]
set-as-path-mode <tag|prepend>
[clear]
set-automatic-tag <enable|disable>
[clear]
set-community <community-list>
[clear]
set-community-mode <additive|none>
[clear]
set-injectlist <prefix-list>
[clear]
set-local-pref <pref-value> [clear]
set-mask <ipaddr>
set-metric <metric-value> [clear]
set-metric-type <metric-type>
[clear]

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuration prerequisites 289

Command Parameter
set-nssa-pbit <enable|disable>
set-next-hop <ipaddr> [clear]
set-origin <origin> [clear]
set-origin-egp-as <origin-egp-as>
[clear]
set-preference <pref-value> [clear]
set-tag <tag> [clear]
set-weight <weight> [clear]
how vlan info dvmrp [vlan <value>]
show ports info dvmrp [port
<value>]
show ip dvmrp show-all [file
<value>]

Configuration prerequisites
Before you can configure DVMRP, you must prepare the router as follows:

Step Action

1 Configure an IP interface. For information, see Configuring IP

Routing Operations (NN46205-500).

2 Disable PIM-SM from the interface where you want to configure

DVMRP because you cannot configure PIM-SM and DVMRP on
the same interface. For information, see "Configuring PIM using
the CLI" (page 345).

ATTENTION
Changing the configuration from PIM to DVMRP, or from DVMRP to PIM,
is not recommended while multicast traffic is flowing on the network.

a. A switch can have a mix of DVMRP and PIM-SM interfaces if it is

configured as an multicast border router (MBR).
b. An interface can only be configured with one multicast routing
protocol at a time (PIM-SM or DVMRP).
3 Enable DVMRP globally.
To enable DVMRP globally, see "Configuring DVMRP globally" (page
290)."

—End—

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
290 Configuring DVMRP using the CLI

Configuring DVMRP globally

To configure DVMRP globally, use the following command:

config ip dvmrp
This command includes the following parameters:

config ip dvmrp
followed by:
info Displays DVMRP settings on the switch (Figure 143
"config ip dvmrp info command output" (page 291)).
disable Globally disables DVMRP on the switch.
enable Globally enables DVMRP on the switch.
fwd-cache-timeout <integer> Sets the forward cache timeout (in seconds).
• integer is the range of 300 to 86400 seconds. The
default value is 300 seconds.
generate-log <enable|disab Enables or disables the DVMRP log.
le>
generate-trap <enable|disa Enables or disables the DVMRP trap.
ble>
leaf-timeout <integer> Sets the length of time (in seconds) the router waits for a
response from a neighbor before considering the attached
network to be a leaf network.
• integer is the range of 25 to 4000 seconds. The
default value is 125 seconds.
nbr-probe-interval Sets the time interval (in seconds) for the DVMRP router
<integer> to send a neighbor probe message on its interface.
• integer is the range of 5 to 30 seconds. The default
value is 10 seconds.
nbr-timeout <integer> Sets the length of time (in seconds) the router waits to
receive a report from a neighbor before considering the
connection inactive.
• integer is the range of 35 to 8000 seconds. The
default value is 35 seconds.
route-discard-timeout Sets the route discard timeout (in seconds).
<integer>
• integer is the range of 40 to 8000. The default
value is 260 seconds.
route-expiration-timeout Sets the route expiration timeout (in seconds).
<integer>
• integer is the range of 20 to 400 seconds. The
default value is 140 seconds.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring DVMRP globally 291

config ip dvmrp
followed by:
route-switch-timeout Sets the route switch timeout (in seconds).
<integer>
• integer is the range of 20 to 2000. The default
value is 140 seconds.
show-next-hop-table Enables or disables showing information about the
<enable|disable> DVMRP next hops"Showing DVMRP next hops" (page
296).
triggered-update-interval Sets the time interval (in seconds) between triggered
<integer> update messages sent when routing information changes.
• integer is the range of 5 to 1000 seconds. The
default value is 5 seconds.
update-interval <integer> Sets the time interval (in seconds) between DVMRP
router update messages.
• integer is the range of 10 to 2000 seconds. The
default value is 60 seconds.
prune-resend <enable|disab Sends prune messages every three minutes, to address
le> the link failures at some remote upstream switches. The
feature is disabled by default.

Figure 143 "config ip dvmrp info command output" (page 291) shows
sample output for the config ip dvmrp info command.

Figure 143
config ip dvmrp info command output

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
292 Configuring DVMRP using the CLI

Configuring DVMRP on an interface

To configure DVMRP on a specific interface, use the following command:

config ip dvmrp interface <ipaddr>

where
ipaddr indicates the IP address of the selected interface.
This command includes the following parameters:

config ip dvmrp interface <ipaddr>

followed by:
info Displays information about the specified DVMRP local
router interface (Figure 144 "config ip dvmrp interface info
command output" (page 293)).
advertise-self <enable|disa Enables or disables the advertisement of local routes for
ble> the selected interface to other switches in the network.
"Applying the advertisement of local networks policy to an
interface" (page 330).
create <active|passive> Sets the interface type: active or passive. "Creating a
passive interface" (page 334).
default-listen <enable|disa Learns the default route over the specified interface if this
ble> feature is enabled on the interface. The default setting is
enable. "Applying the default route policy to an interface"
(page 304).
default-supply <enable|disa Generates and advertises the default route when enabled
ble> on the interface. The default setting is disable. "Applying
the default route policy to an interface" (page 304).
default-supply-metric Advertises the specified metric over the interface if you
<cost> have configured the interface to supply the default route.
The range is 1 to 31 hops. The default setting is 1 hop.
"Applying the default route policy to an interface" (page
304).
disable Disables DVMRP on the local router interface.
enable Enables DVMRP on the local router interface.
in-policy <policy_name> Applies a DVMRP accept policy.
• policy_name is a policy name that has a string
length of 0 to 64.

"Applying a DVMRP accept policy to an interface" (page

328).
interface-type <active|pass Configure an interface as active or passive. "Configuring
ive> an active or passive interface type" (page 334).

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring DVMRP on an interface 293

config ip dvmrp interface <ipaddr>

followed by:
metric <cost> Sets the cost metric (maximum number of hops) for the
router interface.
• cost is the range of 1 to 31.
out-policy <policy_name> Applies a DVMRP accept policy.
• policy_name is a policy name that has a string
length of 0 to 64.

"Applying a DVMRP announce policy to an interface"

(page 318).

Figure 144 "config ip dvmrp interface info command output" (page 293)
shows sample output for the config ip dvmrp interface info
command.

Figure 144
config ip dvmrp interface info command output

Showing DVMRP group information

To display information about the general DVMRP group, use the following
command:

show ip dvmrp info

Figure 145 "show ip dvmrp info command output" (page 294) shows sample
output for the show ip dvmrp info command.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
294 Configuring DVMRP using the CLI

Figure 145
show ip dvmrp info command output

Table 81 "show ip dvmrp info command" (page 294) shows the field
descriptions for this command.

Table 81
show ip dvmrp info command
Field Description
AdminStat Indicates the status of DVMRP.
Genid Indicates the generation identifier for the routing process.
This is used by neighboring routers to detect whether the
DVMRP routing table is resent.
Version Indicates the version of DVMRP.
NumRoutes Indicates the number of entries in the routing table. This
is used to monitor the routing table size to detect illegal
advertisements of unicast routes.
NumReachableRoutes Indicates the number of entries in the routing table with
non infinite metrics. This is used to detect network
partitions by observing the ratio of reachable routes to
total routes.
UpdateInterval Indicates the global route update interval in seconds.
TriggeredUpdateInterval Indicates the global route triggered update interval in
seconds.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring DVMRP on an interface 295

Field Description
LeafTimeOut Indicates the hold down timer for leaf in seconds.
NbrTimeOut Indicates the neighbor timeout interval in seconds.
NbrProbeInterval Indicates the global neighbor probe interval in seconds.
FwdCacheTimeout Indicates the timeout interval (in seconds) for aging prune
entries in the Forward Cache.
RouteExpireTimeout Indicates the minimum amount of time remaining before
this entry ages out.
RouteDiscardTimeout Indicates the interval (in seconds) to discard collected
routes.
RouteSwitchTimeout Indicates the interval (in seconds) to discard unused
routes.
ShowNextHopTable Indicates the status of showing the nest hop table.
generate-trap Indicates the status of DVMRP traps.
generate-log Indicates the status of logging DVMRP.
PruneResend Indicates the status of resending prune messages.

Showing DVMRP neighbors

To display information about the configured DVMRP neighbors, use the
following command:

show ip dvmrp neighbor

Figure 146 "show ip dvmrp neighbor command output" (page 295) shows
sample output for the show ip dvmrp neighbor command.

Figure 146
show ip dvmrp neighbor command output

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
296 Configuring DVMRP using the CLI

Table 82 "show ip dvmrp neighbor command" (page 296) shows the field
descriptions for this command.

Table 82
show ip dvmrp neighbor command
Field Description
INTERFACE Indicates the value of ifIndex for the virtual interface used
to reach this DVMRP neighbor.
ADDRESS Indicates the IP address of the DVMRP neighbor.
EXPIRE Indicates the minimum time (in seconds) remaining before
this DVMRP neighbor ages out.
GENID Indicates the neighboring router generation identifier.
MAJVER Indicates the neighboring router’s major DVMRP version
number.
MINVER Indicates the neighboring router’s minor DVMRP version
number.
CAPABILITY Indicates the neighboring router’s capabilities. The leaf bit
indicates that the neighbor has only one interface with
its neighbors. The prune bit indicates that the neighbor
supports pruning. The generationID bit indicates that the
neighbor sends its generationID in probe messages. The
mtrace bit indicates that the neighbor can handle mtrace
requests.
STATE Indicates the state of DVMRP for the neighboring router.

Showing DVMRP next hops

Before you can show DVMRP next hops, you enable showing the table
by entering the following command:
config ip dvmrp show-next-hop-table enable

Showing the next-hop table is disabled by default. However, you can save
the setting of this command in the configuration for the switch. Disabling this
setting avoids using the large amount of memory required for these tables in
a scaled multicast environment with a large number of VLANs. For more
information, see "Configuring DVMRP globally" (page 290).

To display information about the DVMRP next hops, use the following
command:

show ip dvmrp next-hop

Figure 147 "show ip dvmrp next-hop command output" (page 297) shows
sample output for the show ip dvmrp next-hop command.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring DVMRP on an interface 297

Figure 147
show ip dvmrp next-hop command output

Table 83 "show ip dvmrp next-hop command" (page 297) shows the field
descriptions for this command.

Table 83
show ip dvmrp next-hop command
Field Description
SOURCE Indicates the network address, which when combined with the corresponding
value of dvmrpRouteNextHopSourceMask, identifies the sources for a next
hop on an outgoing interface.
MASK Indicates the network mask, which when combined with the corresponding
value of dvmrpRouteNextHopSource, identifies the sources for a next hop on
an outgoing interface.
INTERFACE Indicates the outgoing interface for this next hop.
TYPE Displays leaf if no downstream dependent neighbors exist on the outgoing
virtual interface. Otherwise, the type is branch.

Showing DVMRP routes

To display information about the DVMRP routes, use the following command:

show ip dvmrp route

Figure 148 "show ip dvmrp route command output" (page 298) shows
sample output for the show ip dvmrp route command.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
298 Configuring DVMRP using the CLI

Figure 148
show ip dvmrp route command output

Table 84 "show ip dvmrp route command" (page 298) shows the field
descriptions for this command.

Table 84
show ip dvmrp route command
Field Description
SOURCE Indicates the network address, which when combined with the
corresponding value of dvmrpRouteSourceMask, identifies the sources
for multicast routing information.
MASK Indicates the network mask, which when combined with the
corresponding value of dvmrpRouteSource, identifies the sources for
multicast routing information.
UPSTREAM_NBR Indicates the address of the upstream neighbor (for example, RPF
neighbor) from which IP datagrams from these sources are received.
INTERFACE Indicates the interface on which IP datagrams sent by these sources
are received.
METRIC Indicates the distance in hops to the source subnet.
EXPIRE Indicates the minimum amount of time remaining (in seconds) before
this entry ages out.

Configuring DVMRP on Ethernet ports

To configure DVMRP at the port level, use the following command:

config ethernet <ports> ip dvmrp

where
ports use the convention {slot/port[-slot/port][,...]}.
DVMRP must be enabled globally for these settings to take effect.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring DVMRP on Ethernet ports 299

This command includes the following parameters:

config ethernet <ports> ip dvmrp

followed by:
info Displays DVMRP settings on the port (Figure 149
"config ethernet ip dvmrp info command output"
(page 300)).
advertise-self <enable|disable> Enables or disables the advertisement of local routes
for the selected port to other switches in the network.
"Applying the advertisement of local networks policy
over a port" (page 332).
create <active|passive> Sets the interface type: active or passive.
"Configuring an active or passive port type" (page
336).
default-listen <enable|disable> Learns the default route over the specified port if
this feature is enabled on the interface. The default
setting is enable. "Applying the default route policy
to a port" (page 308).
default-supply <enable|disable> Generates and advertises the default route when
enabled on the port. The default setting is disable.
"Applying the default route policy to a port" (page
308).
default-supply-metric <cost> Advertises the specified metric over the port if you
have configured the port to supply the default route.
The range is 1 to 31 hops. The default setting is
1 hop. "Applying the default route policy to a port"
(page 308).
disable Disables DVMRP on the port.
enable Enables DVMRP on the port.
in-policy <policy_name> Applies a DVMRP accept policy.
• policy_name is a policy name that has a string
length of 0 to 64.

"Applying a DVMRP accept policy to a port" (page

329).
interface-type <active|passive> Configures an interface as active or passive.
"Configuring an active or passive port type" (page
336).

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
300 Configuring DVMRP using the CLI

config ethernet <ports> ip dvmrp

followed by:
metric <cost> Sets the DVMRP route metric.
• cost is the maximum number of hops with a
value of 1 to 31.
out-policy <policy_name> Applies a DVMRP accept policy.
• policy_name is a policy name that has a string
length of 0 to 64.

"Applying a DVMRP announce policy to a port" (page

320).

Figure 149 "config ethernet ip dvmrp info command output" (page 300)
shows sample output for the config ethernet ip dvmrp info
command.

Figure 149
config ethernet ip dvmrp info command output

Configuring DVMRP on a VLAN

To configure DVMRP on a VLAN, use the following command:
config vlan <vid> ip dvmrp
where
vid is a VLAN ID from 1 to 4092.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring DVMRP on a VLAN 301

This command includes the following parameters:

config vlan <vid> ip dvmrp

followed by:
info Displays DVMRP settings on the VLAN (Figure 150
"config vlan ip dvmrp info command output" (page 302)).
advertise-self <enable|disa Enables or disables the advertisement of local routes
ble> for the selected VLAN to other switches in the network.
"Applying the advertisement of local networks policy over
a VLAN" (page 331).
create <active|passive> Sets the interface type: active or passive.
"Configuring an active or passive VLAN type" (page 335).
default-listen <enable|disa Learns the default route over the specified VLAN if this
ble> feature is enabled on the interface. The default setting
is enable. "Applying the default route policy to a VLAN"
(page 306).
default-supply <enable|disa Generates and advertises the default route when enabled
ble> on the VLAN. The default setting is disable. "Applying the
default route policy to a VLAN" (page 306).
default-supply-metric Advertises the specified metric over the VLAN if you
<cost> configure the VLAN to supply the default route. The range
is 1 to 31 hops. The default setting is 1 hop. "Applying the
default route policy to a VLAN" (page 306).
disable Disables DVMRP on the VLAN.
enable Enables DVMRP on the VLAN.
in-policy <policy_name> Applies a DVMRP accept policy.
• policy_name is a policy name that has a string
length of 0 to 64.

"Applying a DVMRP accept policy to a VLAN" (page 328).

interface-type <active|pass Configures an interface as active or passive. "Configuring
ive> an active or passive VLAN type" (page 335).
metric <cost> Sets the DVMRP route metric.
• cost is the maximum number of hops with a value of
1 to 31.
out-policy <policy_name> Applies a DVMRP accept policy.
• policy_name is a policy name that has a string
length of 0 to 64.

"Applying a DVMRP announce policy to a VLAN" (page

319).

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
302 Configuring DVMRP using the CLI

Figure 150 "config vlan ip dvmrp info command output" (page 302) shows
sample output for the config vlan ip dvmrp info command.
Figure 150
config vlan ip dvmrp info command output

Configuration example: basic configuration for DVMRP on a VLAN

Two steps are needed to configure basic DVMRP on the Ethernet Routing
Switch 8600. Enabling of DVMRP globally and enabling DVMRP on a per
VLAN or brouter port basis.
In this case, configure the following:
• Enable DVMRP on VLAN 2 in passive mode as there are no DVMRP
routers attached to VLAN 2.
• Enable DVMRP on brouter port 1/1.

Figure 151 "DVMRP configuration example: base configuration" (page 303)

shows this configuration.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring DVMRP on a VLAN 303

Figure 151
DVMRP configuration example: base configuration

The following are the configuration steps required to enable DVMRP:

Step Action

1 Configure DVMRP Interface:

• On a Brouter Port
The following commands configure port 1/1 as a brouter port
with VLAN ID 2170 and enables DVMRP on this interface:
8610:5# config ethernet 1/1 ip create
10.1.1.76/30 2170
8610:5# config ethernet 1/1 ip dvmrp enable
• On a VLAN
The following commands create port-based VLAN 2 under STG
1 and enables DVMRP on this VLAN:
8610:5# config vlan 2 create byport 1
8610:5# config vlan 2 ports add 1/41
8610:5# config vlan 2 ip create 172.3.1.1/24
8610:5# config vlan 2 ip dvmrp interface-type
passive

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
304 Configuring DVMRP using the CLI

8610:5# config vlan 2 ip dvmrp enable

2 Enable DVMRP globally by using the command:

8610:5# config ip dvmrp enable

—End—

Configuring DVMRP routing policies

With DVMRP routing policies, you can improve the management of the
DVMRP routing tables by providing control of how the routing table is
populated and how the routes are exchanged between Ethernet Routing
Switch 8600 devices. These routing policies, when enabled, can be applied
to an interface that is a VLAN or a brouter port.
This section includes the following topics:
• "Configuring default route policies" (page 304)
• "Configuring DVMRP announce policies" (page 310)
• "Configuring DVMRP accept policies" (page 321)
• "Configuring the advertisement of local network policies" (page 330)
• "Configuring a DVMRP interface type" (page 333)
• "Displaying DVMRP routing policy information" (page 337)

Configuring default route policies

This section includes the following tasks that describe how to set up your
default route configuration using the command line interface:
• "Applying the default route policy to an interface" (page 304)
• "Applying the default route policy to a VLAN" (page 306)
• "Applying the default route policy to a port" (page 308)

Before you apply the default route policy to the switch, you must perform the
procedures provided in "Configuration prerequisites" (page 289).

To display DVMRP default route configuration information for an interface,

VLAN, or port, see "Displaying DVMRP routing policy information" (page
337).

Applying the default route policy to an interface

To apply the default route policy to an interface, use the following command:

config ip dvmrp interface <ipaddr>

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring DVMRP routing policies 305

where
ipaddr indicates the IP address of the selected interface.
This command includes the following parameters:

config ip dvmrp interface <ipaddr>

followed by:
info Shows the current level parameter settings and next level
directories.
advertise-self <enable|disa Advertises the local network if the setting is enable.
ble>
create <active|passive> Enables DVMRP on a specific interface of a specific
interface type.
• active is an active interface type.
• passive is a passive interface type.
default-listen <enable|disa Learns the default route over the specified interface if
ble> this feature is enabled on the interface. The options are
enable and disable. The default setting is enable.
default-supply <enable|disa Generates and advertises the default route when enabled
ble> on the interface. The options are enable and disable. The
default setting is disable.
default-supply-metric Advertises the specified metric over the interface if you
<cost> have configured the interface to supply the default route.
The range is 1 to 31 hops. The default setting is 1 hop.
disable Disables DVMRP on a specific interface.
enable Enables DVMRP on a specific interface
in-policy <policy_name> Specifies the DVMRP route in-policy.
• policy_name is a policy name that has a string
length of 0 to 64.
interface-type <active|pass Specifies the interface type as active or passive.
ive>
metric <cost> Specifies the DVMRP route metric.
• cost is the metric value with a range of 1 to 31.
out-policy <policy_name> Specifies the DVMRP route out-policy.
• policy_name is a policy name that has a string
length of 0 to 64.

Configuration example: DVMRP

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
306 Configuring DVMRP using the CLI

The following configuration example uses the commands described above

to enable the switch to learn the default route over interface 100.100.100.2.
After configuring these parameters, use the info command to show a
summary of the results.

8610:5# config ip dvmrp interface 100.100.100.2

default-listen enable
8610:5/config/ip/dvmrp/interface/100.100.100.2# info
Sub-Context:
Current Context:
enable : true
metric : 1
interface-type : passive
in-policy : N/A
out-policy : N/A
advertise-self : disable
default-listen : enable
default-supply : disable
default-supply-metric : 1

The following configuration example uses the commands described above

to enable the switch to generate and advertise the default route over
interface 100.100.100.6. After configuring these parameters, use the info
command to show a summary of the results.

8610:5# config ip dvmrp interface 100.100.100.6

default-supply enable
8610:5/config/ip/dvmrp/interface/100.100.100.6#
default-supply-metric 3
8610:5/config/ip/dvmrp/interface/100.100.100.6# info
Sub-Context:
Current Context:
enable : true
metric : 1
interface-type : passive
in-policy : N/A
out-policy : N/A
advertise-self : enable
default-listen : disable
default-supply : enable
default-supply-metric : 3

Applying the default route policy to a VLAN

To apply the default route policy to a VLAN, use the following command:

config vlan <vid> ip dvmrp

where

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring DVMRP routing policies 307

vid is a VLAN ID from 1 to 4092.

This command includes the following parameters:

config vlan <vid> ip dvmrp

followed by:
info Shows the current level parameter settings and next level
directories.
advertise-self <enable|disa Advertises the local network if set to enable.
ble>
create <active|passive> Enables DVMRP on a specific interface of a specific
interface type.
• active is an active interface type.
• passive is a passive interface type.
default-listen <enable|disa Learns the default route over the specified VLAN if this
ble> feature is enabled on the VLAN. The options are enable
and disable. The default setting is enable.

default-supply <enable|disa Generates and advertises only the default route when
ble> enabled on the VLAN. No other route is advertised to
the neighbors on this VLAN. The options are enable and
disable. The default setting is disable.
default-supply-metric Advertises the specified metric over the VLAN if you
<cost> configure the VLAN to supply the default route. The range
is 1 to 31 hops. The default setting is 1 hop.
disable Disables dvmrp on a specific interface.
enable Enables dvmrp on a specific interface.
in-policy <policy_name> Specifies the DVRMP route in-policy.
• policy_name is a policy name that has a string
length of 0 to 64.
interface-type <active|pass Specifies the interface type as active or passive.
ive>
metric <cost> Specifies the DVMRP route metric.
• cost is the metric value with a range of 1 to 31.
out-policy <policy_name> Specifies the DVRMP route out-policy.
• policy_name is a policy name that has a string
length of 0 to 64.

Configuration example: default route policy

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
308 Configuring DVMRP using the CLI

The following configuration example uses the commands described above

to enable the switch to learn the default route over VLAN 100 and to
disable the VLAN from advertising the default route. After configuring these
parameters, use the info command to show a summary of the results.

8610:5# config vlan 100 ip dvmrp default-listen enable

8610:5/config/vlan/100/ip/dvmrp# default-supply disable
8610:5/config/vlan/100/ip/dvmrp# info
Sub-Context:
Current Context:
dvmrp : enable
metric : 1
interface-type : passive
in-policy : N/A
out-policy : N/A
advertise-self : disable
default-listen : enable
default-supply : disable
default-supply-metric : 3

Applying the default route policy to a port

To apply the default route policy to a port, use the following command:

config ethernet <ports> ip dvmrp

where
ports use the convention {slot/port[-slot/port][, ...]}.
This command includes the following parameters:

config ethernet <ports> ip dvmrp

followed by:
advertise-self <enable|disa Advertises the local network if set to enable.
ble>
create <active|passive> Enables DVMRP on a specific interface of a specific
interface type.
• active is an active interface type.
• passive is a passive interface type.
default-listen <enable|disa Learns the default route over the specified port if this
ble> feature is enabled on the port. The options are enable and
disable. The default setting is enable.
default-supply <enable|disa Generates and advertises only the default route when
ble> enabled on the port. No other route is advertised to
the neighbors on this port. The options are enable and
disable. The default setting is disable.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring DVMRP routing policies 309

config ethernet <ports> ip dvmrp

followed by:
default-supply-metric Advertises the specified metric over the port if you
<cost> configure the port to supply the default route. The range is
1 to 31 hops. The default setting is 1 hop.
disable Disables dvmrp on a specific interface.
enable Enables dvmrp on a specific interface.
in-policy <policy_name> Specifies the DVRMP route in-policy.
• policy_name is a policy name that has a string
length of 0 to 64.
interface-type <active|pass Specifies the interface type as active or passive.
ive>
metric <cost> Specifies the DVMRP route metric.
• cost is the metric value with a range of 1 to 31.
out-policy <policy_name> Specifies the DVRMP route out-policy.
• policy_name is a policy name that has a string
length of 0 to 64.

Configuration example: default route policy for a port

The following configuration example uses the commands described above

to configure port 9 of the card in slot 1 to listen for the default route and to
disable the port from advertising the default route. After configuring these
parameters, use the info command to show a summary of the results.

8610:5# config ethernet 1/9 ip dvmrp default-listen

enable
8610:5/config/ethernet/1/9/ip/dvmrp# default-supply
disable
8610:5/config/ethernet/1/9/ip/dvmrp# info
Sub-Context:
Current Context:
dvmrp : enable
metric : 1
interface-type : active
in-policy : N/A
out-policy : N/A
advertise-self : disable
default-listen : enable
default-supply : disable
default-supply-metric : 3

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
310 Configuring DVMRP using the CLI

Configuring DVMRP announce policies

This section includes the following tasks that describe how to set up your
announce policy configuration using the command line interface:
• "Creating a DVMRP announce policy" (page 310)
• "Applying a DVMRP announce policy to an interface" (page 318)
• "Deleting a DVMRP announce policy from an interface" (page 319)
• "Applying a DVMRP announce policy to a VLAN" (page 319)
• "Deleting a DVMRP announce policy from a VLAN" (page 319)
• "Applying a DVMRP announce policy to a port" (page 320)
• "Deleting a DVMRP announce policy from a port" (page 320)

Before you create and apply a DVMRP announce policy to the switch, you
must perform the procedures provided in "Configuration prerequisites"
(page 289).

ATTENTION
Deleting an announce policy from an interface, VLAN, or port means that you
change the configuration. It does not mean that you delete the policy itself.

To display DVMRP announce policy configuration information for an

interface, VLAN, or port, see "Displaying DVMRP routing policy information"
(page 337).

Creating a DVMRP announce policy

Before you can apply an announce policy to an interface, VLAN, or port, you
must first create and configure the policy. An announce policy must be
configured on an interface.
You can create one or more IP prefix lists and apply that list to any IP route
policy. A prefix list with a 32 bit mask is equivalent to an address. A prefix
list with a mask less than 32 bits can be used as a network. If you configure
the MaskLenFrom field to be less than MaskLenUpto field, it can also be
used as a range.
To create prefix lists of networks to be used by the DVMRP policy, use the
following command:
config ip prefix-list <prefix-list-name>
where
prefix-list-name indicates the name of the specified prefix list,
which is a string length from 1 to 64.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring DVMRP routing policies 311

This command includes the following parameters:

config ip prefix-list <prefix-list-name>

followed by:
info Displays all of the prefixes in a given list.
add-prefix <ipaddr|mask>
Adds a prefix entry to the prefix list.
[maskLenFrom <value> ]
[maskLenTo <value> ] • ipaddr|mask is the IP address and mask.
• maskLenFrom <value> is the lower bound
of mask length. The default is the mask
length.
• maskLenTo <value> is the higher bound
mask length. The default is the mask length.

ATTENTION
Lower bound and higher bound mask lengths
together can define a range of networks.

delete Deletes the prefix list.

name <name> The name command is used to rename the specified
prefix list. The name length can be from 1 to 64
characters.
remove-prefix <ipaddr/mask> Removes a prefix entry from the prefix list.
• ipaddr/mask is the IP address and mask.

To configure a DVMRP policy, use the following command:

config ip route-policy <policy_name> seq <seq_number>
where:
• policy_name indicates the name of the specified policy, which is a
string length from 1 to 64.
• seq_number indicates the number of the specified policy, which is a
number from 1 to 65535.

ATTENTION
Not all of the route-policy seq parameters apply to the process of creating
a DVMRP policy. The table below describes the parameters that you must use
to create the DVMRP policy. For information about the other parameters for this
command, see Configuring IP Routing Operations (NN46205-500).

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
312 Configuring DVMRP using the CLI

This command includes the following parameters:

config ip route-policy <policy_name> seq <seq_number>

followed by:
info Displays current configuration information about this policy
sequence number (Figure 152 "config ip route-policy seq
info command" (page 317)).
action <permit|deny> This field specifies the action to be taken when a policy is
selected for a specific route. This can be permit or deny.
Permit allows the route and deny ignores the route.
create
Creates a route policy with a policy name and a
sequence number.

ATTENTION
When creating a route policy in the CLI, the ID is
internally generated using an automated algorithm.
When you create a route policy in Device Manager,
you can manually assign the ID number.

delete Deletes a route policy with a policy name and a sequence

number.
disable Disables a route policy with a policy name and a sequence
number.
enable Enables a route policy with a policy name and a sequence
number.
match-as-path <as-list> If configured, the switch matches the as-path attribute
[clear] of the BGP routes against the contents of the specified
as-lists. This field is used only for BGP routes and ignored
for all other route types.
• as-list specifies the list IDs of up to four as-lists,
separated by a comma.
• [clear] removes the configured value for
match-as-path.
match-community <community- If configured, the switch matches the community attribute
list> [clear] of the BGP routes against the contents of the specified
community-lists. This field is used only for BGP routes
and ignored for all other route types.
• community-list specifies the list IDs of up to four
defined community-lists, separated by a comma.
• [clear] removes the configured value for
match-community.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring DVMRP routing policies 313

config ip route-policy <policy_name> seq <seq_number>

followed by:
match-community-exact When disabled, match-community results in a match when
<enable|disable> [clear] the community attribute of the BGP routes matches any
entry of any community-list specified in match-community.
When enabled, match-community results in a match
when the community attribute of the BGP routes matches
all of the entries of all the community-lists specified in
match-community.
match-interface <prefix-lis If configured, the switch matches the IP address of the
t> [clear] interface from which the RIP route was learned against the
contents of the specified prefix list. This field is used only
for RIP routes and ignored for all other route types.
• prefix-list specifies the names of up to four
defined prefix lists, separated by a comma.
• [clear] removes the configured value for
match-interface.
match-metric <metric> If configured, the switch matches the metric of the
[clear] incoming advertisement or existing route against the
specified value. If 0, this field is ignored.
• metric is 1 to 65535. The default is 0.
• [clear] removes the configured value for
match-metric.
match-network <prefix-list> If configured, the switch matches the destination network
[clear] against the contents of the specified prefix lists.
• prefix-list specifies the names of up to four
defined prefix lists, separated by a comma.
• [clear] removes the configured value for
match-network.
match-next-hop <prefix-lis If configured, matches the next hop IP address of the route
t> [clear] against the contents of the specified prefix list. This field
applies only to nonlocal routes.
• prefix-list specifies the names of up to four
defined prefix lists, separated by a comma.
• [clear] removes the configured value for
match-next-hop.
match-protocol <protocol_na If configured, matches route policy to the protocol from
me> [clear] which the route is learned. This field is used only for RIP
announcement purposes.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
314 Configuring DVMRP using the CLI

config ip route-policy <policy_name> seq <seq_number>

followed by:
match-route-src <prefix-lis If configured, matches the next hop IP address for RIP
t> [clear] routes and advertising router IDs for OSPF routes against
the contents of the specified prefix list. This option is
ignored for all other route types.
• prefix-list specifies the names of up to four
defined prefix list s, separated by a comma.
• [clear] removes the configured value for
match-route-src.
match-route-type <route-ty Sets a specific route-type to be matched (applies only to
pe> OSPF routes).
• route-type External-1 and External-2 specifies
OSPF routes of the specified type only (any other
value is ignored).
match-tag <tag> [clear] Specifies a list of tags that is used during the match criteria
process. Contains one or more tag values.
• tag is a value from 0 to 256.
• [clear] removes the configured values for
match-tag.
name <policy_name> Renames a policy after its creation. This command
changes the name field for all sequence numbers under
the given policy.
set-as-path <as-list-id> If configured, the switch adds the as-number of the as-list
[clear] to the BGP routes that match this policy.
• as-list-id specifies the list id of up to four defined
as-lists, separated by a comma.
• [clear] removes the configured value for
set-as-path.
set-as-path-mode <tag|prepe prepend is the default configuration. The switch prepends
nd> [clear] the as-number of the as-list specified in set-as-path to the
old as-path attribute of the BGP routes that match this
policy.
set-automatic-tag Sets the tag automatically. This option is used for BGP
<enable|disable> [clear] routes only.
set-community <community-li If configured, the switch adds the community number of
st> [clear] the community list to the BGP routes that match this policy.
• community-list specifies the list ID of up to four
defined community lists, separated by a comma.
• [clear] removes the configured value for
set-community.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring DVMRP routing policies 315

config ip route-policy <policy_name> seq <seq_number>

followed by:
set-community-mode Sets the community mode.
<additive|none> [clear]
• additive—the switch prepends the community
number of the community list specified in
set-community to the old community path attribute of
the BGP routes that match this policy.
• none—the switch removes the community path
attribute of the BGP routes that match this policy to
the specified value.
• [clear] removes the configured value for
set-community-mode.
set-injectlist <prefix-lis If configured, the switch replaces the destination network
t> [clear] of the route that matches this policy with contents of the
specified prefix list.
• prefix-list specifies one prefix list by name.
• [clear] removes the configured value for
set-injectlist.
set-local-pref <pref-value> A value used during a route decision process in the BGP
[clear] protocol. Applicable to BGP only.
set-mask <ipaddr> If configured, the switch sets the mask of the route that
matches this policy. This applies only to RIP accept
policies.
• ipaddr is a valid contiguous IP mask.
set-metric <metric-value> If configured, the switch sets the metric value for the route
[clear] while announcing a redistributing. The default is 0. If
the default is configured, the original cost of the route is
advertised into OSPF; for RIP, the original cost of the
route or default-import-metric is used.
set-metric-type <metric-typ If configured, sets the metric type for the routes to be
e> [clear] announced into the OSPF domain that matches this
policy. The default is type 2. This field is applicable only
for OSPF announce policies.
set-nssa-pbit <enable|disa Sets the not-so-stubby-area (NSSA) translation P bit.
ble> Applicable to OSPF announce policies only.

set-next-hop <ipaddr> Specifies the IP address of the next hop router. Ignored
[clear] for DVMRP routes.
set-origin <origin> [clear] If configured, the switch changes the origin path attribute
of the BGP routes that match this policy to the specified
value.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
316 Configuring DVMRP using the CLI

config ip route-policy <policy_name> seq <seq_number>

followed by:
set-origin-egp-as Indicates the remote autonomous sys number. Applicable
<origin-egp-as> [clear] to BGP only.
set-preference <pref-value> Setting the preference greater than zero specifies the
[clear] route preference value to be assigned to the routes that
match this policy. This applies to accept policies only.
• pref-value sets the preference value from 0 to 255.
The default is 0. If the default is configured, the global
preference value is used.
• [clear] removes the configured value for
set-preference.
set-tag <tag> [clear] Sets the tag of the destination routing protocol. If not
specified, forward the tag value in the source routing
protocol. A value of zero indicates that this parameter is
not set.
set-weight <weight> [clear] The weight value for the routing table. For BGP,
this value overrides the weight configured through
NetworkTableEntry, FilterListWeight, or NeighborWeight.
Used for BGP only. A value of zero indicates that this
parameter is not set.

Figure 152 "config ip route-policy seq info command" (page 317) displays
sample output for the config ip route-policy seq info command.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring DVMRP routing policies 317

Figure 152
config ip route-policy seq info command

Configuration example: DVMRP announce policy

The following configuration example uses the above commands to create

a DVMRP announce policy. In this example, a single prefix list is created
(prefix1) (see command line 1 below), and IP address 4.4.4.4/24 is added to
the prefix list (see command line 2 below).

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
318 Configuring DVMRP using the CLI

After the prefix list is created, the policy is configured (see command lines 3
through 7 below), the prefix list is applied to the match-network parameter
of the DVMRP policy (see command line 8 below), and the new policy is
applied to VLAN 3 (see command line 9 below).

1. ERS_8606:5# config vlan 3 ip config ip prefix-list

prefix1
2. ERS_8606:5/config/ip/prefix-list/prefix1# add
4.4.4.4/24
3. ERS_8606:5# config ip route-policy policy1
4. ERS_8606:5/config/ip/route-policy/policy1# seq 1
5. ERS_8606:5/config/ip/route-policy/policy1/seq/1#
create
6. ERS_8606:5/config/ip/route-policy/policy1/seq/1#
action deny
7. ERS_8606:5/config/ip/route-policy/policy1/seq/1#
enable
8. ERS_8606:5/config/ip/route-policy/policy1/seq/1#
match-network prefix1
9. ERS_8606:5# config vlan 3 ip dvmrp out-policy policy1

ATTENTION
When this configuration is applied to VLAN 3, the switch does not announce the
DVMRP routes to network 4.4.4.0 or to the neighbor switches on VLAN 3.

Applying a DVMRP announce policy to an interface

To apply a DVMRP announce policy to an interface, use the following
command:
config ip dvmrp interface <ipaddr> out-policy
<policy_name>
where:
• ipaddr is the address of the interface.
• policy_name is the name of the applicable announce policy you create.

Configuration example: applying DVMRP interface announce policy

The following configuration example uses the above command to apply a

DVMRP announce policy to an interface. In this example, the announce
policy named "policy1" is applied to interface 2.2.2.2.

ERS_8606:5# config ip dvmrp interface 2.2.2.2 out-policy

policy1

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring DVMRP routing policies 319

Deleting a DVMRP announce policy from an interface

To delete a DVMRP announce policy from an interface, use the following
command:
config ip dvmrp interface <ipaddr> out-policy ""
where:
• ipaddr is the address of the interface.
• "" are double quotes that indicate the policy used in the current session.
Entering no name for the out-policy deletes the policy.

Configuration example: deleting DVMRP interface announce policy

The following configuration example uses the above command to delete the
DVMRP announce policy from an interface. In this example, the announce
policy currently set on interface 2.2.2.2 is deleted.

ERS_8606:5# config ip dvmrp interface 2.2.2.2 out-policy

""

Applying a DVMRP announce policy to a VLAN

To apply a DVMRP announce policy to a VLAN, use the following command:
config vlan <vid> ip dvmrp out-policy <policy_name>
where:
• vid is the number of the VLAN.
• policy_name is the name of the applicable announce policy you create.

Configuration example: adding DVMRP interface announce policy

to a VLAN

The following configuration example uses the above command to apply a

DVMRP announce policy to a VLAN. In this example, the announce policy
named "policy1" is applied to VLAN 5.

ERS-8606:5# config vlan vlan5 ip dvmrp out-policy

policy1

Deleting a DVMRP announce policy from a VLAN

To delete a DVMRP announce policy from a VLAN, use the following
command:
config vlan <vid> ip dvmrp out-policy ""
where:
• vid is the number of the VLAN.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
320 Configuring DVMRP using the CLI

• "" are double quotes that indicate the policy used in the current session.
Entering no name for the out-policy deletes the policy.

Configuration example: deleting DVMRP interface announce policy

to a VLAN

The following configuration example uses the above command to delete

the DVMRP announce policy from a VLAN. In this example, the announce
policy currently set on VLAN 5 is deleted.

ERS_8606:5# config vlan vlan5 ip dvmrp out-policy ""

Applying a DVMRP announce policy to a port

To apply a DVMRP announce policy to a port, use the following command:
config ether <port> ip dvmrp out-policy <policy_name>
where:
• port is the number of the port.
• policy_name is the name of the applicable announce policy you create.

Configuration example: adding DVMRP interface announce policy

to a port

The following configuration example uses the above command to apply a

DVMRP announce policy to a port. In this example, the announce policy
named "policy1" is applied to port 1/5.

ERS_8606:5# config ether 1/5 ip dvmrp out-policy policy1

Deleting a DVMRP announce policy from a port

To delete a DVMRP announce policy from a port, use the following
command:
config ether <port> ip dvmrp out-policy ""
where:
• port is the number of the port.
• "" are double quotes that indicate the policy used in the current session.
Entering no name for the out-policy deletes the policy.

Configuration example: deleting DVMRP interface announce policy

to a port

The following configuration example uses the above command to delete the
DVMRP announce policy from a port. In this example, the announce policy
currently set on port 1/5 is deleted.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring DVMRP routing policies 321

ERS_8606:5# config ether 1/5 ip dvmrp out-policy ""

Configuring DVMRP accept policies

This section includes the following tasks that describe how to set up your
accept policy configuration using the command line interface:
• "Creating a DVMRP accept policy" (page 321)
• "Applying a DVMRP accept policy to an interface" (page 328)
• "Deleting a DVMRP accept policy from an interface" (page 328)
• "Applying a DVMRP accept policy to a VLAN" (page 328)
• "Deleting a DVMRP accept policy from a VLAN" (page 329)
• "Applying a DVMRP accept policy to a port" (page 329)
• "Deleting a DVMRP accept policy from a port" (page 330)

Before you create and apply a DVMRP accept policy to the switch, you
must perform the procedures provided in "Configuration prerequisites"
(page 289).

ATTENTION
Deleting an accept policy from an interface, VLAN, or port means that you change
the configuration. It does not mean that you delete the policy itself.

To display DVMRP accept policy configuration information for an interface,

VLAN, or port, see "Displaying DVMRP routing policy information" (page
337).

Creating a DVMRP accept policy

Before you can apply an accept policy to an interface, VLAN, or port,
you must first create and configure the policy. An accept policy must be
configured on an interface.
You can create one or more IP prefix lists and apply that list to any IP route
policy. A prefix list with a 32 bit mask is equivalent to an address. A prefix
list with a mask less than 32 bits can be used as a network. If you configure
the MaskLenFrom field to be less than the MaskLenUpto field, it can also
be used as a range.
To create prefix lists of networks to be used by the DVMRP policy, use the
following command:
config ip prefix-list <prefix-list-name>
where
prefix-list-name indicates the name of the specified prefix list,
which is a string length from 1 to 64.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
322 Configuring DVMRP using the CLI

This command includes the following parameters:

config ip prefix-list <prefix-list-name>

followed by:
info Displays all of the prefixes in a given list.
add-prefix <ipaddr/mask> [maskLenFr
Adds a prefix entry to the prefix list.
om <value> ] [maskLenTo <value> ]
• ipaddr/mask is the IP address and
mask.
• maskLenFrom <value> is the lower
bound of mask length. The default is the
mask length.
• maskLenTo <value> is the higher
bound mask length. The default is the
mask length.

ATTENTION
Lower bound and higher bound mask
lengths together can define a range of
networks.

delete Deletes the prefix list.

name <name> The name command is used to rename the
specified prefix list. The name length can be
from 1 to 64 characters.
remove-prefix <ipaddr/mask> Removes a prefix entry from the prefix list.
• ipaddr/mask is the IP address and mask.

To configure a DVMRP policy, use the following command:

config ip route-policy <policy_name> seq <seq number>
where:
• policy name indicates the name of the specified policy, which is a
string length from 1 to 64.
• seq number indicates the number of the specified policy, which is a
number from 1 to 65535.

ATTENTION
Not all of the route-policy seq parameters apply to the process of creating a
DVMRP policy. The following table describes the parameters that you must use
to create the DVMRP policy. For information about the other parameters for this
command, see Configuring IP Routing Operations (NN46205-500).

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring DVMRP routing policies 323

This command includes the following parameters:

config ip route-policy <policy name> seq <seq number>

followed by:
info Displays current configuration information about this policy
sequence number (Figure 152 "config ip route-policy seq
info command" (page 317)).
action <permit|deny> This field specifies the action to be taken when a policy is
selected for a specific route. This can be permit or deny.
Permit allows the route, and deny ignores the route.
create
Creates a route policy with a policy name and a
sequence number.

ATTENTION
When creating a route policy in the CLI, the ID is
internally generated using an automated algorithm.
When you create a route policy in Device Manager,
you can manually assign the ID number.

delete Deletes a route policy with a policy name and a sequence

number.
disable Disables a route policy with a policy name and a sequence
number.
enable Enables a route policy with a policy name and a sequence
number.
match-as-path <as-list> If configured, the switch matches the as-path attribute
[clear] of the BGP routes against the contents of the specified
as-lists. This field is used only for BGP routes and ignored
for all other route types.
• as-list specifies the list IDs of up to four as-lists,
separated by a comma.
• [clear] removes the configured value for
match-as-path.
match-community <community- If configured, the switch matches the community attribute
list> [clear] of the BGP routes against the contents of the specified
community-lists. This field is used only for BGP routes
and ignored for all other route types.
• community-list specifies the list IDs of up to four
defined community-lists, separated by a comma.
• [clear] removes the configured value for
match-community.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
324 Configuring DVMRP using the CLI

config ip route-policy <policy name> seq <seq number>

followed by:
match-community-exact When disabled, match-community results in a match when
<enable|disable> [clear] the community attribute of the BGP routes matches any
entry of any community-list specified in match-community.
When enabled, match-community results in a match
when the community attribute of the BGP routes matches
all of the entries of all the community-lists specified in
match-community.
match-interface <prefix-lis If configured, the switch matches the IP address of the
t> [clear] interface from which the RIP route was learned against
the contents of the specified prefix list. This field is used
only for RIP routes and ignored for all other route types.
• prefix-list specifies the names of up to four
defined prefix lists, separated by a comma.
• [clear] removes the configured value for
match-interface.
match-metric <metric> If configured, the switch matches the metric of the
[clear] incoming advertisement or existing route against the
specified value. If 0, this field is ignored.
• metric is 1 to 65535. The default is 0.
• [clear] removes the configured value for
match-metric.
match-network <prefix-list> If configured, the switch matches the destination network
[clear] against the contents of the specified prefix lists.
• prefix-list specifies the names of up to four
defined prefix lists, separated by a comma.
• [clear] removes the configured value for
match-network.
match-next-hop <prefix-lis If configured, matches the next hop IP address of the
t> [clear] route against the contents of the specified prefix list. This
field applies only to nonlocal routes.
• prefix-list specifies the names of up to four
defined prefix lists, separated by a comma.
• [clear] removes the configured value for
match-next-hop.
match-protocol <protocol-na If configured, matches the protocol from which the route
me> [clear] is learned. This field is used only for RIP announcement
purposes.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring DVMRP routing policies 325

config ip route-policy <policy name> seq <seq number>

followed by:
match-route-src <prefix-lis If configured, matches the next hop IP address for RIP
t> [clear] routes and advertising router IDs for OSPF routes against
the contents of the specified prefix list. This option ignores
for all other route types.
• prefix-list specifies the names of up to four
defined prefix lists, separated by a comma.
• [clear] removes the configured value for
match-route-src.
match-route-type <route-ty Sets a specific route-type to be matched (applies only to
pe> OSPF routes).
• route-type External-1 and External-2 specifies
OSPF routes of the specified type only (any other
value is ignored).
match-tag <tag> [clear] Specifies a list of tags that is used during the match
criteria process. Contains one or more tag values.
• tag is a value from 0 to 256.
• [clear] removes the configured values for
match-tag.
name <policy name> This command is used to rename a policy after its
creation. This command changes the name field for all
sequence numbers under the given policy.
set-as-path <as-list-id> If configured, the switch adds the as-number of the as-list,
[clear] to the BGP routes that match this policy.
• as-list-id specifies the list ID of up to four defined
as-lists separated by a comma.
• [clear] removes the configured value for
set-as-path.
set-as-path-mode <tag|prepe prepend is the default configuration. The switch
nd> [clear] prepends the as-number of the as-list specified in
set-as-path to the old as-path attribute of the BGP routes
that match this policy.
set-automatic-tag Sets the tag automatically. This option is used for BGP
<enable|disable> [clear] routes only.
set-community <community-li If configured, the switch adds the community number
st> [clear] of the community-list to the BGP routes that match this
policy.
• community-list specifies the list ID of up to four
defined community lists separated by a comma.
• [clear] removes the configured value for
set-community.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
326 Configuring DVMRP using the CLI

config ip route-policy <policy name> seq <seq number>

followed by:
set-community-mode Sets the community mode.
<additive|none> [clear]
• additive—the switch prepends the community
number of the community-list specified in
set-community to the old community path attribute of
the BGP routes that match this policy.
• none—the switch removes the community-path
attribute of the BGP routes that match this policy to
the specified value.
• [clear] removes the configured value for
set-community-mode.
set-injectlist <prefix-lis If configured, the switch replaces the destination network
t> [clear] of the route that matches this policy with contents of the
specifies prefix list.
• prefix-list specify one prefix list by name.
• [clear] removes the configured value for
set-injectlist.
set-local-pref <pref-value> A value used during the route decision process in the
[clear] BGP protocol. Applicable to BGP only.
set-mask <ipaddr> If configured, the switch sets the mask of the route that
matches this policy. This applies only to RIP accept
policies.
ipaddr is a valid contiguous IP mask.
set-metric <metric-value> If configured, the switch sets the metric value for the
[clear] route while announcing a redistributing. The default is 0.
If the default is configured, the original cost of the route
is advertised into OSPF; for RIP, the original cost of the
route or default-import-metric is used.
set-metric-type <metric-typ If configured, sets the metric type for the routes to be
e> [clear] announced into the OSPF domain that matches this
policy. The default is type 2. This field is applicable only
for OSPF announce policies.
set-nssa-pbit <enable|disa Sets the not-so-stubby-area (nssa) translation P bit.
ble> Applicable to OSPF announce policies only.

set-next-hop <ipaddr> Specifies the IP address of the next hop router. Ignored
[clear] for DVMRP routes.
set-origin <origin> [clear] If configured, the switch changes the origin path attribute
of the BGP routes that match this policy to the specified
value.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring DVMRP routing policies 327

config ip route-policy <policy name> seq <seq number>

followed by:
set-origin-egp-as Indicates the remote autonomous system number.
<origin-egp-as> [clear] Applicable to BGP only.
set-preference <pref-value> Setting the preference greater than zero specifies the
[clear] route preference value to be assigned to the routes that
match this policy. This applies to accept policies only.
• pref-value sets the preference value from 0 to 255.
The default is 0. If the default is configured, the global
preference value is used.
• [clear] removes the configured value for
set-preference.
set-tag <tag> [clear] Sets the tag of the destination routing protocol. If not
specified, forward the tag value in the source routing
protocol. A value of zero indicates that this parameter
is not set.
set-weight <weight> [clear] The weight value for the routing table. For BGP,
this value overrides the weight configured through
NetworkTableEntry, FilterListWeight, or NeighborWeight.
Used for BGP only. A value of zero indicates that this
parameter is not set.

Configuration example: DVMRP accept policy

The following configuration example uses the previous commands to create

a DVMRP accept policy. In this example, a single prefix list is created
(prefix2) (see command line 1), and IP address 4.4.4.4/24 is added to the
prefix list (refer command line 2). After the prefix list is created, the policy is
configured (see command lines 3 through 7), the prefix list is applied to the
match-network parameter of the DVMRP policy (see command line 8), and
the new policy is applied to VLAN 5 (see command line 9).

1. ERS_8606:5# config vlan 5 ip config ip prefix-list

prefix2
2. ERS_8606:5/config/ip/prefix-list/prefix2# add
4.4.4.4/24
3. ERS_8606:5# config ip route-policy policy2
4. ERS_8606:5/config/ip/route-policy/policy2# seq 1
5. ERS_8606:5/config/ip/route-policy/policy2/seq/1#
create
6. ERS_8606:5/config/ip/route-policy/policy2/seq/1#
action deny
7. ERS_8606:5/config/ip/route-policy/policy2/seq/1#
enable

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
328 Configuring DVMRP using the CLI

8. ERS_8606:5/config/ip/route-policy/policy2/seq/1#
match-network prefix2
9. ERS_8606:5# config vlan 5 ip dvmrp in-policy policy2

Applying a DVMRP accept policy to an interface

To apply a DVMRP accept policy to an interface, use the following command:
config ip dvmrp interface <ipaddr> in-policy <policy
name>
where:
• ipaddr is the address of the interface.
• policy name is the name of the applicable accept policy you create.

Configuration example: applying DVMRP accept policy to an interface

The following configuration example uses the above command to apply a

DVMRP accept policy to an interface. In this example, the announce policy
named "policy2" is applied to interface 3.3.3.3.

ERS_8606:5# config ip dvmrp interface 3.3.3.3 in-policy

policy2

Deleting a DVMRP accept policy from an interface

To delete a DVMRP accept policy from an interface, use the following
command:
config ip dvmrp interface <ipaddr> in-policy ""
where:
• ipaddr is the address of the interface.
• "" are double quotes that indicate the policy used in the current session.
Entering no name for the in-policy deletes the policy.

Configuration example: deleting DVMRP accept policy on an interface

The following configuration example uses the above command to delete the
DVMRP accept policy from an interface. In this example, the accept policy
currently set on interface 3.3.3.3 is deleted.

ERS_8606:5# config ip dvmrp interface 3.3.3.3 in-policy

""

Applying a DVMRP accept policy to a VLAN

To apply a DVMRP accept policy to a VLAN, use the following command:
config vlan <vid> ip dvmrp in-policy <policy name>

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring DVMRP routing policies 329

where:
• vid is the number of the VLAN.
• policy name is the name of the applicable accept policy you create.

Configuration example: applying DVMRP accept policy to a VLAN

The following configuration example uses the above command to apply a

DVMRP accept policy to a VLAN. In this example, the announce policy
named "policy2" is applied to VLAN 3.

ERS_8606:5# config vlan vlan3 ip dvmrp in-policy policy2

Deleting a DVMRP accept policy from a VLAN

To delete a DVMRP accept policy from a VLAN, use the following command:
config vlan <vid> ip dvmrp in-policy ""
where:
• vid is the number of the VLAN.
• "" are double quotes that indicate the policy used in the current session.
Entering no name for the in-policy deletes the policy.

Configuration example: deleting DVMRP accept policy to a VLAN

The following configuration example uses the above command to delete

the DVMRP accept policy from a VLAN. In this example, the accept policy
currently set on VLAN 3 is deleted.

ERS_8606:5# config vlan vlan3 ip dvmrp in-policy ""

Applying a DVMRP accept policy to a port

To apply a DVMRP accept policy to a port, use the following command:
config ether <port> ip dvmrp in-policy <policy name>
where:
• port is the number of the port.
• policy_name is the name of the applicable announce policy you create.

Configuration example: applying DVMRP accept policy to a port

The following configuration example uses the above command to apply

a DVMRP accept policy to a port. In this example, the announce policy
named "policy2" is applied to port 1/5.

ERS_8606:5# config ether 1/5 ip dvmrp in-policy policy2

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
330 Configuring DVMRP using the CLI

Deleting a DVMRP accept policy from a port

To delete a DVMRP accept policy from a port, use the following command:
config ether <port> ip dvmrp in-policy ""
where:
• port is the number of the port.
• "" are double quotes that indicate the policy used in the current session.
Entering no name for the in-policy deletes the policy.

Configuration example: deleting DVMRP accept policy to a port

The following configuration example uses the above command to delete

the DVMRP accept policy from a port. In this example, the accept policy
currently set on port 1/5 is deleted.

ERS_8606:5# config ether/1/5 ip dvmrp in-policy ""

Configuring the advertisement of local network policies

This section includes the following tasks that describe how to configure the
advertisement of local networks policy using the command line interface:
• "Applying the advertisement of local networks policy to an interface"
(page 330)
• "Applying the advertisement of local networks policy over a VLAN"
(page 331)
• "Applying the advertisement of local networks policy over a port" (page
332)

Before you apply the advertisement of local networks policy to the switch,
you must perform the procedures provided in "Configuration prerequisites"
(page 289).

To display DVMRP advertisement of local networks policy configuration

information for an interface, VLAN, or port, see "Displaying DVMRP routing
policy information" (page 337).

Applying the advertisement of local networks policy to an

interface
To apply the advertisement of local networks to an interface, use the
following command:

config ip dvmrp interface <ipaddr> advertise-self

where
ipaddr is the address of the interface.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring DVMRP routing policies 331

This command includes the following parameters:

config ip dvmrp interface <ipaddr> advertise-self

followed by:
enable Enables the advertisement of local routes for the selected interface
to other switches in the network.
disable Disables the advertisement of local routes for the selected interface
to other switches in the network.

Configuration example: applying DVMRP interface advertisement

The following configuration example uses the above command to disable the
advertisement of local routes on interface 100.100.100.2. After configuring
these parameters, use the info command to show a summary of the
results:

ERS_8606:5# config ip dvmrp interface 100.100.100.2

advertise-self disable
ERS_8606:5/config/ip/dvmrp/interface/100.100.100.2# info
Sub-Context:
Current Context:
enable : true
metric : 1
interface-type : passive
in-policy : N/A
out-policy : N/A
advertise-self : disable
default-listen : enable
default-supply : disable
default-supply-metric : 3

Applying the advertisement of local networks policy over a VLAN

To apply the advertisement of local networks to a VLAN, use the following
command:

config vlan <vid> ip dvmrp advertise-self

where
vid is the number of the VLAN.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
332 Configuring DVMRP using the CLI

This command includes the following parameters:

config vlan <vid> ip dvmrp advertise-self

followed by:
enable Enables the advertisement of local routes over the selected VLAN to
other switches in the network.
disable Disables the advertisement of local routes over the selected VLAN
to other switches in the network.

Configuration example: applying DVMRP VLAN advertisement

The following configuration example uses the above command to enable

the advertisement of local routes on VLAN 100. After configuring these
parameters, use the info command to show a summary of the results:

ERS_8606:5# config vlan 100 ip dvmrp advertise-self

enable
ERS_8606:5/config/vlan/100/ip/dvmrp# info
Sub-Context:
Current Context:
dvmrp : enable
metric : 1
interface-type : active
in-policy : N/A
out-policy : N/A
advertise-self : enable
default-listen : enable
default-supply : disable
default-supply-metric : 3

Applying the advertisement of local networks policy over a port

To apply the advertisement of local networks to a port, use the following
command:

config ether <port> ip dvmrp advertise-self

where
port is the number of the port.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring DVMRP routing policies 333

This command includes the following parameters:

config ether <port> ip dvmrp advertise-self

followed by:
enable Enables the advertisement of local routes over the selected port to other
switches in the network.
disable Disables the advertisement of local routes over the selected port to other
switches in the network.

Configuration example: applying DVMRP port advertisement

The following configuration example uses the above command to disable

the advertisement of local routes on port 9 of the card in slot 1. After
configuring these parameters, use the info command to show a summary
of the results:

ERS_8606:5# config ethernet 1/9 ip dvmrp advertise-self

disable
ERS_8606:5/config/ethernet/1/9/ip/dvmrp# info
Sub-Context:
Current Context:
dvmrp : enable
metric : 1
interface-type : active
in-policy : N/A
out-policy : N/A
advertise-self : disable
default-listen : enable
default-supply : disable
default-supply-metric : 3

Configuring a DVMRP interface type

This section includes the following tasks that describe how to configure a
passive interface type using the command line interface:
• "Creating a passive interface" (page 334)
• "Configuring an active or passive interface type" (page 334)
• "Configuring an active or passive VLAN type" (page 335)
• "Configuring an active or passive port type" (page 336)

Before you apply the DVMRP passive interface policy to the switch, you
must perform the procedures provided in "Configuration prerequisites"
(page 289).

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
334 Configuring DVMRP using the CLI

To display DVMRP interface type configuration information for an interface,

VLAN, or port, see "Displaying DVMRP routing policy information" (page
337).

Creating a passive interface

To create a passive interface, use the following command:

config ip dvmrp interface <ipaddr> create

where
ipaddr is the address of the interface.
This command includes the following parameters:

config ip dvmrp interface <ipaddr> create

followed by:
passive Interface drops all types of incoming DVMRP packets from
neighbors and does not send out any probes or route reports to its
neighbor switches.
active Interface receives all types of incoming DVMRP packets from
neighbors and sends out any probes or route reports to its neighbor
switches.

Configuration example: DVMRP passive interface

The following configuration example uses the above command to create a

passive interface named 100.100.100.2. After configuring these parameters,
use the info command to show a summary of the results.

ERS_8606:5# config ip dvmrp interface 100.100.100.2

create passive
ERS_8606:5config /config/ip/dvmrp/inter-
face/100.100.100.2# info
Sub-Context:
Current Context:
enable : true
metric : 1
interface-type : passive
in-policy : N/A
out-policy : N/A
advertise-self : disable
default-listen : enable
default-supply : disable
default-supply-metric : 3

Configuring an active or passive interface type

To configure an interface as active or passive, use the following command:

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring DVMRP routing policies 335

config ip dvmrp interface <ipaddr> interface-type

where
ipaddr is the address of the selected interface.
This command includes the following parameters:

config ip dvmrp interface <ipaddr> interface-type

followed by:
passive Interface drops all types of incoming DVMRP packets from neighbors and
does not send out any probes or route reports to its neighbor switches.
active Interface receives all types of incoming DVMRP packets from neighbors and
sends out any probes or route reports to its neighbor switches.

Configuration example: active DVMRP interface

The following configuration example uses the above command to set

interface 100.100.100.2 active. After configuring these parameters, use the
info command to show a summary of the results.

ERS_8606:5# config ip dvmrp interface 100.100.100.2

interface-type active
ERS_8606:5/config/ip/dvmrp/interface/100.100.100.2# info
Sub-Context:
Current Context:
enable : true
metric : 1
interface-type : active
in-policy : N/A
out-policy : N/A
advertise-self : disable
default-listen : enable
default-supply : disable
default-supply-metric : 3

Configuring an active or passive VLAN type

To configure a VLAN interface as active or passive, use the following
command:

config vlan <vid> ip dvmrp interface-type

where
vid is a VLAN ID from 1 to 4092.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
336 Configuring DVMRP using the CLI

This command includes the following parameters:

config vlan <vid> ip dvmrp interface-type

followed by:
passive Interface drops all types of incoming DVMRP packets from neighbors and
does not send out any probes or route reports to its neighbor switches.
active Interface receives all types of incoming DVMRP packets from neighbors and
sends out any probes or route reports to its neighbor switches.

Configuration example: DVMRP VLAN interface

The following configuration example uses the above command to set VLAN
100 passive. After configuring these parameters, use the info command
to show a summary of the results.

ERS_8606:5# config vlan 100 ip dvmrp interface-type

active
ERS_8606:5/config/vlan/100/ip/dvmrp# info
Sub-Context:
Current Context:
dvmrp : enable
metric : 1
interface-type : passive
in-policy : N/A
out-policy : N/A
advertise-self : disable
default-listen : enable
default-supply : disable
default-supply-metric : 3

Configuring an active or passive port type

To configure a port interface as active or passive, use the following
command:

config ethernet <port> ip dvmrp interface-type

where
port is the number of the port.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring DVMRP routing policies 337

This command includes the following parameters:

config ethernet <port> ip dvmrp interface-type

followed by:
passive Interface drops all types of incoming DVMRP packets from neighbors and
does not send out any probes or route reports to its neighbor switches.
active Interface receives all types of incoming DVMRP packets from neighbors and
sends out any probes or route reports to its neighbor switches.

Configuration example: DVMRP port interface

The following configuration example uses the above command to set port
9 in slot 1 as active. After configuring these parameters, use the info
command to show a summary of the results.

ERS_8606:5# config ethernet 1/9 ip dvmrp interface-type

active
ERS_8606:5/config/ethernet/1/9/ip/dvmrp# info
Sub-Context:
Current Context:
dvmrp : enable
metric : 1
interface-type : active
in-policy : N/A
out-policy : N/A
advertise-self : disable
default-listen : enable
default-supply : disable
default-supply-metric : 3

Displaying DVMRP routing policy information

This section describes the procedures for displaying DVMRP configuration
information for an interface, VLAN, and port.

Displaying DVMRP routing policy information for an interface

To display DVMRP route policy information for the DVMRP interface
configurations on the switch, use the following command:

show ip dvmrp interface

Figure 153 "show ip dvmrp interface command output" (page 338) shows
sample output for the show ip dvmrp interface command.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
338 Configuring DVMRP using the CLI

Figure 153
show ip dvmrp interface command output

Table 85 "show ip dvmrp interface command" (page 338) shows the field
descriptions for this command.

Table 85
show ip dvmrp interface command
Field Description
IF Indicates the ifIndex value of the interface for which DVMRP is enabled.
ADDR Indicates the IP address this system uses as a source address on this interface.
METRIC Indicates the distance metric for this interface used to calculate distance
vectors.
OPERSTAT Indicates the current operational state of this DVMRP interface.
DEFAULT Indicates whether the switch can learn DVMRP default routes over this
LISTEN interface.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring DVMRP routing policies 339

Field Description
DEFAULT Indicates the whether the switch should supply DVMRP default routes over
SUPPLY this interface.
DEFAULT Indicates the cost of the DVMRP default route that this interface generates and
METRIC supplies when it is configured to supply default route.
ADVERTISE Indicates whether the switch can advertise this local network.
SELF
IN-POLICY Indicates the DVMRP accept policy name configured on this interface.
OUT-POLICY Indicates the DVMRP announce policy name configured on this interface.
INTF TYPE Indicates the type of this DVMRP interface, and whether it uses a tunnel,
source routing, a physical interface for which there is a querier, or a physical
interface for which there is not a querier (subnet).

Displaying DVMRP routing policy information for a VLAN

To display DVMRP route policy information for the DVMRP VLAN
configurations on the switch, use the following command:

show vlan info dvmrp [vlan <value> ]

where
value is a VLAN ID from 1 to 4092.
Figure 154 "DVMRP VLAN configuration information" (page 339) shows
sample output for the show vlan info dvmrp command.

Figure 154
DVMRP VLAN configuration information

See Table 85 "show ip dvmrp interface command" (page 338) for field
descriptions for this command.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
340 Configuring DVMRP using the CLI

Displaying DVMRP routing policy information for a port

To display DVMRP route policy information for the DVMRP port
configurations on the switch, use the following command:

show ports info dvmrp [port <value> ]

where
value is a port or range of ports in the slot/port format.
Figure 155 "DVMRP port configuration information" (page 340) shows
sample output for the show ports info dvmrp command.

Figure 155
DVMRP port configuration information

See Table 85 "show ip dvmrp interface command" (page 338) for field
descriptions for this command.

Configuration examples
This section presents the following configuration examples:
• "Denying DVMRP routes from a DVMRP neighbor" (page 341)
• "Manipulating the advertised DVMRP metric to load balance multicast
traffic" (page 343)

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuration examples 341

Denying DVMRP routes from a DVMRP neighbor

In this example, configure ERS 8600-B so that its DVMRP route table uses
interface 2/8 for both multicast sources (192.4.10.0/24 and 192.4.99.0/24)
from ERS 8600-D. Normally, ERS 8600-B DVMRP route table selects the
shortest path tree through interface 2/7 either configuring an In-policy on
ERS 8600-B or an Out-policy on ERS 8600-D. In this example, an In-policy
on ERS 8600-B is configured to deny both multicast sources from ERS
8600-D on interface 2/7. See Figure 156 "DVMRP Configuration example,
denying DVMRP routes from a DVMRP neighbor" (page 341).
Figure 156
DVMRP Configuration example, denying DVMRP routes from a DVMRP neighbor

The following shows the configuration steps only for interface 2/7.

Step Action

1 Configure DVMRP interface—brouter port 2/7.

The following commands configure port 2/7 as a brouter port with
VLAN ID 2198, and enables DVMRP on this interface:
8610:5# config ethernet 2/7 ip create 10.1.1.9/30
2198
8610:5# config ethernet 2/7 ip dvmrp enable
2 Enable DVMRP globally by using the command:

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
342 Configuring DVMRP using the CLI

8610:5# config ip dvmrp enable

3 Add a prefix lists named "one" and the other named "two" by using
the commands:
8610:5# config ip prefix-list "one" add-prefix
192.4.10.0/24
8610:5# config ip prefix-list "two" add-prefix
192.4.99.0/24

4 Add a route policy named "P-one". Two sequences are added to

match both prefix lists created in the step 3, and match protocol
equals DVMRP.
8610:5# config ip route-policy "P-one" seq 1
create
8610:5# config ip route-policy "P-one" seq 1
enable
8610:5# config ip route-policy "P-one" seq 1
action deny
8610:5# config ip route-policy "P-one" seq 1
match-network "one"
8610:5# config ip route-policy "P-one" seq 1
match-protocol dvmrp
8610:5# config ip route-policy "P-one" seq 2
create
8610:5# config ip route-policy "P-one" seq 2
enable
8610:5# config ip route-policy "P-one" seq 2
action deny
8610:5# config ip route-policy "P-one" seq 2
match-network "two"
8610:5# config ip route-policy "P-one" seq 2
match-protocol dvmrp

5 Add the route policy to IP interface on port 2/7 by using the

command:
8610:5# config ip dvmrp interface 10.1.1.9
in-policy P-one

—End—

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuration examples 343

Manipulating the advertised DVMRP metric to load balance multicast

traffic
Another method to influence the DVMRP route table is changing the DVMRP
metric. Configure ERS 8600-D so that the DVMRP route 192.4.99.0/24
advertises a metric of 14 to ERS 8600-B (see Figure 156 "DVMRP
Configuration example, denying DVMRP routes from a DVMRP neighbor"
(page 341)). The result is that ERS 8600-B selects link 2/8 instead of 2/7 for
the 192.4.99.0 source, and uses link 2/7 for the 192.4.10.0 source.
The following shows the configuration steps for only the route policy on
ERS 8600-D.

Step Action

1 Add a prefix lists named "one" and the other named "two" by using
the following command:
8610:5# config ip prefix-list "one" add-prefix
192.4.99.0/24

2 Add a route policy named "P-one". Two sequences are added to

match both prefix lists created in step 1, and match protocol equals
DVMRP.
8610:5# config ip route-policy "P-one" seq 1
create
8610:5# config ip route-policy "P-one" seq 1
enable
8610:5# config ip route-policy "P-one" seq 1
action permit
8610:5# config ip route-policy "P-one" seq 1
match-network "one"
8610:5# config ip route-policy "P-one" seq 1
match-protocol local
8610:5# config ip route-policy "P-one" seq 1
set-metric 14
3 Add the route policy created in step 2 to the IP interface on port
2/7 using the following command:
8610:5# config ip dvmrp interface 10.1.1.10
out-policy P-one

—End—

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
344 Configuring DVMRP using the CLI

Displaying all IP DVMRP show commands

The show ip dvmrp show-all command displays all relevant IP
DVMRP information.

The command uses the syntax:

show ip dvmrp show-all [file <value> ]

where
value is the filename from which the output is redirected.
Figure 157 "show ip dvmrp show-all command output" (page 344) shows
sample output for the show ip dvmrp show-all command.

Figure 157
show ip dvmrp show-all command output

For each of the show ip dvmrp xxxx commands listed in Figure 157
"show ip dvmrp show-all command output" (page 344), see the appropriate
section for parameter explanations.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 345

Configuring PIM using the CLI

This section describes the commands used to configure Protocol
Independent Multicast (PIM) on your Ethernet Routing Switch 8600. There
are two PIM modes: sparse mode (SM) and source specific multicast
(SSM). The following section describes PIM-SM.
• For information about PIM-SSM, see "Configuring Source Specific
Multicast (SSM)" (page 384).

Protocol Independent Multicast-Sparse Mode (PIM-SM) supports multicast

groups that are spread out across large areas of a company or on the
Internet.
• What makes PIM-SM protocol-independent? PIM-SM does not maintain
its own, or depend on, a specific multicast protocol to maintain unicast
routing tables. PIM-SM uses the routing table information from any
underlying unicast routing protocol, such as RIP or OSPF.
• How does it multicast? PIM-SM sends one stream of data to the network
where it is replicated to all interested receivers.
• What is sparse mode? Instead of using a push model, PIM-SM uses
a pull model where receivers pull down multicast traffic. For sparsely
populated networks, PIM-SM is more efficient than dense-mode
protocols because it sends multicast traffic only to those routers that
belong to a specific multicast group and that choose to receive traffic.

The Ethernet Routing Switch 8600 supports the following for PIM-SM:
• RP functionality
• Redundant RP configuration where several RPs can be configured for
the same groups
• RP load sharing where several RPs can be configured in the same PIM
domain
• BSR functionality
• Redundant BSR functionality

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
346 Configuring PIM using the CLI

• MBR functionality to connect a PIM-SM domain to a DVMRP domain.

When you configure an Ethernet Routing Switch 8600 with MBR
functionality, you can have some interfaces running PIM-SM and other
interfaces running DVMRP to connect a PIM-SM domain to a DVMRP
domain.

ATTENTION
You must first configure and enable PIM on the circuitless IP interface before
configuring PIM on the RP. To configure PIM-SM RP for a circuitless IP interface,
see Configuring BGP Services (NN46205-510).

For more information about PIM concepts and terminology, see "IP Multicast
concepts" (page 15).
For instructions on how to configure PIM static source groups, see "Viewing
and editing multicast routes using the CLI" (page 429).
This section includes the following topics:
• "Roadmap of PIM commands" (page 347)
• "PIM-SM configuration prerequisites" (page 350)
• "Configuring PIM-SM globally" (page 351)
• "Configuring a PIM multicast border router (PMBR)" (page 355)
• "Configuring PIM on an interface" (page 355)
• "Configuring the PIM interface virtual neighbor" (page 357)
• "Configuring a candidate BSR on an interface" (page 359)
• "Configuring a candidate rendezvous point (C-RP)" (page 360)
• "Configuring a static rendezvous point (RP)" (page 367)
• "Configuring PIM on an Ethernet (brouter) port" (page 370)
• "Configuring a candidate BSR on an Ethernet port" (page 372)
• "Configuring PIM on a VLAN" (page 373)
• "Configuring a candidate BSR on a VLAN" (page 376)
• "Configuring PIM debug trace commands" (page 377)
• "Configuring Source Specific Multicast (SSM)" (page 384)
• "Configuring square-SMLT globally" (page 388)
• "Configuration examples" (page 388)
• "Displaying all IP PIM show commands" (page 406)

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Roadmap of PIM commands 347

Roadmap of PIM commands

The following roadmap lists all the PIM commands and their parameters.
After using the commands below to configure the Ethernet Routing Switch
8600, you can use the show commands to display information for a
particular feature.

To facilitate troubleshooting, the Ethernet Routing Switch 8600 also

provides one command (show ip pim show-all) that lists all the show
commands for IP PIM and displays their configuration output. "Displaying all
IP PIM show commands" (page 406).

Use this list as a quick reference.

Command Parameter
config ip pim info

activity-chk-interval <15|30|210>
bootstrap-period <integer>
c-rp-adv-timeout <integer>
disable
disc-data-timeout <integer>
enable
fwd-cache-timeout <integer>
joinprune-interval <integer>
mode <sparse|ssm>
register-suppression-timeout
<integer>
unicast-route-change-timeout
<integer>
show ip pim info
config ip pim mbr info
disable
enable
config ip pim interface <ipaddr> info
create <active|passive>
disable
enable
hellointerval <seconds>
interface-type <active|passive>

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
348 Configuring PIM using the CLI

Command Parameter
joinprune-interval <seconds>
config ip pim interface <ipaddr> info
virtual-interface
add <ipaddr>
delete <ipaddr>
show ip pim interface
show ip pim neighbor
config ip pim candbsr interface info
<ipaddr>
enable preference <value>
disable
config ip pim candrp info
add grp <value> mask <value> rp
<value>
delete grp <value> mask <value>
show ip pim rp-set
show ip pim candidate-rp
show ip pim active-rp <group>
show ip pim active-rp
show ip pim bsr
show ip pim mroute
config ip pim static-rp info
add grp <value>mask <value>rp
<value>
delete grp <value>mask <value > rp
<value>
disable
enable
show ip pim static-rp
config ethernet <ports> ip pim info
create <active|passive>
disable
enable
hellointerval <seconds>
interface-type <active|passive>
joinprune-interval <seconds>

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Roadmap of PIM commands 349

Command Parameter
config ethernet <ports> ip pim info
candbsr
disable
enable preference <value>
config vlan <vid> ip pim info
create <active|passive>
disable
enable
hellointerval <seconds>
interface-type <active|passive>
joinprune-interval <seconds>
config vlan <vid> ip pim candbsr info
disable
enable preference <value>
config ip pim debug-pimmsg info
assert <true=1|false=2>
bstrap <true=1|false=2>
group <ipaddress>
hello <true=1|false=2>
joinprune <true=1|false=2>
pimdbglog <true=1|false=2>
pimdbgtrace <true=1|false=2>
rcv <true=1|false=2>
register <true=1|false=2>
regstop <true=1|false=2>
rp-adv <true=1|false=2>
send <true=1|false=2>
source <ipaddress>
config sys mcast-smlt info
square-smlt <enable|disable>
show ip pim mode
show ip pim virtual-neighbor
show ip pim show-all [file <value>]

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
350 Configuring PIM using the CLI

PIM-SM configuration prerequisites

Before you can configure PIM-SM, you must prepare the switch as follows:

Step Action

1 Configure an IP interface. For information, see Configuring IP

Routing Operations (NN46205-500).

2 Disable DVMRP from the interface where you want to configure

PIM-SM, because you cannot configure PIM-SM and DVMRP on the
same interface. For information, see "Configuring DVMRP using
the CLI" (page 285).

ATTENTION
Changing the configuration from PIM to DVMRP, or from DVMRP to PIM,
is not recommended while multicast traffic is flowing on the network.

a. A switch can have a mix of DVMRP and PIM-SM interfaces if it is

configured as an multicast border router (MBR).
b. An interface can only be configured with one multicast routing
protocol at a time (PIM-SM or DVMRP).

3 Configure a unicast protocol (RIP or OSPF) globally and on the

interfaces where you want to configure PIM-SM. For information
about RIP and OSPF, see Configuring IP Routing Operations
(NN46205-500).
PIM-SM requires a unicast protocol to multicast traffic within the
network when performing the Reverse Path Forwarding (RFP)
check. PIM-SM uses the information from the unicast routing table
to create and maintain the shared and shortest multicast tree that
enables PIM-enabled routers to communicate. The unicast routing
table must contain a route to every multicast source in the network,
as well as routes to PIM entities like the RPs and BSR.
4 To configure PIM-SM on an Ethernet Routing Switch 8600, requires
the following configuration:
• Enable PIM-SM globally.
• Enable PIM-SM on individual interfaces.
• Configure one or several RPs for the groups that are used by a
multicast application in the network.
• Configure one or several BSRs to propagate RP information to
all switches in the network.
• If connecting a PIM-SM domain to a DVMRP domain, configure
the switch interconnecting the domains as an MBR switch with

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring PIM-SM globally 351

the corresponding PIM-SM interfaces enabled with PIM-SM, and

the DVMRP interfaces enabled with DVMRP.

ATTENTION
Routes to sources in a PIM domain must not have a lower cost through the
DVMRP domain to ensure that multicast routing from these sources works
properly. Configure MBR switches with this design guideline in mind.

—End—

Configuring PIM-SM globally

To enable or disable PIM-SM globally on the switch, use the following
command:

config ip pim
This command includes the following parameters:

config ip pim
followed by:
info Displays current PIM settings on the switch (Figure 158 "config
ip pim info command output" (page 353)).

activity-chk-interval Specifies how often (in seconds) to check traffic activity for a
<15|30|210> multicast group. The lower the value, the more often the switch
checks the activity.
• The default is 30.

Notes:
• Before you can change the activity-chk-interval, you must
disable PIM globally.
• Nortel recommends an activity check interval of 30
seconds.
• On IGAP-enabled interfaces, set the activity check interval
to 30 seconds or less.
• On non-IGAP enabled interfaces, you may want to set the
activity check interval to 210 seconds for systems that have
a large number (200+) of S,G streams.
• When one of the timer activity-chk-interval or
fwd-cache-timeout is configured with a nondefault value,
the other cannot be configured.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
352 Configuring PIM using the CLI

config ip pim
followed by:
bootstrap-period Specifies the interval (in seconds) that the elected BSR waits
<integer> between originating bootstrap messages.
• integer is an integer in the range of 5 to 32757. The
default is 60.
c-rp-adv-timeout Specifies how often (in seconds) that routers configured as
<integer> candidate RPs send C-RP advertisement messages. When
this timer expires, the C-RP sends an advertisement message
to the elected BSR.
• integer is an integer in the range of 5 to 26214. The
default is 60.
disable Globally disables PIM on the switch.
disc-data-timeout Specifies how long (in seconds) to discard data until the Join is
<integer> received from the RP. An ipmc discard record is created after
a register packet is sent, until the the timer expires or when a
Join is received.
• integer is an integer in the range of 5 to 65535. The
default is 60.
enable Globally enables PIM on the switch.
fwd-cache-timeout
Specifies the forward cache timeout value.
<integer>
• integer is an integer in the range of 10 to 86 400.
The default is 210.

ATTENTION
When one of the timer activity-chk-interval or
fwd-cache-timeout is configured with a nondefault value,
the other cannot be configured.

joinprune-interval Specifies how long to wait (in seconds) before the PIM
<integer> router sends out the next join/prune message to its upstream
neighbors.
• integer is an integer in the range of 1 to 18724. The
default is 60.
mode <sparse|ssm> To enable PIM-SSM globally, see "Configuring PIM-SSM
globally" (page 385). Also note that when you change from one
mode to another, an information message pops up to remind
you that traffic does not stop immediately. The configured mode
of this interface: sparse or ssm (source-specific multicast).1

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring PIM-SM globally 353

config ip pim
followed by:
register-suppression-ti Specifies how long (in seconds) the DR suppresses sending
meout <integer> registers to the RP. The timer starts when the DR receives a
Register Stop message from the RP.
• integer is an integer in the range of 6 to 65535. The
default is 60.
unicast-route-change-ti
Specifies how often (in seconds) the switch polls the
meout <integer>
routing table manager (RTM) for unicast routing information
updates to be used by PIM.

ATTENTION
Lowering this value increases how often the switch polls
the RTM. This can affect the performance of the switch,
especially when there is a lot of traffic is flowing through
the switch.

• integer is an integer in the range of 2 to 65535. The

default is 5.

To enable PIM-SSM globally, see . Also note that when you change from one
mode to another, an information message pops up to remind you that traffic
does not stop immediately. Figure 158 "config ip pim info command output"
(page 353) shows sample output for the config ip pim info command.

Figure 158
config ip pim info command output

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
354 Configuring PIM using the CLI

Showing PIM group information

To display the global status of PIM on the switch, use the following command:

show ip pim info

Figure 159 "show ip pim info command output" (page 354) shows sample
output for the show ip pim info command.

Figure 159
show ip pim info command output

Table 86 "show ip pim info command" (page 354) shows the field
descriptions for this command.

Table 86
show ip pim info command
Field Description
PimStat Indicates the status of PIM.
Mode Indicates the PIM mode.
Mbr Indicates the status of the PIM multicast border router feature.
StaticRP Indicates the status of static RP.
ActivityChkInterval Indicates the activity check interval for polling PIM SG traffic activity
information.
BootstrapPeriod Indicates the interval between originating bootstrap messages at
the elected BSR.
CRPAdvTimeout Indicates the candidate RPs timer (in seconds) for sending
C-RP-Adv messages.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring PIM on an interface 355

Field Description
DiscDataTimeout Indicates the time (in seconds) used to discard data until the join
is received from the RP. An IPMC discard record is created and
deleted after the timer expires and when a join is received.
FwdCacheTimeout Indicates the PIM forward cache expiry value in seconds. This value
is used in aging PIM mroutes.
RegSupprTimeout Indicates the Register-Suppression timer in seconds.
UniRouteChangeTimeout Indicates the frequency at which the RTM is polled for routing
information updates.
JoinPruneInt Indicates the join pruning interval in seconds.

Configuring a PIM multicast border router (PMBR)

PIM multicast border routers (PMBRs) connect PIM domains to other
multicast routing domains and to the rest of the Internet. The MBR
functionality on an Ethernet Routing Switch 8600 allows the connection of a
PIM-SM domain to a DVMRP domain.

To configure the switch as a PMBR, use the following command:

config ip pim mbr

This command includes the following parameters:

config ip pim mbr

followed by:
info Displays the current PMBR configuration setting.
disable Disables PMBR on the switch.
enable Enables PMBR on the switch.

Configuring PIM on an interface

When you enable PIM on a particular interface, you must also enable it
globally. Otherwise, PIM does not work. See "Configuring PIM-SM globally"
(page 351).

To configure PIM on a specific interface, use the following command:

config ip pim interface <ipaddr>

where
ipaddr indicates the IP address of the selected interface.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
356 Configuring PIM using the CLI

This command includes the following parameters:

config ip pim interface <ipaddr>

followed by:
info Displays current PIM configuration settings on the local switch
interface.
create <active|pass Enables PIM on a specific interface with a specific type. An active
ive> interface allows PIM control traffic to be transmitted and received. A
passive interface prevents PIM control traffic from being transmitted
or received, thereby reducing the load on a system. This feature
is useful when a high number of PIM interfaces exist and are
connected to end users, not to other switches.
disable Disables PIM on the local switch interface.
enable Enables PIM on the local switch interface.
hellointerval Specifies how long to wait (in seconds) before the PIM switch sends
<seconds> out the next hello message to neighboring switches. The default
is 30 seconds.
interface-type Specifies whether the selected interface is active or passive. See
<active|passive> create &lt;active|passive> for a description of active and passive
interfaces. You can change the state of a PIM interface after
creating the interface. It can be changed only when PIM is disabled
on the specified interface.
joinprune-interval Specifies how long to wait (in seconds) before the PIM switch sends
<seconds> out the next join/prune message to its upstream neighbors. The
default is 60 seconds.

Configuration example: PIM passive interface

The following example shows how to create a PIM passive interface and
display information about that interface.

ERS-8606:5# config ip pim interface 128.3.1.1 create

passive
ERS-8606:5/config/ip/pim/interface/128.3.1.1# info
Sub-Context:
Current Context:
enable : true
mode : sparse
interface-type : passive
joinpruneint : 60
cbsrpref : -1 (disabled)
ERS-8606:5/config/ip/pim#

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring the PIM interface virtual neighbor 357

Changing the interface type

Before changing the interface type, you must first disable PIM on the
interface. Use the following commands to change the interface type from
active to passive:

config ip pim interface <ipaddr> disable

config ip pim interface <ipaddr> interface-type passive
config ip pim interface <ipaddr> enable

Configuring the PIM interface virtual neighbor

A virtual neighbor is a PIM neighbor IP address on the Ethernet Routing
Switch 8600 neighbor table. A virtual neighbor is typically used where
the next-hop for a static route cannot run PIM, such as the virtual VRRP
address on an adjacent device.

To configure a virtual neighbor, use the following command:

config ip pim interface <ipaddr> virtual-interface

where
ipaddr indicates the IP address of the selected interface.
This command includes the following parameters:

config ip pim interface <ipaddr>

followed by:
info Displays current virtual neighbor settings on the local switch
interface.

add <ipaddr> Adds the virtual neighbor on the local switch interface.
• ipaddr is the IP address of the selected interface.
delete <ipaddr> Deletes the virtual neighbor on the local switch interface.
• ipaddr is the IP address of the selected interface.

Showing PIM interface information

To display information about the PIM-SM interface setup on the switch,
use the following command:

show ip pim interface

Figure 160 "show ip pim interface command output" (page 358) shows
sample output for the show ip pim interface command.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
358 Configuring PIM using the CLI

Figure 160
show ip pim interface command output

Table 87 "show ip pim interface parameters" (page 358) shows the field
descriptions for this command.

Table 87
show ip pim interface parameters
Field Description
IF The slot/port number or VLAN ID of the interface where PIM is enabled.
ADDR The IP address of the PIM interface.
MASK The network mask for the IP address of the PIM interface.
MODE The configured mode of this interface. The valid modes are SSM and Sparse.
DR Shows the designated router (DR) for this interface.
HLINT Specifies how long to wait (in seconds) before the PIM switch sends out the next
hello message to neighboring switches. The default hello interval is 30 seconds.
JPINT Specifies how long to wait (in seconds) before the PIM switch sends out the next
join/prune message to its upstream neighbors. The default join/prune interval is
60 seconds.
CBSPR The preference for this local interface to become a Candidate BSR. The
Candidate BSR with the highest BSR-priority and address is referred to as the
preferred BSR. The default is -1, which indicates that the current interface is
not a Candidate BSR.
OPSTAT Indicates the status of PIM on this interface: up or down.
INTF TYPE Indicates whether the PIM interface is active or passive.

Showing PIM neighbor information

To display information about the neighboring routers configured with
PIM-SM, use the following command:

show ip pim neighbor

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring a candidate BSR on an interface 359

Figure 161 "show ip pim neighbor command output" (page 359) shows
sample output for the show ip pim neighbor command.

Figure 161
show ip pim neighbor command output

Table 88 "show ip pim neighbor parameters" (page 359) shows the field
descriptions for this command.

Table 88
show ip pim neighbor parameters
Field Description
INTERFACE The interface number.
ADDRESS The IP address of the PIM neighbor.
UPTIME The elapsed time since this PIM neighbor last became a neighbor of the
local router.
EXPIRE The time remaining before this PIM neighbor times out.

Configuring a candidate BSR on an interface

PIM-SM cannot run without a bootstrap router (BSR). Although a PIM-SM
domain can have only one active BSR, you can configure additional routers
as candidate BSRs (C-BSRs). C-BSRs provide backup protection in the
event that the primary BSR fails.

The C-BSR with the highest configured preference becomes the BSR for
the domain. If two C-BSRs have equal preference, the candidate with the
higher IP address becomes the BSR. If you add a new C-BSR with a higher
preference to the domain, it automatically becomes the new BSR.

To configure a candidate BSR on a specific interface, use the following

command:

config ip pim candbsr interface <ipaddr>

where
ipaddr indicates the IP address of the selected interface.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
360 Configuring PIM using the CLI

This command includes the following parameters:

config ip pim candbsr interface <ipaddr>

followed by:
info Displays the candidate BSR preference setting for this interface
(Figure 162 "config ip pim candbsr interface command output" (page
360)).
enable preference Enables the Candidate BSR on this interface and sets its preference
<value> value to become a BSR. The Candidate BSR with the highest
BSR preference and address is referred to as the preferred BSR.
The default is -1, which indicates that the current interface is not
a Candidate BSR.
disable Disables the Candidate BSR on this interface.

Figure 162 "config ip pim candbsr interface command output" (page 360)
shows sample output for the config ip pim candbsr interface
info command.

Figure 162
config ip pim candbsr interface command output

Configuring a candidate rendezvous point (C-RP)

To configure a rendezvous point (RP) in the RP set, use the following
command:

config ip pim candrp

This command includes the following parameters:

config ip pim candrp

followed by:
info Displays current RP configuration settings on the local router
interface.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring a candidate rendezvous point (C-RP) 361

config ip pim candrp

followed by:
add grp <value> mask Adds a candidate RP to the RP set.
<value> rp <value>
• add grp <value> is the IP address of the multicast group.
When combined with the group mask, it identifies the prefix
that the local router uses to advertise itself as a C-RP.
• mask <value> is the address mask of the multicast group.
When combined with the group address, it identifies the
prefix that the local router uses to advertise itself as a C-RP.
• rp <value> is the IP address of the C-RP. This address
must be one of the local PIM-SM enabled interfaces.
delete grp <value> mask Deletes a candidate RP from the RP set.
<value>
• delete grp <value> is the IP address of the multicast
group. When combined with the group mask, it identifies
the prefix that the local router uses to advertise itself as a
C-RP.
• mask <value> is the address mask of the multicast group.
When combined with the group address, it identifies the
prefix that the local router uses to advertise itself as a C-RP.

You can only configure one interface on an Ethernet Routing Switch 8600 for
multiple groups. You cannot configure multiple interfaces for multiple groups.

With the mask value, you can configure a candidate RP for several groups in
one configuration. For example, a candidate RP configuration with a group
address of 224.0.0.0 and a group mask of 240.0.0.0 permits you to configure
the candidate RP for a multicast range from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255.

Showing rendezvous point (RP) set information

To display information about the rendezvous points (RPs) for this PIM-SM
domain, use the following command:

show ip pim rp-set

Figure 163 "show ip pim rp-set command output" (page 362) shows sample
output for the show ip pim rp-set command.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
362 Configuring PIM using the CLI

Figure 163
show ip pim rp-set command output

Table 89 "show ip pim rp-set parameters" (page 362) shows the field
descriptions for this command.

Table 89
show ip pim rp-set parameters
Field Description
GRPADDRESS The IP address of the multicast group. When combined with the group mask, it
identifies the prefix that the local router uses to advertise itself as a C-RP.
GRPMASK The address mask of the multicast group. When combined with the group
address, it identifies the prefix that the local router uses to advertise itself
as a C-RP.
ADDRESS The IP address of the C-RP.
COMPONENT A unique number identifying the protocol instance connected to each PIM
domain.
HOLDTIME The time specified in a C-RP advertisement that the BSR uses to time out the
RP. When the BSR receives an advertisement for the RP, it restarts the timer.
If no advertisement arrives before the timer expires, the BSR removes that
RP from the RP set.
EXPTIME The time remaining before this C-RP times out.

Showing candidate RP information

To display information about the candidate rendezvous points (C-RPs) for
this PIM-SM domain, use the following command:

show ip pim candidate-rp

Figure 164 "show ip pim candidate-rp command output" (page 363) shows
sample output for the show ip pim candidate-rp command.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring a candidate rendezvous point (C-RP) 363

Figure 164
show ip pim candidate-rp command output

Table 90 "show ip pim candidate-rp parameters" (page 363) shows the

field descriptions for this command.

Table 90
show ip pim candidate-rp parameters
Field Description
GRPADDR The IP address of the multicast group. When combined with the
group mask, it identifies the prefix that the local router uses to
advertise itself as a C-RP.
GRPMASK The address mask of the multicast group. When combined with the
group address, it identifies the prefix that the local router uses to
advertise itself as a C-RP.
RPADDR The IP address of the C-RP. This address must be one of the local
PIM-SM enabled interfaces.

Showing the active RP for a specific group

To display information about the active rendezvous point (RP) for a specific
group, use the following command:

show ip pim active-rp <group>

where
group is the IP address of the active RP for a specific group.
Figure 165 "show ip pim active-rp 228.1.2.3 command output" (page 364)
shows sample output for the show ip pim active-rp command.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
364 Configuring PIM using the CLI

Figure 165
show ip pim active-rp 228.1.2.3 command output

Table 91 "show ip pim active-rp parameter" (page 364) shows the field
descriptions for this command.

Table 91
show ip pim active-rp parameter
Field Description
GRPADDR The IP address of the multicast group. When combined with the group mask,
it identifies the prefix that the local router uses to advertise itself as a C-RP.
RP-ADDR The IP address of the C-RP. This address must be one of the local PIM-SM
enabled interfaces.
RP-PRIORITY The priority of the RP. C-RPs must send C-RP advertising messages with
the field set to 0, which is the highest priority.

Showing the active RP for all groups

To display information about the active rendezvous point (RP) for all the
running multicast groups on the switch, use the following command:

show ip pim active-rp

Figure 166 "show ip pim active-rp command output" (page 364) shows
sample output for the show ip pim active-rp command.

Figure 166
show ip pim active-rp command output

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring a candidate rendezvous point (C-RP) 365

Table 92 "show ip pim active-rp parameters" (page 365) shows the field
descriptions for this command.

Table 92
show ip pim active-rp parameters
Field Description
GRPADDR The IP address of the multicast group. When combined with the group mask,
it identifies the prefix that the local router uses to advertise itself as a C-RP.
RP-ADDR The IP address of the C-RP. This address must be one of the local PIM-SM
enabled interfaces.
RP-PRIORITY The priority of the RP. C-RPs must send C-RP advertising messages with
the field set to 0, which is the highest priority.

Showing bootstrap router (BSR) information

To display information about the bootstrap router (BSR) for this PIM-SM
domain, use the following command:

show ip pim bsr

Figure 167 "show ip pim bsr command output" (page 365) shows sample
output for the show ip pim bsr command.

Figure 167
show ip pim bsr command output

Table 93 "show ip pim bsr parameters" (page 365) shows the field
descriptions for this command.

Table 93
show ip pim bsr parameters
Field Description
Current BSR address The IP address of the current BSR for the local PIM domain.
Current BSR priority The priority of the current BSR. The Candidate BSR (C-BSR)
with the highest BSR-priority and address (referred to as the
preferred BSR) is elected as the BSR for the domain.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
366 Configuring PIM using the CLI

Field Description
Current BSR HashMask The mask used in the hash function to map a group to one of
the C-RPs from the RP-Set. The hash-mask allows a small
number of consecutive groups (for example, 4) to always hash
to the same RP.
Current BSR Fragment Tag A randomly generated number that distinguishes fragments
belonging to different Bootstrap messages. Fragments
belonging to the same Bootstrap message carry the same
Fragment Tag.
Pim Bootstrap Timer When the Bootstrap Timer expires, the BSR sends out
Bootstrap messages.

Showing PIM route information

To display information from the route table, use the following command:

show ip pim mroute

Figure 168 "show ip pim mroute command output" (page 367) shows
sample output for the show ip pim mroute command.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring a static rendezvous point router 367

Figure 168
show ip pim mroute command output

Configuring a static rendezvous point router

With static RP, you can configure a static entry for a rendezvous point
(RP). When configured, static RP ignores the BSR mechanism and uses
the statically configured RPs only. This feature allows static RP-enabled
Ethernet Routing Switch 8600s to communicate with switches from other
vendors that do not use the BSR mechanism. For more information about
static RP and other PIM-SM concepts, see "IP Multicast concepts" (page
15).

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
368 Configuring PIM using the CLI

Static RP configuration considerations

Before you can configure a static RP, you must enable PIM in sparse mode
(sm) and enable Static RP as shown in the next section.
After meeting these prerequisites, keep in mind the following configuration
considerations:
• A static RP-enabled switch cannot be configured as a BSR or as a C-RP.
• All dynamically learned BSR information is lost. However, if you disable
static RP, the switch loses the static RP information and regains the
BSR functionality.
• Static RPs do not age, that is, they cannot time out.
• Switches do not advertise static RPs, so, if a new PIM neighbor joins
the network, it does not know about the static RP unless it is configured
with that static RP.
• Configure all the switches in the network (including switches from other
vendors) to map to the same RP.
• In a PIM domain with both static and dynamic RP switches, the static RP
switches cannot have one of their (local) interfaces configured as RP.
• To avoid a single point of failure, you can configure redundant static RPs
for the same group prefix. If there is a mix of Nortel and other vendor’s
switches across the network, you must ensure that all switches/routers
use the same active RP because other vendors can be using different
algorithms to elect the active RP. Ethernet Routing Switch 8600 devices
use the hash function defined in the PIM-SM standard to elect the active
RP; other vendors can use the lowest IP address to break the tie.
• Static RP configured on the switch is assumed to be alive as long as
the switch has a unicast route to the static RP’s network. If the switch
loses this route, the static RP is invalidated and the hash algorithm is
invoked to remap all affected groups. If the switch regains this route,
the static RP is validated and the hash algorithm is invoked to remap
the affected groups.

Configuring static RP
To configure a static RP, use the following command:

config ip pim static-rp

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring a static rendezvous point router 369

This command includes the following parameters:

config ip pim static-rp

followed by:
info Displays current PIM settings on the switch.
add grp <value> mask Adds a static RP entry to the RP set.
<value> rp <value>
• grp <value> is the IP address of the multicast group.
When combined with the group mask, it identifies the
range of the multicast addresses that the RP handles.
• mask <value> is the address mask of the multicast
group. When combined with the group address, it
identifies the range of the multicast addresses that
the RP handles.
• rp <value> is the IP address of the static RP.
delete grp <value> mask Deletes a static RP entry from the RP set.
<value> rp <value>
• grp <value> is the IP address of the multicast group.
When combined with the group mask, it identifies the
range of the multicast addresses that the RP handles.
• mask <value> is the address mask of the multicast
group. When combined with the group address, it
identifies the range of the multicast addresses that
the RP handles.
• rp <value> is the IP address of the static RP.
disable Disables static RP on the switch.
enable Enables static RP on the switch.

Configuration example: static RP

This configuration example uses the commands described above to enable

static RP and to add a static RP entry. After configuring the parameters, use
the info command to show a summary of the results.

ERS-8606:5# config ip pim static-rp

ERS-8606:5/config/ip/pim/static-rp# enable
WARNING: RP information learnt dynamically through BSR
functionality will be lost.

Do you wish to enable Static RP? (y/n) ? y

ERS-8606:5/config/ip/pim/static-rp# add grp 239.255.0.0
mask 255.255.0.0 rp 100.1.1.1
ERS-8606:5/config/ip/pim/static-rp# info
Sub-Context:
Current Context:
static-rp: enabled

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
370 Configuring PIM using the CLI

Group Address: 239.255.0.0

Group Mask: 255.255.0.0
RP Address: 100.1.1.1
Status: valid

Showing the static RP table

To display the static RP table, use the following command:

show ip pim static-rp

Figure 169 "show ip pim static-rp command output" (page 370) shows
sample output for the show ip pim static-rp command.

Figure 169
show ip pim static-rp command output

Table 94 "show ip pim static-rp parameters" (page 370) shows the field
descriptions for this command.

Table 94
show ip pim static-rp parameters
Field Description
GRPADDR Indicates the IP address of the multicast group. When combined with the
group mask, it identifies the prefix that the local router uses to advertise itself
as a static RP.
GRPMASK Indicates the address mask of the multicast group. When combined with the
group address, it identifies the prefix that the local router uses to advertise
itself as a static RP.
RPADDR Indicates the IP address of the static RP. This address must be one of the local
PIM-SM enabled interfaces.
STATUS Indicates the status of static RP.

Configuring PIM on an Ethernet (brouter) port

When you enable PIM on an Ethernet port, you must also enable it globally.
Otherwise, PIM does not work. See "Configuring PIM-SM globally" (page
351).

To configure PIM on a brouter port, use the following command:

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring PIM on an Ethernet (brouter) port 371

config ethernet <ports> ip pim

where
ports uses the convention {slot/port[-slot/port][,...]}.
This command includes the following parameters:

config ethernet <ports> ip pim

followed by:
info Displays current PIM configuration settings on the selected
brouter port (Figure 170 "config ethernet ip pim info command
output" (page 372)).
create <active|passive> Enables PIM on a specific brouter port with a specific type.
An active port allows PIM control traffic to be transmitted and
received. A passive port prevents PIM control traffic from being
transmitted or received, thereby reducing the load on a system.
This feature is useful when a high number of PIM interfaces
exist and are connected to end users, not to other switches.
disable Disables PIM on the selected brouter port.
enable Enables PIM on the selected port.
hellointerval <seconds> Specifies how long to wait (in seconds) before the PIM switch
sends out the next hello message to neighboring switches. The
default is 30 seconds.
interface-type Specifies whether the selected port is active or passive. See
<active|passive> create &lt;active|passive> for a description of active and
passive ports. You can change the state of a PIM interface
after it is created. It can be changed only when PIM is disabled
on the specified port.
joinprune-interval Specifies how long to wait (in seconds) before the PIM
<seconds> switch sends out the next join/prune message to its upstream
neighbors. The default is 60 seconds.

Figure 170 "config ethernet ip pim info command output" (page 372) shows
sample output for the config ethernet ip pim info command.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
372 Configuring PIM using the CLI

Figure 170
config ethernet ip pim info command output

Changing the port interface type

Before changing the port interface type, you must first disable PIM. Use the
following commands to change the interface type from active to passive:

config ethernet <ports> ip pim disable

config ethernet <ports> ip pim interface-type passive
config ethernet <ports> ip pim enable

Configuring a candidate BSR on an Ethernet port

PIM-SM cannot run without a bootstrap router (BSR). Although a PIM-SM
domain can have only one active BSR, you can configure additional routers
as candidate BSRs (C-BSRs). C-BSRs provide backup protection in the
event that the primary BSR fails.

The C-BSR with the highest configured preference becomes the BSR for
the domain. If two C-BSRs have equal preference, the candidate with the
higher IP address becomes the BSR. If you add a new C-BSR with a higher
preference to the domain, it automatically becomes the new BSR.

To configure a candidate BSR on an Ethernet port, use the following

command:

config ethernet <ports> ip pim candbsr

where
ports uses the convention {slot/port[-slot/port][,...]}.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring PIM on a VLAN 373

This command includes the following parameters:

config ethernet <ports> ip pim candbsr

followed by:
info Displays the candidate BSR preference setting for this
interface (Figure 171 "config ethernet ip pim candbsr
command output" (page 373)).
disable Disables the Candidate BSR on this interface.
enable preference <value> Enables the Candidate BSR on this interface and sets its
preference value to become a BSR. The Candidate BSR
with the highest BSR preference and address is referred
to as the preferred BSR. The default is -1, which indicates
that the current interface is not a Candidate BSR.

Figure 171 "config ethernet ip pim candbsr command output" (page 373)
shows sample output for the config ethernet <ports> ip pim
candbsr info command.

Figure 171
config ethernet ip pim candbsr command output

Configuring PIM on a VLAN

When you enable PIM on a particular VLAN, you must also enable it
globally. Otherwise, PIM does not work. See "Configuring PIM-SM globally"
(page 351).

To configure PIM on a VLAN, use the following command:

config vlan <vid> ip pim

where
vid is a VLAN ID from 1 to 4092.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
374 Configuring PIM using the CLI

This command includes the following parameters:

config vlan <vid> ip pim

followed by:
info Displays current PIM configuration settings on the selected VLAN
(Figure 172 "config vlan ip pim info command output" (page 374)).
create <active|pass Enables PIM on a specific VLAN with a specific type.
ive>
• active allows PIM control traffic to be transmitted and received.
• passive prevents PIM control traffic from being transmitted or
received, thereby reducing the load on a system. This feature
is useful when a high number of PIM interfaces exist and are
connected to end users, not to other switches.
disable Disables PIM on the selected VLAN.
enable Enables PIM on the selected VLAN.
hellointerval Specifies how long to wait (in seconds) before the PIM switch sends
<seconds> out the next hello message to neighboring switches. The default
is 30 seconds.
interface-type Specifies whether the selected interface is active or passive. See
<active|passive> create &lt;active|passive> for a description of active and passive
interfaces. You can change the state of a PIM interface after it
is created. It can be changed only when PIM is disabled on the
specified interface
joinprune-interval Specifies how long to wait (in seconds) before the PIM switch sends
<seconds> out the next join/prune message to its upstream neighbors. The
default is 60 seconds.

Figure 172 "config vlan ip pim info command output" (page 374) shows
sample output for the config vlan ip pim info command.

Figure 172
config vlan ip pim info command output

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring PIM on a VLAN 375

Changing the VLAN interface type

Before changing the interface type, you must first disable PIM on the VLAN.
Use the following commands to change the interface type from active to
passive:

config vlan <vid> ip pim disable

config vlan <vid> ip pim interface-type passive
config vlan <vid> ip pim enable

Showing PIM information for VLANs

To display information about the PIM-SM interface setup for VLANs, use the
following command:

show vlan info pim

Figure 173 "show vlan info pim command output" (page 375) shows sample
output for the show vlan info pim command.

Figure 173
show vlan info pim command output

Table 95 "show vlan ip pim parameters" (page 375) shows the field
descriptions for this command.

Table 95
show vlan ip pim parameters
Field Description
VLAN-ID Identifies the VLAN.
PIM-ENABLE The state of PIM on the VLAN.
MODE The configured mode of this VLAN. The valid modes are SSM and Sparse.
HELLOINT Indicates how long to wait (in seconds) before the PIM switch sends out the
next hello message to neighboring switches. The default hello interval is 30
seconds.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
376 Configuring PIM using the CLI

Field Description
JPINT Indicates how long to wait (in seconds) before the PIM switch sends out the
next join/prune message to its upstream neighbors. The default join/prune
interval is 60 seconds.
CBSR PREF The preference for this local interface to become a Candidate BSR. The
Candidate BSR with the highest BSR-priority and address is referred to as the
preferred BSR. The default is -1, which indicates that the current interface is
not a Candidate BSR.
INTF TYPE Indicates whether the PIM interface is active or passive.

Configuring a candidate BSR on a VLAN

PIM-SM cannot run without a bootstrap router (BSR). Although a PIM-SM
domain can have only one active BSR, you can configure additional routers
as candidate BSRs (C-BSRs). C-BSRs provide backup protection in case
the primary BSR fails.

The C-BSR with the highest configured preference becomes the BSR for
the domain. If two C-BSRs have equal preference, the candidate with the
higher IP address becomes the BSR. If you add a new C-BSR with a higher
preference to the domain, it automatically becomes the new BSR.

To configure a candidate BSR on a VLAN, use the following command:

config vlan <vid> ip pim candbsr

where
vid is a VLAN ID from 1 to 4092.
This command includes the following parameters:

config vlan <vid> ip pim candbsr

followed by:
info Displays the candidate BSR preference setting for
this interface (Figure 174 "config vlan ip pim candbsr
command output" (page 377)).
disable Disables the Candidate BSR on this interface.
enable preference <value> Enables the Candidate BSR on this interface and sets its
preference value to become a BSR. The Candidate BSR
with the highest BSR preference and address is referred
to as the preferred BSR. The default is -1, which indicates
that the current interface is not a Candidate BSR.

Figure 174 "config vlan ip pim candbsr command output" (page 377) shows
sample output for the config vlan ip pim candbsr info command.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring PIM debug trace commands 377

Figure 174
config vlan ip pim candbsr command output

Configuring PIM debug trace commands

To configure PIM protocol traces for troubleshooting, use the following
command:

config ip pim debug-pimmsg

This command includes the following parameters:

ATTENTION
For the following parameter values, 1=true and 2=false. The default value for
each parameter is 2 (false).

config ip pim debug-pimmsg

followed by:
info Displays the current PIM debug trace flag settings on
the switch (Figure 175 "config ip pim debug-pimmsg info
command output" (page 378)).
assert <true=1|false=2> Allows you to set the switch to display the assert debug
traces.
bstrap <true=1|false=2> Allows you to set the switch to display bootstrap debug
traces.
group <ipaddress> Allows you to set the switch to display debug traces from
a specific group IP address.
hello <true=1|false=2> Allows you to set the switch to display hello debug traces.
joinprune <true=1|false=2> Allows you to set the switch to display join/prune debug
traces.
pimdbglog <true=1|false=2> Allows you to control whether the switch logs debug
traces.
pimdbgtrace <true=1|false= Allows you to set the switch to display pim debug traces.
2>
rcv <true=1|false=2> Allows you to set the switch to display received debug
traces.
register <true=1|false=2> Allows you to set the switch to display register debug
traces.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
378 Configuring PIM using the CLI

config ip pim debug-pimmsg

followed by:
regstop <true=1|false=2> Allows you to set the switch to display register stop debug
traces.
rp-adv <true=1|false=2> Allows you to set the switch to display rp advertisement
debug traces.
send <true=1|false=2> Allows you to set the switch to display send debug traces.
source <ipaddress> Allows you to set the switch to display debug traces from
a specific source IP address.

Figure 175 "config ip pim debug-pimmsg info command output" (page 378)
shows sample output for the config ip pim debug-pimmsg info
command.

Figure 175
config ip pim debug-pimmsg info command output

Tips for using the debug trace commands

With the debug trace command values, you can control debug traces for
specific PIM protocol message types. For examples of debug trace output,
see "Debug trace command sample output" (page 379).
The following tips can help you use the debug trace commands:
• All configured debug trace messages can be set to true <1> or false <2>
by entering the following command at the console or Telnet session:
config ip pim debug-pimmsg pimdbgtrace <1|2>
To stop the debug trace messages output at any time, enter the following
command:
config ip pim debug-pimmsg pimdbgtrace 2

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring PIM debug trace commands 379

• To display trace messages forwarded by the switch, set the send value
to 1. To display trace messages received by the switch, set the rcv
value to 1.
You can also simultaneously display forwarded and received debug trace
messages by setting both send and rcv values to 1. For example, to
simultaneously display Hello messages forwarded and received by the
switch, type the following commands:
config ip pim debug-pimmsg hello 1
config ip pim debug-pimmsg send 1
config ip pim debug-pimmsg rcv 1
• You can save debug trace messages in a log file, or you can display the
messages on your console. For example, to display (and log) a debug
trace, use the following command:
config ip pim debug-pimmsg pimdbglog 1
where:
1 = true (debug trace messages are logged)
2 = false (debug trace messages are displayed only, not logged).
• To disable previously enabled register messages, type the following
command:
config ip pim debug-pimmsg register 2
• To display debug trace messages from a specific interface, type the
following command:
config ip pim debug-pimmsg source <ipaddress>
The above command ensures that messages from any other interface
are not shown.

Debug trace command sample output

This section describes sample debug trace command output and includes
the following commands:
• "Assert debug trace send/receive output" (page 380)
• "Bootstrap debug trace send/receive output" (page 380)
• "Hello debug trace send/receive output" (page 381)
• "Joinprune debug trace send/receive output" (page 381)
• "Register debug trace send/receive output" (page 382)
• "Regstop debug trace send/receive output" (page 383)
• "Rp-adv debug trace send/receive output" (page 383)

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
380 Configuring PIM using the CLI

Assert debug trace send/receive output

To display assert send/receive debug traces from a switch, use the following
commands:

config ip pim debug-pimmsg pimdbgtrace 1

config ip pim debug-pimmsg assert 1
config ip pim debug-pimmsg send 1
config ip pim debug-pimmsg rcv 1
Figure 176 "Assert debug trace send/receive output example" (page 380)
shows the assert send/receive debug trace output sent by the assert winner
switch and received by the assert loser switch.

Figure 176
Assert debug trace send/receive output example

Bootstrap debug trace send/receive output

To display bootstrap send/receive debug traces from a switch, use the
following commands:

config ip pim debug-pimmsg pimdbgtrace 1

config ip pim debug-pimmsg bstrap 1
config ip pim debug-pimmsg send 1
config ip pim debug-pimmsg rcv 1
Figure 177 "Bootstrap debug trace send/receive output example" (page
381) shows the bootstrap send/receive debug trace output sent by a switch
and received by a neighboring switch.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring PIM debug trace commands 381

Figure 177
Bootstrap debug trace send/receive output example

Hello debug trace send/receive output

To display hello send/receive debug traces from a switch, use the following
commands:

config ip pim debug-pimmsg pimdbgtrace 1

config ip pim debug-pimmsg hello 1
config ip pim debug-pimmsg send 1
config ip pim debug-pimmsg rcv 1
Figure 178 "Hello debug trace send/receive output example" (page 381)
shows the hello send/receive debug trace output sent by a switch and
received by a neighboring switch.

Figure 178
Hello debug trace send/receive output example

Joinprune debug trace send/receive output

To display joinprune send/receive debug traces from a switch, use the
following commands:

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
382 Configuring PIM using the CLI

config ip pim debug-pimmsg pimdbgtrace 1

config ip pim debug-pimmsg joinprune 1
config ip pim debug-pimmsg send 1
config ip pim debug-pimmsg rcv 1
Figure 179 "Joinprune debug trace send/receive output example" (page
382) shows the joinprune send/receive debug trace output sent by a
downstream neighbor switch and received by an upstream neighbor switch.

Figure 179
Joinprune debug trace send/receive output example

Register debug trace send/receive output

To display register send/receive debug traces from a switch, use the
following commands:

config ip pim debug-pimmsg pimdbgtrace 1

config ip pim debug-pimmsg register 1
config ip pim debug-pimmsg send 1
config ip pim debug-pimmsg rcv 1
Figure 180 "Register debug trace send/receive output example" (page 383)
shows the register send/receive debug trace output sent by the source DR
and received by the RP.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring PIM debug trace commands 383

Figure 180
Register debug trace send/receive output example

Regstop debug trace send/receive output

To display regstop send/receive debug traces from a switch, use the
following commands:

config ip pim debug-pimmsg pimdbgtrace 1

config ip pim debug-pimmsg regstop 1
config ip pim debug-pimmsg send 1
config ip pim debug-pimmsg rcv 1
Figure 181 "Regstop debug trace send/receive output example" (page 383)
shows the regstop send/receive debug trace output sent by the RP and
received by the source DR.

Figure 181
Regstop debug trace send/receive output example

Rp-adv debug trace send/receive output

To display rp-adv send/receive debug traces from the bootstrap switch,
use the following commands:

config ip pim debug-pimmsg pimdbgtrace 1

config ip pim debug-pimmsg rp-adv 1
config ip pim debug-pimmsg send 1
config ip pim debug-pimmsg rcv 1

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
384 Configuring PIM using the CLI

Figure 182 "Rp-adv debug trace send/receive output example" (page 384)
shows the rp-adv send/receive debug trace output sent by the candidate RP
and received by the bootstrap switch.

Figure 182
Rp-adv debug trace send/receive output example

Configuring Source Specific Multicast (SSM)

Source Specific Multicast (SSM) optimizes PIM-SM by simplifying the
many-to-many model (servers-to-receivers). Since most multicast
applications distribute content to a group in one direction, SSM uses
a one-to-many model that only uses a subset of the PIM-SM features.
This model is more efficient and puts less of a load on multicast routing
devices. For more information about SSM concepts and terminology, see
"IP Multicast concepts" (page 15).

PIM-SSM configuration prerequisites

SSM is a global configuration. When you enable SSM on a switch, it is
enabled on all interfaces running PIM. On an SSM-enabled switch, SSM
behavior is limited to the SSM group range. For non-SSM groups, the
protocol behavior is PIM-SM.
Before you can configure SSM, you must prepare the router as follows:

Step Action

1 Configure an IP interface. For information, see Configuring IP

Routing Operations (NN46205-500).

2 Configure a unicast protocol (RIP or OSPF) globally and on the

interfaces where you want to configure PIM. For information about
RIP and OSPF, see Configuring IP Routing Operations.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring Source Specific Multicast (SSM) 385

PIM requires a unicast protocol in order to forward multicast traffic

within the network when performing the Reverse Path Forwarding
(RFP) check. PIM-SM uses the information from the unicast routing
table to create and maintain the shared and shortest multicast tree
that enables PIM-enabled routers to communicate. The unicast
routing table must contain a route to every multicast source in the
network as well as routes to PIM entities like the RPs and BSR.

3 Enable PIM globally.

—End—

Configuring PIM-SSM globally

To enable or disable PIM-SSM globally on the switch, use the following
commands:

config ip pim enable

config ip pim mode ssm
When changing modes from SSM to sparse, the following warning message
appears:
Dynamic mode change from SSM is not allowed, please disable
PIM.

To change modes from SSM to sparse, use the following commands:

config ip pim disable

config ip pim mode sparse
config ip pim enable
After you enable PIM in SSM mode, the IGMP parameters take effect. To
take full advantage of SSM, enable IGMPv3 if hosts attached to the switch
are running IGMPv3 or configuring the SSM table.

For information about configuring IGMPv3, see "Configuring IGMP on an

interface" (page 232), or "Configuring IGMP on a VLAN" (page 262).

For information about configuring the SSM group range and channel table,
see "Showing SSM group range and dynamic learning status" (page 253),
or "Configuring the SSM channel table" (page 254).

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
386 Configuring PIM using the CLI

The config ip pim command includes the following parameters:

config ip pim
followed by:
info Displays current PIM settings on the switch.
disable Globally disables PIM on the switch.
enable Globally enables PIM on the switch.
mode <sparse|ssm> The configured mode of this interface: sparse or ssm
(source-specific multicast).
bootstrap-period <integer> Specifies the interval (in seconds) that the elected BSR
waits between originating bootstrap messages.
• integer is an integer in the range of 5 to 32757. The
default is 60.
c-rp-adv-timeout <integer> Specifies how often (in seconds) that routers configured
as candidate RPs send C-RP advertisement messages.
When this timer expires, the C-RP sends an advertisement
message to the elected BSR.
• integer is an integer in the range of 5 to 26214. The
default is 60.
disc-data-timeout <integer> Specifies how long (in seconds) to discard data until the
Join is received from the RP. An ipmc discard record is
created after a register packet is sent until the the timer
expires or when a Join is received.
• integer is an integer in the range of 5 to 65535. The
default is 60.
activity-chk-interval Specifies the PIM activity check interval. The default is
<15|30|210> 210.
joinprune-interval Specifies how long to wait (in seconds) before the PIM
<integer> router sends out the next join/prune message to its
upstream neighbors.
• integer is an integer in the range of 1 to 18724. The
default is 60.
register-suppression-timeou Specifies how long (in seconds) the DR suppresses
t <integer> sending registers to the RP. The timer starts when the DR
receives a Register Stop message from the RP.
• integer is an integer in the range of 6 to 65535. The
default is 60.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring Source Specific Multicast (SSM) 387

config ip pim
followed by:
unicast-route-change-timeou
Specifies how often (in seconds) the switch polls
t <integer>
the routing table manager (RTM) for unicast routing
information updates to be used by PIM.

ATTENTION
Lowering this value increases how often the switch
polls the RTM. This can affect the performance of
the switch, especially when there is a lot of traffic
flowing through the switch.

• integer is an integer in the range of 2 to 65535.

The default is 5.

fwd-cache-timeout <integer> Specifies for how long (in seconds) the forward cache is
maintained.
• integer is an integer in the range of 10 to 86400.
The default is 210.

Configuration example: PIM-SSM

This configuration example uses the commands described above to globally

enable PIM in SSM mode and to set the timers. After configuring the
parameters, use the info command to show a summary of the results.

8610co:5# config ip pim enable

8610co:5/config/ip/pim# mode ssm
8610co:5/config/ip/pim# register-suppression-timeout 60
8610co:5/config/ip/pim# joinprune-interval 60
ERS-8606:5/config/ip/pim# info
Sub-Context: candbsr candrp debug-pimmsg interface mbr
static-rp
Current Context:
enable : true
global mode : ssm
mbr : Disabled
activity-chk-interval : 210
bootstrap-period : 60
c-rp-adv-timeout : 60
disc-data-timeout : 60
fwd-cache-timeout : 210
register-suppression-timeout : 60
unicast-route-change-timeout : 5
joinprune-interval : 60

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
388 Configuring PIM using the CLI

Configuring square-SMLT globally

When you use SMLT in a square configuration, use the following command
to enable square-SMLT globally on each of the four switches:

config sys mcast-smlt

This command includes the following parameters:

config sys mcast-smlt

followed by:
info Displays the current square-SMLT configuration. (Figure
183 "config sys mcast-smlt info output example" (page
388)).
square-smlt <enable|disabl Allows you to set the square-SMLT flag. The default is
e> disable.

Figure 183 "config sys mcast-smlt info output example" (page 388) displays
the config sys mcast-smlt info command.

Figure 183
config sys mcast-smlt info output example

Configuration examples
This section contains the following configuration examples:
• "Base configuration with backup BSR" (page 388)
• "PIM-SM BSR and RP using circuitless IP addresses" (page 392)
• "PIMv2 configuration example with Cisco and Juniper, with redundant
BSR" (page 394)
• "PIM configuration example with Cisco using PIMv1 and Auto-RP" (page
400)
• "Using PIM-SSM with static channel table" (page 404)

Base configuration with backup BSR

To do a base configuration with a backup BSR as seen in Figure 184
"PIM-SM Configuration Example, Base Configuration with Backup BSR"
(page 389), configure the following:
• Configure OSPF as the IGP protocol.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuration examples 389

• Configure ERS 8600-B as the primary BSR, and ERS 8600-C and
backup BSR. The higher preference number determines the BSR so
ERS 8600-B is configured with a higher preference than ERS 8600-C.
• Configure ERS 8600-C as a RP for multicast group 238.1.1.0/24.
• Configure ERS 8600-E with VLAN 2 to connect to a SetTop box to
receive multicast traffic. VLAN 2 is configured in PIM-SM passive mode
and also OSPF passive mode.
• Configure ERS 8600-C with VLAN 2 to connect to the multicast source.
VLAN 2 is configured in PIM-SM passive mode.

ATTENTION
Nortel highly recommends that you configure all PIM interfaces for passive mode
if no PIM router is attached to this interface. This also applies to OSPF if no
OSPF router is attached to this interface.

Figure 184
PIM-SM Configuration Example, Base Configuration with Backup BSR

Configuring ERS 8600-E

Step Action

1 Use the following commands to configure port 1/1 as a brouter port

with VLAN ID 2170 and to enable OSPF and PIM on this interface:
8610:5# config ethernet 1/1 ip create 10.1.1.78/30
2170
8610:5# config ethernet 1/1 ip ospf enable
8610:5# config ethernet 1/1 ip pim enable

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
390 Configuring PIM using the CLI

2 Use the following commands to create a port-based VLAN 2 under

STG 1 with OSPF and PIM:
8610:5# config vlan 2 create byport 1
8610:5# config vlan 2 ports add 1/15
8610:5# config vlan 2 ip create
172.3.1.1/255.255.255.0
8610:5# config vlan 2 ip pim interface-type
passive
8610:5# config vlan 2 ip pim enable
8610:5# config vlan 2 ip ospf interface-type
passive
8610:5# config vlan 2 ip ospf enable

3 To enable OSPF globally, use the following command:

8610:5# config ip ospf enable
4 To enable PIM globally, use the following command:
8610:5# config ip pim enable

—End—

Configuring ERS 8600-B

Step Action

1 Use the following commands to configure port 1/1 as a brouter port

with VLAN ID 2202 and to enable OSPF and PIM on this interface:
8610:5# config ethernet 1/1 ip create 10.1.1.77/30
2202
8610:5# config ethernet 1/1 ip ospf enable
8610:5# config ethernet 1/1 ip pim enable

2 Use the following commands to configure port 2/8 as a brouter port

with VLAN ID 2199 and to enable OSPF and PIM on this interface:
8610:5# config ethernet 2/8 ip create 10.1.1.13/30
2199
8610:5# config ethernet 2/8 ip ospf enable
8610:5# config ethe.rnet 2/8 ip pim enable
3 To enable OSPF globally, use the following command:

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuration examples 391

8610:5# config ip ospf enable

4 To configure the BSR, use the following command:

8610:6# config ip pim candbsr interface 10.1.1.77
enable preference 10
5 To enable PIM globally, use the following command:
8610:5# config ip pim enable

—End—

Configuring ERS 8600-C

Step Action

1 Use the following commands to configure port 1/9 as a brouter port

with VLAN ID 2138 and to enable OSPF and PIM with a passive
interface:
8610:5# config ethernet 1/9 ip create 192.4.4.1/24
2138
8610:5# config ethernet 1/9 ip ospf interface-type
passive
8610:5# config ethernet 1/9 ip ospf enable
8610:5# config ethernet 1/9 ip pim interface-type
passive
8610:5# config ethernet 1/9 ip pim enable

2 Use the following commands to configure port 2/8 as a brouter port

with VLAN ID 2135 and to enable OSPF and PIM on this interface:
8610:5# config ethernet 2/8 ip create 10.1.1.14/30
2135
8610:5# config ethernet 2/8 ip ospf enable
8610:5# config ethernet 2/8 ip pim enable

3 To enable OSPF globally, use the following command:

8610:5# config ip ospf enable

4 To configure the BSR, use the following command:

8610:6# config ip pim candbsr interface 10.1.1.14
enable preference 1

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
392 Configuring PIM using the CLI

5 Use the following command to configure RP with multicast group

address 238.1.1.0/24:
8610:5# config ip pim candrp add grp 238.1.1.0
mask 255.255.255.0 rp 192.4.4.1

6 To enable PIM globally, use the following command:

8610:5# config ip pim enable

—End—

PIM-SM BSR and RP using circuitless IP addresses

The BSR and RP are configurable using circuitless IP (CLIP) addresses. In
this example, based on Figure 184 "PIM-SM Configuration Example, Base
Configuration with Backup BSR" (page 389), ERS 8600-E is configured
with the following:
• CLIP 1: IP address 1.1.1.12/32 with OSPF enabled and used for the
OSPF router ID.

ATTENTION
A CLIP address for the OSPF router-id is not necessary and only used as an
example illustrating the use of CLIP for OSPF and PIM.

• CLIP 2: IP address 1.1.1.13 with OSPF enabled and configured for

PIM-SM BSR with a priority of 140.
• CLIP 3: IP address 1.1.1.14 with OSPF enabled and configured for
PIM-SM RP for group 238.2.2.0/24.

Configuring ERS 8600-E

Step Action

1 Use the following commands to configure port 1/1 as a brouter port

with VLAN ID 2170 and to enables OSPF and PIM on this interface:
8610:5# config ethernet 1/1 ip create 10.1.1.78/30
2170
8610:5# config ethernet 1/1 ip ospf enable
8610:5# config ethernet 1/1 ip pim enable

2 Use the following commands to create a port-based VLAN 2 under

STG 1 with OSPF and PIM:
8610:5# config vlan 2 create byport 1
8610:5# config vlan 2 ports add 1/15

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuration examples 393

8610:5# config vlan 2 ip create

172.3.1.1/255.255.255.0
8610:5# config vlan 2 ip pim interface-type
passive
8610:5# config vlan 2 ip pim enable
8610:5# config vlan 2 ip ospf interface-type
passive
8610:5# config vlan 2 ip ospf enable

3 Use the following commands to create three CLIP address: CLIP

1 is used for the OSPF Router-ID, CLIP 2 is used for the BSR, and
CLIP 3 is used for the RP:
8610:5# config ip circuitless-ip-int 1 create
1.1.1.12/32
8610:5# config ip circuitless-ip-int 1 ospf enable
8610:5# config ip circuitless-ip-int 2 create
1.1.1.13/32
8610:5# config ip circuitless-ip-int 2 ospf enable
8610:5# config ip circuitless-ip-int 2 pim enable
8610:5# config ip circuitless-ip-int 3 create
1.1.1.14/32
8610:5# config ip circuitless-ip-int 3 ospf enable
8610:5# config ip circuitless-ip-int 3 pim enable

4 Use the following command to enable OSPF globally:

8610:5# config ip ospf router-id 1.1.1.12
8610:5# config ip ospf enable

5 Use the following command configures CLIP 2 as a BSR:

8610:5# config ip pim candbsr interface 1.1.1.13
enable preference 140
6 Use the following command to configure CLIP 3 as a RP with the
multicast group address 238.2.2.0/24:
8610:5# config ip pim candrp add grp 238.2.2.0
mask 255.255.255.0 rp 1.1.1.14
7 Use the following command to enable PIM globally:
8610:5# config ip pim enable

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
394 Configuring PIM using the CLI

—End—

PIMv2 configuration example with Cisco and Juniper, with redundant

BSR
In this configuration example, as seen in Figure 185 "PIM configuration
example with redundant BSR" (page 395), the following steps are
configured:
• Enable OSPF as the IGP
• Configure ERS 8600-D as the BSR with a priority of 100 using CLIP
• Configure Cisco 4500 as backup BSR with a priority of 10
• Configure the Cisco 4500 as a RP for a group address of 237.0.0.0/8
• Configure ERS 8600-D as a RP for a group address of 238.1.1.0

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuration examples 395

Figure 185
PIM configuration example with redundant BSR

Configuring Cisco switch

The following is a Cisco configuration of sparse-mode PIM with RP
configured with group address 237.0.0.0/8.
version 12.2
!
ip subnet-zero
!
IP Multicast-routing
!
interface Loopback0
ip address 1.1.1.55 255.255.255.255
!
interface Ethernet0
ip address 10.20.2.2 255.255.255.0
ip pim sparse-mode

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
396 Configuring PIM using the CLI

ip ospf network broadcast

ip ospf priority 0
media-type 10BaseT
no cdp enable
!
!
interface FastEthernet0
ip address 10.20.1.2 255.255.255.0
ip pim sparse-mode
ip ospf priority 0
full-duplex
!
router ospf 1
log-adjacency-changes
passive-interface Ethernet0
network 1.1.1.55 0.0.0.0 area 0
network 10.20.0.0 0.0.255.255 area 0
!
ip classless
ip pim bsr-candidate Loopback0 30 10
ip pim rp-candidate Ethernet0 group-list 1
!
access-list 1 permit 237.0.0.0 0.255.255.255
!
end

Configuring Juniper M20 switch

This following is a Juniper configuration of sparse-mode PIM.
interfaces {
fe-1/1/0 {
speed 100m;
link-mode full-duplex;
unit 0 {
family inet {
address 10.10.10.9/30;
}
}
}
fe-1/1/1 {
speed 100m;
link-mode full-duplex;
unit 0 {
family inet {
address 192.3.3.1/24;
}
}
lo0 {
unit 0 {
family inet {
address 2.1.1.10/32;

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuration examples 397

}
family iso {
address 49.0001.2081.9716.9018.00;
}
}
}
routing-options {
router-id 2.1.1.10;
}
protocols {
ospf {
traffic-engineering;
area 0.0.0.0 {
interface lo0.0;
interface fe-1/1/0.0;
interface fe-1/1/1.0;
}
}
pim {
traceoptions {
file boot size 100000;
flag bootstrap;
}
rp {
local {
}
}
interface fe-1/1/0.0;
interface lo0.0 {
mode sparse;
version 2;
}
interface fe-1/1/1.0;
}
}

Configuring ERS 8600-A

Step Action

1 To configure PIM, use the following command:

8610:5# config ip pim enable
2 To configure the port, use the following commands:
8610:5# config ethernet 1/33 auto-negotiate
disable
8610:5# config ethernet 1/33 speed 100
8610:5# config ethernet 1/33 duplex full

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
398 Configuring PIM using the CLI

8610:5# config ethernet 1/33 ip create 10.20.1.1/

255.255.255.0 2096 mac_offset 6
8610:5# config ethernet 1/33 ip ospf enable
8610:5# config ethernet 1/33 ip pim enable
8610:5# config ethernet 2/8 ip create 10.1.1.5/
255.255.255.252 2135 mac_offset 3
8610:5# config ethernet 2/8 ip ospf enable
8610:5# config ethernet 2/8 ip pim enable

3 To configure OSPF, use the following commands:

8610:5# config ip ospf admin-state enable
8610:5# config ip ospf enable

—End—

Configuring ERS 8600-D

Step Action

1 To configure PIM, use the following command:

8610:5# config ip pim enable
2 To configure the port, use the following commands:
8610:5# config ethernet 1/25 ip create 192.3.3.1/
255.255.255.0 2088 mac_offset 10
8610:5# config ethernet 1/25 ip ospf enable
8610:5# config ethernet 1/25 ip pim interface-type
passive
8610:5# config ethernet 1/25 ip pim enable
8610:5# config ethernet 2/6 ip create 10.1.1.10/
255.255.255.252 2134 mac_offset 1
8610:5# config ethernet 2/6 ip ospf enable
8610:5# config ethernet 2/6 ip pim enable
8610:5# config ethernet 2/8 ip create 10.1.1.6/
255.255.255.252 2135 mac_offset 2
8610:5# config ethernet 2/8 ip ospf enable
8610:5# config ethernet 2/8 ip pim enable

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuration examples 399

8610:5# config ethernet 2/8 ip pim cbsrpreference

100

3 To configure a circuitless IP interface, use the following commands:

8610:5# config ip circuitless-ip-int 1 create
1.1.1.4/ 255.255.255.255
8610:5# config ip circuitless-ip-int 1 ospf enable
8610:5# config ip circuitless-ip-int 2 create
1.1.1.5/ 255.255.255.255
8610:5# config ip circuitless-ip-int 2 ospf enable
8610:5# config ip circuitless-ip-int 2 pim enable

4 To configure PIM RP, use the following command:

8610:5# config ip pim candrp add grp 238.1.1.0
mask 255.255.255.0 rp 192.3.3.1
5 To configure PIM on the circuitless IP CANDBSR, use the following
commands:
8610:5# config ip pim interface 1.1.1.4
cbsrpreference -1
8610:5# config ip pim interface 1.1.1.5
cbsrpreference 100
6 To configure OSPF, use the following commands:
8610:5# config ip ospf admin-state enable
8610:5# config ip ospf router-id 1.1.1.4
8610:5# config ip ospf enable

—End—

Configuring ERS 8600-B

Step Action

1 To configure PIM, use the following command:

8610:5# config ip pim enable

2 To configure the port, use the following commands:

8610:5# config ethernet 1/33 auto-negotiate
disable

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
400 Configuring PIM using the CLI

8610:5# config ethernet 1/33 speed 100

8610:5# config ethernet 1/33 ip create 10.10.10.10/
255.255.255.252 2201 mac_offset 6
8610:5# config ethernet 1/33 ip ospf enable
8610:5# config ethernet 1/33 ip pim enable
8610:5# config ethernet 2/7 ip create 10.1.1.9/
255.255.255.252 2198 mac_offset 1
8610:5# config ethernet 2/7 ip ospf enable
8610:5# config ethernet 2/7 ip pim enable
3 To configure OSPF, use the following commands:
8610:5# config ip ospf admin-state enable
8610:5# config ip ospf enable

—End—

PIM configuration example with Cisco using PIMv1 and Auto-RP

The Ethernet Routing Switch 8600 can be connected to a Cisco proprietary
PIMv1 network using Auto-RP. This application works with the following
considerations:
• The IP interface between the Ethernet Routing Switch 8600 and Cisco
router must be configured using PIMv2. All other IP interfaces on the
Cisco router can be configured as PIMv1 with or without Auto-RP.
• The Cisco router connected to the Ethernet Routing Switch 8600 must
be configured as the BSR. This allows the Cisco router to advertise
any RP discovered through Auto-RP to be advertised to the Ethernet
Routing Switch 8600.
• A multicast source on a Cisco PIMv1 router can use a RP configured on
the Ethernet Routing Switch 8600.
• A multicast source on an Ethernet Routing Switch 8600 cannot use a
RP configured on a Cisco router. As long as the source is connected to
a Cisco router where AutoRP is used, the multicast receivers can be on
a Cisco router or Ethernet Routing Switch 8600.

In this configuration (as seen in Figure 186 "PIM configuration example, with
Cisco using PIMv1 and Auto-RP" (page 401)), the following is configured:
• Cisco #1 interface fe0 with PIMv2 and e1 with PIMv1
• Cisco #1 as the BSR with a priority of 170
• Cisco #1 as a RP for group address 237.0.0.0/8

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuration examples 401

• Cisco #2 interface e0 and e1 with PIMv1. Cisco #2 uses an older IOS

software that only supports PIMv1 (ISO 11.2)
• Cisco #2 as a RP for group 236.0.0.0/8 using Auto-RP

Figure 186
PIM configuration example, with Cisco using PIMv1 and Auto-RP

Configuring Cisco #1
!
version 12.2
!
ip subnet-zero
ip cef
!
IP Multicast-routing
!
!
interface Loopback0
ip address 1.1.1.55 255.255.255.255
ip ospf priority 0
!
!
interface Ethernet1

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
402 Configuring PIM using the CLI

ip address 10.20.3.2 255.255.255.0

ip pim version 1
ip pim sparse-dense-mode
ip ospf priority 0
media-type 10BaseT
!
interface FastEthernet0
ip address 10.20.1.2 255.255.255.0
ip pim sparse-mode
ip ospf priority 0
full-duplex
!
router ospf 1
log-adjacency-changes
passive-interface Ethernet0
network 1.1.1.55 0.0.0.0 area 0
network 10.20.0.0 0.0.255.255 area 0
!
ip classless
ip ospf name-lookup
ip pim bsr-candidate Loopback0 30 170
ip pim rp-candidate Ethernet0 group-list 1
ip pim send-rp-announce Ethernet1 scope 16 group-list 3
ip pim send-rp-discovery scope 16
!
access-list 1 permit 237.0.0.0 0.255.255.255
access-list 3 permit 237.0.0.0 0.255.255.255
access-list 3 permit 238.2.2.0 0.0.0.255

Configuring Cisco #2
!
version 11.2
!
ip subnet-zero
IP Multicast-routing
!
interface Loopback0
ip address 1.1.1.56 255.255.255.255
ip ospf priority 0
!
interface Ethernet0
ip address 10.20.3.1 255.255.255.0
ip pim sparse-mode
media-type 10BaseT
!
interface Ethernet1
ip address 10.20.4.1 255.255.255.0
ip pim sparse-mode
ip ospf priority 0
media-type 10BaseT

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuration examples 403

!
router ospf 1
network 1.1.1.56 0.0.0.0 area 0
network 10.20.0.0 0.0.255.255 area 0
!
ip classless
ip pim send-rp-announce Ethernet0 scope 16 group-list 1
ip pim send-rp-discovery scope 16
access-list 1 permit 236.0.0.0 0.255.255.255

Configuring ERS 8600-A

Step Action

1 To configure PIM, use the following command:

8610:5# config ip pim enable

2 To configure ports, use the following commands:

8610:5# config ethernet 1/33 auto-negotiate
disable
8610:5# config ethernet 1/33 speed 100
8610:5# config ethernet 1/33 duplex full
8610:5# config ethernet 1/33 ip create 10.20.1.1/
255.255.255.0 2096 mac_offset 6
8610:5# config ethernet 1/33 ip ospf enable
8610:5# config ethernet 1/33 ip pim enable
8610:5# config ethernet 2/8 ip create 10.1.1.5/
255.255.255.252 2135 mac_offset 3
8610:5# config ethernet 2/8 ip ospf enable
8610:5# config ethernet 2/8 ip pim enable

3 To configure a circuitless IP CANDBSR, use the following command:

config ip pim interface 1.1.1.1 cbsrpreference -1

4 To configure OSPF, use the following command:

8610:5# config ip ospf admin-state enable
8610:5# config ip ospf enable

—End—

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
404 Configuring PIM using the CLI

Using PIM-SSM with static channel table

The Ethernet Routing Switch 8600 supports a mix of PIM-SSM and PIM-SM
with support for the following:
• Support for a mix of PIM-SSM and PIM-SM enabled switches if needed
• Extensions to PIM-SM with full PIM-SSM support
• IGMPv3 support for PIM-SSM in dynamic and static modes
• IGMPv2 extensions to support PIM-SSM
• Flexible implementation with the ability to have configurable SSM range
for day one support of existing applications

In this configuration example, configure the Ethernet Routing Switch 8600 to

add static multicast entries to support IGMPv2 devices. This allows support
for IGMPv2 devices when the Ethernet Routing Switch 8600 is configured
for PIM-SSM to support a mix of IGMPv2 and IGMPv3 devices.
Configuring Ethernet Routing Switch 8600
When configuring PIM-SSM, you do not need to configure an RP or
BSR unless you wish to support both PIM-SM and PIM-SSM. To enable
PIM-SSM, enter the following commands:

Step Action

1 Use the following command to enable PIM-SSM globally since the

default setting is PIM-SM:
8610:5# config ip pim mode ssm
2 Use the following command to configures an interface for IGMPv3:
8610:5# config ip igmp interface <ipaddr> version
3

3 Use the following commands to enable either dynamic or static

PIM-SSM:
In PIM-SSM mode, the ERS 8600 can learn the multicast source
dynamically from an IGMP Report. Dynamic Learning can also be
disabled to configure a static SSM table that maps the SSM groups
to their sources, using the following command:
8610:5# config ip igmp ssm dynamic-learning
<enable|disable>
By default, the SSM group range is 232.0.0.0/8. Multicast groups
are added by using the following command:
8610:5# config ip igmp ssm ssm-grp-range group
<value> mask <value>

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Showing the PIM mode 405

4 Use the following commands to add static groups if ERS 8600 is

configured for static PIM-SSM:
8610:5# config ip igmp ssm ssm-channel create
group <value> source <value>
8610:5# config ip igmp ssm ssm-channel enable
<group value>
or
8610:5# config ip igmp ssm ssm-channel enable all

5 Use the following commands to view the PIM-SSM configuration:

8610:5# show ip igmp ssm ssm-global
8610:5# show ip igmp ssm ssm-channel

—End—

Showing the PIM mode

To show the PIM mode (SM or SSM), use the following command:

show ip pim mode

Figure 187 "show ip pim mode command output" (page 405) shows sample
output for the show ip pim mode command.

Figure 187
show ip pim mode command output

Table 96 "show ip mode parameter" (page 405) shows the field description
for this command.

Table 96
show ip mode parameter
Field Description
Mode Indicates the PIM mode as sparse or SSM.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
406 Configuring PIM using the CLI

Showing the virtual neighbor

To display the virtual neighbor, use the following command:

show ip pim virtual-neighbor

Figure 188 "show ip pim virtual-neighbor command output" (page 406)
shows sample output for the show ip pim virtual-neighbor
command.

Figure 188
show ip pim virtual-neighbor command output

Table 97 "show ip virtual-neighbor parameter" (page 406) shows the field

descriptions for this command.

Table 97
show ip virtual-neighbor parameter
Field Description
INTERFACE Indicates the interface.
ADDRESS Indicates the IP address of the virtual neighbor.

Displaying all IP PIM show commands

To display all relevant IP PIM information, use the following command:

show ip pim show-all [file <value> ]

where
value is the filename where the output is redirected.
Figure 189 "show ip pim show-all command output" (page 407) shows
sample output for the show ip pim show-all command.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Displaying all IP PIM show commands 407

Figure 189
show ip pim show-all command output

For each of the show ip pim xxxx commands listed in Figure 189 "show
ip pim show-all command output" (page 407), see the appropriate section
for parameter explanations.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
408 Configuring PIM using the CLI

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 409

Configuring PGM using the CLI

Pragmatic General Multicast (PGM) provides reliable, duplicate-free delivery
of data packets while reducing network congestion. PGM guarantees
that receivers either can receive all data packets from transmissions and
retransmissions, or can detect unrecoverable data packet loss. PGM is
particularly well suited to push applications with relatively small information
transfers such as stock and news updates.
For more information about PGM concepts and terminology, see "IP
Multicast concepts" (page 15).
This section includes the following topics:
• "Roadmap of PGM commands" (page 409)
• "Configuration considerations and prerequisites" (page 411)
• "Configuring PGM globally" (page 411)
• "Configuring PGM on an interface" (page 417)
• "Configuring PGM on Ethernet ports" (page 424)
• "Configuring PGM on a VLAN" (page 425)
• "Displaying all IP PGM show commands" (page 426)

Roadmap of PGM commands

The following roadmap lists all the PGM commands and their parameters.
After using the commands below to configure the Ethernet Routing Switch
8600, you can use the show commands to display information for a
particular feature.

To facilitate troubleshooting, the Ethernet Routing Switch 8600 also

provides one command (show ip pgm show-all) that lists all the show
commands for IP PGM and displays their configuration output. "Displaying
all IP PGM show commands" (page 426).

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
410 Configuring PGM using the CLI

Use this list as a quick reference.

Command Parameter
config ip pgm info
max-rexmit-state <integer>
max-sessions <integer>
nnak-generate <enable|disable>
state <enable|disable>
session-life-time <integer>
show ip pgm global
show ip pgm retransmit
show ip pgm session
config ip pgm interface <ipaddr> info
max-nak-rdata-int <integer>
max-nak-re-xmit-cnt <integer>
nak-eliminate-int <integer>
nak-re-xmit-int <integer>
state <enable|disable>
show ip pgm interface config
show ip pgm interface error general
show ip pgm interface error nak
show ip pgm interface stat general
show ip pgm interface stat nak
show ip pgm interface stat parity
config ethernet <ports> ip pgm info
max-nak-rdata-int <integer>
max-nak-re-xmit-cnt <integer>
nak-eliminate-int <integer>
nak-re-xmit-int <integer>
state <enable|disable>
config vlan <vid> ip pgm info
max-nak-rdata-int <integer>
max-nak-re-xmit-cnt <integer>
nak-eliminate-int <integer>
nak-re-xmit-int <integer>

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring PGM globally 411

Command Parameter
state <enable|disable>
show ip pgm show-all [file <value>]

Configuration considerations and prerequisites

The Ethernet Routing Switch 8600 implements the network element portion
of PGM and supports the following PGM options:
• NAK list
• FEC (forward error correction)

The Ethernet Routing Switch 8600 cannot serve as a designated local

repairer (DLR) because DLRs require a large amount of buffering.
Therefore, the null negative acknowledgement (NNAK) parameters in the
CLI are not supported.
To configure and use PGM on an Ethernet Routing Switch 8600, the switch
must be running IP Multicast with IGMP snooping or an IP Multicast protocol
such as DVMRP or PIM-SM. If PGM is configured without IP Multicast
enabled on a switch, PGM does not run and cannot be used.
To configure PGM on a switch, you need to perform the following steps:

Step Action

1 Configure and enable IP Multicast on the switch, particularly on the

interfaces where PGM is required.

2 Enable PGM globally.

3 Enable PGM on the required interfaces.

—End—

Configuring PGM globally

To configure PGM globally on the switch, use the following command:

config ip pgm

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
412 Configuring PGM using the CLI

This command includes the following parameters:

config ip pgm
followed by:
info Displays current PGM settings on the switch (Figure 190
"config ip pgm info command output" (page 412)).
max-rexmit-state Configures the maximum number of retransmit state entries
<integer> that the switch can create. Each entry has a unique NAK
sequence number. The default value is 200 entries.
max-sessions <integer> Configures the maximum number of source path state sessions
allowed on the switch. The default value is 100 sessions.
nnak-generate When enabled, the DLR that receives redirected NAKs, where
<enable|disable> it has the RDATA, sends a null NAK (NNAK) to the original
source.
state <enable|disable> Displays the current state (up or down) of PGM.
session-life-time Specifies the length of idle time (in seconds) before a session
<integer> times out. Idle time is when no SPMs are received from the
upstream. The default value is 300 seconds.

Figure 190 "config ip pgm info command output" (page 412) shows sample
output for the config ip pgm info command.

Figure 190
config ip pgm info command output

Showing PGM global information

To display the PGM global status on the switch, use the following command:

show ip pgm global

Figure 191 "show ip pgm global command output" (page 413) shows sample
output for the show ip pgm global command.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring PGM globally 413

Figure 191
show ip pgm global command output

Table 98 "show ip pgm global parameters" (page 413) describes the fields
for this command.

Table 98
show ip pgm global parameters
Field Description
enable Displays whether PGM is globally enabled or disabled.
state Displays the current state (up or down) of PGM.
session-life-time Displays the length of idle time (in seconds) before a session
times out. Idle time is when no SPMs are received from the
upstream. The default is 300 seconds.
nnak-generate When enabled, the DLR that receives redirected NAKs, where
it has the RDATA, sends a NULL NAK to the original source.
max-re-xmit-states Displays the maximum number of retransmit state entries that
the switch can create. Each entry has a unique NAK sequence
number. The default is 200 entries.
total-re-xmit-states Displays the total number of retransmit state entries in the
retransmit table.
max-sessions Displays the maximum number of source path state sessions
allowed on the switch. The default is 100 sessions.
total-sessions Displays the total number of source path state sessions in the
PGM session entries table.
total-re-xmit-states-timeout Displays the total number of retransmit state entries that were
removed because they timed out.
total-unique-naks Displays the total number of unique NAKs received.
total-unique-parity-naks Displays the total number of unique parity NAKs received.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
414 Configuring PGM using the CLI

Showing PGM retransmission statistics

To display the PGM retransmission statistics, use the following command:

show ip pgm retransmit

Figure 192 "show ip pgm retransmit command output" (page 414) shows
sample output for the show ip pgm retransmit command.

Figure 192
show ip pgm retransmit command output

Table 99 "show ip pgm retransmit parameters" (page 414) describes fields

for this command.

Table 99
show ip pgm retransmit parameters
Field Description
SOURCE PORT Displays the source port of this retransmit state.
GLOBAL ID Displays the global ID for this entry.
SOURCE Displays the source IP address for this entry.
GROUP Displays the destination group address for this entry.
SEQ_NUM TG/CNT Displays the selected sequence number for this entry.
UPSTREAM CCT Displays the upstream circuit number from this entry.
DOWNSTREAM Displays the list of downstream interfaces from this entry.

Showing PGM session statistics

To display the PGM session statistics, use the following command:

show ip pgm session

Figure 193 "show ip pgm session command output" (page 415) shows
sample output for the show ip pgm session command.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring PGM globally 415

Figure 193
show ip pgm session command output

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
416 Configuring PGM using the CLI

Table 100 "show ip pgm session parameters" (page 416) describes the
fields for this command.

Table 100
show ip pgm session parameters
Field Description
SOURCE PORT Displays the source port for this session.
GLOBAL ID Displays the global ID for this session.
SOURCE Displays the source IP address for this session.
GROUP Displays the destination group address for this session.
UPSTREAM ADDRESS Displays the IP address of the upstream interface for this session.
UPSTREAM IF_CCT Displays the circuit number of the upstream interface for this session.
TRAIL EDGE SEQ Displays the trailing edge sequence of the transfer window.
LEAD EDGE SEQ Displays the leading edge sequence of the transfer window.
IN SPMS Displays the number of SPMs received during this session.
OUT SPMS Displays the number of SPMs sent out during this session.
TOTAL RE_XMIT STATES Displays the total number of retransmit state entries during this
session.
TOTAL RE_XMIT Displays the total number of timed out retransmit state entries during
TIMEOUT this session.
IN RDATA Displays the number of RDATA packets received during this session.
OUT RDATA Displays the number of RDATA packets sent out during this session.
IN_RDATA NO_STATE Displays the number of RDATA packets discarded because there
ERORS was no active session.
UNIQUE NAKS Displays the number of unique NAKs received during this session.
IN NAKS Displays the number of NAKs received during this session.
OUT NAKS Displays the number of unique NAKs sent out during this session.
IN_NAK SEQ ERRORS Displays the number of NAKs discarded because they were out of
sequence.
IN NNAKS Displays the number of NNAKs received during this session.
OUT NNAKS Displays the number of NNAKs sent out during this session.
IN NCFS Displays the number of NCFs received during this session.
OUT NCFS Displays the number of NCFs sent out during this session.
IN_REDIRECTED NCFS Displays the number of redirected NCFs received during this
session.
IN_PARITY_NAK Displays the number of parity NAKs received during this session.
OUT_PARITY_NAK Displays the number of parity NAKs sent out during this session.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring PGM on an interface 417

Field Description
IN_PARITY_RDATA Displays the number of parity RDATA packets received during this
session.
OUT_PARITY_RDATA Displays the number of parity RDATA packets sent out during this
session.
IN_PARITY_NCF Displays the number of parity NCFs received during this session.
OUT_PARITY_NCF Displays the number of parity NCFs sent out during this session.
IN_PARITY_SPM Displays the number of parity SPMs received during this session.
OUT_PARITY_SPM Displays the number of parity SPMs sent out during this session.
UNIQUE_PARITY_NAKS Displays the number of unique parity NAKs received during this
session.

Configuring PGM on an interface

To configure PGM on a specific interface, use the following command:

config ip pgm interface <ipaddr>

where
ipaddr indicates the IP address of the selected interface.
This command includes the following parameters:

config ip pgm interface <ipaddr>

followed by:
info Displays current PGM settings on the selected interface (Figure
194 "config ip pgm interface info command output" (page 418)).
max-nak-rdata-int Specifies how long to wait for RDATA (in milliseconds) after
<integer> receiving a NCF. The default value is 10000 milliseconds.
max-nak-re-xmit-cnt Configures the maximum number of NAK retransmission
<integer> packets allowed per second.
The default value is 2 pps.
nak-eliminate-int Specifies the length of time (in milliseconds) during which a
<integer> network element (NE) eliminates duplicate NAKs. When this
interval expires, the NE suspends NAK elimination until the
first duplicate arrives. After this NAK is forwarded, the NE
once again eliminates duplicate NAKs for the specified interval.
This parameter must be less than max-nak-rdata-int. The
default value is 5000 milliseconds.
nak-re-xmit-int Specifies how long to wait for a NCF (in milliseconds) before
<integer> retransmitting the NAK. The default value is 1000 milliseconds.
state <enable|disable> Indicates the current state (enable or disable) of PGM on the
selected interface.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
418 Configuring PGM using the CLI

Figure 194 "config ip pgm interface info command output" (page 418) shows
sample output for the config ip pgm interface info command.

Figure 194
config ip pgm interface info command output

Showing PGM interface commands

Three types of show interface commands are available:
• Interface configurations
"Showing PGM interface configurations" (page 418)
• Interface errors
"Showing PGM interface errors" (page 419)
"Showing PGM interface nak errors" (page 420)
• Interface statistics
"Showing PGM interface statistics" (page 421)
"Showing PGM interface nak statistics" (page 422)
"Showing PGM interface parity statistics" (page 423)

Showing PGM interface configurations

To display information about the current PGM configuration on the selected
interface, use the following command:

show ip pgm interface config

Figure 195 "show ip pgm interface config command output" (page 419)
shows sample output for the show ip pgm interface config
command.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring PGM on an interface 419

Figure 195
show ip pgm interface config command output

Table 101 "show ip pgm interface config parameters" (page 419) describes
the fields for this command.

Table 101
show ip pgm interface config parameters
Field Description
CCT Displays the circuit number of the selected interface.
ENABLE Displays whether PGM is enabled or disabled on this interface.
STATE Indicates the current state (up or down) of PGM.
NAK_RE_XMIT Specifies how long to wait for an NCF (in milliseconds) before retransmitting
INTERVAL the NAK. The default is 1 000 milliseconds.
MAX_NAK_RE Displays the maximum number of NAK retransmission packets allowed per
XMIT_COUNT second.
NAK_RDATA Displays how long to wait for RDATA (in milliseconds) after receiving a NCF.
INTERVAL
NAK_ELIMINATE Displays the length of time (in milliseconds) during which a network element
INTERVAL (NE) eliminates duplicate NAKs. When this interval expires, the NE
suspends NAK elimination until the first duplicate arrives. After this NAK is
forwarded, the NE once again eliminates duplicate NAKs for the specified
interval. This parameter must be less than the NAK_RDATA INTERVAL.

Showing PGM interface errors

To display general information about errors that occurred on the selected
interface, use the following command:

show ip pgm interface error general

Figure 196 "show ip pgm interface error general command output" (page
420) shows sample output for the show ip pgm interface error
general command.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
420 Configuring PGM using the CLI

Figure 196
show ip pgm interface error general command output

Table 102 "show ip pgm interface error general parameters" (page 420)
describes fields for this command.

Table 102
show ip pgm interface error general parameters
Field Description
CCT Displays the circuit number of the selected interface.
IN_SPM PORT ERRORS Displays the number of SPMs discarded because they were
received on the wrong interface.
IN_RDATA PORT Displays the number of RDATA packets discarded because they
ERRORS were received on the wrong interface.
IN_RDATA NO_SESSION Displays the number of RDATA packets discarded because there
ERRORS was no active session.
IN_NCF PORT ERRORS Displays the number of NCFs discarded because they were received
on the wrong interface.
IN_NCF Displays the number of NCFs discarded because there was no
NO_SESSION ERRORS active session.

Showing PGM interface nak errors

To display information about NAK and NNAK errors that occurred on the
selected interface, use the following command:

show ip pgm interface error nak

Figure 197 "show ip pgm interface error nak command output" (page 421)
shows sample output for the show ip pgm interface error nak
command.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring PGM on an interface 421

Figure 197
show ip pgm interface error nak command output

Table 103 "show ip pgm interface error nak parameters" (page 421)
describes fields for this command.

Table 103
show ip pgm interface error nak parameters
Field Description
CCT Displays the circuit number of the selected interface.
IN_NAK Displays the number of NAKs discarded because they were received
PORT ERRORS on the wrong interface.
IN_NAK Displays the number of NAKs discarded because there was no
NO_SESSION ERRORS active session.
IN_NAK Displays the number of NAKs discarded because they were out of
SEQ ERRORS sequence.
IN_NNAK Displays the number of NNAKs discarded because they were
PORT ERRORS received on the wrong interface.
IN_NNAK Displays the number of NNAKs discarded because there was no
NO_SESSION ERRORS active session.
PARITY Displays the number of parity NAKs discarded because they were
NAK_TG ERRORS out of the parity TG window.

Showing PGM interface statistics

To display general statistics about the selected interface, use the following
command:

show ip pgm interface stat general

Figure 198 "show ip pgm interface stat general command output" (page
422) shows sample output for the show ip pgm interface stat
general command.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
422 Configuring PGM using the CLI

Figure 198
show ip pgm interface stat general command output

Table 104 "show ip pgm interface stat general parameters" (page 422)
describes fields for this command.

Table 104
show ip pgm interface stat general parameters
Field Description
CCT Displays the circuit number of the selected interface.
TOTAL REXMIT STATES Displays the total number of retransmit state entries for this interface.
TOTAL REXMIT TIMEOUT Displays the total number of timed out retransmit state entries for
this interface.
IN SPMS Displays the number of SPMs received on this interface.
OUT SPMS Displays the number of SPMs sent out from this interface.
IN RDATA Displays the number of RDATA packets received on this interface.
OUT RDATA Displays the number of RDATA packets sent out from this interface.
IN NCFS Displays the number of NCFs received on this interface.
OUT NCFS Displays the number of NCFs sent out from this interface.
IN REDIRECT NCFS Displays the number of redirected NCFs received on this interface.

Showing PGM interface nak statistics

To display information about NAK and NNAK statistics on the selected
interface, use the following command:

show ip pgm interface stat nak

Figure 199 "show ip pgm interface stat nak command output" (page 423)
shows sample output for the show ip pgm interface stat nak
command.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring PGM on an interface 423

Figure 199
show ip pgm interface stat nak command output

Table 105 "show ip pgm interface stat nak parameters" (page 423) describes
fields for this command.

Table 105
show ip pgm interface stat nak parameters
Field Description
CCT Displays the circuit number of the selected interface.
UNIQUE_NAKS Displays the number of unique NAKs received on this interface.
IN_NAKS Displays the number of NAKs received on this interface.
OUT_NAKS Displays the number of unique NAKs sent out from this interface.
IN_NNAKS Displays the number of NNAKs received on this interface.
OUT_NNAKS Displays the number of NNAKs sent out from this interface.

Showing PGM interface parity statistics

To display parity information about the selected interface, use the following
command:

show ip pgm interface stat parity

Figure 200 "show ip pgm interface stat parity command output" (page 424)
shows sample output for the show ip pgm interface stat parity
command.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
424 Configuring PGM using the CLI

Figure 200
show ip pgm interface stat parity command output

Table 106 "show ip pgm interface stat parity parameters" (page 424)
describes the fields for this command.

Table 106
show ip pgm interface stat parity parameters
Field Description
CCT Displays the circuit number of the selected interface.
IN SPMS Displays the number of SPMs received on this interface.
OUT SPMS Displays the number of SPMs sent out from this interface.
IN RDATA Displays the number of RDATA packets received on this interface.
OUT RDATA Displays the number of RDATA packets sent out from this interface.
IN NCFS Displays the number of NCFs received on this interface.
OUT NCFS Displays the number of NCFs sent out from this interface.
IN NAKS Displays the number of NAKs received on this interface.
OUT NAKS Displays the number of unique NAKs sent out from this interface.
UNIQUE NAKS Displays the number of unique NAKs received on this interface.

Configuring PGM on Ethernet ports

To configure PGM at the port level, use the following command:

config ethernet <ports> ip pgm

where
ports use the convention {slot/port[-slot/port][,...]}.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring PGM on a VLAN 425

This command includes the following parameters:

config ethernet <ports> ip pgm

followed by:
info Displays current pgm settings on the selected port (Figure 201
"config ethernet ip pgm info command output" (page 425)).
max-nak-rdata-int Specifies how long to wait for RDATA (in milliseconds) after
<integer> receiving a NCF. The default value is 10000 milliseconds.
max-nak-re-xmit-cnt Configures the maximum number of NAK retransmission
<integer> packets allowed per second.
The default value is 2.
nak-eliminate-int Specifies the length of time (in milliseconds) during which a
<integer> network element (NE) eliminates duplicate NAKs. When this
interval expires, the NE suspends NAK elimination until the
first duplicate arrives. After this NAK is forwarded, the NE
once again eliminates duplicate NAKs for the specified interval.
This parameter must be less than max-nak-rdata-int. The
default value is 5000 milliseconds.
nak-re-xmit-int Specifies how long to wait for a NCF (in milliseconds) before
<integer> retransmitting the NAK. The default value is 1000 milliseconds.
state <enable|disable> Indicates the current state (enable or disable) of PGM on the
selected port.

Figure 201 "config ethernet ip pgm info command output" (page 425) shows
sample output for the config ethernet ip pgm info command.

Figure 201
config ethernet ip pgm info command output

Configuring PGM on a VLAN

To configure PGM on a VLAN, use the following command:

config vlan <vid> ip pgm

where
vid is a VLAN ID from 1 to 4092.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
426 Configuring PGM using the CLI

This command includes the following parameters:

config vlan <vid> ip pgm

followed by:
info Displays current PGM settings on the selected VLAN (Figure 202
"config vlan ip pgm info command output" (page 426)).
max-nak-rdata-int Specifies how long to wait for RDATA (in milliseconds) after
<integer> receiving a NCF. The default value is 10 000 milliseconds.
max-nak-re-xmit-cnt Configures the maximum number of NAK retransmission packets
<integer> allowed per second. The default value is 2.
nak-eliminate-int Specifies the length of time (in milliseconds) during which a network
<integer> element (NE) eliminates duplicate NAKs. When this interval expires,
the NE suspends NAK elimination until the first duplicate arrives.
After this NAK is forwarded, the NE once again eliminates duplicate
NAKs for the specified interval. This parameter must be less than
max-nak-rdata-int. The default value is 5000 milliseconds.
nak-re-xmit-int Specifies how long to wait for a NCF (in milliseconds) before
<integer> retransmitting the NAK. The default value is 1000 milliseconds.
state <enable|disab Indicates the current state (enable or disable) of PGM on the
le> selected VLAN.

Figure 202 "config vlan ip pgm info command output" (page 426) shows
sample output for the config vlan ip pgm info command.

Figure 202
config vlan ip pgm info command output

Displaying all IP PGM show commands

The show ip pgm show-all command displays all relevant IP PGM
information.

The command uses the syntax:

show ip pgm show-all [file <value> ]

where
value is the filename to which the output is redirected.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Displaying all IP PGM show commands 427

Figure 203 "show ip pgm show-all command output" (page 427) shows
sample output for the show ip pgm show-all command.

Figure 203
show ip pgm show-all command output

For each of the show ip pgm xxxx commands listed in Figure 203 "show
ip pgm show-all command output" (page 427), see the appropriate section
for parameter explanations.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
428 Configuring PGM using the CLI

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 429

Viewing and editing multicast routes

using the CLI
With multicast route commands (mroute commands), you can configure and
view IP Multicast routing parameters on the Ethernet Routing Switch 8600.
For more information about multicast concepts and terminology, see "IP
Multicast concepts" (page 15).
This section includes the following topics:
• "Roadmap of multicast route commands" (page 429)
• "Displaying multicast routes" (page 431)
• "Showing a multicast routes next hop" (page 431)
• "Showing multicast route information" (page 432)
• "Configuring a multicast route on an interface" (page 434)
• "Showing multicast routes on an interface" (page 435)
• "Configuring multicast static source groups" (page 439)
• "Showing DVMRP troubleshooting information" (page 443)
• "Showing DVMRP troubleshooting information" (page 443)
• "Configuring IP Multicast software forwarding" (page 446)
• "Showing the software forwarding configuration" (page 447)
• "Configuring the resource usage counter for multicast streams" (page
448)
• "Showing the hardware resource usage output" (page 449)
• "Displaying all IP mroute show commands" (page 450)

Roadmap of multicast route commands

The following roadmap lists all the multicast route (mroute) commands and
their parameters. After using the following commands to configure the
Ethernet Routing Switch 8600, you can use the show commands to display
information for a particular feature.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
430 Viewing and editing multicast routes using the CLI

To facilitate troubleshooting, the Ethernet Routing Switch 8600 also

provides one command (show ip mroute show-all) that lists all the
show commands for IP mroutes and displays their configuration output.
"Displaying all IP mroute show commands" (page 450).

Use this list as a quick reference:

Command Parameter
config ip mroute info
config ip mroute interface <ipaddr> info
ttl <ttl>
config ip mroute static-source-gro info
up <GroupSubnet>
create <SourceSubnet> <SrcSubnetM
ask>
delete <SourceSubnet> <SrcSubnetM
ask>
config sys mcast-software-forwardi info
ng
disable
enable
show ip mroute interface
config ethernet <port> mroute-limit info
enable <true|false>
max-allowed-streams <integer>
max-allowed-streams-timer-check
<integer>
show ports info mroute-limit
show ip mroute next-hop
show ip mroute route
show ip mroute static-source-group
[<GroupAddress>]
show ip mroute-hw group-trace
show ip mroute-hw group-prune-state
show sys mcast-software-forwarding
config ip mroute resource-usage info
egress-Threshold <integer>
ingress-Threshold <integer>
send-Trap-And-Log <enable|disable>

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Showing a multicast routes next hop 431

Command Parameter
trap-Msg-Only <enable|disable>
log-Msg-Only <enable|disable>
show ip mroute-hw resource-usage
show ip mroute show-all [file
<value>]

Displaying multicast routes

To display information about the multicast routes configured on the switch,
use the following command:

config ip mroute
This command includes the following parameter:

config ip mroute
followed by:
info Displays information about the multicast route.

Showing a multicast routes next hop

To display information about the next hop for the multicast routes set up on
the switch, use the following command:

show ip mroute next-hop

Figure 204 "show ip mroute next-hop command output" (page 431) shows
sample output of the show ip mroute next-hop command.

Figure 204
show ip mroute next-hop command output

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
432 Viewing and editing multicast routes using the CLI

Table 107 "show ip mroute next-hop parameter" (page 432) shows the field
descriptions for this command.

Table 107
show ip mroute next-hop parameter
Field Description
INTERFACE Indicates the interface identity.
GROUP Indicates the IP multicast group for which this entry specifies a next hop on
an outgoing interface.
SOURCE Indicates the network address, which when combined with the corresponding
value of ipMRouteNextHopSourceMask identifies the sources for which this
entry specifies a next hop on an outgoing interface.
SRCMASK Indicates the network mask, which when combined with the corresponding
value of ipMRouteNextHopSource identifies the sources for which this entry
specifies a next hop on an outgoing interface.
ADDRESS Indicates the address of the next hop specific to this entry. For most interfaces,
this is identical to ipMRouteNextHopGroup. NBMA interfaces, however, may
have multiple next hop addresses on a single outgoing interface.
STATE Indicates whether the outgoing interface and next hop represented by this
entry is currently forwarding IP datagrams. The value forwarding indicates it is
currently being used; the value pruned indicates it is not.
EXPTIME Indicates the minimum amount of time remaining before this entry ages out.
The value 0 indicates that the entry is not subject to aging.
CLOSEHOP Indicates the minimum number of hops between this router and any member
of this IP multicast group reached through this next hop on this outgoing
interface. Any IP multicast datagrams for the group which have a TTL less
than this number of hops are forwarded to the next hop
PROTOCOL Indicates the routing mechanism through which this next-hop was learned.

Showing multicast route information

To display information about the multicast routes set up on the switch, use
the following command:

show ip mroute route

The following section shows sample output for the show ip mroute
route command. In this table, every stream has one (*,G) entry and x
(S,G) entries, depending on how many servers are forwarding traffic to the
same group. The 0.0.0.0 mask is always tied to a (*,G) entry. Every time a

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Showing multicast route information 433

new stream comes in, PIM creates two entries in the table; one is an (*,G)
entry which points towards the Rendezvous Point router, and the other is
an (S,G) entry which points towards the source.

ERS-8610:5# sho ip mroute route

======================================================================
===========
Mroute Route
======================================================================
===========
GROUP SOURCE SRCMASK UPSTREAM_NBR
IF EXPIR PROT
----------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------
224.2.128.119 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 104.0.0.207
V504 210 pimsm
224.2.128.119 155.120.50.165 255.255.255.0 104.0.0.207
V504 210 pimsm
224.2.128.119 155.120.51.165 255.255.255.0 155.120.51.204
V155 210 pimsm
224.2.128.119 155.120.51.166 255.255.255.0 155.120.51.204
V155 210 pimsm
224.2.128.119 155.120.51.166 255.255.255.0 155.120.51.204
V155 210 pimsm
224.2.148.113 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 104.0.0.208
V504 210 pimsm
224.2.148.113 155.120.50.165 255.255.255.0 104.0.0.208
V504 210 pimsm
224.2.157.11 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 104.0.0.208
V504 210 pimsm
224.2.157.11 155.120.50.165 255.255.255.0 104.0.0.207
V504 210 pimsm
224.2.157.11 155.120.51.165 255.255.255.0 155.120.51.204
V155 210 pimsm
224.2.157.11 155.120.51.166 255.255.255.0 155.120.51.204
V155 210 pimsm

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
434 Viewing and editing multicast routes using the CLI

Table 108 "show ip mroute route parameters" (page 434) shows the field
descriptions for this command.

Table 108
show ip mroute route parameters
Field Description
GROUP Indicates the IP multicast group for which this entry specifies a next hop
on an outgoing interface.
SOURCE Indicates the network address which when combined with the
corresponding value of ipMRouteNextHopSourceMask identifies the
sources for which this entry specifies a next hop on an outgoing
interface.
SRCMASK Indicates the network mask which when combined with the
corresponding value of ipMRouteNextHopSource identifies the sources
for which this entry specifies a next hop on an outgoing interface.
UPSTREAM_NBR Indicates the address of the upstream neighbor (for example, RPF
neighbor) from which IP datagrams from these sources to this multicast
address are received, or 0.0.0.0 if the upstream neighbor is unknown
(for example, in CBT).
IF Indicates the value of ifIndex for the interface on which IP datagrams
sent by these sources to this multicast address are received. A value
of 0 indicates that datagrams are not subject to an incoming interface
check, but may be accepted on multiple interfaces (for example, in
CBT).
EXPIR Indicates the minimum amount of time remaining before this entry ages
out. The value 0 indicates that the entry is not subject to aging.
PROT Indicates the outing mechanism through which this route was learned.

Configuring a multicast route on an interface

To configure multicast routing on a specific interface, use the following
command:

config ip mroute interface <ipaddr>

where
ipaddr indicates the IP address of the selected interface.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Showing multicast routes on an interface 435

This command includes the following parameters:

config ip mroute interface <ipaddr>

followed by:
info Displays information about the multicast route interface (Figure 205
"config ip mroute interface info command output" (page 435)).
ttl <ttl> Sets the default time-to-live (TTL) threshold for the multicast route
interface. The range (in seconds) is 1 to 255.

Figure 205 "config ip mroute interface info command output" (page 435)
shows sample output for the config ip mroute interface info
command.

Figure 205
config ip mroute interface info command output

Showing multicast routes on an interface

To display information about the multicast routes set up on the switch for
a specific interface, use the following command:

show ip mroute interface

Figure 206 "show ip mroute interface command output" (page 435) shows
sample output for the show ip mroute interface command.

Figure 206
show ip mroute interface command output

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
436 Viewing and editing multicast routes using the CLI

Table 109 "show ip mroute interface parameter" (page 436) shows the field
descriptions for this command.

Table 109
show ip mroute interface parameter
Field Description
INTERFACE Indicates the interface identity.
TTL Indicates the datagram TTL threshold for the interface. Any IP multicast
datagrams with a TTL less than this threshold are not forwarded out the
interface. The default value of 0 means all multicast packets are forwarded
out the interface.
PROTOCOL Indicates the routing protocol running on this interface.

Configuring multicast stream limits

To protect a CPU from multicast data packet bursts generated by malicious
applications, such as viruses that cause the CPU to reach 100 percent
utilization or that prevent the CPU from processing protocol packets or
management requests, you can limit the number of multicast streams. If
more than a certain number of multicast streams ingress to a CPU through
a port during a sampling interval, the port shuts down until the user or
administrator takes appropriate action.

config ethernet <port> mroute-limit

where
port is the port or range of ports in slot/port notation.
This command includes the following parameters:

config ethernet <port> mroute-limit

followed by:
info Displays the current configuration (Figure 207 "config
ethernet mroute-limit info command output" (page 437)).
enable <true|false> This command enables or disables the feature on the
specified port. By default it is disabled.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Showing multicast stream configuration 437

config ethernet <port> mroute-limit

followed by:
max-allowed-streams This command configures the maximum number of
<integer> streams that are allowed on the specified port. The port is
shut down if the number of streams exceeds this limit. The
value is any number between 1 and 32768. The default
value is 1984 streams.
max-allowed-streams-timer-c This command configures the sampling interval which is
heck <integer> used to check if the number of ingress multicast streams
to the CPU is under a configured limit or if the port needs
to be shut down. The range is between 1 and 3600. The
default value is 10 seconds.

The mroute stream limit can be enabled or disabled for the entire device or
for an individual ports at any time the switch is operating. If the mroute
stream limit is enabled for the system and for a specified port, then only the
periodic check is performed for that port.

The following message is displayed while shutting down the port due to
excessive multicast streams:
Shutdown port <port> due to excessive multicast streams <# of
streams ingressed>; Configured limit max streams <configured
limit> in <configured sampling interval> sec. Please disable
and re-enable the port.

Figure 207 "config ethernet mroute-limit info command output" (page 437)
shows sample output for the config ethernet mroute-limit info
command.

Figure 207
config ethernet mroute-limit info command output

Showing multicast stream configuration

The following command shows the mroute stream limit configuration:

show ports info mroute-limit

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
438 Viewing and editing multicast routes using the CLI

Figure 208 "show ports info mroute-limit command output" (page 438) shows
sample output for the show ports info mroute-limit command.

Figure 208
show ports info mroute-limit command output

Table 110 "show ports info mroute-limit parameter" (page 438) shows the
field descriptions for this command.

Table 110
show ports info mroute-limit parameter
Field Description
PORT Indicates the port number.
MROUTE STR Indicates the maximum number of multicast streams that are allowed to
LIMIT ingress to CPU through this port.
MROUTE STR Indicates the sampling period (in seconds) to check number of multicast
LIMIT TIMER streams that have ingressed the CPU through this port.
ENABLE Indicates the status of the mroute stream limit on the port.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring multicast static source groups 439

Configuring multicast static source groups

With static source groups, you can configure static source-group entries in
the DVMRP or PIM multicast routing table. Neither DVMRP nor PIM can
prune these entries from the distribution tree. In other words, even if there
are no receivers in the group, the multicast stream for a static source-group
entry stays active.

Configuration considerations
The Ethernet Routing Switch 8600 supports static source groups using
one of several multicast protocols: DVMRP, PIM-SM (sparse mode), and
PIM-SSM (source specific multicast). For conceptual information about
DVMRP, PIM and static source groups, see "IP Multicast concepts" (page
15)."
Before you can configure a static source group, you must globally enable
one of the following protocols:
• DVMRP—To globally enable DVMRP, see "Configuring DVMRP globally"
(page 290).
• PIM sparse mode (SM)—To globally enable PIM-SM, see "Configuring
PIM-SM globally" (page 351).
• PIM source specific multicast mode (SSM)—To globally enable
PIM-SSM, see "Configuring Source Specific Multicast (SSM)" (page
384).

After configuring static source groups, keep the following points in mind:
• The maximum number of static source groups must not exceed 1024.
• Disabling DVMRP or PIM causes the switch to deactivate all of the
static source groups. When you reenable DVMRP or PIM, the switch
reactivates the static source groups.
• Using DVMRP or PIM-SM
In DVMRP and PIM-SM configurations, the static source-group feature
works for both specific source addresses and subnet addresses. This
is achieved by using the create <SourceSubnet> <SubnetMask>
parameter ("Viewing and editing static source groups" (page 440)).
When the Network Mask is configured as 255.255.255.255, the full
source address is used to match the (S,G) that is the specific source
case. When the network mask field is configured as a subnet mask
for the source, only the source subnet is used to match (S,G)s. The
first entry in Figure 209 "show ip mroute static-source-group command
output" (page 443) shows a subnet configuration, and the second entry
shows a source specific configuration.
• Using PIM-SSM

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
440 Viewing and editing multicast routes using the CLI

In PIM-SSM configurations, static source groups have the following

limitations:
— Subnets: SSM static source groups work only with specific IP
addresses. This means that static source groups cannot work
with source subnets, so the mask must be a full 32-bit mask,
255.255.255.255.
— SSM Channels: Static source groups cannot conflict with SSM
channels and vice versa. When you configure a static source group
or a SSM channel, the switch performs a consistency check to
make sure there are no conflicts. You cannot map one group (G) to
different sources for both a static source group and a SSM channel.
For SSM channel information, see "Configuring SSM dynamic
learning and range group" (page 250).
If a group is already mapped to a source and you try to map it to a
different source, the switch detects the conflict and displays an error
message. For example, if G1 is already defined in the SSM channel
table as (S1,G1), you cannot configure G1 as static source group
(S2,G1). However, you can configure the same entry (S1,G1) in both
the SSM channel table and as a static source group. As long as there
is no conflict between the two tables, the configuration is allowed.

Viewing and editing static source groups

To configure a static source-group entry in the DVMRP or PIM multicast
routing table, use the following command:
config ip mroute static-source-group <GroupSubnet>
where
GroupSubnet is the IP address of the multicast group.
To avoid conflicts between the static source group table and the SSM
channel table, see "Configuration considerations" (page 439) before
creating a static source group.
This command includes the following parameters:

config ip mroute static-source-group <GroupSubnet>

followed by:
info Displays information about the source-group entry.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring multicast static source groups 441

config ip mroute static-source-group <GroupSubnet>

followed by:
create <SourceSubnet> Creates a new static multicast source-group entry. You
<SrcSubnetMask> cannot create duplicate groups.
• SourceSubnet is the multicast source address for
this static source-group entry.
How you configure the source address depends on
the protocol you are using and in what mode. For
more information, see "Configuration considerations"
(page 439).
• SrcSubnetMask is the subnet mask of the source for
this static source-group entry.
delete <SourceSubnet> Deletes the source-group entry from the static
<SrcSubnetMask> source-group table.
• SourceSubnet is the multicast source address for
this static source-group entry.
• SrcSubnetMask is the subnet mask of the source for
this static source-group entry.

Configuration example: static source groups

This configuration example uses the commands described previously to
perform the following tasks:
• Create a static source group for two multicast groups: 224.32.2.1 and
226.50.2.2.
The static mroute for group 224.32.2.1 is for a source subnet
10.10.10.0/24.
The static mroute for group 226.50.2.2 is for host 20.20.20.100/32.
• Use the info command to show a summary of the results.
ERS-8606:5# config ip mroute static-source-group
224.32.2.1
ERS-8606:5/config/ip/mroute/static-source-
group/224.32.2.1# create 10.10.10.0 255.255.255.0
ERS-8606:5/config/ip/mroute/static-source-
group/224.32.2.1# info
Sub-Context:
Current Context:
create :
Source
Address - 10.10.10.0
Source Subnet Mask
- 255.255.255.0

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
442 Viewing and editing multicast routes using the CLI

delete : N/A
ERS-8606:5/config/ip/mroute/static-source-group/224.32.2
.1#

ERS-8606:5/config/ip/mroute# static-source-group
226.50.2.2
ERS-8606:5/config/ip/mroute/static-source-
group/226.50.2.2# create 20.20.20.100 255.255.255.255
ERS-8606:5/config/ip/mroute/static-source-
group/226.50.2.2# info
Sub-Context:
Current Context:
create :
Source Address
- 20.20.20.100
Source Subnet Mask
- 255.255.255.255
delete : N/A
ERS-8606:5/config/ip/mroute/static-source-group/226.50.2
.2#

Showing multicast static source groups

To display information about the static source groups on the current
interface, use the following command:

show ip mroute static-source-group [ <GroupAddress> ]

where
GroupAddress is the group IP address.
You can see all the valid entries that were created. If the entry is created
with a "x" bit mask, it shows as a "x" bit in the output.

Figure 209 "show ip mroute static-source-group command output" (page

443) shows sample output for both configurations of the show ip mroute
static-source-group command.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Showing DVMRP troubleshooting information 443

Figure 209
show ip mroute static-source-group command output

Table 111 "show ip mroute static-source-group parameter" (page 443)

shows the field descriptions for this command.

Table 111
show ip mroute static-source-group parameter
Field Description
Group Address Indicates the IP multicast group address.
Source Address Indicates the network address.
Subnet Mask Indicates the network mask.

Showing DVMRP troubleshooting information

The mroute-hw command provides an exact hardware view of existing IP
multicast records and information on sender and receiver ports for every
stream.

To display DVMRP troubleshooting information, use the following

commands:

show ip mroute-hw group-trace

and

show ip mroute-hw group-prune-state

Figure 210 "show ip mroute-hw group-trace grp command output" (page
444) shows sample output for the group-trace grp command.
Figure 211 "show ip mroute-hw group-trace src grp command output" (page
445) shows sample output for the group-trace src command.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
444 Viewing and editing multicast routes using the CLI

Figure 212 "show ip mroute-hw group-prune-state grp command output"

(page 445) shows sample output for the group-prune-state grp command.

show ip mroute-hw
followed by:
group-trace [src <value> ] [grp Use the show ip mroute-hw group-trace
<value> ] command as follows:
• When you use it by itself, the output includes all
the group entries found in the hardware records.
• When you follow the command with grp
<value>, the output includes all the entries
corresponding to the specified Group Address
(Figure 210 "show ip mroute-hw group-trace grp
command output" (page 444)).
• When you follow the command with src
<value> and grp <value>, the output includes
only the specified Source-Group pair (Figure
211 "show ip mroute-hw group-trace src grp
command output" (page 445)).
group-prune-state [grp <value> ] Use the show ip mroute-hw group-prune-st
ate command as follows:
• When you use it by itself, the output includes all
the group entries found in the hardware records.
• When you follow the command with grp
<value>, the output includes all the entries
corresponding to the specified Group
Address (Figure 212 "show ip mroute-hw
group-prune-state grp command output" (page
445)).

Figure 210
show ip mroute-hw group-trace grp command output

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Showing DVMRP troubleshooting information 445

Figure 211
show ip mroute-hw group-trace src grp command output

Figure 212
show ip mroute-hw group-prune-state grp command output

Table 112 "show ip mroute-hw group-trace and group-prune-state output

fields" (page 445) describes the output fields that appear in Figure 210
"show ip mroute-hw group-trace grp command output" (page 444), Figure
211 "show ip mroute-hw group-trace src grp command output" (page 445),
and Figure 212 "show ip mroute-hw group-prune-state grp command
output" (page 445).

Table 112
show ip mroute-hw group-trace and group-prune-state output fields
Field Description
Group-Trace
GROUP ADDRESS The IP Multicast group address for the multicast stream.
SOURCE ADDRESS The IP addresses of the sources on this particular subnet sending traffic
to the multicast group for the selected entry in the Mroute-HW table.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
446 Viewing and editing multicast routes using the CLI

Field Description
SENDING SUBNET
The network address of the source subnet that has sources sending
IP Multicast traffic to the group address.

ATTENTION
There can be several sources sending to that group. Use the Source
tab to view these sources.

TOTAL SESSIONS One session includes a combination of group address, subnet, and
ingress VLAN information. The total number of sessions indicates how
many sources in the same subnet are sending traffic for the given group
address and ingress VLAN.
IN VLAN The ingress VLAN ID where the traffic emanates for the multicast stream.
IN PORT The corresponding ingress port in the multicast stream selected from
the Mroute-HW table.
OUT PORT All the egress VLANs for the particular multicast stream selected from
the Mroute-HW table.
OUT PORT The corresponding ports for the particular multicast stream selected from
the Mroute-HW table.
Group Prune State
GROUP ADDRESS The IP Multicast group address for the multicast stream.
SOURCE ADDRESS The IP addresses of the sources on this particular subnet sending traffic
to the multicast group for the selected entry in the Mroute-HW table.
PRUNED True indicates that the multicast stream is pruned back. False indicates
it is not.
TIME LEFT FOR The time left (in seconds) for the neighboring downstream router to send
GRAFT the graft message.
PRUNE RECEIVED The IP address of the downstream neighbor from which the prune has
FROM been received.

Configuring IP Multicast software forwarding

The IP Multicast software forwarding feature enables the CPU to initially
forward IP Multicast data until a hardware record is created. The CPU
forwards the initial packets of a stream it receives and, at the same time,
creates a corresponding hardware record for any subsequent packets. The
advantage of this feature is that it avoids any initial data loss experienced by
multicast applications, and is most suited for low bandwidth.

The IP Multicast software forwarding is a global system configuration feature

that applies to all IP Multicast enabled interfaces and protocols. When you
enable IP Multicast software forwarding, the hardware is still responsible for

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Showing the software forwarding configuration 447

forwarding IP Multicast traffic. The software only forwards initial data traffic.
Therefore, the intention is not to replace hardware forwarding with software
forwarding. By default, the feature is disabled.

ATTENTION
To avoid overloading the CPU, Nortel recommends that you do not use the IP
Multicast software forwarding feature for video multicast applications.

To configure IP Multicast software forwarding, use the following command:

config sys mcast-software-forwarding

This command includes the following parameters:

config sys mcast-software-forwarding

followed by:
info Displays the current configuration information (Figure 213 "config sys
mcast-software-forwarding info command output" (page 447)).
disable Disables IP Multicast software forwarding. This is the default.
enable Enables IP Multicast software forwarding. The default is disable.

Figure 213 "config sys mcast-software-forwarding info command

output" (page 447) shows sample output for the config sys
mcast-software-forwarding info command.

Figure 213
config sys mcast-software-forwarding info command output

Showing the software forwarding configuration

To display the current IP Multicast software forwarding configuration, use
the following command:

show sys mcast-software-forwarding

Figure 214 "show sys mcast-software-forwarding command
output" (page 448) shows sample output for the show sys
mcast-software-forwarding command.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
448 Viewing and editing multicast routes using the CLI

Figure 214
show sys mcast-software-forwarding command output

Configuring the resource usage counter for multicast streams

The Ethernet Routing Switch 8600 can query the number of ingress and
egress IP Multicast streams traversing your switch. After setting the
thresholds for ingress and egress records, if the record-usage goes beyond
the threshold, you are notified by way of a trap on the console, logged
message, or both.
If you do not set the thresholds, the CLI displays only the ingress and
egress records that are currently in use. To see these records, enter one
of the following commands:
config ip mroute resource-usage info
show ip mroute-hw resource-usage
To configure the record usage counter and notification method, use the
following command:
config ip mroute resource-usage
This command includes the following parameters:

config ip mroute resource-usage

followed by:
info Displays the current configuration for the record
usage counter.
egress-Threshold <integer> Sets the egress record threshold (S,G).
A notification message is sent if this value is
exceeded.
• integer is a value between 0 and 32767.
ingress-Threshold <integer> Sets the ingress record threshold (peps).
A notification message is sent if this value is
exceeded.
• integer is a value between 0 and 32767.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Showing the hardware resource usage output 449

config ip mroute resource-usage

followed by:
send-Trap-And-Log <enable|disab
Sets the notification method for sending both
le>
a trap message and a log message when the
threshold level is exceeded.

ATTENTION
You can only set one notification type.

trap-Msg-Only <enable|disable> Sets the notification method for sending only a trap
message when the threshold level is exceeded.

log-Msg-Only <enable|disable> Sets the notification method for sending only a log
message when the threshold level is exceeded.

Configuration example: mroute resource usage

This configuration example uses the commands described above to perform
the following tasks:
• Set the egress threshold to 200.
• Set the ingress threshold to 100.
• Enable the log message notification method.
• Use the info command to show a summary of the results.

ERS_8606:5# config ip mroute resource-usage

egress-Threshold 200
ERS_8606:5/config/ip/mroute/resource-usage#
ingress-Threshold 100
ERS_8606:5/config/ip/mroute/resource-usage# log-Msg-Only
enable
ERS_8606:5/config/ip/mroute/resource-usage# info
Sub-Context:
Current Context:
Egress Records InUse : 0
Ingress Records InUse : 0
Egress Threshold : 200
Ingress Threshold : 100
Log Msg Only : true
Send Trap Only : false
Send Trap And Log Msg : false
ERS_8606:5/config/ip/mroute/resource-usage#

Showing the hardware resource usage output

To display the hardware resource usage output, enter the CLI command:

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
450 Viewing and editing multicast routes using the CLI

show ip mroute-hw resource-usage

Figure 215 "show ip mroute-hw resource-usage command output"
(page 450) displays sample output for the show ip mroute-hw
resource-usage command:

Figure 215
show ip mroute-hw resource-usage command output

Table 113 "show ip mroute-hw resource-usage parameter" (page 450)

shows the field descriptions for this command.

Table 113
show ip mroute-hw resource-usage parameter
Field Description
EGRESS REC IN-USE Indicates the number of egress records (peps) traversing the switch
that are in use.
INGRESS REC IN-USE Indicates the number of source and group records traversing the
switch that are in use.
EGRESS THRESHOLD Indicates the egress records threshold.
INGRESS THRESHOLD Indicates the source and group records threshold.
LOG MSG ONLY Indicates the status of logging messages only.
SEND TRAP ONLY Indicates the status of sending traps only.
SEND TRAP AND LOG Indicates the status of sending traps and log messages.

Displaying all IP mroute show commands

The show ip mroute show-all command displays all relevant IP
mroute information.

The command uses the syntax:

show ip mroute show-all [file <value> ]

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Displaying all IP mroute show commands 451

where
value is the filename to which the output is redirected.
Figure 216 "show ip mroute show-all command output" (page 451) shows
sample output for the show ip mroute show-all command.

Figure 216
show ip mroute show-all command output

Table 114 "show ip mroute show-all parameters" (page 451) shows the
field descriptions for this command.

Table 114
show ip mroute show-all parameters
Field Description
Mroute Interface
INTERFACE Indicates the interface identity.
TTL Indicates the datagram time-to-live (TTL) threshold for the interface. Any IP
multicast datagrams with a TTL less than this threshold are not forwarded
out of the interface. The default value of 0 means all multicast packets
are forwarded out of the interface.
PROTOCOL Indicates the routing protocol running on this interface.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
452 Viewing and editing multicast routes using the CLI

Field Description
Mroute Next Hop
INTERFACE Indicates the interface identity.
GROUP Indicates the IP multicast group for which this entry specifies a next hop on
an outgoing interface.
SOURCE Indicates the network address, which when combined with the
corresponding value of ipMRouteNextHopSourceMask,identifies the
sources for a next hop on an outgoing interface.
SRCMASK Indicates the network mask, which when combined with the corresponding
value of ipMRouteNextHopSource identifies the sources for a next hop on
an outgoing interface.
ADDRESS Indicates the address of the next hop specific to this entry. For most
interfaces, this is identical to ipMRouteNextHopGroup. NBMA interfaces,
however, may have multiple next hop addresses out of a single outgoing
interface.
STATE Indicates whether the outgoing interface and next hop represented by this
entry is currently forwarding IP datagrams. The value forwarding indicates it
is currently being used; the value pruned indicates it is not.
EXPTIME Indicates the minimum amount of time remaining (in seconds) before this
entry ages out. The value 0 indicates that the entry is not subject to aging.
CLOSEHOP Indicates the minimum number of hops between this router and any member
of this IP multicast group. Any IP multicast datagrams for the group which
have a TTL less than this number of hops are forwarded to this next hop
PROTOCOL Indicates the routing mechanism through which this next hop was learned.
Mroute Route
GROUP Indicates the IP multicast group for which this entry specifies a next hop on
an outgoing interface.
SOURCE Indicates the network address which when combined with the corresponding
value of ipMRouteNextHopSourceMask identifies the sources for which this
entry specifies a next hop on an outgoing interface.
SRCMASK Indicates the network mask which when combined with the corresponding
value of ipMRouteNextHopSource identifies the sources for which this entry
specifies a next hop on an outgoing interface.
UPSTREAM_NBR Indicates the address of the upstream neighbor (for example, RPF neighbor)
from which IP datagrams from these sources to this multicast address are
received, or 0.0.0.0 if the upstream neighbor is unknown (for example,
in CBT).
IF Indicates the value of ifIndex for the interface on which IP datagrams sent
by these sources to this multicast address are received. A value of 0
indicates that datagrams are not subject to an incoming interface check, but
may be accepted on multiple interfaces (for example, in CBT).

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Displaying all IP mroute show commands 453

Field Description
EXPIR Indicates the minimum amount of time remaining before this entry ages out.
The value 0 indicates that the entry is not subject to aging.
PROT Indicates the outing mechanism through which this route was learned.
IP Multicast Static Source Group Table
Group Address Indicates the IP multicast group address.
Source Address Indicates the network address.
Subnet Mask Indicates the network mask.
Group Prune State
GROUP ADDRESS The IP Multicast group address for the multicast stream.
SOURCE The IP addresses of the sources on this particular subnet sending traffic to
ADDRESS the multicast group for the selected entry in the Mroute-HW table.
PRUNED True indicates that the multicast stream is pruned back. False indicates
it is not.
TIME LEFT FOR The time left (in seconds) for the neighboring downstream router to send
GRAFT the graft message.
PRUNE RECEIVE The IP address of the downstream neighbor from which the prune has
D FROM been received.
Group_Trace
GROUP ADDRESS The IP Multicast group address for the multicast stream.
SOURCE The IP addresses of the sources on this particular subnet sending traffic to
ADDRESS the multicast group for the selected entry in the Mroute-HW table.
SENDING
The network address of the source subnet that has sources sending IP
SUBNET Multicast traffic to the group address.

ATTENTION
There can be several sources sending to that group. Use the Source
tab to view these sources.

TOTAL SESSIONS One session includes a combination of group address, subnet, and ingress
VLAN information. The total number of sessions indicates how many
sources in the same subnet are sending traffic for the given group address
and ingress VLAN.
IN VLAN The ingress VLAN ID where the traffic emanates for the multicast stream.
IN PORT The corresponding ingress port in the multicast stream selected from the
Mroute-HW table.
OUT PORT All the egress VLANs for the particular multicast stream selected from the
Mroute-HW table.
OUT PORT The corresponding ports for the particular multicast stream selected from
the Mroute-HW table.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
454 Viewing and editing multicast routes using the CLI

Field Description
Multicast Hardware Resource Usage
EGRESS REC Indicates the number of egress records (peps) traversing the switch that
IN-USE are in use.
INGRESS REC Indicates the number of source and group records traversing the switch
IN-USE that are in use.
EGRESS Indicates the egress records threshold.
THRESHOLD
INGRESS Indicates the source and group records threshold.
THRESHOLD
LOG MSG ONLY Indicates the status of logging messages only.
SEND TRAP ONLY Indicates the status of sending traps only.
SEND TRAP AND Indicates the status of sending traps and log messages.
LOG

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 455

Configuring multicast flow distribution

over MLT using the CLI
Multicast flow distribution over MultiLink Trunking (MLT) provides a
mechanism for distributing multicast streams over an multilink trunk. You
can distribute the load on different ports of the multilink trunk and aim
(whenever possible) to achieve an even distribution of the streams.
To configure multicast flow distribution over MLT, you must enable it globally,
and per multilink trunk. For more information about MLT, see Configuring
VLANs, Spanning Tree, and Link Aggregation (NN46205-506).
This section includes the following topics:
• "Roadmap of multicast MLT commands" (page 455)
• "Configuring multicast flow distribution globally" (page 456)
• "Configuring multicast flow distribution per multilink trunk" (page 457)
• "Showing the multicast MLT distribution show command" (page 457)

Roadmap of multicast MLT commands

The following roadmap lists all the multicast MLT commands and their
parameters. Use this list as a quick reference.

Command Parameter
config sys mcast-mlt-distribution info
disable
enable
grp-mask <grp-mask>
redistribution <enable|disable>
src-mask <src-mask>
config mlt <mltid> mcast-distribu enable
tion
disable

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
456 Configuring multicast flow distribution over MLT using the CLI

Command Parameter
show sys mcast-mlt-distribution
show mlt info

Configuring multicast flow distribution globally

To configure multicast flow distribution over MLT globally, use the following
command.
config sys mcast-mlt-distribution
This command includes the following parameters:

config sys mcast-mlt-distribution

followed by:
info Displays the current configuration information.
disable Disables multicast MLT distribution. This is the default.
enable Enables multicast MLT distribution globally.
grp-mask <grp-mask> Specifies a group mask to use when distributing multicast traffic over
a multilink trunk. The default is 255.255.255.255.
redistribution Enables or disables the multicast MLT redistribution feature. The
<enable|disable> default is disabled.
src-mask <src-mask>
Specifies a source mask to use when distributing multicast traffic
over a multilink trunk. The default is 255.255.255.255.

ATTENTION
Ensure that the mask values for grp-mask and src-mask are
contiguous.

Configuration example: multicast MLT distribution

This configuration example uses the commands described previously to
perform the following tasks:
• Enable multicast flow distribution over MLT globally
• Set the mask for the group so that it takes into account the last byte
of the group address
• Set the mask for the source so that it takes into account the last two
bytes of the source IP address
• Enable redistribution to allow streams to be redistributed in the event
of changes in the multilink trunk

After configuring the parameters, use the info command to show a

summary of the results.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring multicast flow distribution per multilink trunk 457

ERS-8606:5# config sys mcast-mlt-distribution disable

ERS-8606:5# config sys mcast-mlt-distribution grp-mask
0.0.0.255
ERS-8606:5# config sys mcast-mlt-distribution src-mask
0.0.255.255
ERS-8606:5# config sys mcast-mlt-distribution
redistribution enable
ERS-8606:5/config/sys/mcast-mlt-distribution#
redistribution enable
IpmMltMcastDistributionGrpConsistencyCheck: Enable
multicast redistribution over MLT may disrupt traffic
for existing streams on the MLT during redistribution
ERS-8606:5/config/sys/mcast-mlt-distribution# enable
ERS-8606:5/config/sys/mcast-mlt-distribution# info
Sub-Context:
Current Context:
enable : enabled
grpmask : 0.0.0.255
srcmask : 0.0.255.255
redistribution : enabled

Configuring multicast flow distribution per multilink trunk

To enable multicast flow distribution per multilink trunk, use the following
command:

config mlt <mltid> mcast-distribution

where
mltid is the MultiLink Trunking ID, which has a range of 1 to 32.
This command includes the following parameters:

config mlt <mltid> mcast-distribution

followed by:
enable Enables multicast MLT distribution on the specified multilink trunk.
disable Disables multicast MLT distribution on the specified multilink trunk. This is
the default.

Showing the multicast MLT distribution show command

To display the current multicast over MLT configuration, use the following
command:

show sys mcast-mlt-distribution

Figure 217 "show sys mcast-mlt-distribution command output" (page 458)
shows sample output for the show sys mcast-mlt-distribution
command.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
458 Configuring multicast flow distribution over MLT using the CLI

Figure 217
show sys mcast-mlt-distribution command output

Use the following command to display whether multicast flow distribution is

enabled per multilink trunk.

show mlt info

Figure 218 "show mlt info command output" (page 458) shows sample
output for the show mlt info command.

Figure 218
show mlt info command output

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring multicast flow distribution per multilink trunk 459

Table 115 "show mlt info parameter" (page 459) shows the field descriptions
for this command.

Table 115
show mlt info parameter
Field Description
MLTID Indicates the multilink trunk ID number.
IFINDEX Indicates the interface index number.
NAME Indicates the name of this multilink trunk.
PORT TYPE Indicates the type of multilink trunk port: access or trunk.
SVLAN TYPE Indicates the type of multilink trunk port.
MLT ADMIN Indicates the status of MLT.
MLT CURRENT Indicates the operational status of MLT.
PORT MEMBERS Indicates the set of ports that are members of this multilink trunk.
VLAN IDS Indicates the number of VLANS on the multilink trunk.
MULTICAST Indicates the status of multicast distribution per multilink trunk.
DISTRIBUTION
NT-STG Indicates whether this STG is operating in Nortel mode or in Cisco mode.
• true—Nortel Mode
• false—Cisco Mode.
DESIGNATED Indicates the designated port for the multilink trunk.
PORTS
LACP ADMIN Indicates the administrative status of link aggregation on the multilink
trunk.
LACP OPER Indicates the operational status of link aggregation on the multilink trunk.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
460 Configuring multicast flow distribution over MLT using the CLI

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 461

Configuring multicast MAC filtering

using the CLI
With multicast MAC filtering, you can create a smaller flooding domain
inside a VLAN. For a particular VLAN, you can specify a multicast MAC
address and a subset of ports. When clients send data to that designated
MAC address, only that subset of ports receive the traffic.
For more information about multicast MAC filtering, see "IP Multicast
concepts" (page 15).
This section includes the following topics:
• "Roadmap of multicast MAC filtering commands" (page 461)
• "Configuring Layer 2 multicast MAC filtering" (page 462)
• "Configuring Layer 3 multicast MAC filtering" (page 464)
• "Showing the Layer 2 multicast MAC filters" (page 465)
• "Showing the Layer 3 multicast MAC ARP data" (page 466)
• "Showing VLAN port data" (page 466)
• "Showing the multicast VLAN information" (page 468)

Roadmap of multicast MAC filtering commands

The following roadmap lists all the multicast MAC filtering commands and
their parameters. Use this list as a quick reference.

Command Parameter
config vlan <vid> static-mcastmac info
add mac <value> [port <value>] [mlt
<value>]
add-mlt <mid> mac <value>
add-ports <ports> mac <value>
delete mac <value>
delete-mlt <mid> mac <value>

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
462 Configuring multicast MAC filtering using the CLI

Command Parameter
delete-ports <ports> mac <value>
config ip arp static-mcastmac info
add mac <value> ip <value> vlan
<value> [port <value>] [mlt
<value>]
delete <ipaddr>

show vlan info static-mcastmac

[<vid>]
show ip arp static-mcastmac
show vlan info ports [<vid>]
show vlan info all [<vid>] [port
<value>] [by <value>]

Configuring Layer 2 multicast MAC filtering

To configure Layer 2 multicast MAC filtering, use the following command:
config vlan <vid> static-mcastmac
where
vid is a VLAN from 1 to 4092.
The static-mcastmac parameter does not accept MAC addresses
beginning with 01:00:5e (01:00:5e:00:00:00 to 01:00:5e:ff:ff:ff inclusive).
If you attempt to use this type of address, the following error message is
displayed: Error: Invalid MAC address .
This command includes the following parameters:

config vlan <vid> static-mcastmac

followed by:
info Displays current settings.
add mac <value> [port <value> ] Adds VLAN static multicast MAC entries, where:
[mlt <value> ]
• mac <value> is the MAC address.1
• port <value> is the port that receives the
multicast flooding.
• mlt <value> is the MID.
add-mlt <mid> mac <value> Adds MLT to VLAN static multicast MAC entries.
• mid is the multilink trunking ID from 1 to 256.
• value is the MAC address.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring Layer 2 multicast MAC filtering 463

config vlan <vid> static-mcastmac

followed by:
add-ports <ports> mac <value> Adds ports to VLAN static multicast MAC entries.
• ports is a port or a range of ports in slot/port
format.
• value is the MAC address.
delete mac <value> Deletes VLAN static multicast MAC entries.
• value is the MAC address.
delete-mlt <mid> mac <value> Deletes MLT-to-VLAN static multicast MAC entries.
• mid is the multilink trunking ID from 1 to 256.
• mac <value> is the MAC address.
delete-ports <ports> mac <value> Deletes ports from VLAN static multicast MAC
entries.
• ports is a port or a range of ports in slot/port
format.
• value is the MAC address.

Configuration example:
This configuration example uses the commands described previously to
perform the following tasks:
• Add a multicast MAC address 01:02:03:04:05:06 as a static MAC in
VLAN 2.
• Add ports and a multilink trunk group so that traffic destined for the MAC
address is forwarded to ports 4/1 through 4/4 and MLT 1, instead of
being flooded to all VLAN 2 ports.

After configuring the parameters, use the info command to show a

summary of the results.

ERS-8606:5# config vlan 3 static-mcastmac add mac

01:02:03:04:05:06 port 4/1-4/4 mlt 1
ERS-8606:5# config vlan 3 static-mcastmac info
Sub-Context:
Current Context:
add:
macaddress - : 01:02:03:04:05:06
portmember - 4/1-4/4
mltgroups - 1
remove: N/A

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
464 Configuring multicast MAC filtering using the CLI

Configuring Layer 3 multicast MAC filtering

To configure Layer 3 multicast MAC filtering, use the following command:
config ip arp static-mcastmac
The static-mcastmac parameter does not accept MAC addresses
beginning with 01:00:5e (01:00:5e:00:00:00 to 01:00:5e:ff:ff:ff inclusive).
If you attempt to use this type of address, the following error message is
displayed: Error: Invalid MAC address.
This command includes the following parameters:

config ip arp static-mcastmac

followed by:
info Displays current settings.
add mac <value> ip Adds static multicast MAC entries, where:
<value> vlan <value>
• mac <value> is the MAC address.1
[port <value> ] [mlt
<value> ] • ip <value> is the IP address.
• vlan <value> is the VLAN ID number.
• port <value> is the port that receives the multicast
flooding.
• mlt <value> is the MID.
delete <ipaddr> Deletes static multicast MAC entries.
• ipaddr is the IP address.

Configuration example: ARP static multicast MAC address

This configuration example uses the commands described previously to
perform the following tasks:
• Add a multicast MAC address 01:01:01:01:01:02 as a static ARP entry
in VLAN 2.
• Add ports and a multilink trunk group so that traffic destined for the
MAC address is forwarded to ports 4/14 and 4/43, and MLT 1, instead of
being flooded to all VLAN 2 ports.

After configuring the parameters, use the info command to show a

summary of the results.

ERS-8606:5# config ip arp static-mcastmac add mac

01:01:01:01:01:02 ip 2.2.2.100 vlan 2 port 4/14-4/43
mlt 1
ERS-8606:5# config ip arp static-mcastmac info
============================================================
Ip Static Multicast MAC Arp

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring Layer 3 multicast MAC filtering 465

============================================================
IP_ADDRESS MAC_ADDRESS VLAN PORT MLT ID
2.2.2.100 01:01:01:01:01:02 2 4/14-4/431
Total 1
8610:5#

Showing the Layer 2 multicast MAC filters

To display the Layer 2 multicast MAC filters, use the following command:

show vlan info static-mcastmac [ <vid> ]

where:
vid is the VLAN ID from 1 to 4092. Entering a vid is optional. When you
enter a vid, the command displays information for the specified VLAN.
Without the vid, the command displays information for all the configured
VLANs.

Figure 219 "show vlan info static-mcastmac command output" (page 465)
shows sample output of the show vlan info static-mcastmac
command.

Figure 219
show vlan info static-mcastmac command output

Table 116 "show vlan info static-mcastmac parameter" (page 465) shows
the field descriptions for this command.

Table 116
show vlan info static-mcastmac parameter
Field Description
VLAN ID Indicates the VLAN ID.
MAC ADDRESS Indicates the MAC address.
PORT LIST Indicates the list of ports.
MLT GROUPS Indicates the multilink trunk groups.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
466 Configuring multicast MAC filtering using the CLI

Showing the Layer 3 multicast MAC ARP data

To display Layer 3 multicast MAC ARP data, use the following command:

show ip arp static-mcastmac

Figure 220 "show ip arp static-mcastmac command output" (page 466)
shows sample output of the show ip arp static-mcastmac command.

Figure 220
show ip arp static-mcastmac command output

Table 117 "show ip arp static-mcastmac parameter" (page 466) shows the
field descriptions for this command.

Table 117
show ip arp static-mcastmac parameter
Field Description
IP_ADDRESS Indicates the multicast IP address
MAC ADDRESS Indicates the multicast MAC address.
VLAN Indicates the VLAN ID.
PORT LIST Indicates the list of ports.
MLT ID Indicates the multilink trunk ID.

Showing VLAN port data

To display VLAN port data, use the following command:

show vlan info ports [<vid>]

where:
vid is the VLAN ID from 1 to 4092. Entering a vid is optional. When you
enter a vid, the command displays information for the specified VLAN.
Without the vid, the command displays information for all the configured
VLANs.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring Layer 3 multicast MAC filtering 467

Figure 221 "show vlan info ports command output" (page 467) shows
sample output of the show vlan info ports command.

Figure 221
show vlan info ports command output

Table 118 "show vlan info ports parameter" (page 467) shows the field
descriptions for this command.

Table 118
show vlan info ports parameter
Field Description
VLAN ID Indicates the VLAN ID.
PORT MEMBER Indicates the set of ports that are members (static or dynamic) of this
VLAN.
ACTIVE MEMBER Indicates the set of ports that are currently active in this VLAN. Active
ports include all static ports and any dynamic ports where the VLAN
policy was met.
STATIC MEMBER Indicates the set of ports that are static members of this VLAN. A static
member of a VLAN is always active and is never aged out.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
468 Configuring multicast MAC filtering using the CLI

Field Description
NOT_ALLOW Indicates the set of ports that are not allowed to become members of
MEMBER this VLAN.
PORT NUM Indicates the port number.
PVC LIST Indicates the PVC list.
VLAN PORT NUM Indicates the VLAN port number for the passive OSPF interface.

Showing the multicast VLAN information

To display information about all the VLANs, use the following command:
show vlan info all [ <vid> ] [port <value> ] [by <value> ]
where:
• vid is the VLAN ID from 1 to 4092. Entering a vid is optional. When
you enter a vid, the command displays information for the specified
VLAN. Without the vid, the command displays information for all the
configured VLANs.
• port <value> is the port or range of ports in slot/port format.
• by <value> is the group ID.

Figure 222 "show vlan info all command output" (page 469) shows sample
output of the show vlan info all command.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring Layer 3 multicast MAC filtering 469

Figure 222
show vlan info all command output

Table 119 "show vlan info all parameter" (page 469) shows the field
descriptions for this command.

Table 119
show vlan info all parameter
Field Description
Vlan Basic
VLAN ID Indicates the VLAN ID.
NAME Indicates the administrator assigned name for the VLAN.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
470 Configuring multicast MAC filtering using the CLI

Field Description
TYPE Indicates the type of VLAN, distinguished according to the policy used
to define its port membership. Options include:
• byPort—VLAN by Port
• byIpSubnet—VLAN by IP subnet
• byProtocolId—VLAN by protocol ID
• bySrcMac—VLAN by source MAC address
• byDstMcast—VLAN by destination multicast
• bySvlan—VLAN by stacked VLAN
• byIds—VLAN by IDS VLAN
STG ID Indicates the Spanning Tree Group (STG) used by this VLAN to
determine the state of its ports. If this VLAN is not associated with any
STG, it is zero.
PROTOCOLID Indicates the protocol identifier of this VLAN. For other VLAN types, it has
the value of none. Options include:
• none
• ip
• ipx802dot3
• ipx802dot2
• ipxSnap
• ipxEthernet2
• appleTalk
• decLat
• decOther
• sna802dot2
• snaEthernet2
• netBios
• xns
• vines
• ipV6
• usrDefined
• rarp
• pPPoE
SUBNETADDR Indicates the IP subnet address of this VLAN. For other VLAN types,
it has the value of 0.0.0.0.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring Layer 3 multicast MAC filtering 471

Field Description
SUBNETMASK Indicates the IP subnet mask of this VLAN. For other VLAN types, it has
the value of 0.0.0.0.
Vlan Port
VLAN ID Indicates the VLAN ID.
PORT MEMBER Indicates the set of ports that are members (static or dynamic) of this
VLAN.
ACTIVE MEMBER Indicates the set of ports that are currently active in this VLAN. Active
ports include all static ports and any dynamic ports where the VLAN
policy was met.
STATIC MEMBER Indicates the set of ports that are static members of this VLAN. A static
member of a VLAN is always active and is never aged out.
NOT_ALLOW Indicates the set of ports that are not allowed to become members of
MEMBER this VLAN.
Vlan ATM Port
VLAN ID Indicates the VLAN ID.
PORT NUM Indicates the port number.
PVC LIST Indicates the PVC list.
Ospf Passive Port Members
VLAN Indicates the VLAN ID.
PORT NUM Indicates the VLAN port number for the passive OSPF interface.
Vlan Advance
VLAN ID Indicates the VLAN ID.
NAME Indicates the name assigned to the VLAN.
IF INDEX Indicates the interface index.
QOS LVL Indicates the QOS level packets carried in this VLAN for processing.
AGING TIME Indicates the timeout period (in seconds) used for aging out dynamic
members of this VLAN. This field is only relevant for policy-based VLANs.
MAC ADDRESS Indicates the MAC address assigned to the virtual router interface of
this VLAN. This field is meaningful only if rcVlanRoutingEnable is equal
to true.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
472 Configuring multicast MAC filtering using the CLI

Field Description
ACTION Indicates VLAN related actions. Options include:
• none—none of the following
• flushMacFdb—flush MAC forwarding table
• flushArp—flush the ARP table
• flushIp—flush the IP route table
• flushDynMemb—flush Dynamic Members
• all—flush all tables
• flushSnoopMemb—flush the IGMP Snoop Members
• triggerRipUpdate—manually trigger RIP update
• flushSnoopMRtr—flush the snoop multicast router
RESULT Indicates the result from the last VLAN action. Options include:
• none
• inProgress
• success
• fail
USER DEFINEPED Indicates the encapsulation type for user defined protocol-based VLANs.
ENCAP This is not meaningful for other types of VLANs.
Vlan Arp
VLAN ID Indicates the VLAN ID.
DOPROXY Indicates if ARP proxy responses are enabled or disabled on the specified
interface.
DORESP Indicates if the sending of ARP responses is enabled or disabled on the
specified interface.
NLB-UNIAST-MODE Indicates the mode for NLB-UNIAST.
Vlan Fdb
VLAN ID Indicates the VLAN ID.
STATUS Indicates the status of FDB forwarding on the VLAN.
MAC ADDRESS Indicates the MAC address assigned to the virtual router interface of
this VLAN. This field is meaningful only if rcVlanRoutingEnable is equal
to true.
INTERFACE Indicates the interface.
MONITOR Indicates whether monitoring is performed on this unicast MAC address.
If monitoring is enabled, any packet received with a matching destination
MAC address is forwarded to the port configured to receive monitor traffic.
QOS LVL Indicates the QOS level packets carried in this VLAN for processing.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring Layer 3 multicast MAC filtering 473

Field Description
SMLT REMOTE Indicates the MAC address for remote learning, either local or remote.
Vlan Filter
VLAN ID Indicates the VLAN ID.
STATUS Indicates the status of the VLAN filter.
MAC ADDRESS Indicates the MAC address assigned to the virtual router interface of
this VLAN. This field is meaningful only if rcVlanRoutingEnable is equal
to true.
PORT Indicates the port number.
QOS LVL Indicates the QOS level packets carried in this VLAN for processing.
PCAP Indicates the status of PCAP on the filter.
DEST_DISCARD Indicates a set of ports for traffic arriving on any of the specified ports
SET from this MAC address.
SRC_DISCARD SET Indicates a set of ports for traffic arriving on any of the specified ports is
not forwarded to this MAC address.
Vlan Static
VLAN ID Indicates the VLAN ID.
STATUS Indicates the status of the static VLAN.
MAC ADDRESS Indicates the MAC address assigned to the virtual router interface of
this VLAN. This field is meaningful only if rcVlanRoutingEnable is equal
to true.
PORT Indicates the port number.
MONITOR Indicates whether monitoring is performed on this unicast MAC address.
If monitoring is enabled, any packet received with a matching destination
MAC address is forwarded to the port configured to receive monitor traffic.
QOS LVL Indicates the QoS level packets carried in this VLAN for processing.
IDS Vlan Info
VLAN ID Indicates the VLAN ID.
MAC LEARNING Indicates the type of MAC learning.
DISABLED PORTS Indicates the disabled port numbers.
Vlan Ip
VLAN ID Indicates the VLAN ID.
IP ADDRESS Indicates the IP subnet address of this VLAN. This value is meaningful
only if the VLAN type is set to IP subnet. For other VLAN types, it has
the value of 0.0.0.0.
NET MASK Indicates the IP subnet mask of this VLAN. This value is meaningful
only if the VLAN type is set to IP subnet. For other VLAN types, it has
the value of 0.0.0.0.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
474 Configuring multicast MAC filtering using the CLI

Field Description
BCASTADDR Indicates the IP broadcast address format used on this interface.
FORMAT
REASM MAXSIZE Indicates the size of the largest IP datagram that this entity can
reassemble from the incoming IP fragmented datagrams received on
this interface.
ADVERTISE Indicates whether the VLAN state change is notified to layer 3 or not,
WHEN_DOWN provided the VLAN is configured as a routable interface. A VLAN is
considered as up when at least one member of the port-based VLAN has
link up, or at least one port member of the policy based VLAN has an entry
in the MGID, or at least one static member of the policy based VLAN has
link up. Otherwise, a VLAN is considered as down. If the value is true,
then the interface state change does not notify to layer 3 (that is, it always
stays up). If the value is false then the VLAN state change is notified to
layer 3 so that IP related status reflects the routable interface state.
DIRECTED Indicates the status of directed broadcast.
BROADCAST
RPC Indicates the status of RPC.
RPC MODE Indicates the RPC mode type.
Vlan Dhcp
VLAN ID Indicates the VLAN ID number.
IF INDEX Indicates the interface index number. Numbers 1 to 256 are ports;
numbers above 257 are VLANs.
ENABLE Indicates whether DHCP is enabled on the port.
MAX HOP Indicates the maximum number of hops a DHCP packet can take from
the source device to the destination device (that is, the DHCP client to
the DHCP server).
MIN SEC Indicates the minimum number of seconds to wait between receiving a
DHCP packet and forwarding it to the destination device. A value of zero
indicates forwarding should be done immediately without any delay.
MODE Indicates what type of DHCP packets this interface should support. A
value of none causes all incoming DHCP and BOOTP packets to be
dropped. Options include none, bootp, dhcp, and both.
ALWAYS BCAST Indicates whether DHCP Reply packets are to be broadcast to the DHCP
client on this interface.
Vlan Ospf
VLAN ID Indicates the VLAN.
ENABLE Indicates the status of OSPF configured on the port.
HELLO INTERVAL Indicates the length of time, in seconds (1 to FFFF), between the Hello
packets that the router sends on the interface.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring Layer 3 multicast MAC filtering 475

Field Description
RTRDEAD Indicates the number of seconds (1 to FFFF) that the hello packets for a
INTERVAL router have not been seen before the neighbors declare the router down.
DESIGRTR Indicates the priority of this interface. Used in multiaccess networks.
PRIORITY This field is used in the designated router election algorithm. The value
0 indicates the router is not eligible to become the designated router on
this particular network. In the event of a tie in this value, routers use their
router id as a tie breaker. The default is 1.
METRIC • Indicates the metric for this type of service (TOS) on this interface.
The value of the TOS metric is 10^9 / interface speed. The default
is 1.
• FFFF—There is no route for this TOS.
• POS/IPCP links—defaults to 0.
• 0—The interface speed is used as the metric value when the state of
the interface is up.
AUTHTYPE Indicates the type of authentication required for the interface.
• none—No authentication required.
• simple password—All OSPF updates received by the interface must
contain the authentication key specified in the interface AuthKey field.
• MD5 authentication—All OSPF updates received by the interface
must contain the md5 key.
AUTHKEY Indicates the key (up to 8 characters) required when simple password
authentication is specified in the interface AuthType field.
INTF Indicates the interface type.
AREA ID Indicates the area where the host is found. By default, the area that is
submitting the OSPF interface is in 0.0.0.0.
Vlan Rip
PORT NUM Indicates the ports on the VLAN.
ENABLE Indicates the status of RIP on the ports for a VLAN.
DEFAULT SUPPLY
Indicates whether the default route must be advertised out of this
interface.

ATTENTION
The default route is advertised only if it exists in the routing table.

DEFAULT LISTEN Indicates whether the default route must be learned on this interface
when advertised by another router connected to the interface.
TRIGGERED Indicates the status of the RIP triggered update on the interface.
UPDATE
AUTOAGG ENABLE Indicates the status of auto aggregation on the interface.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
476 Configuring multicast MAC filtering using the CLI

Field Description
SUPPLY Indicates the status of advertising RIP routes through the interface.
LISTEN Indicates the status of RIP reception on the interface.
POISON Indicates the status of poison reverse on the interface. If disabled, split
horizon is invoked, meaning that IP routes learned from an immediate
neighbor are not advertised back to the neighbor from which the routes
were learned.
If enabled, the RIP update sent to a neighbor from which a route is
learned is poisoned with a metric of 16. In this manner, the route entry
is not passed along to the neighbor, because historically, 16 is infinity in
terms of hops on a network. The default is disable.
Vlan Vrrp
VLAN ID Indicates the VLAN ID.
VRRP ID Indicates the number which, along with an interface index (ifIndex),
serves to uniquely identify a virtual router on a given VRRP router. A set
of one or more associated addresses is assigned to a VRID.
IP ADDR Indicates the assigned IP addresses that a virtual router is responsible
for backing up.
VIRTUAL MAC ADDR Indicates the virtual MAC address of the virtual router. This is derived as
follows: 00-00-5E-00-01-<VRID>, where the first three octets consist
of the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority’s (IANA) Organizationally
Unique Identifier (OUI), the next two octets indicate the address block of
the VRRP protocol, and the remaining octets consist of the VRID.
Vlan Vrrp Extended
VID Indicates the VLAN ID.
STATE Indicates the current state of the virtual router. Options include:
• initialize—waiting for a startup event
• backup—monitoring the state/availability of the master router
• master—forwarding IP addresses associated with this virtual router.
CONTROL Indicates the virtual router function. Setting the value to enabled
transitions the state of the router from initialize to backup. Setting the
value to disabled transitions the router from master or backup to initialize.
PRIORITY Indicates the priority for the virtual router (for example, master election)
with respect to other virtual routers that are backing up a one or more
associated IP addresses. Higher values imply higher priority.
A priority of 0, although not possible to set, indicates that this router
has ceased to participate in VRRP and a backup virtual router should
transition to become a new master.
A priority of 255 is used for the router that owns the associated IP
addresses.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring Layer 3 multicast MAC filtering 477

Field Description
MASTER IPDDR Indicates the real (primary) IP address of the master router. This is the
IP address listed as the source in the VRRP advertisement last received
by this virtual router.
ADVERTISE Indicates the time interval, in seconds, between sending advertisement
INTERVAL messages. Only the master router sends VRRP advertisements.
CRITICAL IPADDR Indicates the IP address of the interface that causes a shutdown event.
HOLDDOWN_TIME Indicates the amount of time (in seconds) to wait before preempting the
current VRRP master.
ACTION Indicates the trigger for an action on this VRRP interface. Options include
none and preemptHoldDownTimer.
CRITICAL IP Indicates whether a user-defined critical IP address is enabled. No
ENABLE indicates the use of the default IP address (0.0.0.0).There is no effect if
an user-defined IP address does not exist.
BACKUP MASTER Indicates the state of designating a backup master router.
BACKUP MASTER Indicates the state of the backup master router.
STATE
FAST ADV Indicates the faster advertisement interval, in milliseconds, between
INTERVAL sending advertisement messages. When the faster advertisement
interval enable is checked, the faster advertisement interval is being used
instead of the regular advertisement interval.
FAST ADV ENABLE Indicates whether the faster advertisement interval status.
Vlan Ip Igmp
VLAN ID Indicates the VLAN ID.
QUERY INTVL Indicates the interval (in seconds) between IGMPHost-Query packets
transmitted on this interface.
QUERY MAX RESP Indicates the interval (in seconds) for the maximum query response time
advertised in IGMPv2 queries on this interface. Smaller values allow a
router to prune groups faster.
ROBUST Indicates the tuning for the expected packet loss on a subnet. If a subnet
is expected to be lossy, the Robustness variable may be increased.
IGMP is robust to (Robustness - 1) packet losses.
VERSION Indicates the version of IGMP that is running on this interface. This
object configures a router capable of running either value. For IGMP to
function correctly, all routers on a LAN must be configured to run the
same version of IGMP on that LAN.
LAST MEMB QUERY Indicates the max response in a group specific query.
PROXY SNOOP Indicates the status of IGMP proxy snoop on the VLAN.
ENABLE
SNOOP ENABLE Indicates the status of IGMP snooping on the VLAN.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
478 Configuring multicast MAC filtering using the CLI

Field Description
SSM SNOOP Indicates the status of SSM IGMP snooping on the VLAN.
ENABLE
FAST LEAVE Indicates the status of fast leave.
ENABLE
FAST LEAVE PORTS Indicates the ports that have fast leave enabled.
Vlan Ip Dvmrp
IF Indicates the ifIndex value of the interface for which DVMRP is enabled.
ADDR Indicates the IP address that this system uses as a source address on
this interface.
METRIC Indicates the distance metric for this interface that is used to calculate
distance vectors.
OPERSTAT Indicates the current operational state of this DVMRP interface.
DEFAULT LISTEN Indicates whether the switch can learn DVMRP default routes over this
interface.
DEFAULT SUPPLY Indicates the whether the switch should supply DVMRP default routes
over this interface.
DEFAULT METRIC Indicates the cost of the DVMRP default route that this interface
generates and supplies when it is configured to supply a default route.
ADVERTISE SELF Indicates whether the switch can advertise this local network.
IN-POLICY Indicates the DVMRP accept policy name configured on this interface.
OUT-POLICY Indicates the DVMRP announce policy name configured on this interface.
INTF TYPE Indicates the type of this DVMRP interface, and whether it uses a tunnel,
source routing, a physical interface for which there is a querier, or a
physical interface for which there is not a querier (subnet).
Vlan Ip Icmp Route Discovery
VLAN ID Indicates the VLAN ID.
ADV_ADDRESS Indicates the advertisement address to which the route discovery
advertisements are transmitted on this interface.
ADV_FLAG Indicates the flag as to whether or not the address is to be advertised
on this interface.
LIFETIME Indicates the value to be placed in the lifetime field of a router
Advertisements sent from the interface.
MAX_INT Indicates the maximum time allowed between sending router
Advertisements from this interface.
MIN_INT Indicates the minimum time allowed between sending router
Advertisements from this interface.
PREF_LEVEL Indicates the preferability of the router address as a default router
Vlan Ipx

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Configuring Layer 3 multicast MAC filtering 479

Field Description
VLAN-ID Indicates the VLAN ID.
VLAN-TYPE Indicates the type of VLAN, distinguished according to the policy used
to define its port membership. Options include:
• byPort—VLAN by Port
• byIpSubnet—VLAN by IP subnet
• byProtocolId—VLAN by protocol ID
• bySrcMac—VLAN by source MAC address
• byDstMcast—VLAN by destination multicast
• bySvlan—VLAN by stacked VLAN
• byIds—VLAN by IDS VLAN
IPXNET Indicates the IPX network address.
ENCAPSULATION Indicates the IPX encapsulation format. It is only relevant if the VLAN is
port based.
ROUTING Indicates the IPX routing protocol. Options include none or RIP.
Manual Edit Mac
MAC ADDRESS Indicates the MAC address that is learned on the port.
PORTS Indicates the allowed ports that can learn this MAC address.
Autolearn Mac
MAC ADDRESS Indicates the MAC address that is automatically learned on the port.
PORT Indicates the allowed ports that can automatically learn this MAC address.
Vlan Ip Pim
VLAN-ID Identifies the VLAN.
PIM-ENABLE The state of PIM on the VLAN.
MODE The configured mode of this VLAN. The valid modes are SSM and
Sparse.
HELLOINT Indicates how long to wait (in seconds) before the PIM switch sends out
the next hello message to neighboring switches. The default hello interval
is 30 seconds.
JPINT Indicates how long to wait (in seconds) before the PIM switch sends out
the next join/prune message to its upstream neighbors. The default
join/prune interval is 60 seconds.
CBSR PREF The preference for this local interface to become a Candidate BSR. The
Candidate BSR with the highest BSR-priority and address is referred to
as the preferred BSR. The default is -1, which indicates that the current
interface is not a Candidate BSR.
INTF TYPE Indicates whether the PIM interface is active or passive.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
480 Configuring multicast MAC filtering using the CLI

Field Description
Vlan Ip Pgm
VLAN-ID Identifies the VLAN.
ENABLE Displays whether PGM is enabled or disabled on this interface.
STATE Indicates the current state (up or down) of PGM.
NAK_RE_XMIT Specifies how long to wait for a NCF (in milliseconds) before retransmitting
INTERVAL the NAK. The default is 1000 milliseconds.
MAX_NAK_RE Displays the maximum number of NAK retransmission packets allowed
XMIT_COUNT per second.
NAK_RDATA Displays how long to wait for RDATA (in milliseconds) after receiving
INTERVAL an NCF.
NAK_ELIMINATE Displays the length of time (in milliseconds) during which a network
INTERVAL element (NE) eliminates duplicate NAKs. When this interval expires, the
NE suspends NAK elimination until the first duplicate arrives. After this
NAK is forwarded, the NE once again eliminates duplicate NAKs for the
specified interval. This parameter must be less than the NAK_RDATA
INTERVAL.
Vlan Mcastmac
VLAN ID Indicates the VLAN ID.
MAC ADDRESS Indicates the MAC address.
PORT LIST Indicates the list of ports.
MLT GROUPS Indicates the multilink trunk groups.
Vlan Firewall
ID Indicates the VLAN ID.
NAME Indicates the VLAN name assigned by the user.
FIREWALL TYPE Indicates the firewall VLAN type for port-based VLANs. Options include:

• none
• naap
• enforceable
• peering

CLUSTER ID Indicates the firewall cluster ID.

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 481

Index
A config sys mcast-software-forwarding info
accounting command output 447
enabling 74 config vlan ip igmp commands 263
activity check interval 351 configuring IP multicast software forwarding
authentication using the CLI 446
enabling 75 config sys mcast-software-
Auto-RP 44 forwarding command 447
show sys mcast-software-
B forwarding command 447
using the DM 205
bootstrap router 45
configuring multicast MAC filtering
broadcast 16, 31
using the DM 219
BSR, configuring 159
Current BSR
PIM 159
C
C-BSR, configuring a port with the CLI 372 D
C-BSR, configuring a VLAN with the designated router. See DR 43
CLI 376 Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol.
C-BSR, configuring an interface with the See DVMRP 19
CLI 359 distribution tree 16
C-BSR, configuring with Device DLR (designated local repairer) 173
Manager 159 DR
C-BSR, setting a preference with Device (designated router), describing 43
Manager 158 DVMRP 31
C-BSR, setting a preference with the broadcast 31
CLI 359, 372, 376 configuration prerequisites 289
candidate bootstrap router 45 description 285
candidate RP router 44 enabling globally 108, 290
Cisco Auto-RP 44 IGMP host membership 41
config ip commands 311, 322 IP subnet-based VLAN 41
config ip igmp interface commands 232, leaf network 35
250, 254 metric cost 112, 114
config ip route-policy seq command 311, multicast tree 32
322 neighbors 32

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 482 Index

next hops 120 show ip mroute-hw group-prune-

port-based VLAN 41 state (usage) 443
prune 31
reports 32 F
reverse path forwarding 31 fast leave mode 22
route metric 33 fast-leave mode, IGMP 257
route selection 33
routing table 31, 34
shortest-path tree 34
G
source distribution tree 31 GAP CLI commands
source networks 31, 33 config ip igmp interface igap
source route advertisement 33 configuration example 449
upstream neighbor 34
DVMRP CLI commands H
config ethernet ip dvmrp 298 host addresses and masks, specifying 29
config ip dvmrp 290 host group 17
config ip dvmrp interface 292
config vlan ip dvmrp 300 I
roadmap of all commands 285
show ip dvmrp info 293 ID field 86, 129
show ip dvmrp interface 337 IfIndex field
show ip dvmrp neighbor 295 DVMRP Interfaces tab 117
show ip dvmrp next-hop 296 IGAP
show ip dvmrp route 297 enabling 74
show ports info dvmrp 340 IGAP CLI commands
show vlan info dvmrp 339 config ip igmp interface igap
DVMRP Device Manager commands configuration example 441
Capabilities 118 IGAP Device Manager fields
ExpiryTime 118 AccntEnable 74
GenerationId 110, 118 AuthEnable 75
LeafTimeOut 110 IgapEnable 74
MajorVersion 118 IGMP 19
MinorVersion 118 configuration prerequisites 231
NbrProbeInterval 110 description 20
NbrTimeOut 110 DVMRP 41
NumRoutes 111 elected querier 20
ReachableRoutes 111 fast leave feature 22
State 119 host leave message 21
TriggeredUpdateInterval 110 host reports 21
Type (leaf or branch) 121 maximum response time 21
UpdateInterval 110 Multicast Router Discovery
UpstreamNeighbor 120 Protocol 30
VersionString 110 multicast stream limitation 96, 273
DVMRP troubleshooting PIM-SSM 171
using the CLI proxy 24
show ip mroute-hw group trace queries 20, 23
(usage) 443 router alert option 68, 231

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Index 483

snoop 23 show ip igmp snoop 240

snooping 23, 23, 31, 68 show ip igmp static 249
stream limitation members 97 show ip igmp stream-limit-
versions 24 interface 276
IGMP CLI commands show ip igmp stream-limit-port 277
config ethernet ip igmp 257 show ports info igmp 253, 256, 259
config ethernet ip igmp show vlan info igmp 266
access-control 260 IGMP Device Manager commands
config ethernet ip igmp AccntEnable 74
access-control configuration AuthEnable 75
example 261 Current Number Of Stream 97, 102,
config ethernet ip igmp 104
stream-limit 277 DiscoveredRouterPorts 80
config ip igmp info 225 FastLeaveEnable 75
config ip igmp interface FastLeavePortMembers 75
access-control 242 FlushAction 79
config ip igmp interface IfIndex 98
access-control configuration IgapEnable 74
example 243 Interface 97
config ip igmp interface mrdisc 245 Join messages 78
config ip igmp interface LastMembQueryIntvl 74, 78
static-members 248 MaxAdvertiseInterval 80
config ip igmp interface Maximum Number Of Stream 97,
stream-limit 274 102, 104
config ip igmp interface MaxInitialAdvertisements 80
stream-limit-member 275 MaxInitialAdvertismentInterval 80
config vlan ip igmp access- MaxStreams 98
control 267 MinAdvertiseInterval 80
config vlan ip igmp access-control MrdiscEnable 80
configuration example 268 NeighborDeadInterval 80
config vlan ip igmp fast-leave- NotAllowedToJoin 85
members 272 NumStreams 98
config vlan ip igmp mrdisc 270 OtherQuerierPresentTimeout 78
config vlan ip igmp static- Port 98
members 271 ProxySnoopEnable 74
config vlan ip igmp stream-limit 278 QueryInterval 74
config vlan ip igmp stream-limit- QueryMaxResponseTime 74
members 279 Robustness 74
roadmap of all commands 226 RouterAlertEnable 79
show ip igmp access 244 SnoopEnable 74
show ip igmp cache 236 SnoopMRouterPorts 75
show ip igmp group 237 SsmSnoopEnable 74
show ip igmp interface 234 Stream Limit Enable 97
show ip igmp mrdisc 246 StreamLimitEnable 101, 104
show ip igmp mrdisc-neighbors 247 Version 75
show ip igmp router-alert 238 WrongVersionQueries 78
show ip igmp sender 239 IGMP snoop commands 233

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 484 Index

IGMPv1 MAC filtering configuration example 463,

host reports 21 464
IGMPv2 MAC filtering Device Manager commands
control packets 68, 231 Address 221
description 24 ForwardingPorts 221
host reports 21 IPAddress 224
IGMPv3 MacAddress 224
description 24 MltIds 221, 224
host reports 21 Ports 224
Internet Group Management Protocol. See VlanID 224
IGMP 19 MaskLenFrom field 87, 130
IP commands MaskLenUpto field 87, 130
configure 311, 322 MatchInterface field 131
IP multicast software forwarding MatchMetric field 130
default setting 205, 447 MatchProtocol field 130
hardware considerations 205, 447 MatchRouteType field 131
Metric field
L DVMRP Interfaces tab 112, 115,
leaf timeout, DVMRP 290 117
local router interface, DVMRP 292 MLT
LocalAddress field 112, 114, 117 description 62, 211, 455
distribution algorithm 62
E-module support 62
M enabling multicast flow distribution
MAC filtering globally 211, 456
configuration command 66 enabling multicast flow distribution
configuring Layer 2 multicast 219, per MLT 457
462 MLT CLI commands
configuring Layer 3 multicast 464 config mlt mcast-distribution 457
creating VLANs 65 config sys mcast-mlt-distribution 456
defining a flooding domain 65 config sys mcast-mlt-distribution
description 65, 219, 461 configuration example 456
Layer 2, description 65 roadmap of all commands 455
Layer 3, description 65 show sys mcast-mlt-distribution 457
max number of MAC addresses 65 MLT configuration example 456
MAC filtering CLI commands MLT Device Manager commands
config ip arp static-mcastmac 464 MltType 217
config ip arp static-mcastmac MulticastDistribution 217
configuration example 464 PortMembers 217
config vlan static-mcastmac 462 PortType 217
config vlan static-mcastmac RedistributionEnable 214
configuration example 463 SmltId 217
roadmap of all commands 461 SvlanPortType 217
show ip arp static-mcastmac 466 VlanIds 217
show vlan info all 468 multicast
show vlan info ports 466 address range 18
show vlan info static-mcastmac 465 broadcast 16

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Index 485

class D address 18 Multicast CLI commands

distribution tree 16 config ip igmp fast-leave-mode 241
DVMRP 31 config ip mroute 431
E-module support for MLT 62 config ip mroute interface 434
flow distribution over MLT 62 config ip mroute static-source-
flow distribution over MLT group 440
configuration command 64 roadmap of all commands 429
flow distribution over MLT show ip igmp info 241
configuration example 63 show ip mroute interface 435
flow distribution over MLT traffic show ip mroute next-hop 431
redistribution 64 show ip mroute route 432
IGMP 19 show ip mroute static-source-
interfaces 196 group 442
MAC filtering 65 Multicast Device Manager commands
MLT distribution algorithm 62 ClosestMemberHops 196
next hops 194 ExpiryTime 194
permanent host group 17 Group 194
PGM 60 Interface 194
PGM terms 60 multipleUser 72
PIM-SM 42 oneUser 72
PIM-SM domain 43 Protocol 194
PIM-SM hosts 42 Source 194
prune 16 SourceMask 194
reverse path 17 static source group 197, 439
routes 193 UpstreamNeighbor 194
static source group 197, 439 Multicast dialog box- Mcast SW Forwarding
transient host group 18 tab 205
multicast access control Multicast dialog box- Mroute-HW tab-
configuring Egress VLANs tab 204
using Device Manager 87 Multicast dialog box- Mroute-HW tab-
configuring on IGMP Ethernet port Prunes tab 203
using the CLI 260 Multicast dialog box- Mroute-HW tab-
configuring on IGMP interface Sources tab 203
using the CLI 242 multicast flow distribution over MLT. See
configuring on VLAN MLT 211
using the CLI 267 multicast MAC filtering. See MAC
displaying control groups 244 filtering 219
overview of 25 multicast route discovery 271
policy types Multicast Router Discovery Protocol 30
allow-only-both 28 multicast stream limitation
allow-only-rx 28 adding a member 98
allow-only-tx 28 deleting a member 99
deny-both 27 description 29
deny-rx 27 using Device Manager 96
deny-tx 26 using the CLI 273
tab fields 89 multicast stream limitation members
multicast border router 43 using Device Manager 97

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 486 Index

N MaxSessions 176
NAK
Name field 86, 129
NakEliminateInterval 178
neighbor timeout, DVMRP 290
NakRdataInterval 178
NakReXmitInterval 177
P NCF
passive interface, PIM 58 NNAK
PGM NnakGenerate 175
as a DLR 173 RDATA
configuration prerequisites 411 SessionLifeTime 175
description 60, 173, 409 SPM
designated local repairers (DLRs) 61 TotalReXmitStates 176
DVMRP 411 TotalReXmitStatesTimedOut 176
enabling globally 174, 411 TotalSessions 176
graphing interface statistics 181 TotalUniqueNaks 176
IGMP snooping 411 TotalUniqueParityNaks 176
NAK confirmations (NCFs) 61 TrailEdgeSeq 186
negative acknowledgements UpstreamAddress 186
(NAKs) 61 UpstreamIfCct 186
PIM-SM 411 PIM
source path messages (SPMs) 60 active interface 58
terms 60 activity check interval 351
transport session identifiers changing the interface type using the
(TSIs) 60 CLI 372
viewing session parameters 185 changing the VLAN interface type
PGM CLI commands using the CLI 375
config ethernet ip pgm 424 configuring on a brouter port using
config ip pgm 411 the CLI 370
config ip pgm interface 417 configuring on a VLAN using the
config vlan ip pgm 425 CLI 373
roadmap of all commands 409 configuring on an interface using the
show ip pgm global 412 CLI 355
show ip pgm interface config 418 current BSR 159
show ip pgm interface error debug messages 377
general 419 DR
show ip pgm interface error nak 420 showing 165
show ip pgm interface stat enabling on a brouter port using
general 421 Device Manager 156
show ip pgm interface stat nak 422 enabling on a VLAN using Device
show ip pgm interface stat parity 423 Manager 161
show ip pgm retransmit 414 passive interface 58
show ip pgm session 414 showing interface information 357
PGM Device Manager commands PIM CLI commands
LeadEdgeSeq 186 config ethernet ip pim 370
MaxNakRate 176 config ip pim candrp 360
MaxNakReXmitRate 177 config ip pim debug-pimmsg 377
MaxReXmitStates 176 config ip pim interface 355

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 Index 487

config ip pim static-rp 368 OSPF, configuring with 149

config ip pim static-rp configuration PMBR
example 369 (PIM Multicast Border Router),
config vlan ip pim 373 description 43
show ip pim active-rp 363 configuring 355
show ip pim bsr 365 receiver join process 47
show ip pim candidate-rp 362 receiver leave process 48
show ip pim info 354 register messages 46
show ip pim interface 357, 375 register-stop messages 46
show ip pim mroute 366 required elements 49
show ip pim neighbor 358 Reverse Path Forwarding 149
show ip pim rp-set 361 RIP, configuring with 149
show ip pim static-rp 370 RP
PIM Device Manager commands (rendezvous-point), descrip-
CBSRPreference 158 tion 43
DR shared tree 46
showing 165 shortest-path tree 46
ExpiryTime 166 source sending packets to group 48
HelloInterval 157 static RP router 44
HoldTime 167 PIM-SM CLI commands
UpTime 166 config ip pim 351
PIM-SM config ip pim mbr 355
BSR roadmap of all commands 347
(bootstrap router), description 45 PIM-SSM
configuring 159 configuration example using the
C-BSR CLI 387
(candidate bootstrap router), configuring 169
description 45 enabling globally with the CLI 385
configuring 159 IGMPv3 171, 385
C-RP PMBR 43
(candidate RP), description 44 Pragmatic General Multicast. See PGM 60
Cisco Auto-RP 44 Prefix field 86, 129
configuration prerequisites 148 PrefixMaskLen field 86, 129
description 42, 345 Protocol Independent Multicast-Sparse
domain 43 Mode. See PIM-SM 42
DR proxy-snoop option, IGMP 263
(designated router), prune 16, 31
description 43
DVMRP, configuring with 108, 149, R
289, 350 rendezvous-point router 43
enabling globally 351 resource usage
enabling static RP 154 using Device Manager 208
hosts 42 using the CLI 448
IGMP, configuring with 150 Reverse Path Forwarding 149
join/prune messages 45 reverse path multicast 17
MBR router alert option 68, 231
configuring 355

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
 488 Index

router update messages, DVMRP 291 configuration considerations 153

configuration example 369
S configuring with the CLI 368
description 153
shortest-path tree 34
enabling 154
show ip dvmrp show-all command 344
static RP router 44
show ip igmp show-all command 283
static source group
show ip mroute show-all command 450
configuration considerations 197,
show ip mroute-hw group trace grp
439
command output 444
definition 197, 439
show ip mroute-hw group-prune-state grp
deleting a group 200
command output 445
SSM channel conflict 198, 440
show ip mroute-hw group-trace src grp
stream limitation 29, 96, 273
command output 445
stream limitation members 97
show ip pgm show-all command 426
show ip pim show-all command 406
show sys mcast-software-forwarding
T
command output 448 time-to-live, multicast 435
snoop option, IGMP 264
source distribution tree 31 V
static RP VLAN
active RP election algorithm 154 DVMRP 41

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols
NN46205-501 01.01 Standard
4.1 10 January 2007
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks Nortel Networks Confidential
.
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 8600

Configuring IP Multicast Routing Protocols

Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks
All Rights Reserved.

Publication: NN46205-501
Document status: Standard
Document version: 01.01
Document date: 10 January 2007

Sourced in Canada and the United States of America

To provide feedback or report a problem in this document, go to www.nortel.com/documentfeedback.

Nortel, the Nortel logo, and the Globemark are trademarks of Nortel Networks.

Adobe and Acrobat Reader are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.

Microsoft, Windows, and Windows NT are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.

IPX is a trademark of Novell, Inc.

All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.